Manual Book Scrubber

TECHNOLOGIES PTY LTD
ABN 76 100 555 904

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION
The information and drawings contained in this manual are for the use of the Owner/Operator of the
equipment and its designees only. In addition, they remain the property of Fowlerex Technologies
Pty Ltd, and may not be divulged to any parties other than the intended receiver, except those
designees who must use this manual in pursuit of work on the particulate system and related
systems. This manual may not be used in any way detrimental to the interests of Fowlerex
Technologies Pty Ltd. Intellectual or industrial property rights as may be obtained on the basis of
the information given herein shall remain the exclusive property of Fowlerex Technologies Pty Ltd
unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
10030-1120 Rev F O & M MANUAL

ABN 76 100 555 904
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
INSTALLATION DATA SHEET
CLIENT : PT AGINCOURT RESOURCES
PROJECT : MARTABE PLANT
PLANT LOCATION : NORTH SUMATRA, INDONESIA
CONTRACT NO. : 1929-0070B
FOWLEREX JOB & SERIAL NO. : 10030
EQUIPMENT TYPE : WET GAS SCRUBBER – EQUIPMENT

POLLUTION PLANT

ABN 76 100 555 904
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Safety Precautions
Hot Surfaces
This equipment may have very hot surfaces. If an

operator contacts a hot surface injury may occur. Use
protective clothing to prevent injury. If other equipment
comes in contact with a hot surface, damage to the
equipment may occur. Ensure the area around this
equipment is kept clear to prevent damage from
occurring.
High Pressure
This equipment may contain fluids at very high

pressures. Prior to installing, removing or maintaining
this equipment, ensure that the equipment is isolated
from all connecting piping, the equipment is de-
pressurized, the contents have been drained and the
equipment is cool.

10030-1120 Rev F
INDEX FOR INSTALLATION, OPERATION

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Client: PT Agincourt Resources

Project Name: Martabe Project
Package Number: 0070B
Document Rev: V-1929-0070B-0016

Description of Goods: Wet Gas Scrubber – Equipment
VDDR Item No: 11.08
Revision F
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
Confidential Information
Installation Data Sheet
Safety Precautions
Functional Description SECTION A
1.0 System Description A-1

1.1 Control Description
1.1.1 General A-1
1.1.2 Management System A-1
1.2 Operation
1.2.1 Set Point Conditions A-1
1.2.2 Start Up A-1
1.2.3 Shut Down A-1
Sub-System Description, Operation and Service SECTION B
2.0 Ventilation System

2.0.1 Electro Winning Cells B-1
2.0.2 Eluate Hoppers B-1
2.0.3 Retort Extraction B-2
2.0.4 Furnace Extraction B-2
2.0.5 Carbon Regeneration Kiln Extraction B-2
10030-1120 Rev F
Sub-System Description, Operation and Service SECTION B
2.1 Venturi Scrubber

2.1.1 General B-3
2.1.2 Technical Summary B-4
2.1.3 Component Summary B-6
2.1.4 Recirculation System B-6
2.2 Granulated Activated Carbon Tower

2.2.1 General B-8
2.2.2 Components B-9
2.3 ID Fan
2.3.1 Safety Precautions B-10
2.3.2 General B-12
2.3.3 Operation B-14
2.3.4 Design Duties B-14
2.4 Recirculation Pump

2.4.1 Safety Precautions B-15
2.4.2 Venturi Recirculation Pump General B-16
2.4.3 Venturi Recirculation Pump Performance Curves B-16
2.4.4 Mist Eliminator Wash Down Pump General B-17
2.4.5 Mist Eliminator Wash Down Pump Performance Curves B-18
2.5 Plant Specification

2.5.1 Ventilation Duct B-19
2.5.2 Expansion Joints B-20
2.5.3 Compressed Air System B-20
2.5.4 Stack B-21
2.5.5 Access B-21
2.6 Piping and Valving B-22

10030-1120 Rev F
Maintenance and Trouble-shooting SECTION C
3.0 General Maintenance Procedures

3.0.1 Bearing and Lubricants C-1
3.0.2 Motor C-6
3.0.3 Coupling C-6
3.0.4 Pre Start Checks C-7
3.0.5 Operational Checks C-7
3.0.6 Cleaning C-7
3.1 Trouble Shooting C-8
3.2 Lubrication Schedule C-9
3.3 Maintenance Schedule C-10
3.4 Material Safety Data Sheets C-11
Spares SECTION D
4.0 Spares Parts (Recommended) D-1
Instrumentation and Control SECTION E
5.0 Instrumentation and Control E-1

5.1 Plant Control System E-1
5.2 Interlocks & Alarms E-1
5.3 Alarms E-4
5.4 Control Loops E-6
5.5 Fail Safe Table E-8
5.6 Input/ Output Schedule E-9
5.7 Cable Schedule E-10
Bill of Material SECTION F
Drawings SECTION G
Arrangements
Assemblies
(Refer to Assembly Drawing for Equipment Weights)
10030-1120 Rev F
Appendices
Start Up and Shut Down Sequence
Equipment Data Sheet
Fan Manual - Taymac (including TECO motor manual)
Pump Manual - IWAKI
Motor Manual - WEG
Control Systems/ Instrumentations
Articulation Arm - Nederman
Valve Specifications
Description of Control Philosophy (V-1929-0070B-0015)
Control System Functional Description/ Specification (V-1929-0070B-0044)
Commentary Control System Functional Description/ Specification (V-1929-0070B-0113)

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SECTION A
1.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Refer:
V-1929-0070-010 - Wet Scrubber System - General Arrangement (Sheet 1)
V-1929-0070-006 – Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (Sheet 1)

The Wet Scrubbing System shall collect off-gas from electrowinning cells, eluate return
hoppers, carbon regeneration kilns, mercury retort and gold smelting furnaces – thirteen (13)
extraction points in total.
Eleven (11) ventilation points including the Electrowinning Cells (02-60-HD-001:006),

Furnaces all fitted with Fume Hoods, Eluate Cells and Mercury Retort are joined in a single
duct run leading into the dedicated Wet Scrubber Fan (02-60-FA-016).
The static pressure is balanced between the ventilation points by means of an in-duct slide
gate valve. The duct velocity is high enough such that any fine particulate is suspended in
the airflow minimising the chance of settling out.
The Venturi Scrubber (02-60-SB-001) is sized so that the gas/water mixture reaches
velocities between 60 to 150 meters per second creating a fine, dense turbulent mist. The
differential pressure across the venturi throat is related to the throat velocity. Pressure
gauges are located on the venturi thimble and venturi elbow. The adjustable venturi blade is
pneumatically controlled and is to be adjusted until the differential pressure across the throat
reaches 3.5 kPa-g. A compressed air reservoir is to be fitted to the pneumatic operator
which will fail open in an emergency condition.
10030-1120 Rev F A-1 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The recirculated water is collected in the Venturi Solids Settling Tank (02-60-TK-109),
controlled by the Venturi Recycle Pump 1 (02-60-PU-342), Flow Indicator (FI 6607) and in-
line valves. A purge shall be established within the Venturi Solids Settling Tank ensuring that
the levels of particulate do not accumulate and exceed 10% w/w in solution. A magnetic
level switch (LS6608) shall maintain the fluid level within the tank controlling the intake of
fresh make-up water to the system. The operation of the venturi scrubber is dependent
upon reaching adiabatic saturation of the incoming gas. It is therefore important that the
temperature of the fluid within the Venturi Solids Settling Tank remains well below saturation
temperature. Heavy particulate accumulating in the base of the tank shall be manually
drained.
A continuous supply of clean water (controlled by both Venturi Recycle Pump 2 (02-60-PU-
390) and in-line valves) spray over the top of the pad to assist in dislodging the water droplet
from the screen to the separator chamber below.
A sulphur impregnated Granulated Activated Carbon Tower (02-60-TW-001) follows the

venturi scrubber separator chamber. The GAC Tower is designed to adsorb the elemental
mercury collected from both the plant room and carbon regeneration kilns.
The off gas (steam) from the Carbon Regeneration Kilns (02-50-KN-001/002) is expected to
be superheated. In order to reduce the temperature, spray nozzles shall be installed in the
duct. The GAC Tower is sensitive to over-temperature. Ideal inlet temperature to the tower is
65oC. Therefore the temperature from the Carbon Regen. Duct shall be controlled at the
source by means of evaporative cooling in conjunction with dedicated control valves and an
in-duct thermocouple. If the inlet temperature to the GAC tower rises above 65oC, the output
of Venturi Recycle Pump 1 (02-60-PU-342) will increase to counter the surge.
Cleaned gases then circle up through the GAC Tower via the Activated Carbon Tower Fan
(02-60-FA-002) to the Mercury Scrubber Exhaust Stack (02-60-SK-005) and to atmosphere.
10030-1120 Rev F A-2 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.1 OPERATION
1.1.1 SET POINT CONDITIONS
Tag
No. Parameter Set Point
Number
Carbon Regeneration Kiln Temperature

1 TIC6600 110 oC
Transmitter
2 Gold Room Temperature Transmitter TIT6601 -
3 Gold Room Duct Pressure Transmitter PIT6602 -3500 Pa(g)

4 Extraction Fan Shaft Rotation Sensor SE6603
5 Venturi Scrubber Pressure Indicator PIT6604 4000 Pa(g)
6 Venturi Separator Pressure Indicator PIT6605 500 Pa(g)

Recirculation Tank, Water Temperature
7 TIC6609 40 oC
Transmitter
8 GAC Tower Inlet Temperature Indicator TIC6611 65 oC
9 GAC Tower Body Temperature Indicator TI6612 65oC
10 GAC Extraction Fan Pressure Transmitter PIT6613 -4800 Pa (g)

11 GAC Extraction Fan Shaft Rotation Sensor SE6614 -
10030-1120 Rev F A-3 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.1 OPERATION
1.1.2 START-UP
Refer: Appendix A: Start-Up, Shut Down Sequence
The control system must be free of alarm/fault [interlocks] conditions for start up to proceed
and must remain fault/interlock free for the system to continue to run.
System start will initiate from the process equipment via a “Request to Start” digital signal.
Once this signal is received, the ID Fans and Recirculation pump will start and run to pre-set
speeds.
1.1.3 SHUT DOWN
Shut Down is essentially the reverse of start up.
10030-1120 Rev F A-4 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SUB SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, OPERATION AND SERVICE

SECTION B
2.0 VENTILATION SYSTEM
2.0.1 Electro Winning Cells
The Electro-Winning cells are fitted with an exhaust ventilation system to remove Water
Vapour, Sodium Cyanide, Sodium Hydroxide and Mercury Vapour. An in-built plenum and
separate lid shall be fitted over the Electro-winning Cells designed such that an optimum
extraction velocity (1m/sec) and draft pressure is maintained. This hood configuration
provides increased efficiency by reducing the effects of cross draft and by directing more of
the hood air flow over the tank open surface.
Cells are enclosed openings minimised to

o 32mm clearance around between the Anode Frame and the Shroud
o 5mm to 10mm gap fitted at the bottom of the perimeter shroud and the EW cell wall
Three (3) extraction points are situated along the length of the hood to promote good flow
distribution across the cross sectional area.
A constant draft is maintained despite the level or temperature of EW Cell operation.The

interconnecting ducting between each hood is graduated to ensure that an even duct
velocity is maintained. A slide damper is fitted to each cell to adjust the pressure/flow of
individual EW units.
2.0.2 Eluate Hoppers

A simple nozzle connection shall draw the fume from the eluate hopper at -1 kPa-g.
Evaporation Losses have been calculated assuming that the composition is primarily steam.
A constant draft is maintained despite the level or temperature of the eluate’s contents.
10030-1120 Rev F B-1 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.0 VENTILATION SYSTEM
2.0.3 Retort Extraction

A small, articulated extraction arm shall be sized on a draft volume of 900 kg/hr. This design
is based upon a 1 m/s draft velocity and -1 kPa-g suction pressure at the end of the arm.
In the event that the retort door seal fails, a flexible, adjustable extraction arm has been fitted
in the vicinity. The operation of the ventilation arm is at the discretion of the operator.
2.0.4 Furnace Extraction

The design of the Circular High Canopy Hood and exhaust rate has been designed taking
this thermal draft into consideration.
The furnace flow is comprised of both draft and evaporative losses. Draft Losses constitute
the major portion of the flow. The furnace hood, a canopy hood is designed to be moved
away from the furnace controlling the thermal draft emanating from the furnace during
operation. Height above the kiln is 700mm which allows a line of sight over the vessel during
operation. The exhaust duct runs over head to main exhaust plenum.
A slide damper in the hood will assist in balancing the flow/pressure relationship.
A constant draft is maintained despite whether or not the furnace is operating.
2.0.5 Carbon Regeneration Kiln Extraction

To cool the kilns gases by way of evaporation, a dedicated condenser is installed
immediately after each kiln. The evaporative cooling load has been calculated on the
assumption that the Activated Carbon is Loaded 50% w/w moisture, 450 oC, 12 L/min shall
be fed into each condenser.
10030-1120 Rev F B-2 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.1 VENTURI SCRUBBER
2.1.1 General
Refer: V‐1929‐0070B‐0115 : Venturi Scrubber Assembly Drawings (Sheet 1)

V‐1929‐0070B‐0116: Venturi Scrubber Assembly Drawings (Sheet 2)
The Type V Scrubber is a high efficiency Variable Venturi scrubber followed by a cyclonic
entrainment separator.
The Type V scrubber consists of an inlet thimble where the liquid is introduced tangentially
with shelf distribution near the top of the scrubber chamber above the venturi throat. The
scrubbing liquid is delivered at low pressure, usually between 10 to 35 kPa. This method
provides the scrubbing liquid without the use of spray nozzles. Without spray nozzles up to
10% by weight solids concentration can be suspended in the recirculating slurry without
pluggage or abrasion problems.
The scrubbing liquid flows down the inside of the vessel into the throat section of the
scrubber where it is atomized by the high velocity gases. The dust present in the gases
impacts with the billions of water droplets formed by the high velocity gas stream. This
impaction entraps the sub-micron and micron dust in the water droplets which are
subsequently removed in the cyclonic separator.
A Butterfly style damper provides the mechanism for the variable venturi section where the
scrubbing action takes place.
The clean gases pass from the scrubber section to the cyclonic entrainment separator where
the scrubbing liquid, containing the collected dust, is separated from the clean gases via the
action of centrifugal force. These clean gases leave the top of the separator while the dirty
scrubbing liquid flows downward and drains out of the separator.
10030-1120 Rev F B-3 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.1.2 Technical Summary
Refer: V-1929-0070-006 – Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (Sheet 1)

Dust laden gas from the process exhaust line will be ducted into the venturi throat of the Wet
Scrubber – (02-60-SB-001). FD Fan (02-60-FA-016) shall control the draft requirements of
the system. The gas will be forced through the venturi throat where the relative pressure will
be increased by approximately 3.0 kPa-g. The venturi throat is fitted with adjustable damper
blades which can be opened or closed to achieve the required pressure drop. The pressure
drop across the throat will be set and monitored using a differential pressure transmitter
(Smar LD301D.
The gas/water mixture passes through the venturi throat into the adjacent separator. The
separator serves to separate the dense, water laden dust particles from the remaining gas
mixture. The separator drains to a Scrubber Tank (02-60-TK-109). The tank has been sized
such there is enough fluid to circulate throughout the system for a period of up to 3 minutes.
Recirculated Water from Scrubber Recycle Pump (02-60-PU-342) shall be introduced

tangentially to the gas flow. The water mixture is used to encapsulate the dust particles
within the process exhaust effectively increasing the overall particle size.
The two manually operated Ball Valves operating process lines V-021 and
V-017 shall be used to trim the recirculating flow to a pre-set rate. The flow rate is set and
monitored in conjunction with Flow Meter (Krohne – H250).
In combination, these valves will serve to control both the overall recirculation rate with the
ability to shut-off recirculation streams during pump maintenance periods. A check valve (V-
019) has been included within the piping schedule to protect the pumps from undesirable
back-flow.
10030-1120 Rev F B-4 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.1.2 Technical Summary
It should be noted, to maintain efficient removal of particulate, the solids concentration in the
recirculation line should be maintained at approximately 10% (w/w). In order to achieve
these levels slurry shall be continuously removed via a dedicated pump (by others).
An emergency overflow connection has been integrated within the recycle tank. A 100 NB
pipe connection shall be terminated by others.
The Make-Up Water Stream (PL-111) shall ensure that losses incurred by evaporation and
slurry take-off are restored to maintain system balance.
The Make-Up Water Stream (PL-110) will also serve to wash down the mist eliminator
periodically.
10030-1120 Rev F B-5 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.1.3 Component Summary
Refer: V-1929-0070-0152 – Wet Scrubber Piping Assembly (Sheet 1)

V-1929-0070-0152 – Wet Scrubber Piping Assembly (Sheet 2)
V-1929-0070-0146 – Wet Scrubber Assembly (Sheet 1)
V-1929-0070-0115 – Venturi and Separator Assembly (Sheet 1)
V-1929-0070-0116 – Venturi and Separator Assembly (Sheet 2)
V-1929-0070-0117 – Venturi Throat Assembly
V-1929-0070-0118 – Support Structure Assembly
V-1929-0070-0130 – Recirculation Tank Assembly
V-1929-0070-0123 – Wet Scrubber and Recirculation Tank Assembly
2.1.4 Recirculation System
A recirculation tank is fitted below the separator. The tank has been sized such there is
enough fluid to circulate throughout the system. A level switch has been incorporated to
maintain the fluid level inside the tank by controlling the makeup water valve accordingly. A
DN 125 pipe has also been included in the tank as an emergency overflow connection. A
drain line is also incorporated to remove thick solids suspension in the base of the tank.
Fluid temperature within the recirculation tank is also maintained below saturation point by
controlling the purge valve accordingly.
The recycled water will be used in venturi scrubber and fan spray line, pumped by Venturi
Recycle Pump #1 (02-60-PU-342). A flow indicator is incorporated in the venturi line. The fan
10030-1120 Rev F B-6 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
spray line is controlled by a ball valve, actuated according to the temperature in carbon
regeneration kiln.
Refer:
V-1929-0070B-0130 Recirculation Tank
V-1929-0070B-0123 Wet Scrubber
V-1929-0070B-0152 Piping
V-1929-0070B-0153 Piping
V-1929-0070B-0154 Piping
V-1929-0070B-0155 Piping
V-1929-0070B-0156 Piping
V-1929-0070B-0157 Piping
V-1929-0070B-0158 Piping
V-1929-0070B-044 Control System Functional Description/ Specification
10030-1120 Rev F B-7 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.2 GRANULATED ACTIVATED CARBON TOWER
2.2.1 General

separator chamber. The GAC Tower is designed to adsorb the elemental mercury collected
from both the plant room and carbon regeneration kilns. The process of mercury adsorption
is known as chemisorption where the sulphur species present on the carbon surface react to
form a benign compound – mercury (II) sulphide.
Activated Carbon is introduced through the tower openings

The bulk bags have a bottom spout for easier discharge minimizing the risk of particle
breakdown. Fresh adsorbent is slowly and evenly poured directly over the mesh grates.
Once the bed height is reached, the bed is leveled
Length 5820 mm
Width 5820 mm
Height 8000 mm
3
Activated Carbon Density 570 kg/m
Body Velocity (60 foot/min )
Pressure Drop Across GAC Bed (17.74 “ WG)
Weight Vessel 9,200 kg
30,000 kg
Weight Carbon
2 x 1500 mm beds
Material Construction 304 Stainless Steel
Carbon Specification GI 1000 ASTM 4/8 AW (Coal Based)
Carbon Type Sulfur Impregnated Activated Carbon
Carbon Manufacturer Haycarb
Pellet Diameter Mesh : 4 x 8 (2.36mm x 4.75mm)
Maximum Moisture 50%
10030-1120 Rev F B-8 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.2.2 Components
Carbon tower consists of following components:

 6 Pieces of carbon tower casing
 Internal support structure
 5 Access door
 24 Perforated bed panel
 Activated carbon bed
Please refer to the following Fowlerex drawing for further details:

V-1929-0070B-0171 Carbon Tower & Platforms
V-1929-0070B-0179 Carbon Tower
10030-1120 Rev F B-9 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.3 FD FAN (02-60-FA-016)
ID FAN (02-60-FA-002)
2.3.1 Safety Precautions
FAN EQUIPMENT CAN BECOME A SOURCE OF INJURY

AND DEATH IF NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED, OPERATED
OR MAINTAINED.
Do not exceed the maximum operating temperature or

speed limits for which the fan equipment was designed.
Limits for non-catalogued lines of fan equipment
should be obtained in writing directly from Taymac and not
otherwise. Do not rely on limits obtained in any other
manner.
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that all personnel

who operate or maintain the fan equipment are properly
trained and aware of all possible hazards.
THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR PROVIDING SAFETY

ACCESSORIES FOR FAN EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY
TAYMAC IS THAT OF THE USER OF THE FAN
EQUIPMENT.
Taymac sell fan equipment with or without safety

accessories, and accordingly, it can supply standard safety
accessories upon receipt of an order. Ensure that all
necessary safety accessories have been installed
before operation of the fan equipment. The warning notice
set out below IS affixed upon the fan equipment:
10030-1120 Rev F B-10 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.3 FD FAN (02-60-FA-016)
ID FAN (02-60-FA-002)
SAFETY WARNING
This fan has rotating parts and may be hot. Keep body, hands and
foreign objects away from inlet and outlet. Do not touch fan or
motor during operation.
Operate, install and maintain only in strict accordance with safety

practices and instructions in manufacturer’s Operation Manual. Do
not exceed the maximum operating temperature, speed or
vibration level identified in Taymac’s catalogues and Operation
Manual.
Untrained personnel should never operate, install, adjust or

maintain fan or motor.
ADDITIONAL SAFETY ACCESSORIES FOR THE FAN

EQUIPMENT ARE AVAILABLE FROM THE MANUFACTURER.
THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR PROVIDING SUCH ADDITIONAL
ACCESSORIES IS THAT OF THE USER OF THE EQUIPMENT.
CONSULT THE MANUFACTURER’S OPERATION
MANUAL FOR GUIDANCE.
Before starting maintenance work, lock disconnect switch in the off

position, de-energise and disconnect all power sources to the
motor and to accessory devices and secure fan impeller. Cleanout
door and split casing sections must be secure during operation.
Unsecured components may shoot open during operation due to
pressure build up inside the fan. Do not start-up when fan impeller
is rotating backwards.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AS

TO THE OPERATION, INSTALLATION, ADJUSTMENT,
MAINTENANCE, SAFETY EQUIPMENT OR APPROPRIATE
OPERATING CONDITIONS COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO
THIS EQUIPMENT, DAMAGE TO
OTHER EQUIPMENT, PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
10030-1120 Rev F B-11 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.3 FD FAN (02-60-FA-016)
ID FAN (02-60-FA-002)
2.3.2 General
FD Fan Technical Summary
Arrangement Performance Detail

Configuration Single Width Tip Speed m/s 99.6
Handing CW90 Inlet Velocity m/s 16.5
Drive Coupling Outlet Velocity m/s 16.5
Arrangement 8
Fluid Properties Motor Detail

Barometer Pressure kPa 93.24 Manufacturer Taylors Engineering
Elevation m 415 Model FC1200
o
Operating Temp C 80 Installed Power kW 75
o
Maximum Inlet Temp. C 200 No. Poles 4
Humidity % 16 Frame D250MC
Specific Gravity 1.0 Supply V 415
3
Inlet Density kg/m 0.825 Hz 50
Phase 3
Duty Required
3
Inlet Volume Flow Am /hr 27,000 Fan Shaft Power
o
Inlet Pressure kPa -4.5 @0 C kW 135.49
Outlet Pressure kPa +1.5 @ Duty Temp kW 78.20
Speed rpm 1585
Impeller Diameter mm 1200
Paint Specification Construction

Blast Nil Impeller 304 Stainless Steel
External Nil Casing 304 Stainless Steel
Internal Nil
10030-1120 Rev F B-12 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.3 FD FAN (02-60-FA-016)
ID FAN (02-60-FA-002)
2.3.2 General
ID Fan Technical Summary
Arrangement Performance Detail

Configuration Single Width Tip Speed m/s 99.6
Handing CW90 Inlet Velocity m/s 16.5
Drive Coupling Outlet Velocity m/s 16.5
Arrangement 8
Fluid Properties Motor Detail

Barometer Pressure kPa 93.24 Manufacturer Taylors Engineering
Elevation m 415 Model FC1200
o
Operating Temp C 80 Installed Power kW 75
o
Maximum Inlet Temp. C 200 No. Poles 4
Humidity % 16 Frame D250MC
Specific Gravity 1.0 Supply V 415
3
Inlet Density kg/m 0.825 Hz 50
Phase 3
Duty Required
3
Inlet Volume Flow Am /hr 27,000 Fan Shaft Power
o
Inlet Pressure kPa -4.5 @0 C kW 135.49
Outlet Pressure kPa +1.5 @ Duty Temp kW 78.20
Speed rpm 1585
Impeller Diameter mm 1200
Paint Specification Construction

Blast Nil Impeller 304 Stainless Steel
External Nil Casing 304 Stainless Steel
Internal Nil
10030-1120 Rev F B-13 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.3 FD FAN (02-60-FA-016)
ID FAN (02-60-FA-002)
2.3.3 Operation
When the fan is to handle a "hot gas" (i.e. a gas with a temperature
greater than 65°C [150°F]) it is imperative that the fan be subject to
only a slow gradual rate of gas temperature change, not to exceed a
rate of 8°C/minute (15°F/minute). When the fan is being put in
operation the temperature of the gas must not rise at a rate greater
than 8°C/minute (15°F/minute).
Never subject a "cold" fan to a "hot" gas stream. When the fan is
being taken out of operation the temperature of the gas must not
decline at a rate greater than 8°C/minute (15°F/minute), and when the
gas temperature has reached a level of 65°C (150°F) or less it is
imperative that the fan be operated at this temperature for a period of
time sufficient to allow the entire fan structure to reach an equilibrium
temperature of 65°C (150°F). Only when the entire fan structure has
reached an equilibrium temperature of 65°C (150°F) or less can the
fan be shut off and removed from operation. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in damage to the fan equipment.
NEVER EXCEED THE MAXIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURE

OR SPEED FOR WHICH THE FAN WAS DESIGNED.
2.3.4 Design Duties
Item Run 1 Run 2 Run 3

Description Design Duty Duty 1 Duty 2
Inlet Flow (m3/hr) 27,000 27,000 27,000
Static Pressure (kPa) 5.5 5.0 7.0
Fan (rpm) 1585 1510 1780
Damper Angle Open Open Open
Duty (kW) 55 47.5 69.5
Refer to the WEG motor table located in the appendix for further detail on fan motor.
10030-1120 Rev F B-14 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.4 RECIRCULATION PUMPS
PUMP EQUIPMENT CAN BECOME A SOURCE OF

INJURY AND DEATH IF NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED,
OPERATED OR MAINTAINED.
Magnet field danger: the strong magnet field could adversely

affect persons who are assisted by electronic devices such
as pacemakers etc.
Always turn off power supply prior to maintenance works etc.
Pump must always be checked and watched for leakage if it
transfers dangerous liquid.
Do not attempt to remodel the pump.
NON OBSERVANCE OR MISAPPLICATION COULD LEAD

TO AN INJURY OF PERSON OR DAMAGE OF ASSETS.
Attention to strong magnetic force.

Do not run pump dry (without liquid).
Take countermeasures to avoid and remove static electricity
The pump must be handled by qualified operator.
Before full operation of pump, eliminate air from pump
chamber.
Protective measurement must be taken against liquid flowing
out caused by damage of pump or pipe by accident.
Two recirculation pumps have been provided.

 02-60-PU-342
 02-60-PU-390
Refer to Manufacturer’s Instructions located in the Appendix for specific detail.
Refer to the WEG motor table located in the appendix for further detail on pump motor.
10030-1120 Rev F B-15 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.4.2 Venturi Recirculation Pump General
02-60-PU-342 – Venturi Recirculation Pump
Manufacturer Iwaki Pumps

Model MDM65-1201ECFF075
Magnetic Drive Pump fitted 7.5 kW WEG Motor
Motor Output 7.5 kW
Poles 2
Frequency 50 Hz
Duty Point 850 L/min @ 15m head
Efficiency @ Duty Point 48%
Power at Duty Point 5.5 kW
2.4.3 Venturi Recirculation Pump Performance Curves
10030-1120 Rev F B-16 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.4.4 Mist Eliminator Wash Down Pump General
02-60-PU-390 – Mist Eliminator Wash Down Pump

Manufacturer Iwaki Pumps
Model MDM25-2103ECFF075
Magnetic Drive Pump fitted 7.5 kW WEG Motor
Motor Output 7.5 kW
Poles 2
Frequency 50 Hz
Duty Point 20 L/min @ 50m head
Efficiency @ Duty Point 37%
Power at Duty Point 5.5 kW
10030-1120 Rev F B-17 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.4.5 Mist Eliminator Wash Down Pump Performance Curves
2.5 PLANT SPECIFICATION

10030-1120 Rev F B-18 O & M MANUAL
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.5.1 Ventilation Duct
The ducting has been designed for a gas velocity of approximately 19m/s.
All flanged and bolted connections are provided with non-asbestos gasketing.
Refer:
V‐1929‐0070B‐0131 Furnace Line Ducting
V‐1929‐0070B‐0132 Kiln Line Ducting
V‐1929‐0070B‐0135 EWC Line Ducting
V‐1929‐0070B‐0139 EWC and Eluate Ducting
V‐1929‐0070B‐0142 Furnace Duct
V‐1929‐0070B‐0143 Furnace Duct
10030-1120 Rev F B-19 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
2.5 PLANT SPECIFICATION
2.5.2 Expansion Joints
Expansion joints are installed on separator outlet duct, carbon tower outlet duct, and ID Fan
outlet duct. The main purpose of this particular type of joint is to compensate thermal
expansion of the equipment. The material of the expansion joints is Polysil - silicone coated
fibreglass textile, 2 ply coated both sides (or equivalent) with 538° maximum temperature.
The expansion joint on separator outlet duct is equipped with a flow liner, clamped and
bolted to the flange. Expansion joints on carbon tower outlet duct and ID Fan outlet duct are
installed using band-it clamps.
Refer:
V-1929-0070B-0146 Wet Scrubber Area
V-1929-0070B-0124 ID Fan and Stack
2.5.2 Compressed Air System
BEFORE STARTING MAINTENANCE WORK ON COMPRESSED AIR

SYSTEM, LOCK SWITCH IN THE OFF POSITION, DE-ENERGIZE
AND DISCONNECT ALL POWER
SOURCES TO THE PNEUMATIC VALVE AND TO ACCESSORY
DEVICES, AND SECURE PISTON. IN ADDITION, OBSERVE ALL
RELEVANT PROCEDURES FOR THE PLANT IN WHICH
EQUIPMENT IS INSTALLED.
Pneumatic/ compressed air system is used for controlling stack bypass valve, plant bypass
valve, venturi throat damper and other automatic controlled valve. These pneumatic system
is operating under 750 kPa. Stack bypass valve is normally closed, under emergency
10030-1120 Rev F B-20 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B
condition such as overheated, the pneumatic system will open this valve and close plant
bypass valve.
Venturi throat damper is controlled by the pneumatic actuator according to differential
pressure between venturi body and elbow. If any operating fan gives emergency signal, the
pneumatic system will open the damper to emergency position(fully open).
Refer:
V-1929-0070B-0117 Venturi Throat
V-1929-0070B-0149 Kiln Line Duct
V-1929-0070B-0150 Kiln Line Duct
V-1929-0070B-044 Control System Functional Description/ Specification
2.5.4 Stack
The stack is mounted adjacent to the 02-60-FA-016 and secured to the overhead pipe
bridge.
The stack diameter is 900mm providing a velocity of approximately 14.1 m/s at normal gas
flow conditions and is 20 metres to top from ground level. Dust sampling ports complying
with AS4323.1-1995.
2.5.5 Access
Access is provided as shown in the General Arrangement Drawings.
10030-1120 Rev F B-21 O & M MANUAL

2.6 Piping and Valving
FOWLEREX TECHNOLOGIES PTY LTD Document ID 10030-1120revE
PROJECT NAME MARTABE PROJECT
PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER 1929 - 0070B
PURCHASE ORDER DESCRIPTION WET GAS SCRUBBER - EQUIPMENT
VDDR CODE:
AUSENCO DOCUMENT NUMBER
PIPE
Pipe / Duct
Process Line Drawing No. Description Line Size Insulation
Material
PL-03 10030-025 ELECTRO WINNING CELL 1 Ø 160 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-19 10030-025 ELUATE CELL 1 Ø 80 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-20 10030-025 ELUATE CELL 2 Ø 80 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-28 10030-025 RETORT Ø 160 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-29 10030-026 FURNACE 1 Ø 300 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-30 10030-026 FURNACE 2 Ø 300 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-31 10030-025 EWC LINE Ø 350 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-32 10030-026 FURNACE LINE Ø 450 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-33 10030-027 REGEN KILN 1 250 NB 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-34 10030-027 REGEN KILN 2 250 NB 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-35 10030-027 CONDENSER POT 1 Ø 400 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-36 10030-027 CONDENSER POT 2 Ø 400 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-37 10030-027 KILN LINE Ø 400 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-38 10030-027 KILN EMERGENCY BYPASS LINE Ø 400 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-39 10030-025 FURNACE & EWC LINE Ø 550 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-40 10030-026 FD FAN INLET Ø 700 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-41 10030-035 FD FAN OUTLET Ø 770 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-43 10030-037 CARBON TOWER INLET 1056 x 529 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-44 10030-037 ID FAN INLET Ø 732 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-45 10030-038 ID FAN OUTLET Ø 750 ID 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-46 - - - NON-INSULATED
PL-47 10030-008 VENT 40 NB 304 S.S. NON-INSULATED
PL-101 10030-008 CLEAN WATER 32 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-103 10030-008 KILN COOLING LINE 1 32 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-104 10030-008 KILN COOLING LINE 2 25 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-105 10030-008 SEPARATOR OUTLET 200 NB 316 S.S NON-INSULATED
PL-106 10030-008 VENTURI RECYCLE PUMP 1 INLET 80 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-107 10030-008 VENTURI RECYCLE PUMP 1 OUTLET 65 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-108 10030-008 VENTURI INLET 65 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-109 10030-008 EMERGENCY FAN SPRAY LINE 25 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-110 10030-008 MAKEUP WATER 25 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-111 10030-008 RECIRCULATION LINE 40 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-112 10030-008 VENTURI RECYCLE PUMP 2 INLET 40 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-113 10030-008 MIST ELIMINATOR LINE 25 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-114 10030-008 PURGE LINE 50 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-115 10030-008 SOLIDS LINE 65 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-116 10030-008 SEPARATOR OVERFLOW LINE 200 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-117 10030-008 RECIRC TANK OVERFLOW LINE 125 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-118 10030-008 STACK DRAIN 40 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-119 10030-008 DRIP LEG 50 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
PL-120 10030-008 DRIP LEG 15 NB POLYPROPYLENE NON-INSULATED
VALVES
ID Location Purpose Size Actuation Normal Condition Construction
V-001 Stack By Pass Control 400 Yes CLOSED DN400(16”) Damper butterfly valve , double flanged to suit
ANSI150 (fabricated), 304SS body and disc, Complete with
AIRTORQUE AT401DA pneumatic actuator, double acting, suit 0.
5bar air
V-002 Plant Bypass Control 400 Yes OPENED DN400(16”) Damper butterfly valve , double flanged to suit
ANSI150 (fabricated), 304SS body and disc, Complete with
AIRTORQUE AT401DA pneumatic actuator, double acting, suit 0.
5bar air
V-003 CR Kiln Feed Isolation 25 No OPENED ARITA 316SS 2Pce, ball valve rf flange and drilled ansi 150#, Full
bore , non-firesafe, , ptfe seat, GENERAL IND, Lever operated
V-004 CR Kiln Feed Control 25 Yes OPENED ARITA 316ss 2pce ball valve rf flange and drilled ANSI 150#, Full
TV6616 bore, iso pad, firesafe ,ptfe seat, c/w bracket, c/w K-TORC -
052DA
V-005 CR Kiln Feed Isolation 25 No OPENED ARITA 316SS 2Pce, ball valve rf flange and drilled ansi 150#, Full
V-006 CR Kiln Feed Control 25 Yes OPENED ARITA 316ss 2pce ball valve rf flange and drilled ANI 150#, Full
TV6615 bore, iso pad, firesafe ,ptfe seat, c/w bracket, c/w K-TORC -
052DA
V-007 PIT Isolation 25 No OPENED 25MM ARITA 315SS 3PCE , 1000 PSI SCREWED BSP, PTFE SEAT,
LOCKABLE LEVER , FULL BORE
V-010 DPV dP Control - Yes Air cylinder, 80 bore x 240 stroke
V-011 Mist Isolation 40 No OPENED ARITA 316SS 2Pce, ball valve rf flange and drilled ansi 150#, Full
Eliminator bore , non-firesafe, , ptfe seat, GENERAL IND, Lever operated
V-012 Mist Check 25 No OPENED 25MM ARITA 316SS SWING CHECK RF FLANGE AND DRILLED
Eliminator ANSI 150#, BOLTED COVER, GENERAL IND
V-013 Line Drain Isolation 15 No CLOSED 15mm ARITA 316SS 2PCE BALL VALVE, F/F . 1000 PSI, SCREWED
BSP, GENERAL IND, LOCKABLE LEVER
V-014 Mist Control 25 Yes OPENED ARITA 316ss 2pce ball valve rf flange and drilled ANI 150#, Full
Eliminator bore, iso pad, firesafe ,ptfe seat, c/w bracket, c/w K-TORC -
052DA
V-015 Fan Spray Isolation 25 No OPENED ARITA 316SS 2Pce, ball valve rf flange and drilled ansi 150#, Full
V-016 Fan Spray Control 25 Yes OPENED ARITA 316ss 2pce ball valve rf flange and drilled ANI 150#, Full
bore, iso pad, firesafe ,ptfe seat, c/w bracket, c/w K-TORC -
052DA
V-017 Venturi Feed Isolation 65 No OPENED 65MM ARITA 316SS 2PCE BALL VALVE RF FLANGE AND
DRILLED ANSI 150, FULL BORE , NON-FIRESAFE. PTFE SEAT&SEAL,
GENERAL IND, LEVER OPERATED
V-019 Venturi Feed Check 65 No OPENED 65mm ARITA 316SS SWING CHECK RF FLANGE AND DRILLED
ANSI 150#, BOLTED COVER, GENERAL IND
V-021 Venturi Pump Isolation 80 No OPENED 80mm ARITA 2PCE 316SS FULL BALL VALVE ANSI 150# GENERAL
INDUSTRIES PTFE SEAT& SEALS LEVER OPERATED
V-022 Tank Refill Control 40 Yes OPENED ARITA ANSI #150 DN40 SCREWED BSP BALL VALVE - 316 SS
LV6608
V-023 Purge Isolation 50 No OPENED 50MM ARITA 316SS 2PCE BALL VALVE RF FLANGE AND
V-024 Purge Control 50 Yes OPENED 50MM ARITA 316SS 2PCE BALL VALVE RF FLANGE AND DRILLED
TV6609 ANSI 150#, FULL BORE, FIRESAFE, PTFE SEAT & GRAPHITE BODY
SEALS, ISO PAD c/w bracket, C/W K-TORC-C083DA
V-025 Tank Solids Isolation 65 No OPENED 65MM ARITA 316SS 2PCE BALL VALVE RF FLANGE AND
V-025 Drip Leg Isolation 15 No CLOSED 15mm ARITA 316SS 2PCE BALL VALVE, F/F . 1000 PSI, SCREWED
V-027 GAC Drain Isolation 100 No OPENED 100 MM ARITA 316SS 2PCE BALL VALVE RF FLANGE AND
GENERAL IND, Lever
V-028 Mist Isolation 25 No OPENED ARITA 316SS 2Pce, ball valve rf flange and drilled ansi 150#, Full
Eliminator bore , non-firesafe, , ptfe seat, GENERAL IND, Lever operated
V-029 Tank Refill Isolation 100 No OPENED 100 MM ARITA 316SS 2PCE BALL VALVE RF FLANGE AND
DRILLED ANSI 150 FULL BORE , NON-FIRESAFE. PTFE SEAT&SEAL
GENERAL IND LEVER OPERATED
V-031 Stack Drain Isolation 40 No OPENED 40mm ARITA 316SS 3PCE , 1000 PSI SCREWED BSP PTFE SEAT,
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
MAINTENANCE SECTION C
3.0 GENERAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

Although the scrubber should operate continuously with minimum maintenance, some may
be required. Inspection doors on the side of the unit provide convenient access for internal
examination of the unit.
Care must be taken with the internals of the scrubber. Welding to the unit must not be
carried out or the polypropylene packing and vinyl ester supports will be melted.
BEFORE STARTING MAINTENANCE WORK ON FAN EQUIPMENT

LOCK MOTOR, LOCK DISCONNECT SWITCH IN THE OFF
POSITION, DE-ENERGIZE AND DISCONNECT ALL POWER
SOURCES TO THE MOTOR AND TO ACCESSORY DEVICES, AND
SECURE FAN IMPELLER. IN ADDITION, OBSERVE ALL RELEVANT
PROCEDURES FOR THE PLANT IN WHICH EQUIPMENT
IS INSTALLED.
3.0.1 Bearings and Lubricants
Selection of the correct fan bearing lubricant and lubrication intervals depends on several
factors. Extreme high or low temperatures and dirty or damp surroundings are all conditions
that will create a requirement for either special or more frequent lubrication.
READ THE BEARING MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS TO DETERMINE THE TYPE

AND FREQUENCY OF BEARING LUBRICATION REQUIRED. THE MOTOR BEARINGS
SHOULD BE LUBRICATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MOTOR MANUFACTURER'S
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS SHOULD BE FOLLOWED
CLOSELY.
Bearing failure may be caused by failure to lubricate as often as required, use of an

excessive quantity of lubricant or the use of incompatible lubricants. Excessive vibration,
especially if the bearing is not rotating, will also cause bearings to fail. Bearings must also be
protected from water and moisture to avoid internal corrosion. Bearings are susceptible to
10030-1120 Rev F C-1 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
damage from exposure to excess shaft heat transfer, which may occur when a fan operating
at a temperature greater than 93°C (200°F) is shut down without a sufficient period of
gradual temperature reduction.
Bearing Replacement
Replacement of fan bearings should not be required for many years if cared for strictly in
accordance with bearing manufacturer's instructions. The procedure used to replace fan
bearings will vary depending on the type of fan and the type of bearing. It is important that
the replacement of bearings be supervised or inspected by personnel experienced in such
work and equipment.
PROCEDURE FOR APPLYING LUBRICANT TO BEARINGS AND PILLOW BLOCKS

 Bearing and housing must be clean.
 Pack each bearing(race) as full as possible with specified grease by swivelling the
outer ring open, rotating it as necessary to inject the grease, then swivelling the outer
ring closed, being careful not to use force in case a roller catches the corner of the
outer ring sphere.
 Before assembling the pillow block cap to the base, and after completing bearing and
base assembly, fill the pillow block base to the bottom of the shaft with the same
lubricant product used to pack the bearing.
 Before mounting the cap to base, lightly coat the interior of the cap with grease.
 Smear a liberal amount of grease on the contacting surface of the seals.
RELUBRICATION OF BEARINGS NOT SUPPLIED WITH GREASE NIPPLES.
Remove pillow block cap and extract the old grease from the bearing and pillow block. If it is
not practical to swivel the outer ring open, purge the old grease from the bearing by forcing
fresh grease through the bearing. Re-pack pillow block as described above.
10030-1120 Rev F C-2 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
RELUBRICATION OF BEARINGS SUPPLIED WITH GREASE NIPPLES.
Bearings should be completely repacked at least once every three years. Bearings operating
close to the maximum grease speed listed should be repacked every year.
LUBRICANT
Use a multi-purpose roller bearing grease NLGI Grades 1 or 2 with rust inhibitors and anti-
oxidant additives. Suggested minimum oil viscosity 400SSU @ 38 OC (100OF). Grease for
high speed operation should be dynamically stable, must not churn or whip, and must be
suitable for 120OC (250OF) continuous. It is not good practice to mix greases with different
bases as the results are unpredictable. Several suitable products are: Shell Alvania R3,
Moblelux 3, Castrol AP3, BP LS3, Ampol RR3...
STORAGE
If the fan is to be idle and not operated for an extended period of time, bearings should be
protected as recommended by the manufacturer. The bearing housing should be completely
filled with grease and the shaft should be turned in the bearings at frequent intervals to
prevent corrosion and damage. Prior to startup, excess or contaminated grease should be
removed.
NOTES
Some bearings will run warm, especially during the "run-in" period. If the bare hand can be
held on the bearing cap for five seconds, there is no cause for alarm. If the bearings are
equipped with flushable labyrinth seals, the seals should be lubricated once a month.
10030-1120 Rev F C-3 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Lubricants deteriorate in time, and the rate of deteriorate is a function of the lubricant used at
the operating conditions encountered. The above table is based on the use of an age-
resistant, average quality grease and is valid for bearing temperatures of 70 OC (158OF)
measured on the outer ring. The intervals should be halved for every 15 oC(27OF) increase
above 70OC, but the maximum permissible operating temperature for the grease should
obviously not be exceeded.
Conversely, if the operating temperatures are lower than 70OC, the intervals can be
lengthened to about twice for operating temperatures of 50OC (122OF) and below. Where
there is a risk of the grease becoming contaminated, the intervals should be reduced.
10030-1120 Rev F C-4 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.0.2 Motor
The fundamental principle of electrical maintenance is to KEEP THE MOTOR CLEAN AND
DRY. This requires periodic inspection of the motor. The frequency of the inspections
depends upon the type of motor, the service and the motor manufacturer’s instructions.
Periodic checks of voltage, frequency and current of a motor while in operation are
recommended. Such checks ensure the correctness of frequency and voltage applied to the
motor and yield an indication of the fan load. Comparison of this data with previous data will
give an indication of the fan performance. Any serious deviations should be investigated and
corrected.
3.0.3 Coupling
Maintenance is recommended every 6 months to insure long life. Dismantle coupling and
visually inspect all parts. Replace any worn parts. Hand pack coupling with lubricant. When it
is necessary to dismantle coupling, remove half covers. Beginning at a cut end of grid,
carefully insert a screwdriver into loop. Using the teeth for leverage, gradually pry the grid
up, alternating sides while working around the coupling.
Grid Removal
10030-1120 Rev F C-5 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.0.4 Pre Start Checks

 Ensure all doors are secured in place and no personnel remains inside
 Ensure all motors rotations are correct
 Pre-fill recirculation tank.
 Ensure slide gate dampers on EWC are opened.
 Check all water supplies are available (clean water and make up water)
 Check all valves are in the correct normal state
 Check all flanges are connected to the correct equipment, or blanked off if required.
 Ensure furnace hoods and articulated arm are locked in operating position.
 Ensure hopper & vessels are cleaned from installation/ maintenance rubbish, such as
welding rods, lugs, or any other foreign objects
 Ensure all equipments are secured in place, and all guards are present on rotating/
moving components such as fans and pumps
3.0.5 Operational Checks

Refer to maintenance schedule (Section C 3.3)
3.0.6 Cleaning
Cleaning maintenance procedure must only be carried out during shut down process.
 Use high pressure water to wash up material build up
 Clean material build up on internal surfaces of separator tank, recirculation tank,
venturi elbow, and all ducting
 Clear out drains on all equipment in safe manner according to site regulations and
procedures
 Clean out inlet box of FD Fan (02-60-FA-016)
10030-1120 Rev F C-6 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.1 TROUBLESHOOTING
 If collection efficiency drops, check differential pressure between venturi body and elbow.
Adjust venturi throat damper as necessary.
 If any of the pumps appear to be cavitating, check water supply.
 If suction of a furnace hood becomes insufficient, adjust slide gate dampers on the duct
of said hood as necessary to balance the air flow.
 Excess mercury present in carbon tower or stack drain may indicate saturation of
activated carbon, in which case the carbon bed will need to be vacuumed out and
replaced. Carbon tower drainage also needs to be cleaned out from any spent carbon.
 If any pneumatic system is not working, check the air line first for any loose connection or
leakage.
 If there appears to be no air flow on the stack, check expansion joints on ID Fan outlet for
any leakage.
 If recirculation tank is overflowing, check overflow pipe for blockage and clean it as
necessary.
 If recirculation tank is continuously overflowing, it would be due to makeup water not
turning off. Check recirculation tank level probes and makeup water valves for any failure.
 Refer to each instrumentation manual for troubleshooting particular equipment.
10030-1120 Rev F C-7 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.2 LUBRICATION SCHEDULE

Lubricant
Lub’n Recommended Lubricant
Quantity Pre-
ISO Lub’nl
Lubrication Part Requiring Part Initial lubed
Visc. Change
GREASE
Fill
Point Lubrication Number Grade Freq
OIL
Manufacturer
or
NLGI (L) (Hours) Y N
Grd.
Point 1
ID Fan Motor Bearings – 75kW
Point 3
Non-Drive End Bearings 6316-C3 X Mobil Polyrex EM 2 - 7600 X
Drive End Bearings NU-316 X Mobil Polyrex EM 2 - 7600 X
Point 2
ID Fan Impeller Shaft Bearings
Point 4
Drive End Bearings 1213K X Shell Alvania R3 2 - 672 X
Non-Drive End Bearings 22213ESK X Shell Alvania R3 2 - 672 X
Point 5
Pump Motor Bearings
Point 6
Sealed
Non-Drive End Bearings 6306 ZZ X Mobil Polyrex EM - - X
for Life
Sealed
Drive End Bearings 6308 ZZ X Mobil Polyrex EM - - X
for Life
Refer: 10030-1102RevB Lubrication Schedule
10030-1120 Rev F C-8 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
LUBRICATION DIAGRAM
Lubrication Point Tag No. Description

Motor Bearings
1 02-60-FA-002 - Drive End
- Non Drive End
Impeller Shaft Bearings
2 02-60-FA-002 - Drive End
- Non Drive End
Motor Bearings
3 02-60-FA-016 - Drive End
- Non Drive End
Impeller Shaft Bearings
4 02-60-FA-016 - Drive End
- Non Drive End
Motor Bearings
5 02-60-PU-390 - Drive End
- Non Drive End
Motor Bearings
6 02-60-PU-342 - Drive End
- Non Drive End
10030-1120 Rev F C-9 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
10030-1120 Rev F C-10 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.3 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Equipment Item Task Time Interval

Fan Check bearing temperatures Weekly
Fan Check shaft seal Weekly
Fan Check bearing vibration Monthly
Fan Check casing, impeller, shaft, bearings Annually/ Shutdowns
etc for wear
Fan Empty drain Annually/ Shutdowns
Fan Check Material build-up Annually/ Shutdowns
Pumps Refer Vendor manual (see appendix) Refer Vendor manual

(see appendix)
Ductwork Check for leaks Monthly

Ductwork Check flexible duct for wear or damage Monthly
Ductwork Check for wear 6 monthly
Ductwork Check for build-up or material 6 monthly
Expansion Joints Check for wear Monthly

Expansion Joints Check for leaks Monthly
Expansion Joints Check sealing at flanges Monthly
Furnace Condenser Pots Check for cracks Monthly

Furnace Condenser Pots Check for wear or leaks Monthly
Furnace Condenser Pots Check sprays are operating 6monthly/Shutdowns
Pneumatic System Check airlines for leaks Monthly

Pneumatic System Check cylinder strokes correctly Shutdown
Pneumatic System Check emergency reserve action Shutdown
Valves Check correct operation Shutdown
Vessels (General) Check wear Annually / Shutdown

Vessels (General) Check material build-up Annually / Shutdown
Vessels (General) Drain and clean Annually / Shutdown
Carbon Tower Check temperature indicator Daily
Separator Check mist eliminator spray 6monthly / Shutdown
Stack Check drain is open Weekly
10030-1120 Rev F C-11 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.4 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS
10030-1120 Rev F C-12 O & M MANUAL

FOWLEREX
10030-1103
MATERIAL SAEFTY DATA SHEET

Project Name: Martabe Project
Package Number: 00708
Document Rev: A Document Date: 24102111
Purchase Order No: 1929-00708
Description of Goods: Wet Gas Scrubber - Equipment
VDDR ltem No: 11.06
Rclcrcnccs:
v-1929- 00708-0018
02-60-TW-00L Granulated Activated Carbon Tower
Diæiflina By Date
CM /Struct
ng
?A )tt 2..3'll
Qudity
inlcc.rlø i^t Jr( ft

O
Rcceptø to Proceed.
2 Accepted to Proc except as noted. Revise & Resubmit
O 3 NotAccepted to Præeed. Revised & Resubmit
A 4l malion ONLY
Re/iq', of this document has been comfleted to determine if

the intent of the Contract Documênts has gen*ally been
comfliedvlith. Such revia¡r does nol rdia/e tha Conhactor/
Page I of1
21-FeÞ11
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
SECTION I IDENTIFICATTON
PRODUCT NAME : Steam Processed Coconut Shell Activated Ca¡bon

MA¡¡UFACTURECODE : Activated Charcoal
FORMULA : C
CAS NO. : 7440-44-0
CHEMICAL FAMILY : Carbon Group
REVISION DATE : 4-May-09 (Version iii)
SECTION 2 COMPOSITION OF INGREDIENTS
None
SECTION 3 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
APPEARANCE AI\ID ODOUR Black granules or powder ,odourless.

BOILING POINT Not applicable
VAPOUR PRESSURE Not applicable
SOLUBILITY IN WATER Insoluble
PARTICLE DENSITY Nominal 0.82 glcc
BULK DENSITY 0.34 - 0.62 glcc
MELTINGPOINT Not applicable
EVAPORATION RATE Not applicable
SECTION 4 FIRE EXPLOSION HAZARD DATA
FLASH POINT AUTO IGNITION TEMPERATURE

oC
Carbon
Steam activated NA Above 350
FLAMMABLE LIMIT - LEL : Not applicable

- UEL : Not applicable
Activated carbon is difficult to ignite and tends to burn slowly (smolder) without producing smoke or flame.
EXTINGUISHING MEDIA : Water, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, dry chemical extinguishing agents, sand and foam. Avoid
methods which may stir up dust clouds.
SPECIAL FIRE FIGHTING PROCEI: In the event of a fire, wear full protective clothing and NIOSH approved self contained
breathing apparatus with full facepiece operated in the pressure demand or other positive
pressure mode. Since wet cartons adsorb oxygen, do not enter closed vessels without using
a self-contained breathing apparatus.
UNUSUAL FIRE & E)(PLOSION HA : Airborne dust is a weak explosion hazard.
SECTION 5 : REACTIVITY DATA
STABILITY : Stable under ordinary conditions ofuse and storage.
CONDITIONS TO AVOID : Moisture and incompatibles.
INCOMPATIBILITY (MATERIALS TO AVOID)

Strong oxidizing chemicals such as ozone,liquid oxygen, chlorine, permanganate, strong
acids etc and hydrocarbons.
HAZARDOUS DECOMPOSITION : On buming catbon dioxide,carbon monoxide.

PRODUCT/BY-PRODUCT
HAZARDOUS POLYMERIZATION : Will not occu¡
HAYCARß PLC.
DEANS ROAD, COLOMBO IO, SRI LANKA.
4OO,
PHONE: +94112 687565, E-MAIL. haycarb@þaycarb.com , FAX.+94 ll2 699630
SECTION 6 : HEALTHHAZARDDATA
EFFECTS OF EXPOSURE : Inhalation of carbon dust may cause temporary discomfort. No adverse exffects expected
through skin or eye contact, but may cause mild irritation. Workers should also take
appropriate precausions when dealing with spent (used) activated carbons which may exhibit
proprties of absorbed materials.
HEALTH HAZARD ACUTE A¡{D : No data available.

CHRONIC
MOST LIKELY ROUTES OF ENTRI: Inhalation (dust may be inhaled)
MEDICAL CONDITIONS GENERALLY AGGRAVATED BY EXPOSURE

: No information found.
SECTION 7 : SAFE HANDLING& STORAGE
HANDLING Minimise spills ,generation of airbome dust and accumulation of dusts on exposed surfaces.
: Adequate exhaust ventillation to be used to draw dust fiom working environment.
Use appropriate respirators , gloves and eye protection to prevent or minimise exposures to
dust.
Keep in airtight packing to prevent pickup of odours and moisture from air. Wet activated
carbon depletes oxygen from the air and therefore dangerously low levels ofoxygen may be
encountered in confined spaces.
STEPS TO BE TAKEN IN CASE MATERIAL IS RELEASED OR SPILLED

Collect with broom and shovel or vacuum sweep up spills. Avoid creating dust.
STORAGE TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE

: Ambient temp. & atmospheric pressure.
SECTION 8 ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
Remove all sources of ignition. Ventilate area of leak or spill. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment as specified in section 9.
Spills: Clean up spills in a manner that does not disperse dust into the air. Use non-sparking tools and equipment. Reduce airbome dust
prevent scattering by moistening with water. Pick up spill for recovery or disposal and place in a closed container.
Warning! Spent product may have absorbed hazardous materials.
sEcTtoN 9 EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION
Airborne Exposure Guidelines:
OSHA PEL*: (carbon graphite, synthetic 5 mg/m3 (Ræpirable)

l5mg/m3 (Total)
ACGIH TLV*: (carbon graphite) lOmg/m3 (Total)
+PELs (Permissible exposure Limit) and TLVs (Threshold Limit Value) are 8-hour TWAs (Time Weighed Average) unless otherwise
Ventilation System:
A system of local and./or gøreral exhaust is recommended to keep employee exposures below the Ai¡borne Exposure Limis. Local
exhaust ventilation is generally preferred because it can control the emissions ofthe contaminant at its source, preventing dispersion ofit
into the general work area.
Please refer to the ACGIH document, Industrial Ventilation, A Manual of Recommended Pracl,ces , most recent edition, for details.
ttAYUAIil' rLU.
4OO,
PHONE: +94112 687565, E-MAIL. haycarb@Jtoycarb.com, FAX.+94 ll2 699630
Personal Respirators (NIOSH Approved) :

For conditions ofuse whe¡e exposure to the dust or mist is apparent, Use NIOSÍVOSHA approved respirator fot Phosphoric acid and
dust/mist (non-toxic particles). Select the suitable respirator based on exposure limits. For emergencies or instances where the exposure
levels are not known, use a full-face positive pressure, air-supplied respirator.
WARNING: Air-purifling respirators do not protect \ilorkers in oxygen deficient atmospheres.
Skin Protection :
Wear protective gloves and clean body-covering clothing. For penonal hygiene purposes, use adequate clothing to prevent skin contact
including boots,gloves, lab coat, apron or overalls as appropriate.
Eye Protection :
Safety glasses/goggles. Contact lenses should not be worn when working with activated carbon. Maintain eyewash fountain and quick -
drench facilities in work area.
SECTION IO : FIRST AID MEASURES
Inhalation :
Remove to fresh air. Get medical attention for for any breathing difficulty.
Ingestion:
Give seve¡al glasses of water to drink to dilute. If large quantites were swallowed, get medical attention immidiately.
Skin Contact:
Not expected to require first aid measures. Wash exposed area with soap and v/ater. Seek medical attention ifirritation develops'
Eye Contact:
Immidiately flush eyes with gentle but large stream of water for at least 15 min lifting lower and upper eye lids occasionally. Call a
physician if irritation develops.
SECTION II TOXICOLOGICAL INFOR}IATION
Activated Carbon : Investigated as a reproductive effectors.
....---\ Ca¡rcer Lists
carcinogen-----
Insredient IARC cateqorv
Activated Carbon
-ö--NTP No None
SECTION 12 ECOLOGICAL INFOR}TATION
Environmental Fate: Environmental Toxicity

No information found. No information found.
SECTION 13 : DISPOSALCONSIDERATIONS
Whateve¡ cannot be saved for recovery or recycling should be managed in an appropriate and approved waste disposal facility.
Processing, use or contamination ofthis product may change the waste management options.State and local disposal regulations may
differ from federal disposal regulations. Dispose of container and unused contents in accordance with federal, state and local
requirements. Consider potential hazards of any adsorbed material before disposal.
HAYCARB PLC.
4OO,
PHONE: +94112 687565, E-MAIL. haycørb@)aycarb.com , FAX.+94 ll2 699630
SECTION 14 : TRANSPORT INFORÙTATION
Proper Shipping Name: Number:

Identific¡tion Packing Group
Steam Processed Activated carbon ( Not DOT regulated) Not applicable Not applicable
Hazard Class:
ot applicable
This product has been tested according to the United Nations Transport of Dangerous Goods test protocol for spontaneously
combustible materials. It has been specifically determined that this product does not meet the definition ofa selfheating substance or any
hazard class, and therefore is not a hazardous material and not regulated.
SECTION 15 : REGULATORYINFORMATION
.---i*g¡rr, invm.*iH*tl"**
Activated Carbon
-ruical
Component Yes Yes No Yes
------\chemical inventory status-Pa¡tl\--

@ çAN4DA phit.
Insredient DSL NDSL
Activated Carbon Component Yes Yes No Yes
& Intern¿tional Regulations.Partl

-\Fed€ral,State
-------SARA302------- ----------SARA3l3----------
I¡sredie¿t BO IBA !¡!l Chernical Cataloq
Activated Carbon Component No No No No
...--...uredera¡,st8te & Intcmational Regulations-Part2-\----------

lusrctlie4g çJBçIA RCRA 261.33 rSCA 8rp)
Activated Carbon Component No No
weaoon TSCA
Chemical CDTA \ryHMIS
Insredient couvention (12ìb
Activated Carbon Component No No No No
Activated Carbon Component SARA 3l l/312: Acute:Yes Chronic:No Fire:No Pressure:No

Reactivity : No
(Pure/Solid)
SECTION Ió : COMMENTS
Do not enter vessels containing wet Activated Carbon before checking oxygen level. Vessels with limited ventilation may be low in
a the adsorbing characteristics ofActivated Carbon. Ifnecessary, use a NlOSH-approved self-contained breathing
:1Ig:^191"
Dangerous goods regulation-
activated carbon is not classifìed as a dangerous good as per UN No 1362, Class or division 4.2, Packing group III, Special provisions
925
Special Provision 925 - The provisions ofthis Code do not apply to:
- carbons made by a steam activation process.
- a consignment ofcarbon ifit passes the tests for selÊheating substances as reflected in the UN Manual ofTests and Criteria (see
33.3.1.3.3), and is accompanied by a certificate from a laboratory accredited by the competent authority, stating tha the product to be
loaded has been correctly sampled by trained staff from that laboratory and that the sample was correctly tested and has passed the test;
and
EMPLOYERS SHOULD USE THIS INFORMATION ONLY AS A SUPPLEMENT TO OTHER INFORMATION GATHERED BY
THEM AND SHOULD MAKE INDEPENDENT JUDGMENT OF SUITABILITY OF THIS INFORMATION TO ENSURE PROPER
USE AND PROTECT THE HEALTH AND SAFETY OF EMPLOYEES. THIS TNFORMATION IS FURNISHED WITHOUT
WARRANTY AND ANY USE OF THE PRODUCT NOTIN CONFORMANCE 'WITH THIS MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
OR IN COMBINATION WITH AI.IY OTHERPRODUCT OR PROCESS, IS THE RESPONSIBILIry OF THE USER.
-oOe
HAYCARB PLC.
4OO, DEANS ROAD, COLOMBO IO, SRI LANKA.
PHONE: +94112 687565, E-MAIL. haycarb@haycarb.com , FAX.+94 ll2 699630
10030-1120 Rev F
____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SPARES SECTION D
Extended
Part Description Part Number Qty Req'd Parent Part Unit Cost Cost
Suit Tag Nos. 02-60-FA-016Wet Scrubber Extraction Fan &
Coupling Insert
(CSP-0070B-0001) 2 02-60-FA-002 Activated Carbon Tower Fan 80 160
Bearing Set NDE
Shaft Seal
Suit Tag Nos. 02-60-FA-016 Wet Scrubber Extraction Fan &
Bearing Housing
Includes 2 x Grease Nipples
- 2 02-60-FA-002 Activated Carbon Tower Fan 0 0
Bearing Set DE
Locating Rings
- 2 02-60-FA-002 Activated Carbon Tower Fan 0 0
CSP-0070B-
Bearing, Part No. MDM0375 MDM0375 1 Suit Tag No. 02-60-PU-342 Venturi Recycle Pump No. 1 630 630
CSP-0070B-
Mouth Ring, Part No. MDM0377
MDM0377 1 Suit Tag No. 02-60-PU-342 Venturi Recycle Pump No. 1 1200 1200
CSP-0070B-
Bearing, Part No. MDM0950
CSP-0070B-
Mouth Ring, Part No. MDM0951
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SECTION E
5.0 Instrumentation and Control
5.1 Plant Control System
Main Plant Control System DCS shall be supplied by PT Agincourt Resources.
5.2 Interlocks and Alarms
Each device will have both standard interlocks according to its type, which are not described in this
document, and device specific interlocks. There are three types of specific interlocks.
- Safety Interlocks : These interlocks both prevent any operation from commencing and also
terminate the active operation of a device. Safety interlocks can never be
overridden.
- Process Interlocks: These interlocks both prevent any operation from commencing and also
terminate the active operation of a device. Process interlocks will be
automatically overridden in test mode and may be overridden via the HMI by
an operator having sufficient privilege in local, central and sequence modes.
- Start Permissives: These interlocks prevent any operation from commencing but have no effect on
the active operation of a device. Start permissives will be automatically
overridden in test mode and may be overridden via the HMI by an operator
having sufficient privilege in local, central and sequence modes.
5.2.1 Venturi Recycle Pump 1 (02-60-PU-342)
5.2.1.1 Safety Interlocks

Stop Venturi Recycle Pump 1 (02-60-PU-342) when any of the following occur:
o Condition 1: NONE
5.2.1.2 Process Interlocks

o Condition 1: If low level switch (LS-6608) signals a low water level in the Recirculation
Tank (02-60 TK-109).
5.2.1.3 Start Permissives

Prevent Venturi Recycle Pump 1 (02-60-PU-342) when any of the following occur:
o Condition 1: If low level switch (LS-6608) signals a low water level in the Recirculation
Tank (02-60 TK-109) send alarm to operator.
10030-1120 Rev F E-1 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

o Condition 1: NONE

o Condition 1: When Cooling Water Pump (03-20-PU-182/183) stops.

5.2.3 Venturi Scrubber Extraction Fan (02-60-FA-016)

Stop Venturi Scrubber Extraction Fan (02-60-FA-016) when any of the following occur:
o Condition 1: NONE

Stop Venturi Scrubber Extraction Fan (02-60-FA-016) when any of the following occur:
o Condition 1: Relay Response (Motor Temperature Thermistor Alarm)

Prevent Venturi Scrubber Extraction Fan (02-60-FA-016) when any of the following occur:
o Condition 1: NONE
10030-1120 Rev F E-2 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5.2.4 GAC Tower Extraction Fan (02-60-FA-002)

Stop GAC Tower Extraction Fan (02-60-FA-002) when any of the following occur:
o Condition 1: NONE

Condition 1: Relay Response (Motor Temperature Thermistor Alarm)

Prevent GAC Tower Extraction Fan (02-60-FA-002) when any of the following occur:
o Condition 1: NONE
5.2.5 XV6610 Bypass Valve

Open Bypass Valve (XV-6610) when any of the following occur:
o Condition 1: NONE

o Condition 1: When TIT-6600 reads greater than 300oC.
o Condition 2: 02-60-FA-016 Relay Response (Motor Temperature Thermistor Alarm)
o Condition 3: 02-60-FA-016 Relay Response (SSL-6603)
o Condition 4: 02-60-FA-016 No VSD Output

o Condition 1: NONE
10030-1120 Rev F E-3 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5.3 Alarms
Alarms shall be prioritised into the following categories:
- Critical – Urgent action required by the operator. In practice, critical alarms will
generally be generated from safety systems.
- Urgent – Quick action required by the operator.
- Warning – Action required by operator within reasonable period of time.
- Events – No action required and not presented to the operator. Events are recorded
for subsequent and diagnostic purposes only.
Please refer to Table 5.3.1 for additional detail.
10030-1120 Rev F E-4 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Table 5.3.1 Alarm Levels

No. Parameter Tag Number Set Point Alarm Level
Critical Urgent Warning Event
1 Carbon Regeneration Kiln Temperature Transmitter TIC6600 110 oC 300 oC 250oC 200oC 150oC
2 Gold Room Temperature Transmitter TIT6601 - 300oC 200oC 150oC 120oC
3 Gold Room Duct Pressure Transmitter PIT6602 -3500 Pa(g) - -2500 Pa (g) -3000 Pa (g) -
4 Extraction Fan Shaft Rotation Sensor SE6603 - Alarm - -
5 Venturi Scrubber Pressure Indicator PIT6604 4000 Pa(g) - 3000 Pa(g) 3500 Pa(g) -
6 Venturi Separator Pressure Indicator PIT6605 500 Pa(g) - - 4000 Pa(g) <500 Pa(g)
7 Recirculation Tank, Water Temperature Transmitter TIC6609 40 oC - 70 oC 60 oC 50 oC
8 GAC Tower Inlet Temperature Indicator TIC6611 65 oC 300 oC 200oC 120oC 90oC
9 GAC Tower Body Temperature Indicator TI6612 65oC 300 oC 200oC 80oC 70oC
10 GAC Extraction Fan Pressure Transmitter PIT6613 -4800 Pa (g) - -3000 Pa (g) -3800 Pa (g) -4300 Pa (g)
11 GAC Extraction Fan Shaft Rotation Sensor SE6614 Alarm
*Note: FI 6607 - this unit shall be used to indicate flow alone
PIT 6602 will be used for control of the Fan 02-60-FA-016 VSD
PIT 6613 will be used for control of the Fan 02-60-FA-002 VSD
10030-1120 Rev F E-5 O & M MANUAL
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

5.4 Control Loops
5.4.1 TIC6600 Carbon Regeneration Kiln Temperature Transmitter
IF: TIT > 300oC

THEN : Open XV 6610
Close XV 6616
Controlled Plant Stop
IF: TIT > 250oC (t = 0 + 300 sec)

THEN : Open XV 6610
Close XV 6616
IF: TIT6600 > 250oC

THEN: TV 6600 A (Open 100%)
TV 6600 B (Open 100%)
02-60-PU-342 Increase Motor Speed 100%
Open XV 6617
IF: TIT6600 < 200oC

THEN: Close XV 6617
Return TV 6600 A to Set Point
Return TV 6600 B to Set Point
Return 02-60-PU-342 to Set Point
*Note: TV6600A/B will be amended on the PID
5.4.2 DPIC6606 Venturi Damper Positioner
IF: Value (PIT 6604 – PIT 6605) < 3500 Pa-g

THEN: Close DPV 6606 until Value (PIT 6604 – PIT 6605) = 3500 Pa-g
IF: Value (PIT 6604 – PIT 6605) > 3500 Pa-g

THEN: Open DPV 6606 until Value (PIT 6604 – PIT 6605) = 3500 Pa-g
IF: SAL-6603 alarms/fails open DPV6606 to emergency position
10030-1120 Rev F E-6 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5.4.3 TIC6609 Recirculation Tank, Water Temperature Transmitter
IF: TIC 6609 > 40oC,

THEN: Open TV 6609
IF: TIC 6609 < 30oC,
THEN: Close TV 6609
*Note: TIC 6609 shall initiate when T>40°C
5.4.4 TIC6611 GAC Tower Inlet Temperature Transmitter
IF: TIT 6611 > 299oC,

THEN: Open XV 6610
Close XV 6616
Open XV 6617
Open XV 6618
02-60-PU-342 (Full Speed)
IF: TIT 6611 > 200oC,

THEN: Open XV 6610
Close XV 6616
Open XV 6617
Open XV 6618
IF: TIT 6611 > 120oC,

THEN: 02-60-PU-342 (Full Speed)
IF: TIT 6611 < 80oC,

THEN: Close XV 6610
Open XV 6616
Close XV 6617
10030-1120 Rev F E-7 O & M MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Close XV 6618
02-60-PU-342 (Set Point)
02-60-PU-390 (Off)
*Note: TIC 6611 to initiate fan spray nozzle, actuated valve is required. XV-6617 has been allocated
to this duty
5.5 Fail Safe Table
The fail safe status of equipment such as valves shall be shown on the PIDs.
Individual loop fail safe status will be listed in the I/O list.
10030-1120 Rev F E-8 O & M MANUAL

5.7 Cable Schedule
FOWLEREX TECHNOLOGIES PTY LTD Document ID 10030-1120revF
VDDR CODE:
No. of Size
Tag No. Cable Type Length (m) Designation From Designation To
Conductors (mm²)
DPIC6606-C1 3C CU PVC 3 0.25 30 PLC Venturi Damper Closed Position Reed Switch
DPIO6606-C1 3C CU PVC 3 0.25 30 PLC Venturi Damper Open Position Reed Switch
DPV6606-C1 2C+PE 3 1 30 Valve Energise Signal Venturi Damper Solenoid Valve
03ES02-C1 6C+E CU PVC 7 1 30 PLC E Stop PB Plant
FI6607-C1 3C+PE CU PVC 4 1 30 PLC Venturi Scrubber Recirculation Line Flow Switch
LS6608-C1 2C+PE CU PVC 3 1 30 PLC Make Up Tank Low Level Switch
LV6608-C1 2C+PE 3 1 30 Valve Energise Signal Make Up Tank Level Solenoid Valve
05M01-C1 1 Twisted Pair + Sc CU Motor Thermistor Wet Scrubber Exhaust Fan PTC
PVC 2 1.5 30 Connection
05M01-P1 VSD 3C+E+Sc CU PVC 4 35 30 Motor Terminals Wet Scrubber Exhaust Fan Power
06M01-C1 1 Twisted Pair + Sc CU Motor Thermistor
PVC 2 1.5 30 Connection Active Carbon Tower Fan PTC
06M01-P1 VSD 3C+E+Sc CU PVC 4 35 30 Motor Terminals Active Carbon Tower Fan Power
07M01-P1 VSD 3C+E+Sc CU PVC 4 2.5 30 Motor Terminals Venturi Recycle Pump #1 Motor
08M01-P1 VSD 3C+E+Sc CU PVC 4 2.5 30 Motor Terminals Venturi Recycle Pump #2 Motor
PIT6602-I1 2C Twisted Pair + Sc 2 1 30 PLC Gold Room Duct Pressure Transmitter
PIT6604-I1 2C Twisted Pair + Sc 2 1 30 PLC Venturi Scrubber Pressure Transmitter
PIT6605-I1 2C Twisted Pair + Sc 2 1 30 PLC Venturi Separator Pressure Transmitter
PIT6613-I1 2C Twisted Pair + Sc 2 1 30 PLC GAC Extraction Fan Pressure Transmitter
SE6603-C1 3C CU PVC 3 0.25 30 Frequency Transmitter Scrubber Fan Shaft Rotation Prox
SE6614-C1 3C CU PVC 3 0.25 30 Frequency Transmitter Tower Fan Shaft Rotation Prox
07SW01-C1 2C+PE CU PVC 3 1 30 PLC Venturi Recirculation Pump #1 Isolator Feedback
07SW01-P1 VSD 3C+E+Sc CU PVC 4 2.5 30 Local Isolator Venturi Recirculation Pump #1 Motor Isolator
08SW01-C1 2C CU PVC 2 1 30 PLC Venturi Recirculation Pump #2 Isolator Feedback
08SW01-P1 3C+E CU PVC 4 2.5 30 Local Isolator Venturi Recirculation Pump #2 Motor Isolator
TI6600-I1 PREFABRICATED 3 3 RTD Sensor Carbon Regeneration Room Temperature Probe
TI6601-I1 PREFABRICATED 3 3 RTD Sensor Gold Room Temperature Probe
TI6609-I1 PREFABRICATED 3 3 RTD Sensor Recirculation Tank Water Temperature Probe
TI6611-I1 PREFABRICATED 3 3 RTD Sensor GAC Tower Inlet Temperature Probe
TI6612-I1 PREFABRICATED 3 3 RTD Sensor GAC Tower Body Temperature Probe
TIT6600-I1 2C Twisted Pair + Sc 2 1 30 PLC Carbon Regeneration Room Temperature Transmitter

TIT6601-I1 2C Twisted Pair + Sc 2 1 30 PLC Gold Room Temperature Transmitter
TIT6609-I1 2C Twisted Pair + Sc 2 1 30 PLC Recirculation Tank Water Temperature Transmitter

TIT6611-I1 2C Twisted Pair + Sc 2 1 30 PLC GAC Tower Inlet Temperature Transmitter
TIT6612-I1 2C Twisted Pair + Sc 2 1 30 PLC GAC Tower Body Temperature Transmitter
TV6609-C1 2C+PE 3 1 30 Tank Water Purge Solenoid Valve
05VSD01-C1 12+E CU PVC 12 1 10 PLC Wet Scrubber Exhaust Fan VSD
1 Twisted Pair + Sc CU
05VSD01-C2 PVC 2 1 10 PLC Wet Scrubber Extract Fan VSD
05VSD01-P1 VSD 3C+E+Sc CU PVC 4 35 30 Wet Scrubber Exhaust Fan VSD
06VSD01-C1 12C+E CU PVC 12 1 10 PLC Active Carbon Tower Fan VSD
06VSD01-C2 PVC 2 1 10 PLC Active Carbon Tower Fan VSD
Active Carbon Tower Fan
06VSD01-P1 VSD 3C+E CU PVC 4 35 30 VSD Supply Wet Scrubber Exhaust Fan
07VSD01-C1 12C+E CU PVC 12 1 10 PLC Venturi Recycle Pump #1 VSD
07VSD01-C2 PVC 2 1 10 PLC Venturi Recycle Pump #1 VSD
Venturi Recycle Pump #1
07VSD01-P1 VSD 3C+E CU PVC 4 35 5 VSD Supply Venturi Recycle Pump #1
XV6610-C1 2C+PE 3 1 30 Valve Energise Signal Regen Kiln Emergency Bypass Solenoid Valve
XV6615-C1 2C+PE 3 1 30 Valve Energise Signal Kiln 1 Cooling Act Solenoid Valve
XV6616-C1 2C+PE 3 1 30 Valve Energise Signal Kiln 2 Cooling Act Solenoid Valve
Reference: Fowlerex Drawing no. 10030-500 to 10030-545

6. Bill of Materials
FOWLEREX TECHNOLOGIES PTY LTD Document ID 10030-1120 Rev F
VDDR CODE:
Fowlerex Parent Asembly/

Ausenco Document No. Ausenco Tag No. Fowlerex Mark No. Description Mass Qty.
10030-002 / GENERAL ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0173 02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-249 STACK BRACE 23.7 2
V-1929-0070B-0174 02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-250 STACK BRACE CLEAT 4.9 2
V-1929-0070B-0175 02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-280 INSTRUMENTATION FLANGE 1 1
V-1929-0070B-0176 ... M12 FLAT WASHER 0.01 3
... M12 HEX HEAD NUT 0.01 3
... M20 FLAT WASHER 316 STAINLESS STEEL 0.02 68
... M20 HEX HEAD NUT 316 STAINLESS STEEL 0.06 68
M24 x 70 LG HEX HEAD BOLT 316 STAINLESS
... STEEL 0.39 24
ARITA ANSI #150 DN25 FLANGED BALL VALVE
... - 316 SS 5.5 2
... ARITA ANSI #150 DN25 FLANGED BALL VALVE 14 2
... STEEL 0.21 16
... STEEL 0.1 18
... STEEL 0.03 16
10030-008 / PIPING ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0152 02-60-PU-342 ... PUMP - IWAKI MDM65 346.7 1
V-1929-0070B-0153 02-60-PU-390 PUMP - IWAKI MDM25-2 326.3 1
V-1929-0070B-0154 02-60-PU-390 ... - 316 SS 5.5 2

V-1929-0070B-0155 02-60-PU-390 ... - 316 SS - C/W K-TORC C52DA ACTUATOR 14 2
ARITA ANSI #150 DN25 FLANGED CHECK
V-1929-0070B-0156 02-60-PU-390 ... VALVE - 316 SS 5.7 1
ARITA DN15 SCREWED BSP BALL VALVE - 316
V-1929-0070B-0157 02-60-PU-390 ... SS 0.3 5
V-1929-0070B-0158 02-60-PU-390 ... - 316 SS 7.7 2
02-60-PU-390 ... - 316 SS 20.4 1
ARITA ANSI #150 DN65 FLANGED CHECK
02-60-PU-390 ... VALVE - 316 SS 28.2 1
02-60-PU-390 ... - 316 SS 16.5 2
ARITA ANSI #150 DN100 FLANGED BALL
02-60-PU-390 ... VALVE - 316 SS 35.7 1
02-60-PU-390 ... - 316 SS 28.2 1
02-60-PU-390 ... - 316 SS 16.1 1
ARITA DN40 SCREWED BSP BALL VALVE - 316
02-60-PU-390 ... SS 1.4 1
ARITA ANSI #150 DN40 SCREWED BSP BALL
02-60-PU-390 ... VALVE - 316 SS - C/W ACTUATOR 4.6 1
02-60-PU-390 ... DN15 STRAIGHT PIPE 2.5m
02-60-PU-390 ... DN25 STRAIGHT PIPE 15m
02-60-PU-390 ... FLANGE DN25 ANSI DRILLING #150 13
02-60-PU-390 ... GASKET TO SUIT DN25 ANSI FLANGE 13
02-60-PU-390 ... FLANGE ADAPTOR DN25 (ANSI) 13
02-60-PU-390 ... DN50x25 REDUCING TEE 4
02-60-PU-390 ... DN65 TEE 1
02-60-PU-390 ... DN25x15 REDUCER 5
02-60-PU-390 ... DN40x25 REDUCER 1
02-60-PU-390 ... DN50x25 REDUCER 2
02-60-PU-390 ... DN50x40 REDUCER 4
02-60-PU-390 ... DN65x40 REDUCER 3
02-60-PU-390 ... DN80x65 REDUCER 2
02-60-PU-390 ... DN100x65 REDUCER 1
02-60-PU-390 ... DN25 STANDARD 90 BEND 8
02-60-PU-390 ... DN25 UNION 1
02-60-PU-390 ... DN40 UNION 1
02-60-PU-390 ... DN15 ADAPTOR SOCKET 5
02-60-PU-390 ... DN40 ADAPTOR SOCKET 3
02-60-PU-390 ... DN15 S.S BARREL NIPPLE BSP 5
02-60-PU-390 ... DN40 S.S BARREL NIPPLE BSP 3
... M12 x 60 LG HEX HEAD BOLT 0.1 32
... M12 HEX HEAD NUT 0.01 96
... M12 FLAT WASHER 0.01 96
... M16 HEX HEAD NUT 0.03 68
10030-009 / WET SCRUBBER ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0146 02-60-FA-016 MK1-10030-213 EXPANSION JOINT CLAMP 4.4 4
V-1929-0070B-0147 02-60-FA-016 MK1-10030-214 EXPANSION JOINT CLAMP 2.1 4
V-1929-0070B-0148 02-60-FA-016 MK1-10030-215 CARBON TOWER EXPANSION JOINT 4.1 1
02-60-FA-016 MK1-10030-216 DUCT EXPANSION JOINT 1.5 1
... M16 HEX HEAD NUT 0.03 92
... 9.5mm WIDE S.S. BAND-IT BAND TO SUIT 0.2 2
GARLOCK 3535 PTFE JOINT SEALANT OR AS
... EQUIV. ... REQ.
10030-010 / VENTURI & SEPARATOR ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0115 02-60-SB-001 MK1-10030-101 VENTURI BODY 311.6 1
V-1929-0070B-0116 02-60-SB-001 MK1-10030-102 VENTURI ELBOW 255.6 1
02-60-SB-001 MK1-10030-116 VENTURI INSPECTION PORT COVER 4.6 3
02-60-SB-003 MK1-10030-107 SEPARATOR BODY 2265.7 1
02-60-SB-001 MK1-10030-203 VENTURI ACCESS DOOR 26.2 1
02-60-SB-003 MK1-10030-118 SEPARATOR ACCESS DOOR 23.8 1
02-60-SB-003 MK1-10030-117 MIST ELIMINATOR SPRAY 7.6 1
SMC DN80 x 240 Lg LINEAR ACTUATOR C/W

CA2D80-240JN-XAP20180 CYLINDER;
RECEIVER-
XAP4007; AMH350C-04D-T FILTER AND AM-
02-60-SB-001 ... BM103 BRACKET 1
... M20 HEX HEAD NUT 0.06 24
... M16 HEX HEAD NUT 0.03 134
... M16 FLAT WASHER 0.01 138
... SPIRAL NOZZLE B3/8HHSJ/SS12053 0 1
... 65 NB ANSI #150 BLANK FLANGE 1.5 1
65NB ANSI #150 FULL FACE GASKET x 3mm
... THICK 0.1 1
... EQUIV. ... REQ.
10030-011 / VENTURI THROAT ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0117 02-60-SB-001 MK1-10030-103 VENTURI THROAT BODY 35.6 1
02-60-SB-001 MK1-10030-104 VENTURI THROAT END PLATE 12.1 1
02-60-SB-001 MK1-10030-105 VENTURI THROAT GLAND PLATE 0.2 2
02-60-SB-001 MK1-10030-106 VENTURI THROAT BLADE 17.3 1
02-60-SB-001 MK1-10030-113 VENTURI THROAT LEVER ARM 1.3 1
... SKF PLUMMER BLOCK & BEARING SY 30 FM 1.7 2

... M12 SPRING WASHER 0.01 8
PACKING - GARLOCK PACKMASTER 10mm SQ AS
... STYLE 1 OR EQUIVALENT (2 RINGS) - REQ.
GARLOCK 3535 JOINT SEALANT OR AS
... EQUIVALENT - REQ.
... 8 x 7 x 30 LG KEY 0 1
M5 x 15 LG SOCKET SCREW - SET (GRUB) -
... KNURLED CUP POINT 0.002 1
10030-012 / RECIRCULATION TANK ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0130 02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-111 RECIRCULATION TANK 1072.9 1
02-60-TK-110 MK1-10030-112 RECIRCULATION TANK LID 56.4 2
02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-114 RECIRCULATION TANK VENT PLATE 3.6 1
... M12 HEX HEAD NUT 0.01 80
10030-013 / SUPPORT STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0118 02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-137 THROAT ACCESS PLATFORM 189.5 1
V-1929-0070B-0119 02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-138 THROAT ACCESS GRATING 110 1
V-1929-0070B-0120 02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-239 ACCESS PLATFORM SUPPORT 9 3
02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-148 ACCESS PLATFORM SUPPORT 37.1 1
02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-169 THROAT ACCESS PLATFORM 124.1
02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-220 SUPPORT STRUCTURE COLUMN 149.7 1
02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-223 SUPPORT STRUCTURE COLUMN 144 1
02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-224 SUPPORT STRUCTURE BEAM 88.1 1
02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-228 SUPPORT STRUCTURE BEAM 61 1
02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-231 VENTURI ELBOW SUPPORT 72.3 1
02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-232 SUPPORT STRUCTURE BRACE 23.9 4
02-60-TK-109 MK1-10030-235 SUPPORT STRUCTURE BRACE 19 4
GRADE 8.8 M24 x 50 LG HEX HEAD BOLT (GALV.) 208
... M24 HEX HEAD NUT (GALV.) 208
M24 FLAT WASHER (GALV.) 208
10030-014 / CARBON TOWER ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0179 02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-119 CARBON TOWER ACCESS DOOR 29.6 5
V-1929-0070B-0180 02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-270 CARBON TOWER BASE 2761.7 1
V-1929-0070B-0181 02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-271 CARBON TOWER MIDDLE 2556 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-272 CARBON TOWER TOP 2603.9 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-273 CARBON TOWER CORE 1374.1 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-274 CARBON TOWER BEAM 1 33.9 8
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-286 PERFORATED PLATE BED PANEL 50.5 4
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-287 PERFORATED PLATE BED PANEL 44 4
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-289 PERFORATED PLATE BED PANEL 44 4
... M16 x 50 LG HEX HEAD BOLT (S.S.) CLASS 80 0.12 192

... M16 HEX HEAD NUT (S.S.) 0.03 282
... M16 FLAT WASHER (S.S.) 0.01 282
... M16 x 40 LG HEX HEAD BOLT (S.S.) CLASS 80 0.11 90

... HEX HEAD BOLT M24 x 60 LG (S.S.) CLASS 80 0.35 82
... EQUIVALENT - REQ.
... STEEL 0.02 216
... M8 HEX HEAD NUT 316 STAINLESS STEEL 0 216
... M8 FLAT WASHER 316 STAINLESS STEEL 0 216
10030-015 / CARBON TOWER ACCESS PLATFORM
V-1929-0070B-0167 02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-157 CARBON TOWER ACCCESS GRATING 133.2 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-185 CARBON TOWER ACCESS SUPPORT 19.9 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-189 CARBON TOWER ACCESS PLATFORM 186.6 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-190 CARBON TOWER ACCESS HANDRAIL 28.8 1
... M16 HEX HEAD NUT 0.03 10
... MONOWILLS STANCHION TYPE 'S' 5.81 2
… MONOWILLS STANCHION TYPE 'SO 110' 5.61 3
V-1929-0070B-0168 02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-132 CARBON TOWER ACCESS PLATFORM 196.7 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-156 CARBON ACCESS HANDRAIL 28.8 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-187 CARBON TOWER ACCCESS GRATING 131.8 1
... M16 HEX HEAD NUT 0.03 10
… MONOWILLS STANCHION TYPE 'S0 110' 5.61 3
10030-017 / SEPARATOR ACCESS ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0121 02-60-SB-003 MK1-10030-149 SEPARATOR ACCESS PLATFORM 79.3 1
02-60-SB-003 MK1-10030-150 SEPARATOR ACCESS PLATFORM GRATING 41.4 1
02-60-SB-003 MK1-10030-155 PLATFORM HAND RAILING (RUN TO SUIT) 16.8 1
02-60-SB-003 MK1-10030-180 SEPARATOR ACCESS KNEE BRACE 11.7 1
02-60-SB-003 MK1-10030-181 SEPARATOR ACCESS KNEE BRACE 11 1
... M16 HEX HEAD NUT 0.03 11
... M20 x 50 LG HEX HEAD BOLT (GR 8.8) 0.21 4
10030-018 / CARBON TOWER ACCESS ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0169 02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-136 ACCESS PLATFORM KNEE BRACE 19.3 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-144 CARBON TOWER KNEE BRACE 42.9 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-145 CARBON TOWER KNEE BRACE 22.8 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-146 CARBON TOWER ACCESS PLATFORM 232.5 1
CARBON TOWER ACCESS PLATFORM
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-151 GRATING 111.1 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-153 PLATFORM HANDRAILING (RUN TO SUIT) 42.5 1
... M16 HEX HEAD NUT 0.03 10
... MONOWILLS STANCHION TYPE 'S' MULTIBALL 9.76 2

... M20 x 50 LG HEX HEAD BOLT (GR 8.8) 0.21 6
10030-019 SEPARATOR ACCESS LADDER
02-60-SB-003 MK1-10030-182 SEPARATOR ACCESS LADDER 40.3 1
02-60-SB-003 MK1-10030-183 SEPARATOR ACCESS LANDING 7.3 1
V-1929-0070B-0170 02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-140 CARBON TOWER ACCESS PLATFORM 197.5 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-154 CARBON TOWER ACCESS HANDRAIL 28.8 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-188 CARBON TOWER ACCCESS GRATING 131.7 1
... M16 HEX HEAD NUT 0.03 10
… MONOWILLS STANCHION TYPE 'SO 110' 5.61 3
10030-022 / FURNACE LINE DUCTING
V-1929-0070B-0131 02-60-HD-006 … Ø700 DUCT -
02-60-HD-006 … Ø550 DUCT -
02-60-HD-006 … Ø450 DUCT -
02-60-HD-006 … Ø300 DUCT -
700-550 REDUCING BRANCH, 400 BRANCH @
02-60-HD-006 … 30° 1
02-60-HD-006 … 30° 1
02-60-HD-006 … 30° 1
02-60-HD-006 … Ø450 BEND 90°, R = 1.5Ø 1
02-60-HD-006 … Ø300 BEND 92°, R = 1.5Ø 2
02-60-HD-006 … Ø300 BEND 30°, R = 1.5Ø 3
10030-023 / KILN LINE DUCTING
V-1929-0070B-0132 02-60-HD-006 Ø400 STRAIGHT DUCT -
NON REDUCING BRANCH Ø400 WITH Ø400
V-1929-0070B-0133 02-60-HD-006 BRANCH @ 45° 2
V-1929-0070B-0134 02-60-HD-006 Ø400 BEND 90°, R = 1.5 Ø 3
02-60-HD-006 Ø400 BEND 60°, R = 1.5 Ø 2
02-60-HD-006 Ø400 BEND 58°, R = 1.5 Ø 1
02-60-HD-006 Ø400 BEND 45°, R = 1.5 Ø 2
02-60-HD-006 Ø400 STRAIGHT DUCT WITH DROP OUT BOX 1

10030-024 / EWC LINE DUCTING
02-60-HD-006 Ø300 STRAIGHT DUCT -
02-60-HD-006 Ø350 STRAIGHT DUCT -
REDUCING BRANCH, Ø160 TO Ø80 WITH 2 x
6
02-60-HD-006 Ø160 BRANCHES @ 30°
REDUCING BRANCH, Ø200 TO Ø160 WITH
2
02-60-HD-006 Ø160 BRANCH @ 45°
2
02-60-HD-006 Ø160 BRANCH @ 45°
1
02-60-HD-006 Ø160 BRANCH @ 30°
1
02-60-HD-006 Ø250 BRANCH @ 30°
02-60-HD-006 Ø80 BEND, 90°, R = 1.5 Ø 18
02-60-HD-006 Ø80 BEND, 85°, R = 1.5 Ø 12
02-60-HD-006 Ø80 BEND, 60°, R = 1.5 Ø 2
02-60-HD-006 Ø80 BEND, 55°, R = 1.5 Ø 12
02-60-HD-006 Ø160 BEND, 88°, R = 1.5 Ø 1
02-60-HD-006 Ø160 BEND, 87°, R = 1.5 Ø 1
02-60-HD-006 Ø160 BEND, 43°, R = 1.5 Ø 2
02-60-HD-006 Ø250 BEND, 90°, R = 1.5 Ø 1
02-60-HD-006 Ø250 BEND, 60°, R = 1.5 Ø 1
02-60-HD-006 Ø350 BEND, 30°, R = 1.5 Ø 1
02-60-HD-006 Ø80 KNIFE GATE 2
02-60-HD-006 Ø160 KNIFE GATE 7
NON REDUCING BRANCH Ø160 WITH Ø80
2
02-60-HD-006 BRANCH @ 30°
02-60-HD-006 Ø80 SUNFLEX HOSING -
02-60-HD-006 Ø80 HOSE CLAMP 38
02-60-HD-006 Ø160 HOSE CLAMP 2
02-60-HD-006 Ø160 BEND, 42°, R = 1.5n 2
02-60-HD-006 Ø160 BASE LINE PU H FLEXIBLE DUCT -
10030-025 / EWC AND ELUATE DUCTING
V-1929-0070B-0139 02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-158 ARTICULATED ARM BRACKET 27.7 1
V-1929-0070B-0140 02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-242 DUCT SUPPORT CLAMP 0.5 2
V-1929-0070B-0141 02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-245 DUCT SUPPORT POST 37.8 1
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-252 MAIN DUCT SUPPORT 30.9 1
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-257 EWC DUCT SUPPORT CLAMP 0.4 1
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-260 DIAM 160 DUCT CLAMP 0.1 4
02-60-HD-006 ... LIEBERMAN SERIES 535 EXTRACTION ARM 23.4 1
... M8 THREADED ROD - LENGTH TO SUIT 0.3 12
... M8 FLAT WASHER 0 64
... M8 HEX HEAD NUT 0 64
... M8 HEX HEAD LOCKNUT 0.004 24
... M10 HEX HEAD NUT 0.01 72
... M10 FLAT WASHER 0.004 72
02-60-HD-006 ... Ø80 HOSE CLAMP - 40
02-60-HD-006 ... Ø160 HOSE CLAMP - 2
10030-026 / FURNACE DUCT ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0142 02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-243 DUCT SUPPORT CLAMP 0.4 2
V-1929-0070B-0143 02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-246 DUCT SUPPORT POST 36.2 2
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-251 MAIN DUCT SUPPORT 30.3 1
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-253 MAIN DUCT SUPPORT CLAMP 0.6 1
10030-027 KILN LINE DUCT ASSEMBLY
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-241 KILN LINE BRACE CLAMP 0.5 5
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-247 KILN LINE BRACE 48 1
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-248 KILN LINE BRACE 27.5 1
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-255 KILN LINE SUPPORT 6.4 1
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-256 KILN LINE SUPPORT 22 1
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-258 KILN LINE SUPPORT 18.7 1
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-280 INSTRUMENTATION FLANGE 1 1
... M12 HEX HEAD NUT 0.01 10
... M10 HEX HEAD NUT 0.01 158
... M10 HEX HEAD (THIN) 0.01 30
... M10 FLAT WASHER 0.004 158
... M20 HEX HEAD NUT 0.06 12
... M10 x 1500mm THREADED ROD 0.9 15
... 0.03 16
STEEL
... 400mm DAMPER VALVE C3T2 189.2 2
10030-030 / CONDENSER POT ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0141 02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-161 CONDENSER POT 139.1 1
02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-162 CONDENSER POT LID 10.4 1
02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-163 CONDENSER POT HANGING ROD 1.3 4
02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-168 CONDENSER POT SPRAY PIPE 1.4 1
02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-191 CONDENSER POT INLET 88.5 1
... SPIRAL NOZZLE B3/8HHSJ/SS12053 0 1
... M16 HEX HEAD NUT 0.03 20
... M12 HEX HEAD NUT 0.01 29
... DN 65 HEXAGONAL PIPE PLUG (BSP) 316 S.S. 1.16 1
... DN 15 x 10 REDUCING BUSH (BSP) 0.01 1

... GARLOCK 3535 JOINT SEALANT OR EQUIV. - AS
10030-035 / FD FAN AND DUCT ASSEMBLY REQ
V-1929-0070B-0122 02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-160 FAN INLET TRANSITION 178.5 1
02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-205 INLET DUCT 219.4 1
02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-206 INLET DUCT 153 1
02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-207 INLET DUCT 425.8 1
02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-208 INLET DUCT 90.3 1
02-60-FA-002 ... FD FAN FC1200-RD0 AND INLET BOX 2200 1
... M10 HEX HEAD NUT 0.01 24
... M10 FLAT WASHER 0.004 24
... M12 HEX HEAD NUT 0.01 20
... M16 HEX HEAD NUT 0.03 72
... ...
EQUIV. REQ.
... 25 NB BARRELL NIPPLE SS 0.17 1
ARITA DN25 SCREWED BSB BALL VALVE -
... 0.8 1
316SS
10030-036 / WET SCRUBBER ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0123 02-60-FA-016 MK1-10030-115 CARBON TOWER INLET DUCT 189.3 1
02-60-SB-001 MK1-10030-139 THROAT ACCESS LADDER 147.2 1
02-60-SB-001 MK1-10030-166 VENTURI ACCESS HANDRAIL 26.3 1
02-60-SB-001 MK1-10030-178 SEPARATOR OUTLET PIPE 9.2 1
02-60-SB-003 MK1-10030-184 THROAT ACCESS LANDING 7.8 1
02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-279 INSTRUMENTATION FLANGE 1 1
... M20 HEX HEAD NUT 0.06 31
... M16 HEX HEAD NUT 0.03 61
... ...
EQUIV. REQ.
ARITA DN25 SCREWED BSB BALL VALVE -
... 0.8 2
316SS
... 25 NB BARRELL NIPPLE SS 0.17 2
… STANCHION TYPE 'S' 5.92 5
10030-037 / CARBON TOWER & PLATFORM
V-1929-0070B-0171 02-60-FA-016 MK1-10030-130 CARBON TOWER ACCESS LADDER 89.2 1
02-60-FA-016 MK1-10030-131 CARBON TOWER ACCESS LADDER 88.2 2
02-60-FA-016 MK2-10030-131 CARBON TOWER ACCESS LADDER 88.2 1
02-60-FA-016 MK1-10030-209 CARBON TOWER OUTLET DUCT 96.1 1
02-60-FA-016 MK1-10030-210 CARBON TOWER INLET DUCT 165.9 1
02-60-FA-016 MK1-10030-211 CARBON TOWER OUTLET DUCT SUPPORT 13.8 1
02-60-FA-016 MK1-10030-244 CARBON TOWER OUTLET DUCT CLAMP 2.5 1
... M16 HEX HEAD NUT 0.03 88
... M12 HEX HEAD NUT 0.01 40
... -
EQUIVALENT REQ.
... DN 25 BARRELL NIPPLE SS - BSP 0.17 1
ARITA DN25 SCREWED BSP BALL VALVE -
... 0.8 1
316SS
10030-038 / ID FAN AND STACK
V-1929-0070B-0124 02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-199 STACK TOP SECTION 1180.1 1
02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-200 STACK 1626.1 1
02-60-FA-002 MK1-10030-202 CARBON TOWER FAN INLET DUCT 18 1
02-60-FA-002 MK1-10030-216 DUCT EXPANSION JOINT 1.5 1
02-60-SK-005 MK1-10030-198 STACK INSPECTION PORT COVER 3 2
02-60-FA-002 ... ID FAN FC1200-RD45 2100 1
... M12 HEX HEAD NUT 0.01 24
… M20 x 50 LG HEX HEAD BOLT (CLASS 80) 0.21 32
... M20 HEX HEAD NUT 0.06 32
... M16 HEX HEAD NUT 0.03 16
... 9.5mm WIDE S.S. BAND-IT BAND TO SUIT 0.2 2
... ...
EQUIV. REQ.
10030-050 / FURNACE HOOD ASSEMBLY
V-1929-0070B-0145 02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-170 FURNACE HOOD SUPPORT 24.8 1
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-171 FURNACE HOOD 34.9 1
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-172 FURNACE HOOD SUPPORT 39.6 1
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-173 FURNACE HOOD SUPPORT BUSH 0.9 1
02-60-HD-006 MK1-10030-174 FURNACE HOOD SUPPORT BUSH 3.1 1
... M12 HEX HEAD NUT 0.01 12
SUPPORT FRAME
LIFTING AND TRANSPORT SUPPORT FRAME
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-281 1
02-60-TW-001 MK1-10030-282 CARBON TOWER ROOF BRACES 4
INSTRUMENTATION
TV-6600A (V004) CARBON REGENERATION KILN 1 COOLING 1
CARBON REGENERATION KILN 2 COOLING
TV-6600B (V006) LINE ACT. VALVE 1
CARBON REGENERATION KILN
TI-6600 TEMPERATURE INDICATOR 1
CARBON REGENERATION KILN
02-60-TW-001 TIC-6600 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 1
TI-6601 GOLD ROOM TEMPERATURE INDICATOR 1
GOLD ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
02-60-FA-016 TIT-6601 1
GOLD ROOM DUCT PRESSURE INDICATOR
PI-6602 1
GOLD ROOM DUCT PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
02-60-FA-016 PIT-6602 1
EXTRACTION FAN SHAFT ROTATION SENSOR
02-60-FA-016 SE-6603 1
EXTRACTION FAN SHAFT NIL SPEED SWITCH
SAL-6603 1
VENTURI SCRUBBER PRESSURE INDICATOR
02-60-SB-001 PIT-6604 1
VENTURI SCRUBBER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PI-6604 1
VENTURI SEPARATOR PRESSURE INDICATOR
02-60-SB-001 PIT-6605 1
VENTURI SEPARATOR PRESSURE
PI-6605 TRANSMITTER 1
DPV-6606 (V010) VENTURI DAMPER PNEUMATIC VALVE 1
DPIC-6606 VENTURI DAMPER POSITIONER 1
VENTURI SCRUBBER RECIRCULATION LINE
02-60-PU-342 FI-6607 FLOW INDICATION 1
RECIRCULATION TANK, MAKE UP LINE, LEVEL
LS-6608 SWITCH 1
XV-6608 (V022) RECIRCULATION TANK FILL 1
RECIRCULATION TANK, WATER
TI-6609 TEMPERATURE INDICATOR 1
RECIRCULATION TANK, WATER
02-60-TK-109 TIC-6609 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 1
XV-6609 (V024) RECIRCULATION TANK PURGE 1
CARBON REGENERATION KILN EMERGENCY
XV-6610 (V001) BYPASS VALVE A 1
GAC TOWER INLET TEMPERATURE
02-60-FA-016 TI-6611 INDICATOR 1
GAC TOWER INLET TEMPERATURE
TIC-6611 TRANSMITTER 1
GAC TOWER BODY TEMPERATURE
02-60-FA-016 TI-6612 INDICATOR 1
GAC EXTRACTION FAN PRESSURE INDICATOR
PI-6613 1
02-60-FA-002 PIT-6613 GAC EXTRACTION FAN PRESSURE 1
TRANSMITTER
GAC EXTRACTION FAN SHAFT ROTATION
02-60-FA-002 SE-6614 SENSOR 1
GAC EXTRACTION FAN SHAFT NIL SPEED
SAL-6614 SWITCH 1
CARBON REGENERATION KILN EMERGENCY
XV-6616 (V002) BYPASS VALVE B 1
XV-6617 (V016) FAN (02-60-FA-016) INLET SPRAY 1
XV-6618 (V014) MIST ELIMINATOR CLEAN DOWN 1
ELECTROWINNING CELL FUME HOOD
02-60-HD-001 Electrowinning Cell Fume Hood No. 1 1
OTHERS
CSP-0070B-0001 COUPLING INSERT 2
CSP-0070B-0002 BEARING SET NDE 2
CSP-0070B-0003 SHAFT SEAL 2
CSP-0070B-0004 BEARING HOUSING 2
CSP-0070B-0002 BEARING SET DE 2
LOCATING RINGS 2
CSP-0070B-MDM0375 BEARING 1
CSP-0070B-MDM0377 MOUTH RING 1
CSP-0070B-MDM0950 BEARING 1
CSP-0070B-MDM0951 MOUTH RING 1
02-60-AN-057 Gold Room Analyser - Portable 1
10030-1120 Rev F
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DRAWINGS SECTION G
FX Identification Ausenco Identification Item Description Detail
10030 - 005 V‐1929‐0070B‐0006 5.09 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER P&ID
10030 - 001 V‐1929‐0070B‐0010 5.01 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
10030 - 005 V‐1929‐0070B‐0013 5.09 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER P&ID
10030 - 003 V‐1929‐0070B‐0041 5.03 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER FOUNDATION LOADING
10030 - 010 V‐1929‐0070B‐0115 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER VENTURI SEPARATOR ASSEMBLY
10030 - 010 V‐1929‐0070B‐0116 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER VENTURI SEPARATOR ASSEMBLY
10030 - 011 V‐1929‐0070B‐0117 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER VENTURI THROAT ASSEMBLY
SUPPORT STRUCTURE AND RECIRC TANK
10030 - 013 V‐1929‐0070B‐0118 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER ASSEMBLY
10030 - 017 V‐1929‐0070B‐0121 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER SEPARATOR ACCESS ASSEMBLY
10030 - 035 V‐1929‐0070B‐0122 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER FD FAN AND DUCTING
10030 - 036 V‐1929‐0070B‐0123 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER WET SCRUBBER AND RECIRC TANK
10030 - 038 V‐1929‐0070B‐0124 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER ID FAN AND STACK
10030 - 012 V‐1929‐0070B‐0130 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER RECIRCULATION TANK ASSEMBLY
10030 - 022 V‐1929‐0070B‐0131 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER FURNACE LINE DUCTING
10030 - 023 V‐1929‐0070B‐0132 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER KILN LINE DUCTING
10030-1120 Rev F
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DRAWINGS SECTION G
10030 - 024 V‐1929‐0070B‐0135 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER EWC LINE DUCTING
10030 - 025 V‐1929‐0070B‐0139 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER EWC AND ELUATE DUCTING
10030 - 026 V‐1929‐0070B‐0142 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER FURNACE DUCT
10030 - 026 V‐1929‐0070B‐0143 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER FURNACE DUCT
10030 - 030 V‐1929‐0070B‐0144 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER CONDENSOR POT
10030 - 050 V‐1929‐0070B‐0145 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER FURNACE HOOD
10030 - 009 V‐1929‐0070B‐0146 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER WET SCRUBBER ASSEMBLY
10030 - 055 V‐1929‐0070B‐0151 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER EW CELL HOODS
10030 - 008 V‐1929‐0070B‐0152 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER WET SCRUBBER PIPING ASSY
10030-1120 Rev F
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DRAWINGS SECTION G
10030 - 070 V‐1929‐0070B‐0163 7.07 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENT LAYOUT
10030 - 015 V‐1929‐0070B‐0167 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER CARBON TOWER ACCESS PLATFORM ASSY
10030 - 018 V‐1929‐0070B‐0169 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER CARBON TOWER ACCESS ASSEMBLY
10030 - 002 V‐1929‐0070B‐0173 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER GENERAL ASSEMBLY
10030 - 014 V‐1929‐0070B‐0179 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER CARBON TOWER ASSEMBLY
10030 - 014 V-1929-0070B-0180 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER CARBON TOWER ASSEMBLY
10030 - 014 V-1929-0070B-0181 5.05 TYPE V SIZE 30/20 WITH CARBON TOWER CARBON TOWER ASSEMBLY
Appendix
START UP & SHUT DOWN

SEQUENCE
Appendix Sequence Descriptions
Normal Start
Action Idle
To Condition
Step
10 Operator initiates Pollution Plant Operative
Transitions
10 Plant has been Interlocked
0
Alarm Transition
Action Timeout 0 seconds None None
Priority to step
Action 02-60-PU-342 Venturi Recirculation Pump 1
To Condition
Energise Pump
Step
20 Pump Run Conformation Received
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
10
Alarm Transition
Action Timeout seconds None 0
Priority to step
Action 02-60-FA-002 GAC Tower Extraction Fan
To Condition
Energise Fan
Step
30 Fan Run Conformation Received
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
PIT6613 =< Set point -4.8 kpa
20
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
Action 02-60-FA-016 Venturi Extraction Fan
To Condition
Step Energise Fan
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
30
Alarm Transition
Action Timeout 0 seconds None 0
Priority to step
Action V-014 (XV-6618) Mist Eliminator Spray
To Condition
Step
50 Open XV-6618
Transitions
40
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Energise Pump
Step
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
T = 0 + 12 hours
50
300 Alarm Transition
Action Timeout None 0
seconds Priority to step
Action End of Start Up Sequence
To Condition
Step
None
Transitions
60
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
Resume Start
Action Idle
To Condition
Step
Transitions
0
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Energise Pump
Step
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
10
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Energise Fan
Step
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
20
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Step Energise Fan
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
30
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Step
50 Open XV-6618
Transitions
40
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Energise Pump
Step
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
T = 0 + 12 hours
50
To Condition
Step
None
Transitions
60
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
Action Plant Fully Operational

To Condition
Step
510 Operator initiates Pollution Plant Shut Down
Transitions
500
Alarm Transition
Priority to step

To Condition
Step De-Energise Fan
520
Transitions
PIT6602>= -0.5 kpa
510
Alarm Transition
Priority to step

To Condition
530
Transitions
PIT6603 >= -0.5 kPa
520
Alarm Transition
Priority to step

To Condition
Step De-Energise Pump
540
Transitions
530
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
Action System Idle

To Condition
Step
None System Shutdown
Transitions
540
Alarm Transition
Action Timeout seconds None None
Priority to step
Appendix
EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET

Appendix
FAN MANUAL (TAYMAC)

INCLUDING MOTOR MANUAL
(TECO)
10-702 CONTENTS.DOCX
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE NUMBER TAYLORS CENTRIFUGAL FANS

1-2 Data sheets
3-4 Fan curve and noise data
5-11 Operation and maintenance manual
12-17 HRC coupling installation
18-60 TECO Motor manual
61 General trouble shooting guide
62-65 GA and Connections drawings
1
10-702 MFANDAT-RD0
FAN DATA SHEET
MANUFACTURER: TAYLORS MANUFACTURING

BRAND: TAYLORS
Model No: FC1200-RD0
Serial No: 10-702 FC1200 RD0
PERFORMANCE DATA
DESIGN COMMISSIONING
Airflow 7.5 m3/s m3/s
Static pressure 5500 Pa kPa
Temperature 80°C °C
Motor current @1585rpm 134 A A
Fan noise O.K OK
Bearing temperature O.K OK
ELECTRIC MOTOR DATA

Manufacturer TECO Speed 1480 rpm
Power 75 kW Frame 250MC
Full Load Current 125A Protection IP55
Voltage 415 V Serial Number H710A404001
Frequency 50 Hz
BEARING DATA
NON DRIVE DRIVE
Housing SNV120 SNV120
Bearing 22213ESK 1213ESK
Seals DH513 DH513
Taperlock H313 H213
Locating rings 2 x FRM120/10 Non locating
FAN DRIVE DATA

MOTOR FAN
Coupling HRC 230 F HRC 230 H
Taperlock 3020 Ø70 3020 Ø60
Coupling insert HRC 230 NA (standard)
1
10-702 MFANDAT-RD45.DOCX
FAN DATA SHEET
MANUFACTURER: TAYLORS MANUFACTURING

BRAND: TAYLORS
Model No: FC1200-RD45
Serial No: 10-702 FC1200 RD45
PERFORMANCE DATA
DESIGN COMMISSIONING
Airflow 7.5 m3/s m3/s
Static pressure 5500 Pa kPa
Temperature 80°C °C
Motor current @1585rpm 134 A A
Fan noise O.K OK
Bearing temperature O.K OK
ELECTRIC MOTOR DATA

Manufacturer TECO Speed 1480 rpm
Power 75 kW Frame 250MC
Full Load Current 125A Protection IP55
Voltage 415 V Serial Number H710A404010
Frequency 50 Hz
BEARING DATA
NON DRIVE DRIVE
Housing SNV120 SNV120
Bearing 22213ESK 1213ESK
Seals DH513 DH513
Taperlock H313 H213
Locating rings 2 x FRM120/10 Non locating
FAN DRIVE DATA

MOTOR FAN
Coupling HRC 230 F HRC 230 H
Taperlock 3020 Ø70 3020 Ø60
Coupling insert HRC 230 NA (standard)
3
4
10-702 FAN MANUAL.DOC
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
CENTRIFUGAL FANS
ISSUE DATE 2012
1
5
WARNINGS
1. SAFETY
Prior to carrying out any installation, service or maintenance work on the centrifugal
fan ensure that it is switched off and electrically isolated.
Do not weld or gas cut the fan unless it has been cleaned beforehand of any deposits
of combustible dust or fume.
Personnel carrying out service or maintenance work should have suitable protective
clothing and equipment. This is particularly the case in the event of toxic dust or fume
being present.
2. INTRODUCTION
This manual includes installation, operation, servicing and maintenance instructions
for the complete range of Taylors centrifugal fans.
Centrifugal fans are selected on the basis of:

(i) airflow quantity, temperature and humidity.
(ii) airflow pressure rise requirement.
(iii) dust (or product) quantity, type and characteristics.
(iv) ambient conditions.
If the fan is to be used in changed circumstances, consult Taylors Manufacturing on

its suitability.
2
6
3. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
3.1. Receiving
− Check for damage caused in transit.
3.2. Handling
− Handle carefully to prevent damage. Always use lifting points where
provided. Never sling under the shaft.
3.3. Foundations
− Ensure that the fan or its support structure is firmly fixed to the foundations.
Reinforced concrete foundations with a minimum weight two times the dead
weight of the fan and motor (combined) are recommended.
3.4. Packing and Fixing

− The fan should be mounted level (unless specifically ordered otherwise).
Steel packers should be used to ensure that the fan pedestal and/or casing are
not twisted when the holding down bolts are tightened.
3.5. Drive
− If the drive is connected to the fan. The motor shaft should be aligned
parallel to the fan shaft and at the correct centre distance.
− The drive must be guarded (shaft and coupling) in accordance with

Department of Labour requirements.
3.6. Electrical
− Ensure electrical supply to the motor complies with relevant NZ Standards.
3.7. Ductwork
− Ductwork connections to the fan should only be made after the holding
down bolts have been tightened. When using the fan casing and connections
for ductwork support, take care to ensure that the load is not such as to
distort the casing.
3
7
4. START UP
1. Check that the fan and ductwork are clear of any obstructions.
2. Check the coupling is secure. Check that safety guards are correctly refitted.
3. Check that all ductwork connections are secure and that all dampers and the
like are set appropriately.
4. Check the fan rotation by flicking the starter on and off. If necessary change
power supply phases to obtain correct rotation.
5. Start the motor and run the fan up to speed.
6. Check that the motor current does not exceed the motor rating.
7. Check the bearing temperatures and check the level of fan vibration as felt at
the bearings.
8. After the first 2 hours of running check the tension and alignment of the
coupling.
4
8
5. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
5.1. Fan
In normal operating conditions the fan rotor and casing do not require any
maintenance.
5.2. Fan Bearings

It is our usual practice to use plummer blocks with grease nipples. See Lubrication
Schedule for relubrication quantities and times. These are based on operating hours.
To relubricate via grease nipple connect to grease gun and add required quantity. To
fully replace grease, remove the housing cap and the existing grease. Pack 1/3 of the
free space in the bearing with new grease. Pack ½ of the free space in the housing
with new grease. See Lubrication Schedule for correct amount of grease. Replace the
housing cap ensuring that it is on the correct housing and that it is the correct way
round.
5.3. Drives
Check the coupling alignment at frequent intervals and in accordance with the
attached instructions.
5.4. Electric Motor

Regularly inspect the cooling fan and air passages and remove any obstructions.
Each year check the phase currents for overload and/or excessive variation between
phases. Also check winding resistance. Have the motor overhauled if necessary.
5.5. Electric Motor Bearings

Regularly check motor bearings for excessive heat and/or noise. Relubricate in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. See Lubrication Schedule.
5
9
6. FAN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
BEARING LUBRICATION
Relubrication interval-see Lubrication Schedule.
Relubrication quantity- see Lubrication Schedule.
Add grease at nipple, use Arcanol MULTITOP, Shell Alvania EP Grease 2
or SKF LGMT2
MONTHLY
Check the fan and motor bearings for excessive noise and/or heat.
Check the level of fan vibration.
THREE MONTHLY
Check the coupling for alignment.
Inspect the motor cooling fan and air passages for obstructions and remove
any dust build up
AS REQUIRED
Add grease to motor bearing grease nipples.
Replenish grease in bearing housing through grease nipple or...
Grease fan plummer block bearings.
− Bearings See Lubrication Schedule
− Grease type See Lubrication Schedule
− Grease quantity See Lubrication Schedule
Application
(i) Mark and remove housing caps
(ii)Scoop out old grease
(iii)½ repack housing with new grease, 1/3 repack bearing.
(iv)Replace housing caps as marked
YEARLY
Open the fan hatch and carry out a visual inspection:
− Check for dust build up on rotor.
− Check the rotor for signs of wear or of cracking.
Check fan and motor holding down bolts for tightness.
Check motor phase currents for overload or for excessive variation between
phases.
Check motor windings resistance.
6
10
LUBRICATION SCHEDULE
TAYLORS FC1200 FAN BEARINGS NON DRIVE END

DESCRIPTION: LUBRICANT: QUANTITY: MAINTENANCE:
− Bearing: FAG 22213ESK − Arcanol MULTITOP or Shell Alvania EP − Repack 1/3 full 1,500hrs
Grease 2 or SKF LGMT2 or similar
− Housing: FAG SNV120 − Arcanol MULTITOP or Shell Alvania EP − 11 g for each housing 750hrs
plummer blocks Grease 2 or SKF LGMT2 or similar − ½ fill for each housing 1500hrs
(iii)½ repack with new grease
TAYLORS FC1200 FAN BEARINGS DRIVE END
− Bearing DE: FAG 1213K − Arcanol MULTITOP or Shell Alvania EP − Repack 1/3 full 10,000hrs
Grease 2 or SKF LGMT2 or similar
− Housing: FAG SNV120 − Arcanol MULTITOP or Shell Alvania EP − 11 g for each housing 5,000hrs
plummer blocks Grease 2 or SKF LGMT2 or similar − ½ fill for each housing 10,000hrs
(iii)½ repack with new grease
FAN MOTOR: TECO 75KW
− Drive Bearing: 6313 − Multi-temp SRC or Li-Base Grease − 80 g 3,000 hr
6313
− Non Drive Bearing: 6213 − Multi-temp SRC or Li-Base Grease − 50 g − Add grease at grease nipple
7
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Teco Instruction Manual
415 Volt Squirrel Cage Induction Motors
Teco Australia Pty Ltd
18
Teco Installation and Maintenance Manual
TEFC Squirrel Cage Induction Motors
Table of Content
Table of Content....................................................................................................................2
Chapter 1: MOTOR DESCRIPTION.............................................................................4
Chapter 2: TECHNICAL DATA.....................................................................................5
Chapter 3: INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING .............................................6

3.1. INSPECTION UPON RECEIPT..................................................................6
3.2. STORAGE....................................................................................................6
3.3 TRANSPORTATION...................................................................................9
3.4. INSTALLATION. ......................................................................................10
3.5. MOUNTING...............................................................................................10
3.6 COUPLING & ALIGNMENT. ..................................................................10
3.7 INSTALLATION FOR BELT DRIVE ......................................................13
3.8 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS...............................................................13
3.9 AUXILIARY DEVICES ............................................................................14
Chapter 4: OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS................................................................17

4.1. EXAMINATION BEFORE START..........................................................17
4.2. STARTING OPERATION.........................................................................19
4.3 CAUTION POINTS TO NOTE: ................................................................21
Chapter 5: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE.........................................................................22

5.1. IMPORTANCE OF DAILY INSPECTION. .............................................22
5.2. POINTS TO NOTE WHEN STARTING...................................................22
5.3 TEMPERATURE RISE..............................................................................22
5.4 VIBRATION. .............................................................................................23
5.5 NOISE.........................................................................................................24
5.6. ODOUR. .....................................................................................................25
5.7. MEASUREMENT OF THREE PHASE CURRENT.................................25
5.8. MOTOR APPEARANCE...........................................................................26
Teco Electric and Machinery Company 2

Manual Number: 19052003
19
Chapter 6: PERIODIC MAINTENANCE....................................................................27

6.1 REGULAR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE.......................................27
6.2. CLEANING OF COILS, DRYING & VARNISHING TREATMENT. ...30
6.3. VARNISH...................................................................................................32
6.4. KEY POINTS FOR MAINTENANCE & INITIAL OPERATION
INSPECTION AFTER LONG STORAGE................................................32
6.5. RECORDS OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE. ...........................33
6.6. POINTS TO NOTE ON DISASSEMBLY................................................34
Chapter 7 BEARINGS ....................................................................................................35

7.1. MAINTENANCE OF ROLLING BEARING............................................35
7.2. NOISE OF BEARING................................................................................38
7.3. VIBRATION. .............................................................................................39
7.4. REGULAR INSPECTION. ........................................................................39
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting. ............................................................................................40

8.1 FAULT FINDING & RECOGNITION......................................................40

20
Chapter 1: MOTOR DESCRIPTION

This manual applies to Teco model series types as follows:
AEEB, AEVB, AEHB, AEUB, AEHD, AEJE, AEJU and AEJH.
The motors are of Cast Iron Construction, Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled, Squirrel Cage
Induction type designed for operation on a 415Volt/3Ph/50Hz supply system equipped with
grease lubricated anti friction type bearings.
SAFETY WARNING
The following instruction address the more common situations encountered in motor
installation, operation and maintenance. For the TECO warranty to remain valid, the
motor must be installed and operated in strict accordance with the outline drawing,
motor nameplate and these instructions and must not be altered or modified in any
unauthorized manner.
During the installation & operation of motors in heavy industrial applications there is a
danger of live electrical parts and rotating parts. Therefore to prevent injury and/or
damage the basic planning work for transport, assembly, installation & operation needs
to be carried out by authorized and competent personnel. Points in this manual that are
boxed and headed “DANGER”, “CAUTION” or “NOTE"(see below) should be observed
as they indicate possible danger to personnel and/or the potential of equipment damage.
DANGER — This prompt is used when there is an

immediate hazard that WILL result in severe personal
injury or death if correct procedures are not followed.
CAUTION — This prompt is used to warn against

potentially unsafe practices that COULD result in personal
injury and/or property damage if correct procedures are
not followed.
This prompt is used when an operation, condition, or

information is of sufficient importance to warrant
highlighting

21
Chapter 2: TECHNICAL DATA

This manual covers a power outputs ranging through to 600 kw with varying frame sizes
and speeds etc.
For motor technical data refer to appropriate motor catalogue or data sheet.

22
Chapter 3: INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
3.1. INSPECTION UPON RECEIPT.

Check the following points upon receipt:
a. Is the nameplate rating identical to your order?
b. Do dimensions and colour comply with your specification?
c. Are the nameplate ratings for the heater, temperature detector etc. identical with
what you ordered?
d. Is there any damage due to transportation?
e. Are all accessories in good order?
f. If there are any specific requirements, please check if they conform with your
specification.
3.2. STORAGE
When storing motor, the following procedures should be undertaken.
3.2.1. Place.
a. It should be dry, well-ventilated and not subject to direct sunlight, dust or corrosive
gas.
b. It should not be located close to a boiler or freezer.
c. It should be entirely free from vibration and have easy access.
d. Motor should be stored on pallets to prevent moisture ingress.
3.2.2 During storage, the insulation resistance should be kept above the specified values
as follows:-
a. Stator: Above 50MΩ measured with 1000VDC megger.
b. If the motor has absorbed moisture as evidenced by low insulation resistance, it
must be dried with external heat until it is thoroughly dry and the value of insulation
resistance exceeds the minimum requirements.
c. Measurement of insulation resistance should be performed once every month.
d. Anti-condensation heaters should always be connected where fitted.

23
3.2.3 Insulation resistance test should be performed before making high voltage test.
a. Use 500VDC megger to measure insulation resistance.
i. Stator: Over 50MΩ between windings.
ii. Stator: Over 50MΩ between windings and earth.
b. High Voltage Test
i. This test can be undertaken only after the values of insulation resistance in item
3.2.3 (a) are assured.
ii. The value of testing voltage is (1000 + 2E) X 0.8 where E: rated voltage.
3.2.4 Care should be taken to keep parts such as the fitting surface, key, shaft extension
and axial centre hole free of any foreign matter. Grease should also be generously
applied to stop rust.
3.2.5 The shaft should also be rotated by hand a few revolutions once per month.
3.2.6 If practical, a test run should be performed once every three months.
3.2.7 Clean the motor thoroughly, and replenish grease before the machine is put back to
operation.
3.2.8 The ventilation system should be covered to avoid the entry of foreign matter or
insects. It should be thoroughly cleaned before use.
3.2.9 Make sure the hoisting hook is correctly connected to eye bolts or lugs of motors
before hoisting.
Parts such as fan cowl, terminal boxes, etc. which have their
own lifting facilities can only carry their own weight.
They should not be used for lifting the entire motor.

24
An accident could occur if the hoisting hook or eye bolts of the

motor is overloaded.
They are suitable for the motor weights only.
Do not lift motor and load combined with motor lifting lug.
3.2.10 Points to note when hoisting:-

a. Do not twist steel wires.
b. Make sure eye bolts have been firmly screwed in.
c. Keep the sling vertical when moving/lifting motor.
Fig. 1
Please keep the sling vertical when lifting / moving the motor.
Fig. 2
Motor is fitted with lifting points (arrowed). These points are

designed to lift motor weight only.
Do not use other hooks or handles to lift motor.

25
3.3 TRANSPORTATION
To keep the rotating parts of motor from moving, thus causing damage during
Transportation, they should be held securely as follows:
3.3.1 Motors fitted with a retaining plate/bracket to secure the shaft must have it fitted
during transportation.
3.3.2 After receiving motor, remove all securing studs, nuts, etc. before putting motor
into operation. (Fig.3)
Fig 3
If fitted as standard motor must not be transported without shaft lock.

Motor should be uncoupled from load for transportation and the shaft
locked securely.
Damage to bearings caused during transportation is not covered
under warranty.

26
3.4. INSTALLATION.
3.4.1. Site conditions for motor installation:

Standard site conditions for installation of motors are as follows:
a. Ambient temperature: -100C~450C.
b. Humidity: Relative humidity below 90% RH for totally enclosed type.
c. Elevation: Below 1000 metres.
d. Should the installation be in an industrial zone, it should be free of explosive gases
and liquids.
e. Foundation should be strong so as not to induce vibration.
3.4.2. Ventilation and Space.

a. Installation should be well ventilated.
b. The area should be large enough to facilitate heat dissipation and maintenance.
3.4.3. Foundation.
Use rigid and solid sole plate or common bed as the foundation.
3.5. MOUNTING.
3.5.1 An adequate motor support (which is the responsibility of others) is very important.
It must have sufficient rigidity to maintain alignment between the motor and its
driven load. Inadequate or improperly designed motor supporting structures can
lead to serious vibration and alignment problems.
3.6 COUPLING & ALIGNMENT.
2 pole speed motors must not be coupled to the driven

equipment by means other than direct connection.
Please refer to TECO if belt connection is to be used.

27
3.6.1. Installation.
Field application of a coupling to the motor shaft should follow the procedures
recommended by the coupling manufacturer. Under no circumstances may the
motor shaft be modified as to configuration or diameter without the approval of
Teco Australia. The motor shaft extension must not be subjected to either extreme
heat or cold during coupling installation. If it is necessary to exert axial force on the
shaft, either continuously or intermittently, during coupling application, it must be
properly restrained axially to prevent bearing damage.
3.6.2. Alignment.
Motors must always be accurately aligned, and this applies especially where
they are direct coupled.
Incorrect alignment can lead to bearing failure, vibration and even shaft fracture.
As soon as bearing failure or vibration is detected, the alignment should be
checked.
In aligning the motor (and rotor) axially with the driven equipment, consideration
should be given to the axial shaft expansion and increase in shaft centre line height
due to thermal effects.
Shaft height growth (change in shaft centre line elevation) for TEFC machines can
be calculated as follows,
Growth =(0.0005) x (motor foot to shaft centre line dimension [in mm]).
3.6.3 It is desirable, in normal operation that the motor operates, so that no axial force is
exerted on the coupling.
The motor shaft and the driven shaft should be aligned within the following
tolerances in both angular and parallel alignment (refer Table 1).
Units in mm
TIR Solid Flexible
Total Indicated Runout Coupling coupling
Dimension C Medium, Low speed up to 2500 RPM 0.04 0.05
High speed over 2500 RPM 0.03 0.03
Dimension A Medium, Low speed up to 2500 RPM 0.03 0.04
High speed over 2500 RPM 0.03 0.03
Table 1
28
3.6.4 Angular misalignment is the amount by which the centre lines of the driver and
driven shaft are skewed. It can be measured using a dial indicator set up as shown in
fig 4. The couplings are rotated together through 360 degrees so that the indicator
does not measure runout of the coupling hub face. The shaft should be forced
against either the in or out extreme of their end float while being rotated.
Fig. 4 Fig. 5
3.6.5 Parallel misalignment is the amount by which the centre lines of the driver and the
driven shafts are out of parallel. It can be measured using the dial indicator as
shown in fig. 5. Again the couplings are rotated together through 360 degrees so
that the indicator does not measure runout of the coupling hub outside diameter.
3.6.6 After the motor has been properly aligned with the driven equipment and the hold
down bolts have been installed and tightened, at least two dowel pins should be
installed diagonally opposite motor feet.
The exposed rotating parts should be covered to

prevent accidents.
Do not hammer the conveyance devices such as coupling, belt sheaves,

chain wheels, gears etc. onto the motor shaft. Those shaft fitments should
be fitted and removed only by means of suitable devices. Heat shrinking
may be a better alternative to avoid damaging bearings and other
components.

29
3.7 INSTALLATION FOR BELT DRIVE
2 pole speed motors must not be coupled to the driven

equipment by means other than direct connection.
Please refer to TECO if belt connection is to be used.
3.7.1 Small and medium motors within frame sizes up to and including 225M are
designed for use with belt transmission or direct coupling.
In general power transmission through belt, chain or gear connection for larger
motors is not appropriate unless the motors have been specially designed for such
purpose.
3.7.2 The diameter ratio between conveyance sheaves should not be greater 5 to 1 for flat
belts, and 8 to 1 for V-belts. It is also advisable to limit the belt velocity to under
35m/sec to limit belt abrasion and vibration. The smaller the outer diameter of the
V-belt sheave, the greater the shaft bending stress will be. If bending stress is in
excess of the shaft fatigue stress, the shaft may break. Therefore please inform Teco
of the size of the sheaves and belt details for checking.
Place the sheave and belt as close as possible to the motor

body to reduce the bending moment and improve shaft life.
3.8 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
3.8.1 The rated conditions of operation for the motors are as shown by the nameplate.
Within the limits given below, of voltage and frequency variation from the
nameplate values, the motor will continue to operate but with performance
characteristics that may differ from those at the rated conditions:
• +/- 10% of rated voltage
• +/- 5% of rated frequency
• +/- 10% combined voltage and frequency variation so long as frequency
variation is no more than +/- 5% of rated value.
Operating the motor at voltage and frequencies outside of the above limits can result
in both unsatisfactory motor performance and damage to or failure of the motor.

30
3.8.2 Motor connections should be carried out in accordance with the details applicable to
the appropriate supply voltage as shown on the motor nameplate.
3.8.3 The main lead box furnished with the motor has been sized to provide adequate
space for the make up of the connections between the motor lead cables and the
incoming power cables
The bolted joints between the motor lead and the power
cables must be made and insulated in a workman-like
manner following the best trade practices and in accordance
with the minimum requirements of the Australian Standards.
3.8.4 The motors are provided with grounding pads and/or bolts for the connection of
earthing.
The motor must be grounded by a proper connection to the

electrical grounding system and in accordance with the
minimum requirements of the Australian Standards.
3.9 AUXILIARY DEVICES
3.9.1 Motors are equipped with the following thermal protection devices:
• Power Rating 11kW and larger.
Motors in this category are fitted with one set (one per phase – total 3 off) of
PTC 140 degree winding thermistors.
• Mining Specification type AEJC Frame size D315 and larger.
Motors in this category are fitted with two sets (two per phase – total 6 off) of
PTC winding thermistors (1 set x 140 degree plus 1 set x 150 degree).

31
3.9.2 Where specified motors may also be equipped with PT100 bearing Resistance
Temperature Detectors.
3.9.3 Thermistors are positive temperature coefficient type (1000 ohm @ tripping
temperature) with a reference tripping temperatures as detailed in 3.9.1.
They are a tripping device only and not a temperature detector.
Thermistor leads should be connected to an appropriate thermistor control relay
from a reputable supplier.
3.9.4 RTD’s where fitted are of the platinum type with a reference temperature of 0
degrees C at 100 ohms.
RTD leads should be connected to an appropriate motor protection system from a
reputable supplier.
Recommended temperature settings for RTD’s are as per table 2.
DEVICE TYPE LOCATION ALARM TRIP

RTD PLATINIUM 100Ω @ 0OC WINDING 1400C 1500C
RTD PLATINIUM 100Ω @ 0OC DE & NDE BEARING 900C 950C
Table 2
Thermistors and/or RTD’s should not be meggered or tested

at a voltage above 2.5volts.
3.9.6
Should the motor thermal protection circuit trip indicating

over temperature the causes should be thoroughly
investigated before a restart is attempted.
Failure to do so may lead to damage or failure of motor.

32
3.9.7 Where specified motors may be equipped with internal space heaters (check for
nameplate), to prevent the ingress of moisture into the motor insulation system
whilst motor is idle.
The incoming supply to the heaters should be in accordance with the details
contained on the heater nameplate.
The heater circuit should be inter-locked with the motor starter so as to de-energise
heaters when the motor is running.
Heaters may be alive when the motor is switched off.

Isolate supply at all times before working on motor.

33
Chapter 4: OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

4.1. EXAMINATION BEFORE START.
4.1.1. After motor is installed the following points should be noted:-

a. Check all wiring is correct and in accordance with connections appropriate to the supply
voltage as shown on motor nameplate.
b. Is the cable size adequate?
c. Are all connections tight and properly insulated?
d. Check the rating of fuses, starter/contactor are correct & operating normally.
e. Check motor is correctly earthed.
f. Make sure starter/switches are set in correct position.
g. Check heater circuit if fitted is de-energised when motor is in operation.
h. Check bearings are filled with the correct quantity and grade of grease.
4.1.2. Measurement of insulation resistance.

a. Rated voltage below 1000V, measure with 500VDC megger.
b. In accordance with IEEE-43 clause 9.3 standards, refer to following formula:
Rated voltage (v)
R=> ( _____________ + 1 ) x 10(MΩ)
1000
c. If a new winding has low insulation resistance moisture is generally the problem. Drying
the winding through the proper application of heat will normally increase the insulation
resistance to an acceptable level. Following are several accepted methods for applying
heat to a winding:
i. The motor is equipped with space heaters, which can be energised to heat the winding.
ii. Direct current (as from a welder) can be passed through the winding. The total current
should not exceed approximately 50% of rated full load current. Delta wound motors
have six leads and the three phases should be connected into one series circuit.
iii. Heated air can be either blown directly into the motor or into a temporary enclosure
surrounding the motor. The source of heated air should preferably be electrical as
opposed to fuelled (such as kerosene) where a malfunction of the fuel burner could
result in carbon entering the motor.

34
Caution must be exercised, when heating the motor with any

source of heat other than self-contained space heaters, to raise the
winding temperature at a gradual rate to allow any entrapped
moisture to vaporise and escape without rupturing the insulation.
The entire heating cycle should extend over 15-20 hours.
Ensure adequate guarding is provided so live parts cannot be

touched.
iv. Insulation resistance measurements can be made while the winding is being heated.
However, they must be corrected to 400C for evaluation since the actual insulation
resistance will decrease with increasing temperature. As an approximation for a new
winding, the insulation resistance will approximately halve for each 100C increase in
insulation temperature above the dew point temperature.
d. Should the resistance fail to attain the specified value even after drying, careful
examination should be undertaken to eliminate all other possible causes, if any.
4.1.3. Power Supply

a. Is the capacity of the power supply adequate?
b. Do voltage and frequency of supply match with those on the nameplate?
c. Voltage variation should be confined to within ±10% of the rated value and the
phase to phase voltages should be balanced.
4.1.4 Bearing Lubrication

Grease Lubricated Type.
The bearings are properly lubricated with the correct grade and
quantity of grease at the factory. After long storage and at initial
start the grease should be renewed. Please refer to section 7.
a. Refer to the section “Maintenance of Bearing” for maintenance procedures and

grease type.
35
4.1.5. Other Points to note

a. Make sure the transmission system, including belts, screws, bolts, nuts and set pins
are in good condition.
b. Dismantle all locks which fasten the moveable parts of the motor during
transportation, and turn the shaft by hand (if practical) to check if it moves freely
c. Check if there is any evidence of foreign matter inside the motor before starting.
d. Make sure the items above are examined. Test the motor with or without load.
Record and check according to “Maintenance” at 15 minute intervals during the
first three hours of operation. Then conduct regular examinations after longer
intervals.
4.2. STARTING OPERATION.
4.2.1. Starting Load.

The initial test involves running the motor without load. Unless specified, a motor is
designed to start with light load, which is then gradually increased to full load, as
the motor accelerates to full speed.
4.2.2. Starting.
a. Motor can be restarted if the initial start fails. Three attempts are permissible when
the motor is at ambient temperature. Two starts in succession are permitted when
motor is at normal running temperature. Smaller motors have a more frequent
starting cycle.
b. Should an additional start be necessary beyond the conditions stated above, the
following restrictions should be noted:
i. Let the motor cool down for 60 minutes before a full load restart.
ii. Let the motor cool down for 30 minutes before a no load restart.
iii. Two inching starts can be regarded as one normal start.
c. If the motor rotor fails to start turning after two seconds, shut off power supply
immediately. This can result from:
i. Too low a voltage at the motor terminals.
ii. The load is too large for motor rating.
iii. The load has seized mechanically.
36
iv. Electrical connections incorrect.

v. Single phase power has been applied.
vi. Any combination of the above.
Note – Investigate thoroughly and take corrective action before attempting a restart.
4.2.3. Direction of Rotation.

a. Motors are generally bi-directional. Some 2 pole and low noise motors are uni
directional only. If motor is uni-directional the fan cowl will be fitted with a
direction of rotation arrow.
b. If direction of rotation must be changed on a bi-directional motor, cut power and
wait until the motor stops, then interchange any two of the three phase leads.
4.2.4. Power Supply. Voltage/Current.

a. Check if the voltage and frequency of the power supply are identical to that shown
on the nameplate.
b. Voltage variation should be confined to within ±10% of nameplate voltage, and the
three phase voltages should be balanced.
c. Check if the phase currents of the motor, without load, are within ±5% of the
average values.
4.2.5. Frequency.
Frequency variation should be confined to within ±5% of the nameplate frequency.
The aggregate variation of voltage and frequency should be confined to within
±10% of the absolute value of the rating.
4.2.6. Run Up Time.
Run Up time is longer for motors connected to a load with a large

inertia. However, if the run up time exceeds what is normal or there
is abnormal noise, motor and load should be examined to establish
the cause before attempting a restart.

37
4.3 CAUTION POINTS TO NOTE:

4.3.1 Bearings:
a. The motor is fitted with grease lubricated bearings. Following initial start up
bearing temperatures should be closely monitored. The rate of rise in bearing
temperature is more indicative of impending trouble than is the actual temperature.
b. When the rate of bearing temperature rise is less than 10C per half hour, the bearing
temperature is considered to be stabilised.
c. If the total bearing temperature exceeds 1000C, the motor should be shut down
immediately.
4.3.2 Vibration:
a. The ideal values for the motor are below 2.8mm/sec. If vibration exceeds these
levels, an examination of the motor should be made to determine the cause.
4.3.3 Starting:
a. If the motor acceleration time exceeds the ramp time, shut off the power
immediately.
Investigate thoroughly and take corrective action before attempting to restart.
b. It should be recognised that each start of an induction motor subjects the motor to
current greater than full load current with resulting heating of the stator and rotor
windings. Each start can produce more heat than is produced and dissipated by the
motor under full load.
c. The starting duty for which the motor is designed must not be exceeded if long
motor life is expected. Abnormally low terminal voltage and/or excessive load
torque during motor start up can cause lengthened acceleration times during which
rotor ventilation is reduced. This can cause rotor damage or lead to shortened rotor
life.

38
Chapter 5: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

5.1. IMPORTANCE OF DAILY INSPECTION.
5.1.1. Normally electric motors do not fail suddenly. It happens over time, and regular
inspection will detect a problem before a serious situation develops. If operators in
the plant are alert, faults can be detected early and action taken to eliminate trouble.
Daily inspection, can be performed without interrupting the factory’s normal
operation.
5.1.2 Do not overlook any minor irregularities. If necessary, stop the machine
immediately to check and repair. Essentially, inspections should be performed by
the operator daily. But a maintenance technician should also check the machine
once a week together with the operator.
5.2. POINTS TO NOTE WHEN STARTING.

a. Check power supply to see if voltage and frequency are normal.
b. Is starter set at starting position?
c. Are there sparks during start?
d. Is the motor accelerating normally?
5.3 TEMPERATURE RISE.
5.3.1 The temperature of a motor is often determined by measuring the temperature of the
frame. This is not indicative of actual winding operating temperature however this
method can often be referred to of impending trouble. If the temperature is found to
be higher than usual check the following possibilities.
DO NOT MAKE TEMPERATURE READINGS WITH THE SENSE

OF TOUCH.
Often the temperature of a motor is determined by touch. Human hands can
only tolerate temperatures below 600C. Most motors safely operate at
temperatures greater than this, therefore the sense of touch should not be
used. Temperature readings by hand are also inaccurate and readings should
be made using a thermometer probe or non contact thermometer only.

39
5.3.2 Main causes of high temperature:

a. Motor Conditions
i. Voltage and frequency variation of power source is in excess of tolerance.
ii. Unbalanced three phase voltage; open circuit or poor contact.
iii. Insufficient or excessive lubrication.
iv. Abnormal frequency of starts.
v. Single-phasing due to open or short circuits.
vi. Damaged starter or improper operation.
vii. Blocked ventilation ducts.
viii. Motors cooling vents blocked.
b. Due to load or mechanical conditions:
i. Overload.
ii. Defective transmission coupling.
iii. Poor installation causing overload.
iv. High ambient temperature or radiant heat emitted from load or surroundings.
5.4 VIBRATION.
5.4.1 Main causes inducing vibration:

i. Unbalanced load.
i. Misalignment of couplings.
ii. Unbalanced belt-sheaves.
iii. Improper couplings with belts or chains.
iv. Unsuitable foundation or poor installation.
v. Unbalanced motor rotor.
vi. Serious abrasion to motor or load machine drive bearing.
vii. Defective brake coupling.
5.4.2 No matter what causes the vibration, if it is not eliminated, the following faults may
develop:
i. Bearing damage.
ii. Deformation of shaft.
iii. Loose parts or couplings.

40
5.5 NOISE.
5.5.1 Points to note

Not all noise is the result of a fault or abnormality. For instance, wind and slight
electromagnetic sounds are perfectly normal. They will remain at the same level no
matter how long the motor is in operation. Generally the louder the noise, the larger
the vibration amplitude will be.
5.5.2 Bearing Sound.

i. Bearing noise is a guide to the condition of the motor bearings without
dismantling the motor.
ii. Normal bearing sound in general is continuous, not intermittent. The sound
may tend to increase with the age of the bearings, but its increase is gradual
and hardly noticeable by the ear.
iii. Abnormal bearing sound is intermittent, rarely continuous.
iv. Some motors will emit noise when unloaded or after greasing due to skating.
This is normal and temporary.
5.5.3. Abnormal bearing sound generally develops from the following causes:
i. Foreign matter in grease.
ii. Scratches on the contact surface of the bearing.
iii. Rust on the contact surfaces of the bearing.
iv. Poor quality of grease.
v. Insufficient grease (the sound could be continuous).
5.5.4. Causes of abnormal electromagnetic sound:

i. Single phasing.
ii. Short circuit in windings.
iii. Unbalanced air gap resulted from serious bearing wear.

41
5.6. ODOUR.
5.6.1 Causes of motor odours:

i. Short circuit or over current causing overheating of varnish.
ii. Poor lubrication due to insufficient or contaminated grease.
5.7. MEASUREMENT OF THREE PHASE CURRENT.
5.7.1 Causes & effects

When load current is above the rating on the nameplate, it means the motor may be
overloaded. However, the cause of over current is not confined to overloading, but
may be caused by poor coupling installation, transmission structure, excessive high
or low voltage, etc.
a. Causes of unbalanced three phase current.
i. Unbalanced three phase voltage.
ii. Open circuit in power distribution lines.
iii. Poor switch contact.
iv.Open or short circuit in winding.
v. Open circuit at power transformer.
b. Effects:
i. Overheating of the windings causing fire or short circuit.
ii. Vibration of motor.
iii. Reduction of motor output torque.
c. Causes of wavering of ammeter indicator:

The characteristics of devices such as compressor or press are apt to cause
wavering of the indicator. Other causes are,
i. Poor contact of switches.
ii. Uneven mechanism.
iii. Unbalanced air gap due to serious bearing aberration.
iv.Broken conductors of squirrel cage rotor.

42
5.8. MOTOR APPEARANCE.
5.8.1 Reasons for Cleaning
a. Excessive dust or oil accumulation on the motor surface leading to the clogging of
ventilation channels between cooling ribs will reduce the motors cooling efficiency.
b. Keeping the motor and equipment clean will improve appearance and longevity.
Motors should never be cleaned or disturbed while

the motor is in operation.

43
Chapter 6: PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
6.1 REGULAR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE.
For safety, properly trained personnel must only carry out

maintenance and repairs.
Some testing, such as insulation resistance, usually requires

the motor to be stopped and isolated from the power
supply(ies).
Hight temperatures may arise under operating conditions on the motor

surfaces, so that touching should be prevented or avoided.
Keep away from moving and live parts.
Unless deemed necessary, do not remove guards whilst assessing the motor.
6.1.1 Major points in regular inspection and maintenance:

a. Routine inspection and maintenance are usually performed by operators with the
sense of touch, sight, smell and simple meters. But it is difficult to detect trouble
such as insulation deterioration etc. unless the motor is stopped and checked.
b. Replacement of worn-out parts will increase longevity and prevent breakdown.
c. Regular inspection and maintenance is important in preventing breakdown and
lengthening service life.
c. Owing to the varied uses and environments motors are placed in, it is difficult to set
periods for regular inspection and maintenance. However, it has to be performed at
least once every 6 months. Generally, the inspection time is determined by the
following factors:

44
i. Ambient conditions.
ii. Start and stop frequency.
iii. Trouble with components affecting motor functions.
iv. Parts which wear (eg. bearings).
v. The important position of a motor in operation of a factory, mine etc. should be
fully recognised. Therefore, its condition should be monitored, especially when it
is operating in severe conditions.
6.1.2. Motor Windings.

a. For measurement of insulation resistance and tests to determine quality of insulation
resistance, please refer to measures stated in Section 4.1.2.
b. Inspection of coil end:
i. Grease and dust accumulated on coil may cause insulation deterioration
and a reduction in cooling efficiency.
ii. Moisture.
iii. Discolouring. Overheating mainly causes this.
c. Wedge, is there any change from the original position?
d. Is the bind wire at coil end in correct position?
6.1.3. Bearings.
a. Please refer to section 7 for bearing maintenance.
6.1.4. Cleaning the interior of the motor.

a. After a motor has been in operation for some time, accumulation of dust, carbon
powder and grease etc., on the inside is unavoidable, and may cause damage. The
inside should therefore, be regularly cleaned and examined to assure reliable
performance.
b. Points to note during cleaning:
i. If using compressed air or a blower.
• Compressed air should be free of moisture.
• Maintain air pressure at 4kg/cm2, since high pressure can cause
damage to coils.

45
ii. Vacuum – Recommended.

Vacuum cleaning can be used, both before and after other methods of cleaning, to
remove loose dirt and debris. It is a very effective way to remove loose surface
contamination from the winding. Vacuum cleaning tools should be non-metallic to
avoid any damage to the winding insulation.
iii. Wiping.
Surface contamination on the winding can be removed using a soft, lint-free cloth.
If the contamination is oily, the cloth can moistened (not dripping wet) with a safety
type petroleum solvent. In hazardous locations, a solvent such as inhibited methyl
chloroform may be used, but must be used sparingly and immediately removed.
While this solvent is non-flammable under ordinary conditions, it is toxic and
proper health and safety precautions should be followed while using it.
Solvents of any type should never be used on windings

provided with abrasion protection. Abrasion protection is a
grey, rubber-like coating applied to the winding end-turns.
Adequate ventilation must always be provided in any area where solvents are
being used to avoid the danger of fire, explosion or health hazards. In confined
areas (such as pits), each operator should be provided with an air line respirator, a
hose mask, or self-contained breathing apparatus. Operators should wear goggles,
aprons and suitable gloves. Solvents and their vapours should never be exposed to
open flames or sparks and should always be stored in approved safety containers.
6.1.5. Clean the exterior of the motor.

a. The inlet air openings should not be allowed to accumulate any dirt, lint, etc.
that could restrict free air movement.
b. Totally enclosed fan cooled motors require special cleaning consideration.
The external fan must be cleaned thoroughly since any dirt build up not
removed can lead to unbalance and vibration.

46
Motors should never be cleaned or disturbed while

the motor is in operation.
Isolate motor from supply before cleaning.
6.1.6 Checking motor installation and coupling.

a. Installation:
i. Is foundation solid?
ii. Are all bolts and/or nuts tight and in good order?
b. Coupling:
i. Is coupling in good order?
ii. Are fasteners tight and in good order?
6.2. CLEANING OF COILS, DRYING & VARNISHING TREATMENT.

Age, constant heating and cooling and other factors may cause insulation
deterioration. Also, salt deposits or grease may lower insulation resistance.
Washing, drying and re-varnishing may be necessary if motor is flooded or showing
deterioration from age.
6.2.1 Cleaning:
a. If the coils are slightly contaminated, compressed air, cloth or a nylon brush can be
used to do the cleaning. However, when contamination is serious, thorough washing
has to be performed. The cleaning methods are as follows:
b. Cleaning with water:
i. This method is applicable to motors having been immersed in water or insulated
with no cotton yarn and paper materials.
ii. After washing, dry immediately.
iii. Cleaning with steam.
• If the motor has been immersed in sea-water or a chemical solution, clean with
steam after washing thoroughly.
• Steam pressure must be kept between 2 – 4 kg/cm2. High pressure may cause
insulation damage.

47
c. Steam temperature should be maintained between 500C – 800C.

d. After cleaning, dry immediately.
6.2.3 Drying Method.

a. Application:
i. Drying after cleaning.
ii. Motor has absorbed moisture.
b. Hot air method (using heater and blower).
i. Parts to be dried are surrounded inside a steel plate leaving an inlet and an outlet for
hot air. Hot air will enter the inlet to dry parts (stator, rotor, etc.), and will leave via
the outlet carrying away moisture.
ii. The temperature within the area surrounded by the steel plate should be maintained
at 900C – 1000C.
c. Drying with infrared ray lamp:
i. Install the infrared ray lamp in a baking area surrounded with steel plate with
openings at the bottom.
ii. This method can cause partial overheating. So attention must be paid to the parts
heated and the temperature must be kept below 1000C.
d. Drying method with electric current:
i. The winding must have a minimum insulation resistance above 0.5MΩ measured
with 500VDC megger before using this method so as to avoid a short circuit.
ii. Lock the rotor (short the secondary winding of the wound rotor motor), apply rated
voltage of approximately 5% - 10% to the winding.
iii. Temperature control settings:
Squirrel cage rotor induction motor: 700C – 800C for the stator.
e. Measurement of insulation resistance.
i. Measure the insulation resistance periodically during drying.
ii. At the initial stage of drying, insulation resistance may decline slightly. When it
returns to normal, the drying process is complete.
iii. When the current method is applied, be sure to turn off the power to measure
insulation resistance.

48
6.3. VARNISH.
Kind of Varnish
JIS-W-25 or W-28 are highly recommended.
a. Method of Varnish Treatment
i. Dipping method: Immerse windings completely into varnish until no air
bubbles appear.
ii. Pouring Method: Pour varnish completely over windings
Note: Let varnish drip to dry after dipping or pouring. Changing position of the
motor will obtain an even coverage.
b. Curing of Varnish
i. Set oven temperature at 110oC.
ii. Curing time should be 12 – 16 hours
iii. Ensure ventilation is adequate during curing. Combustible gases are present
To ensure adequate insulation the above procedure should be repeated.
6.4. KEY POINTS FOR MAINTENANCE & INITIAL OPERATION

INSPECTION AFTER LONG STORAGE.
6.4.1 If the motor has been out of service in excess of three months, careful inspection
should be made before putting the motor into operation again.
6.4.2 When the motor is not in operation, the following precautionary measures should be
undertaken:
The place for storage should be dry and well-ventilated. If the motor has to be
placed at work site for some time, it should be completely covered and stored on
pallets to prevent dust and moisture contamination.
Inspection and maintenance prior to storage.
Please refer to “Regular Inspection and Maintenance” (Section 6.1).
6.4.3 Items to be examined prior to initial operation.

a. Cleaning:
Outside of motor.
Motor interior.
49
b. Measurement of insulation resistance:

Measurement of insulation resistance and standards to determine quality if
Insulation resistance, please refer to measures stated in Section 4.1.2. Measurement
of insulation resistance.
6.4.4 Drying: If the motor has absorbed moisture, it must be dried.
6.4.5 Examination of bearings.

Turn the motor shaft by hand (if practical) to see if it rotates smoothly and if there is
any unusual noise.
6.4.6 Replenishment of grease. (Refer to bearing maintenance Section 7).
6.4.7 Switches and starters.

Clean off dust and any foreign matter etc.
Check if the operation is normal.
Are the moving parts functioning smoothly?
Check if all bolts and nuts are tight and in good order.
6.4.8 Examination and maintenance of standby motor.

Importance: The purpose of a standby motor is to substitute as an emergency motor
if the motor in operation breaks down.
It is important to always maintain the standby motor in top condition.
Maintenance should be performed strictly according to items and notes stated
previously.
6.5. RECORDS OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE.
6.5.1 Objective:
a. Fully understand the site conditions of the motor in operation and discover any
abnormalities in advance.
b. Prevent the neglect and act of maintenance.
c. Map pertinent maintenance plans after fully understanding the operation of motor.
50
d. Assess the life of parts to determine the quantity of spare parts to be kept.
e. To plan the number of spare motors and replace or repair the motors in operation
according to a schedule.
6.5.2 Records of operation.

a. A maintenance card in table form is acceptable.
b. Principle contents:
i. Serial number of machine
ii. Model
iii. Three phase voltage
iv. Three phase current
v. Temperature of a motor in operation
vi. Ambient temperature, humidity, weather, date and time
vii. Time of start and stop
viii. Special remarks
ix. Operator’s name
6.6. POINTS TO NOTE ON DISASSEMBLY.

a. Disassemble according to the pre-set steps.
b. Necessary tools should be ready before disassembly.
c. Mark the disassembled parts so as to facilitate re-assembly.
d. Place parts, bolts and nuts etc, in a box to avoid misplacing.
e. Avoid damage to heavy parts during transportation.
f. Dust accumulation on coil-end, ducts etc., should be cleaned during disassembly.
g. Coat parts with light oil.
h. Note if there is any shaft deflection or bearing damage when re-assembling.
i. Disassemble and assemble bearing according to the bearing maintenance manual.
For safety and to prevent equipment damage properly trained

personnel must only carry out maintenance and repairs.

51
Chapter 7 BEARINGS
7.1. MAINTENANCE OF ROLLING BEARING.

7.1.1. General.
Bearings play a very important role in motor performance. It is essential to keep
bearings in good order for the motor to operate at optimum performance. For this
reason, please maintain bearings according to this manual.
7.1.2. Motors within frame sizes D180 and below are complete with sealed for life
bearings.
This type of bearing is a non maintainable item and has been pre packed with
grease and fitted with containment shields at point of manufacture.
These bearings do not require greasing for the life of the bearing.
7.1.3. Motors within frame sizes D200 and larger are equipped with through flush
greasing facilities.
Grease replenishment is required, if the motor has been out of service for three
months or more and should also be carried out on initial start and at regular intervals
thereafter.
a. Replenishment of grease is recommended when motor is running.
b. Clean the grease nipple and open the grease drain (if applicable) prior to greasing.
Restore after greasing.
c. A slight leakage of grease between the flinger and bearing cover is normal and
assists in totally sealing the bearing from ingress of dust and foreign matter.
7.1.2. Grease Lubricated Type.

Keeping the bearing lubricant in top condition is extremely important in the
maintenance of bearings. It is a prerequisite of extended bearing life to replenish
grease using the correct grade, quantity and time interval.
The reasons for grease replenishment are:
a. Assure the rolling contact surface has no metal to metal contact.
b. Form a lubrication membrane on the rolling contact surface to reduce noise.
c. Purge the motor of old and contaminated grease.
52
d. The presence of the correct grade and quantity of grease reduces corrosion, seals the
bearing and lowers vibration.
7.1.3. Grease replenishment period:

The life of grease varies depending on model, speed, temperature, operational
conditions etc. it is, therefore, impossible to determine the exact time interval for
replenishment.
However, under normal conditions the greasing interval is shown in Table 3.
Table 3.
53
Remarks:
a. Please refer to lubrication nameplate, if attached.
b. The data as shown in Table 3 and/or lubrication nameplates are the
maximum recommended intervals under good conditions, please consider
site conditions, as a shortening of these periods may be necessary.
7.1.4. Type of grease:

The majority of Teco motors utilise SHELL Alvania grease R3 that is standard for
TECO motors except some special models for which special grease will be shown
on the nameplate. Please use identical grease when servicing or alternatively
lubricants of different brands that have been established as being equivalent in the
areas of composition, physical properties and thickeners.
*Don’t mix different kinds of grease.
7.1.5. Amount of grease replenishment:

Amount of grease replenishment depends on the type, size and construction and the
bearings. For the minimum quantity used in one replenishment of each bearing,
please refer to Table 4.
Table 4.
*Fill new grease until it displaces the old grease completely.
54
7.1.6. Key points to note in grease filling:

Filling method for grease exchange type bearing.
Use grease gun to pump grease through grease nipple into bearings. The old
contaminated grease is forced to drain out of the discharge chute. Please open the
grease drain (if fitted) while greasing, and leave the motor running. Shut outlet after
the motor runs for 30 minutes.
The outlet is not visible on some models, grease should be pumped in until the
sound of bearing is normal. It is advisable to grease when the motor is operating as
old grease is expelled more easily. Don’t grease motor when it is at a standstill. If
there is a draw-out device for grease, draw out the used grease after greasing.
Stay clear of rotating parts while relubricating motor when it

is in operation.
7.1.7. Temperature of bearing.

Temperature of the bearing will rise slightly, but temporarily while greasing and
will return to normal a few minutes after greasing. Brief temperature variations are
of no concern.
7.1.8. Selection of grease gun.

There are two types of grease gun. High pressure lever type and hand press type. As
the hand press type has a lower force, grease replacement will take more time.
Greasing can be achieved quickly by using a lever type gun, however care should be
taken to adjust the pressure and rate to avoid excessive grease entry which may
enter the motor’s interior.
7.2. NOISE OF BEARING.

a. Normal noise.
Noise is congenital to movement of the bearing. Generally bearing noise that has a
continuous rhythm with no sudden change is normal.
b. Abnormal noise.

55
It is difficult to detect the early stages of bearing failure with the ear. It takes a lot of
experience and a sharp ear to detect abnormal noise. Any sudden change in bearing
noise should be investigated.
7.3. VIBRATION.
If the vibration of the bearing is unusually high, please test with vibroscope.
The preferred level for vibration should be below 2.8mm/sec. If the values exceed
this figure, an investigation should be undertaken to find and rectify the problem.
7.4. REGULAR INSPECTION.
7.4.1. Regular monthly inspection.

Grease replenishment (refer to Section 7.1).
7.4.2 Regular yearly inspection.

It is important to undertake regular inspection every year when the machine is out
of service for maintenance.
7.4.3 Inspection Notes.

a. Electric etching.
When there are dark spots on bearing surface or outside the face of outer ring and /
or inside face of bearing housing, please check with microscope to see if they look
like pock marks or fish scales which could be the result of electric etching due to
poor installation etc.
b. Precision of installation.
The degradation of the bearing may be the result of misalignment due to sinking
foundations etc, after the motor has been in use for a long period. Regularly check
and record the alignment of couplings, and make adjustments as necessary.
The bearing is a high precision component, it is important to avoid

ingress of dust and foreign matter. A hammer or similar object must not
be used during the cleaning and installation of the bearing.

56
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting.
8.1 FAULT FINDING & RECOGNITION
Kind of Fault Symptom Cause Remedy

Fail to Motionless Power-off Consult power
start without And soundless company
load Switch-off Switch-on
No fuse Install fuse
Broken wires Check wires and repair
Broken lead Check leads and repair
Faulty winding Check winding and
repair
Fuse blowing – Short circuit Check circuit
(Circuit Breaker Incorrect wiring Check wiring
trips off, slow Poor contact in circuit Check and repair
start with switches
electromagnetic Broken wiring Check and repair
noise Poor contact of starting Check and repair
switch
Incorrect connection of Check and repair
starting switch
Overload after Fuse blowing – Insufficient capacity of Replace fuse or
start Fail to restart fuse or breaker breaker
due to circuit Overload Lighten load
breaker tripping High load at low Check circuit capacity
voltage and reduce load

57

Overload after Start Overheating Overload or Lighten Load
of Motor Intermittent
Overload
Under-voltage Check circuit capacity
and power source
Over-voltage Check power source
Ventilation duct Remove the foreign
clogged matter in the duct
Ambient Lower ambient
temperature temperature
exceeds 450C
Friction between Repair
rotor and stator
Fuse blowing Install the specified
(Single phase fuse
rotating)
Poor contact of Check and repair
circuit switches
Poor contact of Check and repair
starting switch
Unbalanced three Check circuit or
phase voltage consult power
company
Speed falls Voltage drop Check circuit and
sharply power source
Sudden overload Check machine
Single phase Check circuit and
rotating repair
Switch overheat Insufficient Replace switch
capacity of switch
High load Lighten load

58

Overload after Start Bearing Overheat Misalignment Re-align
between motor and
load
Overspeed of Adjust bracket
bearing outer-ring
High bearing noise Replace damaged
bearing
Noise Electro-magnetic Occurrence from Check noise not
noise induced by first operation normal
electricity Sudden sharp noise Short circuit of
and smoking windings. Repair.
Bearing noise Not enough grease Add grease
Deterioration of Clean bearing and
grease re-grease
Excessive noise Replace the
damaged bearing
Mechanical noise Loose belt sheaf Adjust key and
caused by lock the screw
machinery Loose coupling Adjust the position
of couplings and
tighten
Loose screw Tighten screw
Fan rubbing Adjust fan position

59

Noise Mechanical noise Rubbing as a result Clean motor
caused by of ingress of interior and
machinery foreign matter ventilation ducts
Wind noise Noise induced by
air flowing through
ventilation ducts
Induced by Repair machine
conveyance
machine
Vibration Electro-magnetic Short circuit of Repair
vibration windings
Open circuit of Repair
rotor
Vibration Unbalanced rotor Repair
Unbalanced fan Repair
Mechanical Broken fan blade Replace fan
vibration Un-symmetrical Align central points
centres between
belt sheaf
Central points of Adjust the central
couplings do not lie points of couplings
on the same level on the same level
Improper mounting Lock the mounting
installation screw
Motor mounting Reinforce
bed is not strong mounting bed
Remarks:
i. Circuit switches: This includes knife switch, electromagnetic switch, fuse and other
connection switches etc.
ii. Starting switches: This includes Delta-Star starter, compensate starter, reactance
starter, resistor starter, starting controllers etc.
60
10-702-GENERAL TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE.DOCX
GENERAL TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE
WARNING: ISOLATE AND LOCK OUT ALL ELECTRICAL, PNEUMATIC AND HYDRAULIC DEVICES BEFORE WORKING ON THEM.
SYMPTOM CAUSE DETECTION REMEDY

Fan motor overloading High airflow High fan motor current Check for air leakage in ductwork or baghouse.
Less suck at extract Blockage in ductwork Dismantle ductwork Clean inside of ductwork
hoods
Hole in ductwork or ductwork Visual inspection of ductwork Replace damaged section of duct work
collapse
Fan wear due to dust loading on Fan inspection Eliminate dust loading if possible, replace rotor
fan if required.
Excessive fan vibration Worn bearings Bearing noise and vibration Replace bearings.
Check fan speed and reduce if necessary
Dust build-up on fan blades Fan inspection Eliminate dust loading if possible, clean rotor
and replace if required.
Damage to fan rotor Fan inspection Repair or replace fan rotor
1
61
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
THIS DRAWING AND IT'S MODEL IS THE PROPERTY OF

DESIGN BY: Richard MacKay SCALE REVISIONS
DATE: Wednesday, March 16, 2011
A3
VORTEX ENGINEERING LIMITED
AND MUST NOT BE USED, COPIED, DRAWN BY: Richard MacKay ZONE REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED
A 3rd ANGLE PROJECTION
REPRODUCED OR COMMUNICATED TO
ANY PERSON WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION
DATE
CHECKED:
Wednesday, March 16, 2011
Doug Pigou
1:40 A
996 O/S FLANGE

866 I/S FLANGE
492 24 x 12
852 I/S DUCT

246 HOLES
20 x 14 624 A
HOLES 312
1266 O/S FLANGE

1166 I/S FLANGE
156 x 6 = 924
1160 I/S DUCT

B B
1226
156 x 4 = 624
936
720mm OFFSET
C
782mm OFFSET 426 I/S DUCT C
432 I/S FLANGE

540 I/S DUCT
532 O/S FLANGE
554 I/S FLANGE
684 O/S FLANGE
DETAIL B
SCALE 1 : 20
DETAIL A
SCALE 1 : 20
345mm
OFFSET
D D
1670
E E
DRAWING TITLE: DRAWING No: DRAWING TITLE: DRAWING No: TITLE: SYSTEM
FC1200 ARR8 SOUTH ISLAND OFFICE.
PHONE +64 (03) 366 8255
REVISION
F
FAN+INLET BOX
Dwg No:
CLIENT:
FC1200-D250SM-RD0-D-000
CLIENT 00-000 TAYMAC
FAN SETUP
VORTEX JOB No: MANUFACTURER: ORDER/JOB No:
00000
P.O.BOX 10333, PHILLIPSTOWN,
CHRISTCHURCH, NEW ZEALAND.
NORTH ISLAND OFFICE.

PHONE +64 (09) 525 3251
P.O.BOX 120171 NSMC,
D DATE:
F
AUCKLAND, NEW ZEALAND. .................

DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS - MANUAL ALTERATIONS TO THE DRAWING ARE PROHIBITED - DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
62
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DATE: Monday, May 30, 2011
A3
DATE
CHECKED:
Monday, May 30, 2011
Doug Pigou
1:30 ITEM
Description PartNo Material QTY. A
NO.
1 FC1200 PEDESTAL FC1200-PED-RD0-000 WELDMENT 1
REFER TO FASTENERS 2
3
FC1200 PEDESTAL
FC1200 PEDESTAL
FC1200-PED-000
FC1200-PED-000
WELDMENT
WELDMENT
1
1
LIST FOR DETAIL 4 FC1200 RD0 CASING FC1200-CAS-RD0-000 WELDMENT 1
5 SNV120+1213K+H213+DH513 CMP-1213K-0111-001 BEARING - FLOATING 1
6 SNV120+22213ESK+H313+DH513 CMP-22213ESK-0111-001 BEARING - FIXED 1
1 4 7 75kW 4P MOTOR CMP-MTR75K4P-001 D250SM FRAME 1
8 HRC230(H+F+FRAS)+3020070+3020060 CMP-HRC230-0111-009 COMPONENT 1
B 9 FC1200 ARR8 RD RUNNER ASSEMBLY FC1200-RNR-000 ASSEMBLY 1 B
10 FC1200 INLET FC1200-INL-000 WELDMENT 1

11 SHAFT SEAL FC1200-SEAL-001 5mm THK UHMWPHE 1
12 COMPRESSION PLATE FC1200-CMP-001 3mm THK G304 SS PL ASTM A240 1
13 FC1200 INLET BOX FC1200-INB-000 WELDMENT 1
14 FC1200 INLET BOX HATCH FC1200-INH-000 WELDMENT 1
15 HATCH FC1200-HAT-000 WELDMENT 1
11
8 C
C
DESIGN ALLOWS FOR

F
2mm SHIMS UNDER MOTOR
E 12
22213ESK BEARING : PART 6 15 10 13 DETAIL B DETAIL C DETAIL E
36mm
HAS LOCATING RINGS:
FRM120/10
A SCALE 1 : 5
OFFSET
SCALE 1 : 10 SCALE 1 : 10
D D
7 3 5 2 6
13
C
B
13
4 10
E 14 E
DETAIL F
9 SCALE 1 : 20
10
1 4 A SECTION A-A
FC1200 RD0 SOUTH ISLAND OFFICE.
PHONE +64 (03) 366 8255
REVISION
F
FC1200 RD0 ARR8 GA
Dwg No:
CLIENT:
FC1200-D250SM-RD0-D-100
ARR8 FAN
00000

PHONE +64 (09) 525 3251
C DATE:
F

63
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DATE: Wednesday, April 20, 2011
A3
DATE
CHECKED:
Wednesday, April 20, 2011
Doug Pigou
1:40 A
FL 8 6 1
A O
N /
G S
7 61 E
FLA I/S
NG
E
B B
O /S
0
7 6 CT 12 x 14 HOLES
DU S
0 O/ ON 820 PCD
7 6 CT
DU
DETAIL B
VIEW A SCALE 1 : 20
SCALE 1 : 20
C
C 1377mm
366mm OFFSET
OFFSET
A
26
73
2396mm OFFSET
D D
B
45°
1200
E E
FC1200 ARR8 SOUTH ISLAND OFFICE.
PHONE +64 (03) 366 8255
REVISION
F
FAN+SILENCER
Dwg No:
CLIENT:
FC1200-D250SM-RD45-D-000
FAN SETUP
00000

PHONE +64 (09) 525 3251
D DATE:
F

64
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DATE: Monday, May 30, 2011
A3
DATE
CHECKED:
Monday, May 30, 2011
Doug Pigou
1:35 ITEM
Description PartNo Material QTY. A
NO.
1 FC1200 RD45 PEDESTAL FC1200-PED-RD45-000 WELDMENT 1
REFER TO FASTENERS 2 FC1200 SHAFT GUARD FC1200-SGD-000 2mm THK MS PL AS3678-250 1
LIST FOR DETAIL 3

4
FC1200 COUPLING GUARD
FC1200 RD45 CASING
FC1200-CGD-000
FC1200-CAS-RD45-000
WELDMENT
WELDMENT
1
1
4 5 SNV120+1213K+H213+DH513 CMP-1213K-0111-001 BEARING - FLOATING 1
6 SNV120+22213ESK+H313+DH513 CMP-22213ESK-0111-001 BEARING - FIXED 1
7 75kW 4P MOTOR CMP-MTR75K4P-001 D250SM FRAME 1
1 8 HRC230(H+F+FRAS)+3020070+3020060 CMP-HRC230-0111-009 COMPONENT 1
B 9 FC1200 ARR8 RD RUNNER ASSEMBLY FC1200-RNR-000 ASSEMBLY 1 B
10 FC1200 INLET FC1200-INL-000 WELDMENT 1

11 SHAFT SEAL FC1200-SEAL-001 5mm THK UHMWPHE 1
12 COMPRESSION PLATE FC1200-CMP-001 3mm THK G304 SS PL ASTM A240 1
13 FC1200 SILENCER FC1200-SIL-000 WELDMENT 1
14 HATCH FC1200-HAT-000 WELDMENT 1
C
C
DETAIL B
SCALE 1 : 10 12 11
36mm
DESIGN ALLOWS FOR OFFSET
2mm SHIMS UNDER MOTOR A DETAIL C
22213ESK BEARING : PART 6 SCALE 1 : 20
HAS LOCATING RINGS:
D
FRM120/10 C D
14
13 B
7 3 5 2 6
10 4 8 DETAIL D
D 10
SCALE 1 : 5
E
1
E E
4
10
9
DETAIL E
A SECTION A-A SCALE 1 : 10
FC1200 RD45 SOUTH ISLAND OFFICE.
PHONE +64 (03) 366 8255
REVISION
F
FC1200 RD45 ARR8 GA
Dwg No:
CLIENT:
FC1200-D250SM-RD45-D-100
ARR8 FAN
00000

PHONE +64 (09) 525 3251
C DATE:
F

65
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Appendix
PUMP MANUAL - IWAKI

IWAKI Magnetic Drive Pump
MDM Series (Asia Edition: English)
Instruction Manual
Read this manual before use of product
This is patent pending product.
Thank you for selecting IWAKI Magnetic Drive Pump MDM Series. This instruction man-
ual, which is divided into five sections, namely "Safety", "Outline of Product", "Installation",
"Operation" and "Maintenance", deals with the correct handling and operation procedures
for the pump. To make maximum use of the pump and to ensure safe and long time opera-
tion of the pump, please read this manual thoroughly and carefully prior to operating the
pump.
Contents
SAFETY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
OUTLINE OF PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. Unpacking and inspection ..............................................................................5
2. Model code ............................................................................................................6
3. Conditions to be used ......................................................................................7
4. Structure and names of parts ....................................................................... 8
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5. Installation ........................................................................................................... 10
6. Piping .....................................................................................................................11
7. Electrical wiring ................................................................................................. 13
8. Protection ............................................................................................................ 13
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
9. Precautions on operation............................................................................. 15
10. Operation (Starting) ........................................................................................ 16
11. Pump stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
12. Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
13. Maintenance & inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
14. Disassembling & assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
15. Repair parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
16. Mass of pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
SAFETY SECTION
For the Safe and Correct Handling of the Pump
● Before use of the pump, read carefully this "Safety Section" to prevent accidents and to avoid the
damage or loss of other assets.
● Observe and abide by the instructions described in this "Safety Section". These instructions are
very important for protecting pump users or other persons from hazard or from loss of assets.
● Meaning of symbols
Following two symbols describe the extent of hazards and loss which may brought if the instruc-
tions are not observed or if the pump is wrongly used.
Nonobservance or misapplication of the contents of

Warning the "Warning" could lead to a death or heavy injury of
person.
Nonobservance or misapplication of the contents of the
Caution "Caution" could lead to a injury of person or damage of
assets.
Following two symbols describe the content to be observed.
Prohibited action or procedure is indicated. Inside or

near this circle, a concrete activity to be prohibited is
depicted.
Action or procedure which must be performed without
fail is indicated. Inside this circle, a concrete activity to
be performed is depicted.
For exportation
Technology related to the use of goods in this instruction manual falls in the category of
technology contained in the Foreign Exchange Order Attachment, which includes com-
plementary export control of technology. Please be reminded that export license, which
is issued by the Ministry of Economy, Trade, and Industry could be required, when this is
exported or provided to someone even in Japan.
-1-
Safety Section
WARNING
● Magnet field danger
The magnet drive pumps contain very strong magnets. The strong magnet field could
adversely affect persons who are assisted by electronic devices such as pacemakers
etc.
● Always turn off power supply prior to maintenance works etc. Pay special attention so
that no other operator turns on by mistake the power supply while someone is working
on the pump. In a noisy or poor visibility environment, display a sign near power sup-
ply switch to notify other person that someone is "WORKING" on the pump. Power
Power off
supply mistakenly turned on during maintenance works may lead to personal injury.
Each operator must pay special attention.
● Wear protectors
When piping is removed or pump is disassembled/assembled, wear protective gear
such as safety goggles and protective gloves etc. Wear protective
gear
● Lifting pump
When pump is lifted, apply chain or belt to eye bolt and motor to keep the pump &
motor horizontally.
● No remodeling
Remodeling of pump may result in serious personal injury or damage of the pump. Do
not attempt remodeling pump because it is very dangerous. No Remodeling
● Dangerous liquid
When the pump is used to transfer dangerous liquids mentioned as below, the pump
must always be checked and watched so that the liquid can not be leaked. The opera-
tion of pump leaking the liquid may result in personal injury, explosion or fire accident.
● Explosive or flammable liquids
● Corrosive or stimulus toxic liquids
● Liquids harmful to human health
-2-
Safety Section
CAUTION
● Attention to magnetic force
This pump employs strong magnets. Special attention must be paid not to be injured
by attracting force of magnets. Follow the procedure "Disassembling and Assembling"
when the maintenance works are done.
● Do not run pump dry

Do not run pump dry (without liquid). If the pump run dry, heat is generated by rub-
bing, which causes pump damage. If the pump is operated with suction side valve
Do not run dry
closed, the pump runs dry.
● Countermeasures for static electricity

When low electric conductivity liquid such as ultra-pure water and fluor inactive liquid
(e.g. Fluorinert™ are handled, the static electricity may be generated in the pump,
which may cause static discharge and pump break down. Take countermeasures to
avoid and remove the static electricity.
● Qualified operator
The pump must be handled or operated by the person who has enough knowledge
and well acquainted with the pump.
● Eliminate air in pump chamber

Before full operation of pump, run pump to eliminate air from pump chamber.
Above all when pumping liquid which easily generates bubbles (hydrogen perox-
ide, sodium hypochlorite or so), eliminate air every time when pump is operated.
Operation of pump with air remaining in pump chamber may heat rubbing parts of
pump resulting in pump damage.
● For specified application only

The use of pump in any application other than those clearly specified may result in the
failure or damage of the pump.
● Ventilate the site

When handling the liquid which may generate toxic gas, safety measures such as
ventilation must be taken to prepare for the accidental liquid leakage.
● Countermeasure to liquid flowing out

Protective measurement must be taken against liquid flowing out caused by damage
of pump or pipe by accident. Also, appropriate measurement must be taken so that
the liquid can not directly flow out on the ground.
● Disposal of used pump

Disposal of used or damaged pump must be done in accordance with local laws and
regulations. (Consult a licensed industrial waste products disposing company.)
-3-
OUTLINE OF PRODUCT
1. Unpacking and inspection ........................ 5
2. Model code .................................................. 6
3. Conditions to be used ............................... 7
4. Structure and names of parts .................. 8
-4-
1. Unpacking and inspection
After unpacking of the pump, check the following
points.
(1) If the product is ordered one.
Check model code, discharge capacity, discharge
pressure, voltage which are written on nameplate
of pump and motor to see if they conform to your
order.
(2) If the product is not damaged or bolts are not loos-
ened during transportation. Tighten especially the
bolts which are holding a rear casing support to the
specific tightening torque subsequent to the first
tightening. Refer to the "13.Disassembling & assem-
bling" for the specific torque value.
(3) If accessories are attached.
Standard accessories:
Bolts for back pull-out M12 × 100: 2pcs
(M10 × 50 : 2pcs for MDM25-1)
Optional accessories if ordered
Eye bolt
Motor nameplate
Discharge port
Suction port
Pump nameplate
Foot support
Baseplate
-5-
2. Model code
MDM40 - 150 1 E KK F 075 J - D 2 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 Pump discharge bore Suction Discharge
25: 40 × 25
40: 50 × 40
50: 65 × 50
65: 80 × 65
2 Nominal impeller diameter: 100 - 225 (mm)
3 Impeller range: 1: Low head impeller type 2: High head impeller type (Available for MDM25 and MDM40)
3: High head impeller type (Available for MDM25 only)
4 Casing material: E: CFR-ETFE P: PFA
5 Bearing/spindle material: KK:SiC/SiC CF:High density carbon/High purity ceramic
6 Type of motor to be mounted: F : Flange mounted motor type
7 Motor output: 004 : 0.4 kW, 007 : 0.75 kW, 015 : 1.5 kW, 022 : 2.2 kW,
037 : 3.7 kW, 055 : 5.5 kW, 075 : 7.5 kW, 110 : 11 kW, 150 : 15 kW, (185 : 18.5 kW)
8 Standard for connection flange/motor
J : JIS pump flange + JIS motor I : ISO pump flange + IEC motor A : ANSI pump flange + JIS motor
9 Drain/special version
Drain Baseplate Standard or Special version

A Standard
Without drain
S Special version
With baseplate
D Standard
With drain
X Special version
B Standard
Without drain
Y Special version
Without baseplate
E Standard
With drain
Z Special version
Note: For PFA material type, air vent is always equipped for "with drain" type.
10 Motor pole : 2 : 2 pole motor
4 : 4 pole motor
11 High temperature type
No code : Standard
H : High temperature type
(Available for MDM25-3 and MDM40-2)
Note) In this manual, model code is simplified by using pump discharge bore code (1) and impeller range code (3). For
example, when you see MDM25-1, MDM25-2, MDM25-3, MDM40-2, the figures 25 or 40 are pump discharge
bore and 1, 2 or 3 are impeller range.
-6-
3. Conditions to be used
1. Maximum operating pressure
Maximum operating pressure of the pump is 1 MPa (1.6 MPa for MDM25-3 and MDM40-2). Pay attention so that
the pump discharge pressure does not exceed this figure.
2. Slurry containing liquid
Basically slurry containing liquid can not be handled but SiC bearing type (KK type) can handle it in the following
conditions:
• Slurry concentration up to 5 wt%
• Slurry hardness up to 80 Hs
• Slurry size up to 50 μm
3. Performance change caused by specific gravity and viscosity of liquid
When specific gravity and viscosity are larger than water, shaft power, discharge capacity and discharge head will
change depending on specific gravity and viscosity of pumped liquid. The pump was made and shipped according
to the information given to IWAKI. If the liquid condition is changed, ask and confirm IWAKI to use the pump
without problem.
4. Influence by liquid temperature
The chemical liquid changes its viscosity, vapor pressure and corrosivity according to the temperature change. Pay
attention to the change of liquid characteristics.
Liquid temperature range

Pumped liquid
-20 0 105 150 temperature (deg. C)
ETFE material (all models)
PFA material (all models)
Ambient temperature range: 0 - 40 deg. C

Ambient humidity range: 35 - 85% RH
Note 1) For temperature range of each chemical liquid, refer to Chemical Resistant Table on booklet "Technical
Information on MDM Series".
2) For liquid temperature below zero deg. C for both ETFE and PFA material types and above 120 deg. C for
PFA material type, please contact IWAKI because detailed operating condition must be considered for these
temperature ranges.
-7-
4. Structure and names of parts
500.3
554.5 554.6
554.3
100.1 230 942 400.1 901.5 158 159 900 908.1 901.6 801
901.3
903.1
400.3
554.4 122.2
901.4 314.1
314.2
210
500.2
122.1
554.2
400.2
901.2
500.1
554.1
901.1
310 859 161 858 314.4 314.3 159.1 330 554.7 890
901.7
NO. Parts name Q'ty NO. Parts name Q'ty

100.1 Front casing 1 554.1 Spring washer 2
100.2 Cover 1 554.2 Spring washer 2
122.1 Drain plate 1 554.3 Spring washer 2
122.2 Air vent plate 1 554.4 Spring washer 8 (6) or (10) Note (1)
158 Rear casing 1 554.5 Spring washer 4
159 Rear casing cover 1 554.6 Spring washer 4
159.1 Reinforce pipe Note (2) 1 554.7 Spring washer 2
161 Rear casing support 1 801 Motor 1
210 Spindle 1 858 Drive magnet unit 1
230 Impeller 1 859 Magnet capsule unit 1
310 Bearing 1 890 Base plate 1
314.1 Liner ling 1 900 Eye bolt 1
314.2 Mouth ring 1 901.1 Hex. head bolt 2
314.3 Rear thrust 1 901.2 Hex. head bolt 2
314.4 Rear ring 1 901.3 Hex. head bolt 2
330 Bracket 1 901.4 Hex. head bolt 8 (6) or (10) Note (1)
400.1 Gasket 1 901.5 Hex. head bolt 4
400.2 Drain gasket 1 901.6 Hex. head bolt 4
400.3 Air vent gasket 1 901.7 Hex. head bolt 2
500.1 Plain washer 2 903.1 Hex. head bolt Note (3) 5
500.2 Plain washer 2 908.1 Hex. socket head bolt 2
500.3 Plain washer 2 942 Impeller pin 2
Note (1): Q'ty in parenthese (6) is for MDM25-1 and (10) is for MDM25-3 & MDM40-2.
(2): For high temperature type "H" of MDM25-3 & MDM40-2.
(3): For all ETFE types and PTFE type of MDM25-1
-8-
INSTALLATION
5. Installation ..................................................10
6. Piping .......................................................... 11
7. Electrical wiring ......................................... 13
8. Protection ................................................... 13
-9-
5. Installation
Example of recommended piping
1 Discharge pipe
12 1
2 Discharge valve
3 Check valve
12
4 Pressure gauge
5 Motor
2 6 Pump
11
3 7 Flexible joint
8 Vacuum gauge
9 Suction pipe
11 10 Suction valve
4 Within
10 1m
7 11 Gate valve
8
6 12 Air vent piping
5
13 Pipe support
10 13 9 7
1. Installed position
• Install and fix the pump on the foundation which is not affected by vibration generated by other machines.
• Keep enough space around the pump for the back pull-out of motor, assembly and disassembly of the pump.
• Foundation area must be larger than pump base plate.
2. Location
• Install the pump as close to the tank as possible and at lower position than the tank (flooded suction).
• If the pump is installed at the location that the pump suction port comes higher position than the liquid level
of tank (suction lift style), install the priming piping and foot valve at the end.
3. Foundation
• Refer to illustration below.
Foundation bolt
Baseplate liner
Concrete foundation
- 10 -
6. Piping
1. Tightening of pipe flange
Table below shows the bolt size and tightening torque for the connection of pipe flange to pump flange. Tightening
torque is the figure when metallic flange and rubber gasket are used.
Bolt size Tightening torque
M16 78.4 N · m
2. Pipe load and moment
Pipe load and moment put on the pump should not exceed the figures shown below.
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
Allowable pipe load on pump flange
Load kN
Direction of load Discharge flange Suction flange
MDM25, 40, 50 MDM65 MDM25, 40, 50 MDM65
Fx 0.71 1.07 0.89 1.33
Fy (Pression/Tension) 0.89/0.44 1.33/0.67 0.58 0.89
Fz 0.58 0.89 0.71 1.07
Allowable moment on pump flange
Moment kN · m
Direction of load Discharge flange Suction flange
MDM25, 40, 50 MDM65 MDM25, 40, 50 MDM65
Mx 0.46 0.95 0.46 0.95
My 0.35 0.72 0.35 0.72
Mz 0.23 0.47 0.23 0.47
- 11 -
3. Suction piping
(1) Flooded suction
Flooded suction is recommended.
(2) Pipe diameter
Pipe diameter should be larger than pump inlet bore.
(3) Shortest piping
Employ less bends and shortest piping length.
(4) Straight piping
Employ straight pipe just before pump inlet port.
Pump inlet bore 50A or smaller : Straight pipe of 500 mm or longer
Pump inlet bore 65A or larger : Straight pipe of 8 times as larger than inlet port
For the easy pump dismantling and maintenance, install a removable short length pipe of 300mm or so in straight
piping.
(5) Air pocket in piping
Do not allow any projection in piping where air may be trapped along the suction pipe.
Suction pipe should have an ascending gradient of 1/100 toward the pump.
(6) Different diameter of pipes
If diameter of pump suction port is different from that of suction pipe, use the eccentric reducer pipe. Connect
the eccentric reducer pipe so that upper side is level. Residual air may not go out if it is mounted in reverse.
(7) Gate valve in suction side
In case of flooded suction, install gate valve in suction piping. It is needed when the pump is disassembled and
inspected.
(8) Piping for flushing
Install pump flushing piping in case that the dangerous liquid will be handled.
(9) End of suction piping
The end of suction pipe always should be located 500 mm or more below the liquid level. Take care so that air
can not be sucked in suction piping.
(10) In case of suction lift piping
• The end of suction piping should be 1 to 1.5 times of pipe diameter or more away from the bottom of suction tank.
• Install foot valve or check valve in suction piping.
(11) Pipe support
Install the pipe support so that the weight of pipe can not be directly loaded to the pump.
(12) Pipe connection
Pipes must be connected securely so that the air can not be sucked in. If the sealing is not perfect, air is sucked
in, which causes pump damage.
4. Discharge piping
(1) Pipe diameter
In case the discharge piping is long, the specified performance may not be obtained because of unexpected pipe
resistance if the pipe diameter is the same as pump bore. Calculate the pipe resistance in advance to decide proper
diameter of pipe.
(2) Position of the first valve
Take 1m or so distance between pump and the valve located the nearest to pump and install air eliminating piping
at the place close to the nearest valve to the pump so that air can not remain in pump. Refer to "Example of recom-
mended piping" on page 10.
- 12 -
(3) Gate valve
Install the gate valve in discharge piping to adjust flow rate and to protect motor from over loading. If the check
valve is also installed, recommended arrangement is : Pump → Check valve → Gate valve
(4) Pressure gauge
Install a pressure gauge in discharge piping to check the operating conditions such as discharge head etc.
(5) Check valve
Check valve must be installed in the following cases.
• Discharge piping is longer than 15 to 20 meters.
• Actual head exceeds 15 meters.
• Height difference between liquid level and discharge pipe end exceeds 9 meters.
• When two pumps are used in parallel.
(6) Air vent
If horizontal discharge piping is longer than 15 to 20 meters, install air vent on the way.
(7) Drain
If the liquid must be drained to protect from freezing, install the drain valve.
(8) Pipe support
Install the pipe support so that the pipe weight can not be loaded to pump.
(9) Priming piping
Install piping for priming in case of suction lift.
7. Electrical wiring
Electrical works or wiring must be carried out by qualified and authorized person according to local law or regulation.
• Use the electromagnetic switch which conforms to motor specifications such as voltage and capacity etc.
• If pump is installed outdoor, wiring must be done so that water can not get into switch.
• Electromagnetic switch and push-button switch must securely installed apart from the pump.
• Star-delta starter, inverter or soft starter is recommended to start the motor of 5.5 kW or more power which drives the pump.
* See the instruction manual of the motor manufacturer for the handling of the motor.
8. Protection
It is recommended to install the following monitoring devices to protect the pump.
1. Current sensor/Power sensor The sensors monitor the motor load and stop the pump on the detection of load change.
2. Pressure sensor The sensor monitors the starting pressure and stops the pump on the detection of
pressure change.
3. Flow sensor The sensor monitors the discharge flow and stops the pump on the detection of
flow change.
4. Level sensor The sensor monitors the liquid level and stops the pump when it falls below the
specified level.
It is recommended to install two or more monitoring devices. The more monitoring devices are installed, the more
possibility of protecting the pump.
The DR series dry running protector (electric current sensing type) is also available as an option. Contact us for detail.
- 13 -
OPERATION
9. Precautions on operation........................ 15
10. Operation (Starting) .................................16
11. Pump stopping ..........................................16
- 14 -
9. Precautions on operation
CAUTION
● Never operate pump dry or with suction side valve closed.
● Dry running possible model (CF type of carbon bearing) can run dry (completely no liquid in pump)
continuously one hour max. However rubbing parts are worn in a short time which will result in pump
damage in the worst case if pump runs dry continuously exceeding one hour or if it runs dry repeatedly
although it is short time.
● After the pump ran dry, leave the pump one hour or more for cooling down to start it once again. If the
liquid flows into the pump just after the pump ran dry, ceramic parts are cracked due to heat shock.
● Check the direction of rotation of pump. Clockwise seen from motor fan is correct direction. If operated in
reverse, pump may be damaged.
● Stop the pump within one minute if it is operated in cavitation.
● Do not run pump with air sucking in.
● If magnet coupling is disconnected, pump can not transfer liquid. Stop pump within a minute and settle
the cause of disconnection before pump is started again.
● Intermittent operation
Frequent repetition of stop/start is not recommended. Stop/start repetition must be limited to six times an
hour. Frequent stop/run more than six times an hour may cause accelerated damage of parts and low-
ered durability.
● Temperature change at starting, stopping and operating of pump must be within 80 deg. C.
● Fully close the discharge valve when pump is started to avoid water hammer.
● If the pump is operated with discharge valve closed for a long time, the liquid temperature inside the
pump rises, which may cause pump damage. Do not run the pump for more than one minute with dis-
charge valve closed.
● If power is interrupted while pump is running, switch off pump and close discharge valve.
● Pay attention so that discharge pressure can not exceed pump allowable pressure of 1 MPa.
Check that there is no looseness on each bolt before operating pump.Tighten especially the bolts which
are holding rear casing support to the specific tightening torque subsequent to the first tightening. Refer
to the [13.Disassembling&assembling] for the specific torque value.
● Observe the allowable minimum flow rate. If the pump is operated below the allowable minimum flow
rate, bearing or rubbing parts may be seizured due to lack of lubrication and cooling.
Allowable min. flow rate MDM25 : 20 /min.
MDM40, 50, 65 : 50 /min.
● When high temperature liquid is transferred, pump surface becomes very hot. Take protective measure
against burn.
Liquid temp. Max. pump surface temp. (Amb. temp. 40 deg.C)
100 deg. C 90 deg. C
120 deg. C 110 deg. C
150 deg. C 135 deg. C
● Pump noise
85 dB for MDM25-1, 25-2, 40-1, 50-1
95 dB for MDM25-3, 40-2, 65-1
- 15 -
10. Operation (Starting)
1. Fully close discharge valve and fully open suction valve.
2. Fill liquid into pump
• In case of flooded suction, confirm if suction valve is fully opened.
• In case of suction lift, prime to fill liquid into suction piping.
3. Check rotating direction of motor.
• Start motor momentarily (within a second) to check direction. Direction is shown on "arrow" mark on pump.
(Clockwise seen from motor fan side)
• Also check if motor fan smoothly stops when switched off. If it does not stop smoothly, pump rotating parts
may be locked. Check the rotating parts.
4. Air vent operation
• Before pump operation, vent the air in the pump.
• Fully open the valve in air vent piping and repeat one second running for three to five times.
• After the air vent running, fully close the discharge valve.
Note: In case air vent piping is not equipped, open the discharge valve to repeat momentary run several
times.
5. Starting pump
• Start pump with discharge valve fully closed. (Maximum one minute)
• Confirm that discharge pressure rises to shut-down pressure.
• Gradually open discharge valve to get specified pressure (capacity).
Note: Pay attention to over-load caused by excessively opened valve.
Keep minimum allowable capacity to avoid seizure of bearing or rubbing parts.
2P 4P
MDM25 20 /min 10 /min
MDM40, 50, 65 50 /min 20 /min
11. Pump stopping

1. Slowly close the discharge valve
Quick closing of valve may cause water hammer and pump damage.
2. Switch off and stop the pump
Confirm if pump stops smoothly. If pump stops suddenly and not smoothly, inspection is needed.
3. When the pump is stopped for a long period, anti freezing measure must be taken so that the liquid can not be fro-
zen in the pump or piping.
- 16 -
Maintenance
12. Troubleshooting ........................................18
13. Maintenance & inspection ..................... 20
14. Disassembling & assembling.................21
15. Repair parts list .........................................27
16. Mass of pump........................................... 45
- 17 -
12. Troubleshooting
Symptom on pump
Troubles When disch. valve When disch. valve Cause Check & countermeasures
closed opened
Liquid Press. gauge & vac- • Lack of priming • Stop pump and reple-
can not be uum gauge indicate liquid nish pump with liquid
sucked zero. • Dry running to re-start.
Primed liquid drops • Foot valve is cl- • Clean foot valve
quickly ogged by foreign • Check if foreign matters
matters. are not adhered to valve
seat.
After starting, pres- Pressure gauge vi- • Air is sucked from • Check if connected
sure drops as soon brates and drops to suction pipe or gas- flanges are completely
as discharge valve is zero. ket. sealed.
opened. • Check if liquid level of
tank is not excessively
lowered.
• Disconnected ma- • Check amperage to see
gnet coupling if motor is not overload-
ed.
• Check if foreign matters
do not lock imp-eller or
magnet capsule
• Check if voltage is nor-
mal.
Press. gauge shows • Low pump speed • Check wiring or motor.
low pressure • Reverse rotation • Interchange wiring con-
nection.
Discharge Pressure gauge & Vacuum gauge indi- • Strainer is clog- • Remove foreign mat-
capacity is vacuum gauge indicates high figure. ged by foreign ters.
small. cates normal figure. matters.
Vacuum gauge • Air pocket in suc- • Check and remedy suc-
indicates very high tion piping tion piping.
figure. • Foreign matters • Remove foreign mat-
are clogged at ters.
impeller inlet.
Pressure gauge & • Air is sucked in • Check connection part
vacuum gauge vi- from suction pipe of pipes and retighten it.
brate. or gasket.
• Foreign matters • Remove foreign mat-
clog at discharge ters.
side. • Remove foreign matters
or scales in piping.
Vacuum gauge indi- • There are resis- • Check if there is not
cates hign but pres- tance such as air protruded section in
sure gauge indicates pocket etc. in suc- suction piping.
normal. tion piping.
- 18 -
Symptom on pump
Troubles When disch. valve When disch. valve Cause Check & countermeasures
closed opened
Discharge Pressure gauge & Pressure is high but • Too high actual • Check actual head of
capacity is vacuum gauge indi- vacuum is normal. head or too large discharge piping and
small. cates normal figure. pipe resistance loss of pipe resistance.
Pressure is low and Pressure is low and • Motor rotates in • Interchange motor wir-
vacuum is very low. vacuum is low. reverse ing.
Motor is ov- • Lowered power • Check voltage or fre-
erheated. voltage quency.
• Overload • Check density and vis-
cosity of liquid
• Too high ambient • Ventilate
temperature
Discharge Vacuum gauge indi- • Foreign matters • Remove foreign mat-
capacity is cates high figure. clog suction pip- ters.
rapidly re- ing.
duced.
Pump vib- • Foundation is not • Re-install the pump.
rates. perfect.
• Loosened mount- • Re-tighten
ing bolts.
• Cavitation occurs. • Resolve the reason of
cavitation.
• Worn or melted • Replace
bearing
• Broken magnet • Replace
capsule or spindle
• Bad dynamic bal- • Resolve the reason or
ance of drive mag- replace
net
• Worn bearing of • Replace bearing or
motor motor
- 19 -
13. Maintenance & inspection
Warning
• Magnetic force is very strong. Pay attention when you handle the magnet capsule or driving magnet so that
fingers can not be injured by attraction of magnets.
• The persons who are assisted by electronic devices such as pacemakers etc. are prohibited to approach the
magnet capsule and drive magnet.
Caution
• Magnetic force is very strong. Pay attention iron pieces or powder can not be attracted to the magnet capsule
or drive magnet.
• Do not approach the magnetic card to the pump not to break the data.
1. Periodical inspection (Once a six months)
Parts name Inspection items Countermeasures

Drive magnet • If there is no rubbed trace. • If abnormality is found, consult dealer.
• If drive magnet housing is correctly • Re-mount the drive magnet to motor shaft or re-
mounted or if hex. bolts are not loos- tighten the bolt.
ened.
• Decentering of magnet and motor shaft. • Re-tighten bolts or replace drive magnet. (Consult
(Max. 0.1 mm) dealer if replacement is needed.)
Rear casing • Rubbed trace in inner surface. • If abnormality is found, consult dealer.
• If there is no cracks. • If crack is found, replace.
• Wear of thrust ring. • If worn abnormally, consult dealer.
• Dirty inside. • Cleaning
Magnet cap- • If there is no rubbed trace. • If abnormality is found, consult dealer.
sule • If there is no cracks. • If abnormality is found, consult dealer.
• Measure the bearing inner diameter. • Replace if worn excessively.
• If impeller is securely fixed to magnet • If loosened, replace or consult dealer.
capsule.
Impeller • Measure the mouth ring thickness. • Replace if excessively worn.
• If there is no cracks. • Replace if cracked.
• If there is no trace of cavitation. • Resolve the reason.
(Abnormal wear, seizure etc.)
• Dirt or clog inside impeller. • Clean
• Change of dimension. • Replace if abnormality is found.
Front casing • Dirty wet-end. • Clean
• If there is no cracks. • Replace if abnormality is found.
• If there is no abnormal wear, cracks, • Consult dealer if abnormality is found.
rubbed traces in liner ring.
• Clogged drain. • Clean
• If there is no swelling or cracks in gas- • Replace if abnormality is found.
ket.
• If there is no rubbed trace. • Consult if abnormality is found.
Spindle • If there is no crack. • Replace if abnormality is found.
• Wear against bearing • Replace if excessively worn.
- 20 -
2. Wear limit of bearing and spindle (Time to be replaced) Unit: mm
Bearing inner dia. Spindle outer dia.

Model
New one Wear limit New one Wear limit
MDM25-1 20 21 20 19
MDM25-2, MDM40-1, MDM50-1 26 27 26 25
MDM25-3, MDM40-2, MDM65-1 30 31 30 29
Note1. When the clearance between bearing inner dia. and spindle outer dia. exceeds 1 mm, replace by new ones.
Carbon bearing (CF) type: Replace by new one either spindle or bearing which is worn more (normally it is
bearing) .
SiC bearing (KK) type: Replace by new ones both bearing and spindle.
2. It may possible that rubbing parts are worn a little in a short time after the pump is started first time, but it is
not abnormal.
3. Wear limit of mouth ring (Time to be replaced)
Step between mouth ring and impeller is 2 mm when the pump is shipped. Replace mouth ring when this step
becomes zero.
Thickness of mouth ring New one

Model Impeller
New one Wear limit 2mm
MDM25-1, MDM25-2,
8 mm 6 mm
MDM40-1
MDM25-3, MDM40-2,
9 mm 7 mm
MDM50-1, MDM65-1 Mouth ring
14. Disassembling & assembling

Tool list
Following tools are necessary to disassemble and assemble the pump.
MDM25-2, MDM25-3,
Tool MDM25-1 Remarks
MDM40, MDM50, MDM65
Spanner 13 mm, 17 mm, 19 mm 13 mm, 19 mm, 24 mm 1 pc/each
Hex. wrench 4 mm, 5 mm 4 mm, 5 mm 1 pc/each
To remove & mount bear-
Plastic round bar 24 mm dia. × 80 L 34 mm dia. × 100 L
ing
Plastic welder or
1 unit
industrial dryer
Hand press 1 unit
- 21 -
1. Disassembly of pump casing
(1) Remove hex. bolts (901.3) and drain plate (122.1) to drain
liquid inside.
For the type without drain, disassemble the pump after
the liquid inside is neutralized or the pump is cleaned by
water.
Warning
If all the hex. bolts are loosened simultaneously, liquid
will splash and will result in injury.
(2) Remove hex. bolts (901.7) of foot support (330).

(3) Remove hex. bolts (901.5) of pump side.
(4) Separate pump body from foot support by screwing

two bolts (M12 × 100, and M10 × 50 for MDM25-1)
from motor side through bolt threads holes of foot sup-
port. Screw in bolts alternatively to remove foot support
backward. (Screw in bolts by approx. 80 mm and approx.
40mm for MDM25-1).
(5) Pull out backward motor and foot support by lifting
them by crane or so. Take care so that the motor and foot
support are pulled out straight to backward. Otherwise,
drive magnet (858) touches the rear casing (158).
(6) Remove hex. bolts (901.4) of cover (100.2) to pull out
rear casing holder.
- 22 -
(7) Then, remove rear casing (158) from rear casing cover
(159). If rear casing is hard to remove, remove it by turn-
ing. Pay attention not to drop the impeller (230)/magnet
capsule (859) unit which is located in the rear casing.
2. Removal of impeller and bearing

(1) Stand up the claw of rear ring (314.4) after it was heated
by plastic welder or industrial dryer.
(2) Apply plastic made round bar of 34 mm dia. × 100L

(24 mm dia. × 80 L for MDM25-1) on the bearing end
through impeller side and remove bearing (310) and rear
ring (314.4) using hand press etc.
- 23 -
(3) Remove impeller fixing pin (942) of upper part of mag-
net capsule by pushing it by screw driver or like.
(4) Remove impeller (230) from magnet capsule (859). If it

is hard to remove, slightly strike the impeller back side
with plastic hammer.
Impeller (230) and magnet capsule (859) of high temp.
type of MDM25-3 and MDM40-2 can not be separated
because they are unified by welding.
3. Replacement of mouth ring

(1) Stand up the claw of impeller after it was heated by plas-
tic welder or industrial dryer.
(2) Replace the mouth ring (314.2), and fix it by heating the
claw with plastic welder or industrial dryer and push the
claw down.
- 24 -
4. Replacement of spindle
(1) Spindle (210) is slightly pressed into rear casing (158).
Pull out the spindle by a hand.
If it is hard to pull it out, pull it out by shaking it right
and left.
(2) Wipe off the stain at spindle inserted part of rear casing
and insert the spindle. Use hand press or like if it is hard
to insert.
5. Mounting impeller and bearing

(1) Put together the depressed and hollowed parts of impel-
ler and magnet capsule and insert the impeller into mag-
net capsule.
At the same time, align the insert ports of impeller pin.
(2) Insert the impeller pin. Pliers are useful for easy inser-
tion.
(3) Put the magnet capsule on top and insert the bearing into
magnet capsule by using hand press. Before starting the
works, warm the magnet capsule putting it in water of 90
deg. C.
(4) Then, insert the rear ring and fix it by heating the claw
with plastic welder or industrial dryer to weld it and push
it to rear ring.
- 25 -
6. Assembling
Assemble the pump in reverse procedures paying attention to
the following points.
● Replacement of gasket
Do not fail to replace the gasket by new one. Pay attention
so that it cannot be forgotten to be put or it can be mounted
correctly without twist or bite. Clean the sealing surface
before mounting the gasket.
● Tightening of bolts
Tighten the bolts diagonally and evenly.
● Cleaning of magnet capsule
Powdered iron or like can be attracted to the magnet cap-
sule. Remove the foreign matters before assembling.
(1) Mount the gasket on front casing (100.1).
(2) Mount impeller/magnet capsule unit on rear casing and
mount them on front casing by rotating the rear casing
right and left.
(3) Then mount the rear casing cover and securely fix the
rear casing support by tightening hex. bolts diagonally
and evenly.
● Tightening torque of rear casing support
MDM25-1 : 58.8N · m
MDM25-2
MDM25-3
MDM40-1
85N · m
MDM40-2
MDM50-1
MDM65-1
(4) Remove foreign matters from the drive magnet.
(5) Lift the foot support/motor and insert the faucet part of
foot support into the rear casing support by unscrewing
the bolts alternatively. (Before the works, attached bolts
(M12 × 100) are screwed by half into the foot support.
(6) Then, fix the foot support and rear casing support by
hex. bolts. Foot support must be inserted straight, other-
wise, drive magnet will touch the rear casing cover.
- 26 -
(High temp. type) 159
159.1
158
314.3
400.1 210
314.4
801
310
859
100.1 230
942
314.1
100.1
15. Repair parts list
908.1
314.1
858
122.2 400.3 100.2
903.1 900
330.1 901.6
554.3 901.5 330
554.6
- 27 -
314.2 554.5
500.3
901.3 901.4
122.1 554.4 901.7
901.2
554.7
400.2 161
500.1 500.1 554.2 890
554.1 554.1 500.2
901.1
400.2
122.1
901.1 554.8
901.8
MDM25-1 MDM25-2 MDM25-3 MDM25-3 MDM40-1 MDM40-2 MDM40-2 MDM50-1 MDM65-1 MDM65-1
NO Parts name Model code Q'ty Low head High head 7.5kW or below 11/15/18.5kW 7.5kW or below 11/15/18.5kW 5.5/7.5kW 11/15/18.5kW Remarks
Code No. Code No. Code No. Code No. Code No. Code No. Code No. Code No. Code No. Code No.
100.1+ Front casing PKK 1 MDM0001 With drain hole
314.1 EKK 1 MDM0002 MDM0110 MDM0722 MDM0722 MDM0203 MDM0869 MDM0869 MDM0279 MDM0366 MDM0366 With drain hole
ECF MDM0003 MDM0111 MDM1003 MDM1003 MDM0204 MDM1002 MDM1002 MDM0280 MDM0367 MDM0367 With drain hole
PKK MDM0004 Wighout drain hole
EKK 1 MDM0005 MDM0112 MDM0723 MDM0723 MDM0205 MDM0870 MDM0870 MDM0281 MDM0368 MDM0368 Without drain hole
ECF MDM0006 MDM0113 MDM1001 MDM1001 MDM0206 MDM1000 MDM1000 MDM0282 MDM0369 MDM0369 Without drain hole
100.1+ Front casing unit PKK 1 MDM0114 MDM0724 MDM0726 MDM0207 MDM0871 MDM0873 MDM0283 MDM0472 MDM0464 With drain hole
314.1 (Note 1) PKK 1 MDM0115 MDM0725 MDM0727 MDM0208 MDM0872 MDM0874 MDM0284 MDM0473 MDM0465 Without drain hole
PKK F075 (Note 4) 1 MDM0114 MDM0726 MDM0207 MDM0873 MDM0283 MDM0464 With drain hole
PKK F075 (Note 4) 1 MDM0115 MDM0727 MDM0208 MDM0874 MDM0284 MDM0465 Without drain hole
100.2+ Cover unit (Note 1) PKK 1 MDM0007
903.1 EKK, ECF 1 MDM0008 MDM0116 MDM0728 MDM0729 MDM0209 MDM0875 MDM0876 MDM0285 MDM0474 MDM0466 For ETFE
EKK, ECF F075 (Note 4) 1 MDM0116 MDM0729 MDM0209 MDM0876 MDM0285 MDM0466 For ETFE
122.1 Drain plate Steel 1 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009
122.2 Air vent plate Steel 1 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 MDM0009 For PFA
- 28 -
158 Rear casing PKK 1 MDM0010 MDM0117 MDM0730 MDM0730 MDM0210 MDM0370 MDM0370 MDM0210 MDM0370 MDM0370
PKK, EKK, ECF for high temp. type 1 MDM0731 MDM0731 MDM0877 MDM0877
EKK, ECF 1 MDM0011 MDM0118 MDM0732 MDM0732 MDM0211 MDM0371 MDM0371 MDM0211 MDM0371 MDM0371
159 Rear casing cover FRP 1 MDM0012 MDM0119 MDM0733 MDM0733 MDM0212 MDM0119 MDM0119 MDM0212 MDM0119 MDM0119
159.1 Reinforce ring for high temp. type FRP 1 MDM0734 MDM0734 MDM0734 MDM0734
161 Rear casing support Ductile cast iron 1 MDM0013 MDM0120 MDM0852 MDM0852 MDM0213 MDM0878 MDM0878 MDM0213 MDM0120 MDM0120
186 Front spacer Steel 1 MDM0607 MDM0607 MDM0607 Note 5
210 Spindle PKK, EKK 1 MDM0014 MDM0121 MDM0372 MDM0372 MDM0121 MDM0372 MDM0372 MDM0121 MDM0372 MDM0372
ECF 1 MDM0015 MDM0122 MDM0373 MDM0373 MDM0122 MDM0373 MDM0373 MDM0122 MDM0373 MDM0373
230 Impeller
Refer to impeller parts list

230+ Impeller ass'y
314.2
230+ Impeller/magnet
310+ capsule ass'y
314.2+
Refer to impeller parts list
314.4+
859+
942
310 Bearing PKK, EKK 1 MDM0016 MDM0123 MDM0735 MDM0735 MDM0123 MDM0735 MDM0735 MDM0123 MDM0374 MDM0374
314.2 Mouth ring PKK, EKK 1 MDM0018 MDM0018 MDM0488 MDM0488 MDM0018 MDM0488 MDM0488 MDM0488 MDM0376 MDM0376
314.3 Rear thrust EKK, ECF 1 MDM0020 MDM0125 MDM0378 MDM0378 MDM0125 MDM0378 MDM0378 MDM0125 MDM0378 MDM0378
PKK 1 MDM0615 MDM0615 MDM0615 MDM0615
314.4 Rear ring PKK, EKK 1 MDM0021 MDM0126 MDM0126 MDM0126 MDM0126 MDM0126 MDM0126 MDM0126 MDM0126 MDM0126
330 Bracket (Note 2) F015, F022 1 MDM0023
F022 (Note 4) 1 MDM0604
- 29 -
F037 1 MDM0128 MDM0128 MDM0128
F055, F075 1 MDM0129 MDM0129 MDM0129 MDM0129 MDM0129 MDM0129
F075 (Note 4) 1 MDM0467 MDM0467 MDM0467 MDM0467 MDM0467 MDM0467
F110, F150, F185 1 MDM0467 MDM0467 MDM0467
F004-4P 1 MDM0616 0.4kW-4P
F007-4P 1 MDM0023 0.75kW-4P
F015-4P 1 MDM0620 MDM0620 MDM0620 MDM0620 MDM0620 MDM0620 1.5kW-4P
F022, F037-4P 1 MDM0128 MDM0128 MDM0128 MDM0128 MDM0128 MDM0128 2.2/3.7kW-4P
330.1 Motor adapter F150/F185 (Note 4) 1 MDM0610 MDM0610 MDM0610
F004-4P 1 MDM0617 0.4kW-4P
400.1 Gasket PTFE 1 MDM0024 MDM0130 MDM0736 MDM0736 MDM0214 MDM0130 MDM0130 MDM0214 MDM0130 MDM0130
400.2 Drain gasket PTFE 1 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 With drain type
400.3 Air vent gasket PTFE 1 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 MDM0025 With drain of PFA
500.1 Plain washer 2 MDM0026 MDM0026 MDM0026 MDM0026 MDM0026 MDM0026 MDM0026 MDM0026 MDM0026 MDM0026
554.1 Spring washer 2 MDM0028 MDM0028 MDM0028 MDM0028 MDM0028 MDM0028 MDM0028 MDM0028 MDM0028 MDM0028
554.4 Spring washer 6/8/10 MDM0030 MDM0029 MDM0490 MDM0490 MDM0029 MDM0490 MDM0490 MDM0029 MDM0029 MDM0029 25-1 : 6, 25-3 : 8, 40-2 : 10
554.6 Spring washer F015, F022 4 MDM0030
F022 (Note 4) 4 MDM0029
F037, F055, F075 4 MDM0029 MDM0029 MDM0029 MDM0029 MDM0029 MDM0029
F110, F150, F185 4 MDM0490 MDM0490 MDM0490
554.8 Spring washer F004-4P 4 MDM0028 0.4kW-4P
F015-4P 4 MDM0030 MDM0030 MDM0030 MDM0030 1.5kW-4P
801 Motor 1
858 Drive magnet unit F015 1 MDM0031
- 30 -
(Note 2) F022 1 MDM0032
F022 (Note 4) 1 MDM0605
F037 1 MDM0131 MDM0131 MDM0131
F055 1 MDM0132 MDM0286 MDM0132 MDM0286 MDM0132 MDM0286
F075 1 MDM0286 MDM0286 MDM0286 MDM0286 MDM0286 MDM0286
F110 1 MDM0738 MDM0738 MDM0738
F150 1 MDM0738 MDM0738 MDM0738
F185 1 MDM0738 MDM0738 MDM0738
F150 (Note 4) 1 MDM0739 MDM0739 MDM0739
F185 (Note 4) 1 MDM0739 MDM0739 MDM0739
F004-4P 1 MDM0618 0.4kW-4P
F007-4P 1 MDM0627 0.75kW-4P
F055-4P 1 MDM0737 MDM0737 MDM0626 5.5kW-4P
859 Magnet capsule unit PKK-F015 1 MDM0033
PKK-F022 1 MDM0033
PKK-F037 1 MDM0133 MDM0133 MDM0133
PKK-F055 1 MDM0133 MDM0287 MDM0133 MDM0287 MDM0133 MDM0287
PKK-F075 1 MDM0287 MDM0287 MDM0287 MDM0287 MDM0287 MDM0287
PKK-F110 1 MDM0469 MDM0469 MDM0469
PKK-F150 1 MDM0469 MDM0469 MDM0469
PKK-F185 1 MDM0469 MDM0469 MDM0469
PKK-F004-4P 1 MDM0033 0.4kW-4P
PKK-F007-4P 1 MDM0033 0.75kW-4P
PKK-F015-4P 1 MDM0133 MDM0133 MDM0133 MDM0133 MDM0133 MDM0133 1.5kW-4P
PKK-F055-4P 1 MDM0469 MDM0469 MDM0469 5.5kW-4P
EKK/ECF-F015 1 MDM0034
EKK/ECF-F022 1 MDM0034
EKK/ECF-F037 1 MDM0134 MDM0134 MDM0134
- 31 -
EKK/ECF-F055 1 MDM0134 MDM0228 MDM0134 MDM0228 MDM0134 MDM0228
EKK/ECF-F075 1 MDM0228 MDM0228 MDM0228 MDM0228 MDM0228 MDM0228
EKK/ECF-F004-4P 1 MDM0034 0.4kW-4P
EKK/ECF-F007-4P 1 MDM0034 0.75kW-4P
EKK/ECF-F015-4P 1 MDM0134 MDM0134 MDM0134 MDM0134 MDM0134 MDM0134 1.5kW-4P
EKK/ECF-F055-4P 1 MDM0470 MDM0470 MDM0470 5.5kW-4P
890 Base plate 1 MDM0035 MDM0135 MDM0135 MDM0471 MDM0135 MDM0135 MDM0471 MDM0135 MDM0135 MDM0471
F022 (Note 4) 1 MDM0606
900 Eye bolt 1 MDM0036 MDM0036 MDM0036 MDM0036 MDM0036 MDM0036 MDM0036 MDM0036 MDM0036 MDM0036
901.1 Hex. head bolt 2 MDM0037 MDM0037 MDM0037 MDM0037 MDM0037 MDM0037 MDM0037 MDM0037 MDM0037 MDM0037
901.4 Hex. head bolt 6/8/10 MDM0039 MDM0137 MDM0491 MDM0491 MDM0137 MDM0491 MDM0491 MDM0137 MDM0137 MDM0137 25-1 : 6, 25-3/40-2 : 10
901.6 Hex. head bolt F015, F022 4 MDM0041
F022 (Note 4) 4 MDM0555
F037 4 MDM0555 MDM0555 MDM0555
F055, F075 4 MDM0137 MDM0137 MDM0137 MDM0137 MDM0137 MDM0137
F110, F150, F185 4 MDM0491 MDM0491 MDM0491
F004-4P 4 MDM0619 0.4kW-4P
F007-4P 4 MDM0041 0.75kW-4P
F022, F037-4P 4 MDM0555 MDM0555 MDM0555 MDM0555 MDM0555 MDM0555 2.2/3.7kW-4P
- 32 -
F055-4P 4 MDM0137 MDM0137 MDM0137 5.5kW-4P
901.8 Hex. head bolt F004-4P 4 MDM0698 0.4kW-4P
903.1 Hex. socket head bolt 5 MDM0043 MDM0043 MDM0043 MDM0043 MDM0043 MDM0043 MDM0043 MDM0043 MDM0043 MDM0043 Note 3
903.2 Hex. socket head bolt F150/F185 (Note 4) 4 MDM0612 MDM0612 MDM0612
908.1 Hex. socket head bolt 2 MDM0044 MDM0044 MDM0044 MDM0044 MDM0044 MDM0044 MDM0044 MDM0044 MDM0044 MDM0044
942 Impeller pin 2 MDM0045 MDM0138 MDM0138 MDM0138 MDM0138 MDM0138 MDM0138 MDM0138 MDM0138 MDM0138
Note 1: For MDM65, code No. is for TEFC motor type. Ask IWAKI if explosion proof or other type motor is mounted.
Note 2: Code No. is for TEFC motor type. Ask IWAKI if explosion proof or other type motor is mounted.
Note 3: For PFA type of MDM25-1 and all models of ETFE.
Note 4: For safety increased motor.
Note 5: For 7.5kW safety increased motor except MDM65.
MDM25 Impeller parts list
Impeller Motor Q'ty/ Parts code No.
Model NO Parts name
size code power unit PKK EKK ECF
230 Impeller 165 1 MDM0046 MDM0067 MDM0067
160 1 MDM0047 MDM0068 MDM0068
150 1 MDM0048 MDM0069 MDM0069
140 1 MDM0049 MDM0070 MDM0070
130 1 MDM0050 MDM0071 MDM0071
120 1 MDM0051 MDM0072 MDM0072
110 1 MDM0052 MDM0073 MDM0073
100 1 MDM0084 MDM0109 MDM0109
170 4P 1 MDM0628 MDM0632 MDM0632
230+ Impeller ass'y 165 1 MDM0053 MDM0074 MDM0093
314.2 160 1 MDM0054 MDM0075 MDM0094
150 1 MDM0055 MDM0076 MDM0095
140 1 MDM0056 MDM0077 MDM0096
130 1 MDM0057 MDM0078 MDM0097
120 1 MDM0058 MDM0079 MDM0098
110 1 MDM0059 MDM0080 MDM0099
100 1 MDM0083 MDM0081 MDM0100
170 4P 1 MDM0629 MDM0633 MDM0637
MDM25-1
230+ Impeller/magnet 165 1.5kW 1 MDM0060 MDM0085 MDM0101
310+ capsule ass'y 160 1.5kW 1 MDM0061 MDM0086 MDM0102
314.2+ 150 1.5kW 1 MDM0062 MDM0087 MDM0103
314.4+ 140 1.5kW 1 MDM0063 MDM0088 MDM0104
859+ 130 1.5kW 1 MDM0064 MDM0089 MDM0105
942 120 1.5kW 1 MDM0065 MDM0090 MDM0106
110 1.5kW 1 MDM0066 MDM0091 MDM0107
100 1.5kW 1 MDM0082 MDM0092 MDM0108
165 2.2kW 1 MDM0060 MDM0085 MDM0101
160 2.2kW 1 MDM0061 MDM0086 MDM0102
150 2.2kW 1 MDM0062 MDM0087 MDM0103
140 2.2kW 1 MDM0063 MDM0088 MDM0104
130 2.2kW 1 MDM0064 MDM0089 MDM0105
120 2.2kW 1 MDM0065 MDM0090 MDM0106
110 2.2kW 1 MDM0066 MDM0091 MDM0107
100 2.2kW 1 MDM0082 MDM0092 MDM0108
170 0.4kW-4P 1 MDM0630 MDM0634 MDM0635
170 0.75kW-4P 1 MDM0630 MDM0634 MDM0635
190 1 MDM0140 MDM0164 MDM0164
180 1 MDM0141 MDM0165 MDM0165
170 1 MDM0142 MDM0166 MDM0166
MDM25-2 160 1 MDM0143 MDM0167 MDM0167
150 1 MDM0144 MDM0168 MDM0168
140 1 MDM0145 MDM0169 MDM0169
130 1 MDM0146 MDM0170 MDM0170
200 4P 1 MDM0640 MDM0645 MDM0645
- 33 -
Model NO Parts name
314.2 190 1 MDM0148 MDM0172 MDM0188
180 1 MDM0149 MDM0173 MDM0189
170 1 MDM0150 MDM0174 MDM0190
160 1 MDM0151 MDM0175 MDM0191
150 1 MDM0152 MDM0176 MDM0192
140 1 MDM0153 MDM0177 MDM0193
130 1 MDM0154 MDM0178 MDM0194
200 4P 1 MDM0641 MDM0646 MDM0650
314.2+ 180 3.7kW 1 MDM0157 MDM0181 MDM0197
314.4+ 170 3.7kW 1 MDM0158 MDM0182 MDM0198
859+ 160 3.7kW 1 MDM0159 MDM0183 MDM0199
942 150 3.7kW 1 MDM0160 MDM0184 MDM0200
140 3.7kW 1 MDM0161 MDM0185 MDM0201
130 3.7kW 1 MDM0162 MDM0186 MDM0202
195 5.5kW 1 MDM0155 MDM0179 MDM0195
MDM25-2
190 5.5kW 1 MDM0156 MDM0180 MDM0196
180 5.5kW 1 MDM0157 MDM0181 MDM0197
170 5.5kW 1 MDM0158 MDM0182 MDM0198
160 5.5kW 1 MDM0159 MDM0183 MDM0199
150 5.5kW 1 MDM0160 MDM0184 MDM0200
140 5.5kW 1 MDM0161 MDM0185 MDM0201
130 5.5kW 1 MDM0162 MDM0186 MDM0202
195 7.5kW 1 MDM0556 MDM0564 MDM0572
190 7.5kW 1 MDM0557 MDM0565 MDM0573
180 7.5kW 1 MDM0558 MDM0566 MDM0574
170 7.5kW 1 MDM0559 MDM0567 MDM0575
160 7.5kW 1 MDM0560 MDM0568 MDM0576
150 7.5kW 1 MDM0561 MDM0569 MDM0577
140 7.5kW 1 MDM0562 MDM0570 MDM0578
130 7.5kW 1 MDM0563 MDM0571 MDM0579
200 1.5kW-4P 1 MDM0642 MDM0647 MDM0649
200 2.2kW-4P 1 MDM0642 MDM0647 MDM0649
200 3.7kW-4P 1 MDM0643 MDM0648 MDM0651
220 1 MDM0741 MDM0765 MDM0765
210 1 MDM0742 MDM0766 MDM0766
200 1 MDM0743 MDM0767 MDM0767
190 1 MDM0744 MDM0768 MDM0768
MDM25-3 180 1 MDM0745 MDM0769 MDM0769
(except high
170 1 MDM0746 MDM0770 MDM0770
temp. type of
PKK) 160 1 MDM0747 MDM0771 MDM0771
314.2 220 1 MDM0854 MDM0773 MDM0919
210 1 MDM0855 MDM0774 MDM0920
200 1 MDM0856 MDM0775 MDM0921
190 1 MDM0857 MDM0776 MDM0922
- 34 -
Model NO Parts name
314.2 170 1 MDM0859 MDM0778 MDM0924
160 1 MDM0860 MDM0779 MDM0925
314.2+ 210 5.5kW 1 MDM0758 MDM0790 MDM0936
314.4+ 200 5.5kW 1 MDM0759 MDM0791 MDM0937
859+ 190 5.5kW 1 MDM0760 MDM0792 MDM0938
942 180 5.5kW 1 MDM0761 MDM0793 MDM0939
170 5.5kW 1 MDM0762 MDM0794 MDM0940
160 5.5kW 1 MDM0763 MDM0795 MDM0941
225 7.5kW 1 MDM0756 MDM0788 MDM0934
220 7.5kW 1 MDM0757 MDM0789 MDM0935
210 7.5kW 1 MDM0758 MDM0790 MDM0936
200 7.5kW 1 MDM0759 MDM0791 MDM0937
190 7.5kW 1 MDM0760 MDM0792 MDM0938
180 7.5kW 1 MDM0761 MDM0793 MDM0939
170 7.5kW 1 MDM0762 MDM0794 MDM0940
160 7.5kW 1 MDM0763 MDM0795 MDM0941
225 11kW 1 MDM0861 MDM0796 MDM0942
220 11kW 1 MDM0862 MDM0797 MDM0943
210 11kW 1 MDM0863 MDM0798 MDM0944
MDM25-3 200 11kW 1 MDM0864 MDM0799 MDM0945
(except high
190 11kW 1 MDM0865 MDM0800 MDM0946
temp. type of
PKK) 180 11kW 1 MDM0866 MDM0801 MDM0947
170 11kW 1 MDM0867 MDM0802 MDM0948
160 11kW 1 MDM0868 MDM0803 MDM0949
225 15kW 1 MDM0861 MDM0796 MDM0942
220 15kW 1 MDM0862 MDM0797 MDM0943
210 15kW 1 MDM0863 MDM0798 MDM0944
200 15kW 1 MDM0864 MDM0799 MDM0945
190 15kW 1 MDM0865 MDM0800 MDM0946
180 15kW 1 MDM0866 MDM0801 MDM0947
170 15kW 1 MDM0867 MDM0802 MDM0948
160 15kW 1 MDM0868 MDM0803 MDM0949
225 18.5kW 1 MDM0861 MDM0796 MDM0942
220 18.5kW 1 MDM0862 MDM0797 MDM0943
210 18.5kW 1 MDM0863 MDM0798 MDM0944
200 18.5kW 1 MDM0864 MDM0799 MDM0945
190 18.5kW 1 MDM0865 MDM0800 MDM0946
180 18.5kW 1 MDM0866 MDM0801 MDM0947
170 18.5kW 1 MDM0867 MDM0802 MDM0948
160 18.5kW 1 MDM0865 MDM0800 MDM0949
225 1.5kW-4P 1 MDM0748 MDM0780 MDM0926
225 2.2kW-4P 1 MDM0748 MDM0780 MDM0926
225 3.7kW-4P 1 MDM0756 MDM0788 MDM0934
225 5.5kW-4P 1 MDM0861 MDM0796 MDM0942
- 35 -
Model NO Parts name Remarks
size power unit PKK-H
230+ Impeller/magnet 225 5.5kW 1 MDM0812 Impeller and magnet capsule
can not be separated because
859 capsule ass'y they are welded each other.
220 5.5kW 1 MDM0813
210 5.5kW 1 MDM0814
200 5.5kW 1 MDM0815
190 5.5kW 1 MDM0816
180 5.5kW 1 MDM0817
170 5.5kW 1 MDM0818
160 5.5kW 1 MDM0819
225 7.5kW 1 MDM0812
220 7.5kW 1 MDM0813
210 7.5kW 1 MDM0814
200 7.5kW 1 MDM0815
190 7.5kW 1 MDM0816
180 7.5kW 1 MDM0817
170 7.5kW 1 MDM0818
160 7.5kW 1 MDM0819
225 11kW 1 MDM0820
220 11kW 1 MDM0821
210 11kW 1 MDM0822
200 11kW 1 MDM0823
MDM25-3 190 11kW 1 MDM0824
(for high
180 11kW 1 MDM0825
temp. type of
PKK) 170 11kW 1 MDM0826
160 11kW 1 MDM0827
225 15kW 1 MDM0820
220 15kW 1 MDM0821
210 15kW 1 MDM0822
200 15kW 1 MDM0823
190 15kW 1 MDM0824
180 15kW 1 MDM0825
170 15kW 1 MDM0826
160 15kW 1 MDM0827
225 18.5kW 1 MDM0820
220 18.5kW 1 MDM0821
210 18.5kW 1 MDM0822
200 18.5kW 1 MDM0823
190 18.5kW 1 MDM0824
180 18.5kW 1 MDM0825
170 18.5kW 1 MDM0826
160 18.5kW 1 MDM0827
225 1.5kW-4P 1 MDM0804
225 2.2kW-4P 1 MDM0804
225 3.7kW-4P 1 MDM0812
225 5.5kW-4P 1 MDM0820
- 36 -
230+ Impeller/magnet 225 5.5kW 1 MDM0836
310+ capsule ass'y 220 5.5kW 1 MDM0837
314.2+ 210 5.5kW 1 MDM0838
314.4+ 200 5.5kW 1 MDM0839
859+ 190 5.5kW 1 MDM0840
942 180 5.5kW 1 MDM0841
170 5.5kW 1 MDM0842
160 5.5kW 1 MDM0843
225 7.5kW 1 MDM0836
220 7.5kW 1 MDM0837
210 7.5kW 1 MDM0838
200 7.5kW 1 MDM0839
190 7.5kW 1 MDM0840
180 7.5kW 1 MDM0841
170 7.5kW 1 MDM0842
160 7.5kW 1 MDM0843
225 11kW 1 MDM0844
220 11kW 1 MDM0845
210 11kW 1 MDM0846
200 11kW 1 MDM0847
MDM25-3 190 11kW 1 MDM0848
(for high 180 11kW 1 MDM0849
temp. type of 170 11kW 1 MDM0850
PKK) 160 11kW 1 MDM0851
225 15kW 1 MDM0844
220 15kW 1 MDM0845
210 15kW 1 MDM0846
200 15kW 1 MDM0847
190 15kW 1 MDM0848
180 15kW 1 MDM0849
170 15kW 1 MDM0850
160 15kW 1 MDM0851
225 18.5kW 1 MDM0844
220 18.5kW 1 MDM0845
210 18.5kW 1 MDM0846
200 18.5kW 1 MDM0847
190 18.5kW 1 MDM0848
180 18.5kW 1 MDM0849
170 18.5kW 1 MDM0850
160 18.5kW 1 MDM0851
225 1.5kW-4P 1 MDM0828
225 2.2kW-4P 1 MDM0828
225 3.7kW-4P 1 MDM0836
225 5.5kW-4P 1 MDM0844
Note: Tell us pump model code and Mfg. No. when impeller is ordered because actual impeller size may not be the same as those
shown here.
- 37 -
Model NO Parts name
size power unit PKK EKK ECF
160 1 MDM0216 MDM0240 MDM0240
150 1 MDM0217 MDM0241 MDM0241
145 1 MDM0218 MDM0242 MDM0242
140 1 MDM0219 MDM0243 MDM0243
130 1 MDM0220 MDM0244 MDM0244
120 1 MDM0221 MDM0245 MDM0245
110 1 MDM0222 MDM0246 MDM0246
170 4P 1 MDM0654 MDM0659 MDM0659
314.2 160 1 MDM0224 MDM0248 MDM0264
150 1 MDM0225 MDM0249 MDM0265
145 1 MDM0226 MDM0250 MDM0266
140 1 MDM0227 MDM0251 MDM0267
130 1 MDM0228 MDM0252 MDM0268
120 1 MDM0229 MDM0253 MDM0269
110 1 MDM0230 MDM0254 MDM0270
170 4P 1 MDM0655 MDM0668 MDM0664
314.2+ 150 3.7kW 1 MDM0233 MDM0257 MDM0273
314.4+ 145 3.7kW 1 MDM0234 MDM0258 MDM0274
MDM40-1 859+ 140 3.7kW 1 MDM0235 MDM0259 MDM0275
942 130 3.7kW 1 MDM0236 MDM0260 MDM0276
120 3.7kW 1 MDM0237 MDM0261 MDM0277
110 3.7kW 1 MDM0238 MDM0262 MDM0278
165 5.5kW 1 MDM0231 MDM0255 MDM0271
160 5.5kW 1 MDM0232 MDM0256 MDM0272
150 5.5kW 1 MDM0233 MDM0257 MDM0273
145 5.5kW 1 MDM0234 MDM0258 MDM0274
140 5.5kW 1 MDM0235 MDM0259 MDM0275
130 5.5kW 1 MDM0236 MDM0260 MDM0276
120 5.5kW 1 MDM0237 MDM0261 MDM0277
110 5.5kW 1 MDM0238 MDM0262 MDM0278
165 7.5kW 1 MDM0580 MDM0588 MDM0596
160 7.5kW 1 MDM0581 MDM0589 MDM0597
150 7.5kW 1 MDM0582 MDM0590 MDM0598
145 7.5kW 1 MDM0583 MDM0591 MDM0599
140 7.5kW 1 MDM0584 MDM0592 MDM0600
130 7.5kW 1 MDM0585 MDM0593 MDM0601
120 7.5kW 1 MDM0586 MDM0594 MDM0602
110 7.5kW 1 MDM0587 MDM0595 MDM0603
170 1.5kW-4P 1 MDM0656 MDM0661 MDM0663
170 2.2kW-4P 1 MDM0656 MDM0661 MDM0663
170 3.7kW-4P 1 MDM0657 MDM0662 MDM0665
- 38 -
Model NO Parts name
220 1 MDM0741 MDM0765 MDM0765
210 1 MDM0742 MDM0766 MDM0766
200 1 MDM0743 MDM0767 MDM0767
190 1 MDM0744 MDM0768 MDM0768
180 1 MDM0745 MDM0769 MDM0769
170 1 MDM0746 MDM0770 MDM0770
160 1 MDM0747 MDM0771 MDM0771
314.2 220 1 MDM0854 MDM0773 MDM0919
210 1 MDM0855 MDM0774 MDM0920
200 1 MDM0856 MDM0775 MDM0921
190 1 MDM0857 MDM0776 MDM0922
180 1 MDM0858 MDM0777 MDM0923
170 1 MDM0859 MDM0778 MDM0924
160 1 MDM0860 MDM0779 MDM0925
314.2+ 210 5.5kW 1 MDM0758 MDM0790 MDM0936
314.4+ 200 5.5kW 1 MDM0759 MDM0791 MDM0937
859+ 190 5.5kW 1 MDM0760 MDM0792 MDM0938
942 180 5.5kW 1 MDM0761 MDM0793 MDM0939
MDM40-2 170 5.5kW 1 MDM0762 MDM0794 MDM0940
(except high 160 5.5kW 1 MDM0763 MDM0795 MDM0941
temp. type of 225 7.5kW 1 MDM0756 MDM0788 MDM0934
PKK) 220 7.5kW 1 MDM0757 MDM0789 MDM0935
210 7.5kW 1 MDM0758 MDM0790 MDM0936
200 7.5kW 1 MDM0759 MDM0791 MDM0937
190 7.5kW 1 MDM0760 MDM0792 MDM0938
180 7.5kW 1 MDM0761 MDM0793 MDM0939
170 7.5kW 1 MDM0762 MDM0794 MDM0940
160 7.5kW 1 MDM0763 MDM0795 MDM0941
225 11kW 1 MDM0861 MDM0796 MDM0942
220 11kW 1 MDM0862 MDM0797 MDM0943
210 11kW 1 MDM0863 MDM0798 MDM0944
200 11kW 1 MDM0864 MDM0799 MDM0945
190 11kW 1 MDM0865 MDM0800 MDM0946
180 11kW 1 MDM0866 MDM0801 MDM0947
170 11kW 1 MDM0867 MDM0802 MDM0948
160 11kW 1 MDM0868 MDM0803 MDM0949
225 15kW 1 MDM0861 MDM0796 MDM0942
220 15kW 1 MDM0862 MDM0797 MDM0943
210 15kW 1 MDM0863 MDM0798 MDM0944
200 15kW 1 MDM0864 MDM0799 MDM0945
190 15kW 1 MDM0865 MDM0800 MDM0946
180 15kW 1 MDM0866 MDM0801 MDM0947
170 15kW 1 MDM0867 MDM0802 MDM0948
160 15kW 1 MDM0868 MDM0803 MDM0949
- 39 -
Model NO Parts name
314.2+ 210 18.5kW 1 MDM0863 MDM0798 MDM0944
314.4+ 200 18.5kW 1 MDM0864 MDM0799 MDM0945
MDM40-2 859+ 190 18.5kW 1 MDM0865 MDM0800 MDM0946
(except high 942 180 18.5kW 1 MDM0866 MDM0801 MDM0947
temp. type of 170 18.5kW 1 MDM0867 MDM0802 MDM0948
PKK) 160 18.5kW 1 MDM0868 MDM0803 MDM0949
225 1.5kW-4P 1 MDM0748 MDM0780 MDM0926
225 2.2kW-4P 1 MDM0748 MDM0780 MDM0926
225 3.7kW-4P 1 MDM0756 MDM0788 MDM0934
225 5.5kW-4P 1 MDM0861 MDM0796 MDM0942

230+ Impeller/magnet 225 5.5kW 1 MDM0812 Impeller and magnet capsule
can not be separated because
859 capsule ass'y they are welded each other.
220 5.5kW 1 MDM0813
210 5.5kW 1 MDM0814
200 5.5kW 1 MDM0815
190 5.5kW 1 MDM0816
180 5.5kW 1 MDM0817
170 5.5kW 1 MDM0818
160 5.5kW 1 MDM0819
225 7.5kW 1 MDM0812
220 7.5kW 1 MDM0813
210 7.5kW 1 MDM0814
200 7.5kW 1 MDM0815
190 7.5kW 1 MDM0816
180 7.5kW 1 MDM0817
MDM40-2 170 7.5kW 1 MDM0818
(for high
160 7.5kW 1 MDM0819
temp. type of
PKK) 225 11kW 1 MDM0820
220 11kW 1 MDM0821
210 11kW 1 MDM0822
200 11kW 1 MDM0823
190 11kW 1 MDM0824
180 11kW 1 MDM0825
170 11kW 1 MDM0826
160 11kW 1 MDM0827
225 15kW 1 MDM0820
220 15kW 1 MDM0821
210 15kW 1 MDM0822
200 15kW 1 MDM0823
190 15kW 1 MDM0824
180 15kW 1 MDM0825
170 15kW 1 MDM0826
160 15kW 1 MDM0827
- 40 -
859 capsule ass'y 220 18.5kW 1 MDM0821
210 18.5kW 1 MDM0822
200 18.5kW 1 MDM0823
190 18.5kW 1 MDM0824
180 18.5kW 1 MDM0825
170 18.5kW 1 MDM0826
160 18.5kW 1 MDM0827
225 1.5kW-4P 1 MDM0804
225 2.2kW-4P 1 MDM0804
225 3.7kW-4P 1 MDM0812
225 5.5kW-4P 1 MDM0820
314.2+ 210 5.5kW 1 MDM0838
314.4+ 200 5.5kW 1 MDM0839
859+ 190 5.5kW 1 MDM0840
942 180 5.5kW 1 MDM0841
170 5.5kW 1 MDM0842
160 5.5kW 1 MDM0843
225 7.5kW 1 MDM0836
220 7.5kW 1 MDM0837
MDM40-2 210 7.5kW 1 MDM0838
(for high 200 7.5kW 1 MDM0839
temp. type of 190 7.5kW 1 MDM0840
PKK) 180 7.5kW 1 MDM0841
170 7.5kW 1 MDM0842
160 7.5kW 1 MDM0843
225 11kW 1 MDM0844
220 11kW 1 MDM0845
210 11kW 1 MDM0846
200 11kW 1 MDM0847
190 11kW 1 MDM0848
180 11kW 1 MDM0849
170 11kW 1 MDM0850
160 11kW 1 MDM0851
225 15kW 1 MDM0844
220 15kW 1 MDM0845
210 15kW 1 MDM0846
200 15kW 1 MDM0847
190 15kW 1 MDM0848
180 15kW 1 MDM0849
170 15kW 1 MDM0850
160 15kW 1 MDM0851
225 18.5kW 1 MDM0844
220 18.5kW 1 MDM0845
210 18.5kW 1 MDM0846
200 18.5kW 1 MDM0847
- 41 -
MDM40-2 314.2+ 170 18.5kW 1 MDM0850
(for high 314.4+ 160 18.5kW 1 MDM0851
temp. type of 859+ 225 1.5kW-4P 1 MDM0828
PKK) 942 225 2.2kW-4P 1 MDM0828
225 3.7kW-4P 1 MDM0836
225 5.5kW-4P 1 MDM0844
Note: Tell us pump model code and Mfg. No. when impeller is orderd because actual impeller size may not be the same as those
shown here.
- 42 -
Model NO Parts name
160 1 MDM0475 MDM0482 MDM0482
150 1 MDM0476 MDM0483 MDM0483
140 1 MDM0477 MDM0484 MDM0484
130 1 MDM0478 MDM0485 MDM0485
120 1 MDM0479 MDM0486 MDM0486
110 1 MDM0480 MDM0487 MDM0487
170 4P 1 MDM0669 MDM0674 MDM0674
314.2 160 1 MDM0297 MDM0325 MDM0346
150 1 MDM0298 MDM0326 MDM0347
140 1 MDM0299 MDM0327 MDM0348
130 1 MDM0300 MDM0328 MDM0349
120 1 MDM0301 MDM0329 MDM0350
110 1 MDM0302 MDM0330 MDM0351
170 4P 1 MDM0670 MDM0675 MDM0679
314.2+ 150 3.7kW 1 MDM0305 MDM0333 MDM0354
314.4+ 140 3.7kW 1 MDM0306 MDM0334 MDM0355
MDM50-1
859+ 130 3.7kW 1 MDM0307 MDM0335 MDM0356
942 120 3.7kW 1 MDM0308 MDM0336 MDM0357
110 3.7kW 1 MDM0309 MDM0337 MDM0358
165 5.5kW 1 MDM0303 MDM0331 MDM0352
160 5.5kW 1 MDM0304 MDM0332 MDM0353
150 5.5kW 1 MDM0305 MDM0333 MDM0354
140 5.5kW 1 MDM0306 MDM0334 MDM0355
130 5.5kW 1 MDM0307 MDM0335 MDM0356
120 5.5kW 1 MDM0308 MDM0336 MDM0357
110 5.5kW 1 MDM0309 MDM0337 MDM0358
165 7.5kW 1 MDM0310 MDM0338 MDM0359
160 7.5kW 1 MDM0311 MDM0339 MDM0360
150 7.5kW 1 MDM0312 MDM0340 MDM0361
140 7.5kW 1 MDM0313 MDM0341 MDM0362
130 7.5kW 1 MDM0314 MDM0342 MDM0363
120 7.5kW 1 MDM0315 MDM0343 MDM0364
110 7.5kW 1 MDM0316 MDM0344 MDM0365
170 1.5kW-4P 1 MDM0671 MDM0676 MDM0678
170 2.2kW-4P 1 MDM0671 MDM0676 MDM0678
170 3.7kW-4P 1 MDM0672 MDM0677 MDM0680
Note: Tell us pump model code and Mfg. No. when impeller is orderd because actual impeller size may not be the same as those
shown here.
- 43 -
Model NO Parts name
160 1 MDM0290 MDM0318 MDM0318
150 1 MDM0291 MDM0319 MDM0319
140 1 MDM0292 MDM0320 MDM0320
130 1 MDM0293 MDM0321 MDM0321
120 1 MDM0294 MDM0322 MDM0322
110 1 MDM0295 MDM0323 MDM0323
170 4P 1 MDM0683 MDM0689 MDM0689
314.2 160 1 MDM0381 MDM0409 MDM0437
150 1 MDM0382 MDM0410 MDM0438
140 1 MDM0383 MDM0411 MDM0439
130 1 MDM0384 MDM0412 MDM0440
120 1 MDM0385 MDM0413 MDM0441
110 1 MDM0386 MDM0414 MDM0442
170 4P 1 MDM0684 MDM0690 MDM0695
314.2+ 150 5.5kW 1 MDM0396 MDM0424 MDM0452
314.4+ 140 5.5kW 1 MDM0397 MDM0425 MDM0453
859+ 130 5.5kW 1 MDM0398 MDM0426 MDM0454
942 120 5.5kW 1 MDM0399 MDM0427 MDM0455
110 5.5kW 1 MDM0400 MDM0428 MDM0456
165 7.5kW 1 MDM0394 MDM0422 MDM0450
MDM65-1
160 7.5kW 1 MDM0395 MDM0423 MDM0451
150 7.5kW 1 MDM0396 MDM0424 MDM0452
140 7.5kW 1 MDM0397 MDM0425 MDM0453
130 7.5kW 1 MDM0398 MDM0426 MDM0454
120 7.5kW 1 MDM0399 MDM0427 MDM0455
110 7.5kW 1 MDM0400 MDM0428 MDM0456
165 11kW 1 MDM0401 MDM0429 MDM0457
160 11kW 1 MDM0402 MDM0430 MDM0458
150 11kW 1 MDM0403 MDM0431 MDM0459
140 11kW 1 MDM0404 MDM0432 MDM0460
130 11kW 1 MDM0405 MDM0433 MDM0461
120 11kW 1 MDM0406 MDM0434 MDM0462
110 11kW 1 MDM0407 MDM0435 MDM0463
165 15kW 1 MDM0401 MDM0429 MDM0457
160 15kW 1 MDM0402 MDM0430 MDM0458
150 15kW 1 MDM0403 MDM0431 MDM0459
140 15kW 1 MDM0404 MDM0432 MDM0460
130 15kW 1 MDM0405 MDM0433 MDM0461
120 15kW 1 MDM0406 MDM0434 MDM0462
110 15kW 1 MDM0407 MDM0435 MDM0463
170 1.5kW-4P 1 MDM0685 MDM0691 MDM0694
170 2.2kW-4P 1 MDM0685 MDM0691 MDM0694
170 3.7kW-4P 1 MDM0686 MDM0692 MDM0696
170 5.5kW-4P 1 MDM0687 MDM0693 MDM0697
Note: Tell us pump model code and Mfg. No. when impeller is ordered because actual impeller size may not be the same as shown
here.
- 44 -
16. Mass of pump
Total mass with motor & base- Total mass with motor & with-
Model Output (kW) Mass of Motor (kg)
plate (kg) out baseplate (kg)
MDM25-1 1.5 85 60 18
2.2 85 60 19
MDM25-2 3.7 120 95 31
5.5 140 110 44
7.5 145 115 49
MDM-25-3 5.5 145 115 44
7.5 150 120 49
11 220 170 85
15 230 180 91
18.5 230 180 91
MDM40-1 3.7 115 90 31
5.5 135 105 44
7.5 140 110 49
MDM40-2 5.5 150 120 44
7.5 155 125 49
11 225 175 85
15 235 185 91
18.5 235 185 91
MDM50-1 3.7 120 90 31
5.5 135 105 44
7.5 140 110 49
MDM65-1 5.5 140 115 44
7.5 145 120 49
11 215 170 85
15 220 175 91
Note 1. Motor mass is based on TEFC outdoor motor made by HITACHI.
Note 2. 18.5kW motor is only for 60Hz.
- 45 -
( )Country codes
IWAKI CO.,LTD. 6-6 Kanda-Sudacho 2-chome Chiyoda-ku Tokyo 101-8558 Japan
TEL:(81)3 3254 2935 FAX:3 3252 8892(http://www.iwakipumps.jp)
Australia IWAKI Pumps Australia Pty. Ltd. TEL : (61)2 9899 2411 FAX : 2 9899 2421 Italy IWAKI Italia S.R.L. TEL : (39)02 990 3931 FAX : 02 990 42888
Austria IWAKI (Austria) GmbH TEL : (43)2236 33469 FAX : 2236 33469 Korea IWAKI Korea Co.,Ltd. TEL : (82)2 2630 4800 FAX : 2 2630 4801
Belgium IWAKI Belgium n.v. TEL : (32)1367 0200 FAX : 1367 2030 Malaysia IWAKIm Sdn. Bhd. TEL : (60)3 7803 8807 FAX : 3 7803 4800
China IWAKI Pumps (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. TEL : (86)21 6272 7502 FAX : 21 6272 6929 Norway IWAKI Norge AS TEL : (47)66 81 16 60 FAX : 66 81 16 61
China IWAKI Pumps (Guandong) Co., Ltd. TEL : (86)750 3866228 FAX : 750 3866278 Singapore IWAKI Singapore Pte. Ltd. TEL : (65)6316 2028 FAX : 6316 3221
China GFTZ IWAKI Engineering & Trading (Guangzhou) TEL : (86)20 8435 0603 FAX : 20 8435 9181 Spain IWAKI Iberica Pumps, S.A. TEL : (34)943 630030 FAX : 943 628799
China GFTZ IWAKI Engineering & Trading (Beijing) TEL : (86)10 6442 7713 FAX : 10 6442 7712 Sweden IWAKI Sverige AB TEL : (46)8 511 72900 FAX : 8 511 72922
Denmark IWAKI Nordic A/S TEL : (45)48 24 2345 FAX : 48 24 2346 Switzerland IWAKI (Schweiz) AG TEL : (41)26 674 9300 FAX : 26 674 9302
Finland IWAKI Suomi Oy TEL : (358)9 2745810 FAX : 9 2742715 Taiwan IWAKI Pumps Taiwan Co., Ltd. TEL : (886)2 8227 6900 FAX : 2 8227 6818
France IWAKI France S.A. TEL : (33)1 69 63 33 70 FAX : 1 64 49 92 73 Taiwan IWAKI Pumps Taiwan (Hsin-chu) Co., Ltd. TEL : (886)3 573 5797 FAX : (886)3 573 5798
Germany IWAKI EUROPE GmbH TEL : (49)2154 9254 0 FAX : 2154 9254 48 Thailand IWAKI (Thailand) Co.,Ltd. TEL : (66)2 322 2471 FAX : 2 322 2477
Holland IWAKI Holland B.V. TEL : (31)297 241121 FAX : 297 273902 U.K. IWAKI PUMPS (UK) LTD. TEL : (44)1743 231363 FAX : 1743 366507
Hong Kong IWAKI Pumps Co., Ltd. TEL : (852)2 607 1168 FAX : 2 607 1000 U.S.A. IWAKI AMERICA Inc. TEL : (1)508 429 1440 FAX : 508 429 1386
Indonesia IWAKI Singapore (Indonesia Branch) TEL : (62)21 690 6606 FAX : 21 690 6612 Vietnam IWAKI Pumps Vietnam Co.,Ltd. TEL : (84)613 933456 FAX : 613 933399
T383-13 '09/06
Appendix
MOTOR MANUAL - WEG

Motors | Automation | Energy | Transmission & Distribution | Coatings
Low and high voltage electric motors

Instructions manual for installation, operation and maintenance of electric motors
Motores elétricos de baixa e alta tensão

Manual de instalação, operação e manutenção de motores elétricos
Motores Eléctricos de baja y alta tensión

Manual de instalación, operación y mantenimiento de motores eléctricos
Nieder- und Hochspannungsmotoren

Installations-, Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung für Asynchronmotoren
Moteurs électriques à basse et haute tension

Consignes de sécurité pour l’installation, l’utilisation et la maintenance de moteurs
électriques
Электродвигатели двигателей низкого и высокого

напряжения
Инструкции по установке, эксплуатации и техническом обслуживании электромоторов
Elektrische motoren van lage en hoge spanning

Veiligheidsinstructies voor installatie, bediening en onderhoud van elektrische motoren
Motori elettrici di bassa e alta tensione

Manuale di installazione, gestione e manutenzione di motori elettrici
低壓及高壓電動機
电动机安装、操作及维修安全手册
English
Instructions manual for installation, operation and
maintenance of electric motors
3-6
Português
Manual de instalação, operação e manutenção de 7-11
motores elétricos
Español
Manual de instalación, operación y mantenimiento de 12-16
motores eléctricos
Deutsch
Installations-, Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung für
Asynchronmotoren
17-21
Français
Consignes de sécurité pour l’installation, l’utilisation et la 22-26
maintenance de moteurs électriques
Россию
Инструкции по установке, эксплуатации и техническом
обслуживании электромоторов
27-31
Veiligheidsinstructies voor installatie, bediening en Nederlandse

32-35
onderhoud van elektrische motoren
Italiano
Manuale di installazione, gestione e manutenzione di motori

elettrici
36-40
中文
电动机安装、操作及维修安全手册 41-43
2 | Motores Elétricos de Baixa e Alta Tensão

ENGLISH
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. FOREWORD.................................................................................................................. 3
2. SHIPMENT, STORAGE AND HANDLING .................................................................... 3
3. INSTALLATION.............................................................................................................. 4
4. OPERATION.................................................................................................................. 5
5. MAINTENANCE............................................................................................................. 5
6. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION....................................................................................... 5
7. EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY........................................................................ 5
8. WARRANTY TERM....................................................................................................... 6
1. FOREWORD
The installation, operation and maintenance of the motor must be always performed by qualified personnel
using proper tools and methods and following the instructions contained in the documents supplied with the
motor.
The instructions presented in this document are valid for WEG motors with the following characteristics:
g
Three-phase and single-phase induction motors (squirrel cage rotor);
g
Three-phase permanent magnet motors;
g
Three-phase hybrid motors (squirrel cage rotor + permanent magnets);
The objective of this manual is to provide important information, which must be considered during the shipment,
storage, installation, operation and maintenance of WEG motors. Therefore, we advise to make a careful and detailed
study of the instructions contained herein before performing any procedures on the motor. The noncompliance
with the instructions informed in this manual and others mentioned on the website www.weg.net voids the product
warranty and may cause serious personal injuries and material damages.
Electric motors have energized circuits and exposed rotating parts which may cause injuries to people.
2. SHIPMENT, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Check the conditions of the motor immediately upon receipt. When any damage is noticed, this must be reported in
writing to the transportation company, and immediately communicated to the insurance company and to WEG. In
this case, no installation job can be started before the detected problem has been solved.
Check if the nameplate data matches the invoice data and the environmental conditions in which the motor will be
installed. If the motor is not immediately installed, it must be stored in a clean and dry room protected against dust,
vibrations, gases and corrosive agents, and with relative humidity not exceeding 60%.
In order to prevent water condensation within the motor during the storage period, it is recommended to keep the
space heater ON (where provided). In order to prevent oxidation of the bearings and ensure an even distribution of
the lubricant, rotate the motor shaft at least once a month (at least five turns), always leaving it in a different position.
For bearings with oil mist lubrication systems, the motor must be stored horizontally, independently from the
mounting configuration, with ISO VG 68 oil in the bearing, (the amount is indicated in the motor manual available on
the website www.weg.net) and the shaft must be turned weekly. If the motors are stored for more than two years,
it is recommended to change the bearings, or to remove, wash, inspect and relubricate them before the motor is
started. After this storage period, it is also recommended to change the start capacitors of single-phase motors
since they loss their operating characteristics.
Handle the motor always carefully in order to prevent impacts and damages to the bearings and
always install the shaft transportation/locking device (if supplied) when transporting the motor.
Use only the eyebolts to lift the motor. However these eyebolts are designed for the motor
weight only. Thus never use these eyebolts to lift the motor with additional loads coupled to it. The
lifting eyebolts of the terminal box, fan cover, etc., are intended to handle only these parts when
disassembled from the motor. Additional information regarding the maximum allowable angle-of-
inclination is indicated in the general manual available on the website www.weg.net.
Low and High Voltage Electric Motors | 3
Periodically and mainly before the initial star-up, measure the insulation resistance of the motor winding.
Check the recommended values and the measuring procedures in the website.
3. INSTALLATION
During the installation, the motors must be protected against accidental energization.
Check the motor direction of rotation, turning it without load before it is coupled to the
load.
Remove the transportation devices and shaft locking device (if supplied) before starting the motor installation.
Motors must be only installed in places compatible with their mounting features and in applications and
environments for which they are intended.
Those motors with feet must be installed on bases duly planned in order to prevent vibrations and assure perfect
alignment. The motor shaft must be properly aligned with the shaft of the driven machine. Incorrect alignment,
as well as improper belt tension, will certainly damage the bearings, resulting in excessive vibrations and even
causing the shaft to rupture. The admissible shaft radial and axial loads indicated in the general manual of the
website must be respected. Use flexible coupling whenever possible.
When motors are fitted with oil lubricated bearings or oil mist lubrication systems, connect the cooling and
lubrication tubes (where provided). Only remove the corrosion protection grease from the shaft end and flange
immediately before the motor installation.
Unless specified otherwise in the purchase order, WEG motors are dynamically balanced with “half key” and
without load (uncoupled). The driving elements, such as pulleys, couplings, etc., must be balanced with “half key”
before they are mounted on the shaft of the motors.
Observe the correct assembly position of the drains as indicated in the manual on the website www.weg.net.
Do not cover and block the motor ventilation openings. Ensure a minimum clearance of
¼ (25%) of the diameter of the air intake of the fan cover from the walls. The air used for
cooling the motor must be at ambient temperature, limited to the temperature indicated on
the motor nameplate.
Motors installed outdoors or in the vertical position require the use of additional shelter to protect
them from water; for instance, use of a drip cover.
To prevent accidents, ensure that the grounding connection has been performed according to the
applicable standards and that the shaft key has been securely fastened before the motor is started.
Connect the motor properly to the power supply by means of safe and permanent contacts, always
considering the data informed on the nameplate, such as rated voltage, wiring diagram, etc.
For power cables, switching and protection devices dimensioning, consider the rated motor current, the
service factor, and the cable length, among others. For motors without terminal block, insulate the motor
terminal cables by using insulating materials that are compatible with the insulation class informed on the
nameplate. The minimum insulation distance between the non-insulated live parts themselves and between
live parts and the grounding must be: 5.5 mm for rated voltage up to 690 V; 8 mm for voltages up to 1.1 kV;
45 mm for voltages up to 6.9 kV; 70 mm for voltages up to 11 kV and 105 mm for voltages up to 16.5 kV.
In order to assure the degree of protection, unused cable inlet holes in the terminal
box must be properly closed with blanking plugs having and equal or higher degree of
protection to that indicated on the motor nameplate.
The motor must be installed with overload protection devices. When motor is fitted with temperature-
monitoring devices, they must be connected during the operation and even during tests.
Ensure the correct operation of the accessories (brake, encoder, thermal protection, forced ventilation, etc.)
installed on the motor before it is started.
Motors fitted with Automatic Thermal Protectors will reset automatically as soon as
the motor cools down. Thus, do not use motors with Automatic Thermal Protection in
applications where the auto-reseting of this device may cause injuries to people or damage
to equipment. Motors fitted with Manual Thermal Protectors require manual reset after they trip. If
the Automatic Thermal Protector or the Manual Thermal Protector trip, disconnect the motor from
4 | Low and High Voltage Electric Motors
the power supply and investigate the cause of the thermal protector tripping. Wmagnet
motors must be driven by WEG variable frequency drives only.
For more information about the use of variable frequency drives, follow the instructions in the motor manual
on the website www.weg.net and in the manual of the variable frequency drive.
4. OPERATION
During operation, do not touch the non-insulated energized parts and never touch or stay
too close to rotating parts.
Ensure that the space heater is always OFF during the motor operation.
The rated performance values and the operating conditions are specified on the motor nameplate. The
voltage and frequency variations of the power supply should never exceed the limits established in the
applicable standards.
Occasional different behavior during the normal operation (actuation of thermal protections, noise level,
vibration level, temperature and current increase) must always be assessed by qualified personnel. In case
of doubt, turn off the motor immediately and contact the nearest WEG service center.
Do not use roller bearings for direct coupling. Motors fitted with roller bearings require radial load to ensure
their proper operation.
For motors fitted with oil lubrication or oil mist systems, the cooling system must be ON even after the
machine is OFF and until the machine is at complete standstill.
After complete standstill, the cooling and lubrication systems (if any exist) must be switched OFF and the
space heaters must be switched ON.
5. MAINTENANCE
Before any service is performed, ensure that motor is at standstill, disconnected from
the power supply and protected against accidental energization. Even when the motor is
stopped, dangerous voltages may be present in space heater terminals.
If motors are fitted with capacitors, discharge them before any handling or service is performed.
Motor disassembly during the warranty period must be performed by a WEG authorized service
center only.
For motors with permanent magnet rotor (lines WQuattro and Wmagnet), the motor assembly and
disassembly require the use of proper devices due to the attracting or repelling forces that occur
between metallic parts. This work must only be performed by a WEG Authorized service center
specifically trained for such an operation. People with pacemakers cannot handle these motors.
The permanent magnets can also cause disturbances or damages to other electric equipment and
components during maintenance.
Regularly inspect the operation of the motor, according to its application, and ensure a free air flow. Inspect
the seals, the fastening bolts, the bearings, the vibration and noise levels, the drain operation, etc.
6. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
For further information about shipment, storage, handling, installation, operation and maintenance of electric
motors, access the website www.weg.net.
For special applications and operating conditions (for example, smoke extraction motors, totally enclosed
air over (TEAO), motors for high thrust applications, motors with brake) refer to the applicable manual on the
website www.weg.net or contact WEG.
When contacting WEG, please, have the full description of the motor at hand, as well as the serial number
and manufacturing date, indicated on the motor nameplate.
7. EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
WEG Equipamentos Elétricos S/A
Av. Prefeito Waldemar Grubba, 3000
89256-900 - Jaraguá do Sul – SC – Brazil,
and its authorised representative established in the European Community,
Low and High Voltage Electric Motors | 5
WEGeuro – Industria Electrica SA
Rua Eng Frederico Ulrich, Apartado 6074
4476-908 – Maia – Porto – Portugal
hereby declare that the products:
WEG induction motors and components for using in these motors:
Three-phase
IEC frames 63 to 630
Nema frames 42, 48, 56 and 143 to 9610
……………
Single-phase
……………
when installed, maintained and used in applications for which they were designed, and in compliance with
the relevant installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions, comply with the requirements of the
following European Directives and standards where applicable:
Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
Regulation (CE) No 640/2009
Directive 2009/125/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC (induction motors are considered inherently benign in terms of
electromagnetic compatibility)
Standards:
EN 60034-1/2-1/5/6/7/8/9/11/12/14/30 and 60204-1
From 29/12/2009 on low voltage electric motors are no longer considered under the scope of the current
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
CE marking in: 1996
Milton Oscar Castella
Engineering Director
Jaraguá do Sul, May 30th, 2011
8. WARRANTY TERM
WEG Equipamentos Elétricos S/A, Motor Unit, offers warranty against defects in workmanship and materials for their
products for a period of 18 months from the invoice issue date by factory or distributor / dealer, limited to 24 months from
date of manufacture. Motors of the HGF Line are covered for a period of 12 months from the invoice issue date by the
factory or distributor / dealer, limited to 18 months from the date of manufacture.
The paragraph above contains the legal warranty periods. If a warranty period is defined in a different way in the commercial,
technical proposal of a particular sale, that will override the time limits set out above.
The periods above are independent of installation date and provided that the following requirements are met: proper
transportation, handling and storage; correct installation in specified environmental conditions free of aggressive agents;
operation within the capacity limits and observation of the Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual; execution of
regular preventive maintenance; execution of repairs and/or changes only by personnel with WEG‘s written authorization;
in the occurrence of an anomaly, the product must be available to the supplier for the minimum period necessary to identify
the cause of the anomaly and to repair it properly; the buyer must immediately notify WEG of any defects occurred and
they must be later confirmed as manufacturing defects by WEG. The warranty does not include assembly and disassembly
services at the buyer’s premises, costs of product transportation, as well as travel, lodging and meals expenses for the
technical assistance staff when requested by the customer. The warranty service will be provided exclusively at a WEG
authorized Technical Assistance or at the plant.
Components, parts and materials whose useful life is usually less than 12 (twelve) months are not covered by the warranty.
Under no circumstance will warranty services extend the warranty period of the equipment. However, new warranty
equivalent to the original one will be due only to the components repaired or replaced by WEG.
The present warranty is limited to the product supplied. WEG will not be liable for damages to people, third parties, other
equipment and facilities, loss of profits or other incidental or consequential damages.
6 | Low and High Voltage Electric Motors
www.weg.net
Português 2
English 57
Español 111
57 Motores Elétricos
www.weg.net
Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

of Electric Motors
This manual provides information about WEG induction motors fitted with squirrel cage,
permanent magnet or hybrid rotors, low, medium and high voltage, in frame sizes IEC 56
to 630 and NEMA 42 to 9606/10.
The motor lines indicated below have additional information that can be checked in their
respective manuals:
g Smoke Extraction Motors;
g Electromagnetic Brake Motors;
g Hazardous Area Motors.
These motors meet the following standards, if applicable:

g NBR 17094-1: Máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 1: Trifásicos
g NBR 17094-2: Máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 2: Monofásicos
g IEC 60034-1: Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 1: Rating and Performance
g NEMA MG 1: Motors and Generators
g CSA C 22.2 N°100: Motors and Generators
g UL 1004-1: Rotating Electrical Machines – General Requirements
If you have any questions regarding this manual please contact your local WEG branch,
contact details can be found at www.weg.net.
58 Manual of Electric Motors

www.weg.net
Table of Contents
1. Terminology......................................................................................................... 61
2. Initial Recommendations................................................................................ 62
2.1. Warning Symbol.......................................................................................................................... 62
2.2. Receiving Inspection................................................................................................................. 62
2.3. Nameplates................................................................................................................................... 63
3. Safety Instructions......................................................................................... 66
4. Handling and Transport................................................................................ 67

4.1. Lifting............................................................................................................................................... 67
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt....................................................................................... 67
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts...................................................................................... 68
4.1.3. Vertical Motors . ...................................................................................................................... 69
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position................................................ 69
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF motors in the vertical position............................................... 70
4.2 Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position..... 71
5. Storage.................................................................................................................. 73
5.1. Exposed machined Surfaces.................................................................................................. 73
5.2. Storage........................................................................................................................................... 73
5.3 Bearings.......................................................................................................................................... 74
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings..................................................................................................... 74
5.3.2 Oil Lubricated bearings........................................................................................................... 74
ENGLISH
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings.................................................................................................... 75
5.3.4 Sleeve Bearing.......................................................................................................................... 75
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE............................................................................................................. 75
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement...................................................................................... 75
6. Installation.......................................................................................................... 78
6.1. Foundations.................................................................................................................................. 79
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING......................................................................................................................... 81
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 81
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors......................................................................................................... 81
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 82
6.3. Balancing....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4. Couplings....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4.1. Direct coupling......................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling.................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling......................................................................................................... 83
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors....................................................................................... 83
6.5. Leveling.......................................................................................................................................... 84
6.6. Alignment....................................................................................................................................... 84
6.7. Connection of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors.............................. 85
6.8. Connection of the cooling water system...................................................................... 85
6.9. Electrical connection............................................................................................................ 85
Manual of Electric Motors 59

www.weg.net
6.10. Connection of the thermal protection devices....................................................... 88

6.11. Resistance Temperature Detectors (Pt-100)................................................................. 89
6.12. Connection of the space heaters..................................................................................... 91
6.13. Starting Methods..................................................................................................................... 92
6.14. Motors driven by Frequency Inverter........................................................................... 93
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter.................................................................................................................... 93
6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire....................................................................................... 93
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils................................................................................................ 93
6.14.2. Bearing insulation.................................................................................................................. 94
6.14.3. Switching Frequency............................................................................................................. 94
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation................................................................................................ 94
7. Commissioning..................................................................................................... 95
7.1. Initial Start-up ............................................................................................................................ 95
7.2. Operating conditions .............................................................................................................. 97
7.2.1.Limits of vibration .................................................................................................................... 98
8. Maintenance......................................................................................................... 99
8.1. General Inspection.................................................................................................................... 99
8.2. Lubrication................................................................................................................................... 99
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings...................................................................................... 100
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting.............................................................................................. 102
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting................................................................................................... 102
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases.............................. 102
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings......................................................................................................... 103
ENGLISH
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings................................................................................................. 103

8.2.4. Sleeve bearings..................................................................................................................... 103
8.3. Motor assembly and disassembly.................................................................................... 104
8.3.1. Terminal box........................................................................................................................... 105
8.4. Drying the stator winding insulation............................................................................ 105
8.5. Spare parts................................................................................................................................. 106
9. Environmental Information........................................................................ 107

9.1. Packaging..................................................................................................................................... 107
9.2. Product........................................................................................................................................ 107
10. Troubleshooting chart x solutions.................................................... 108
11. Warranty Term................................................................................................ 109
12. Ec declaration of conformity.................................................................110

www.weg.net
1. Terminology
Balancing: the procedure by which the mass distribution of a rotor is checked and, if necessary, adjusted to
ensure that the residual unbalance or the vibration of the journals and/or forces on the bearings at a frequency
corresponding to service speed are within specified limits in International Standards.
[ISO 1925:2001, definition 4.1]
Balance quality grade: indicates the peak velocity amplitude of vibration, given in mm/s, of a rotor running free-
in-space and it is the product of a specific unbalance and the angular velocity of the rotor at maximum
operating speed.
Grounded Part: metallic part connected to the grounding system.
Live Part: conductor or conductive part intended to be energized in normal operation, including a neutral
conductor.
Authorized personnel: employee who has formal approval of the company.
Qualified personnel: employee who meets the following conditions simultaneously:

g Receives training under the guidance and responsibility of a qualified and authorized professional;
g Works under the responsibility of a qualified and approved professional.
Note: The qualification is only valid for the company that trained the employee in the conditions set out by the authorized and qualified
professional responsible for training.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
2. Initial Recommendations
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. Therefore, it is recommended that transportation, storage,
installation, operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Also the applicable procedures and relevant standards of the country where the machine will be installed must
be considered.
Noncompliance with the recommended procedures in this manual and other references on the WEG website
may cause severe personal injuries and/or substantial property damage and may void the product warranty.
For practical reasons, it is not possible to include in this Manual detailed information that covers all construction
variables nor covering all possible assembly, operation or maintenance alternatives.
This Manual contains only the required information that allows qualified and trained personnel to carry out their
services. The product images are shown for illustrative purpose only.
For Smoke Extraction Motors, please refer to the additional instruction manual 50026367 available on the
website www.weg.net.
For brake motors, please refer to the information contained in WEG 50006742 / 50021973 brake motor manual
available on the website www.weg.net.
For information about permissible radial and axial shaft loads, please check the product technical catalogue.
The user is responsible for the correct definition of the installation environment and application
characteristics.
During the warranty period, all repair, overhaul and reclamation services must be carried out by WEG
ENGLISH
authorized Service Centers to maintain validity of the warranty.
2.1. Warning Symbol
Warning about safety and warranty.
2.2. Receiving Inspection

All motors are tested during the manufacturing process.
The motor must be checked when received for any damage that may have occurred during the transportation.
All damages must be reported in writing to the transportation company, to the insurance company and to
WEG. Failure to comply with such procedures will void the product warranty.
You must inspect the product:
g Check if nameplate data complies with the purchase order;
g Remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand to ensure that it rotates freely.
g Check that the motor has not been exposed to excessive dust and moisture during the transportation.
Do not remove the protective grease from the shaft, or the plugs from the cable entries. These protections must
remain in place until the installation has been completed.

www.weg.net
2.3. Nameplates
The nameplate contains information that describes the construction characteristics and the performance of the
motor. Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.2 show nameplate layout examples.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.1 – IEC motor nameplate.

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.2 – NEMA motor nameplate

www.weg.net
3. Safety Instructions
The motor must be disconnected from the power supply and be completely stopped before conducting
any installation or maintenance procedures. Additional measures should be taken to avoid accidental
motor starting.
Professionals working with electrical installations, either in the assembly, operation or maintenance,
should use proper tools and be instructed on the application of standards and safety requirements,
including the use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) that must be carefully observed in order to
reduce risk of personal injury during these services.
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. It is recommended that transportation, storage, installation,
operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Always follow the safety, installation, maintenance and inspection instructions in accordance with the applicable
standards in each country.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
4. Handling and Transport

Individually packaged motors should never be lifted by the shaft or by the packaging. They must be lifted only by
means of the eyebolts, when supplied. Use always suitable lifting devices to lift the motor. Eyebolts on the frame
are designed for lifting the machine weight only as indicated on the motor nameplate. Motors supplied on pallets
must be lifted by the pallet base with lifting devices fully supporting the motor weight.
The package should never be dropped. Handle it carefully to avoid bearing damage.
Eyebolts provided on the frame are designed for lifting the machine only. Do not use these eyebolts for
lifting the motor with coupled equipment such as bases, pulleys, pumps, reducers, etc.
Never use damaged, bent or cracked eyebolts. Always check the eyebolt condition before lifting the motor.
Eyebolts mounted on components, such as on end shields, forced ventilation kits, etc. must be used for lifting
these components only. Do not use them for lifting the complete machine set.
Handle the motor carefully without sudden impacts to avoid bearing damage and prevent excessive mechanical
stresses on the eyebolts resulting in its rupture.
To move or transport motors with cylindrical roller bearings or angular contact ball bearings, use always
the shaft locking device provided with the motor.
All HGF motors, regardless of bearing type, must be transported with shaft locking device fitted.
4.1. Lifting
Before lifting the motor ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly and the eyebolt shoulders are in
contact with the base to be lifted, as shown in Figure 4.1. Figure 4.2 shows an incorrect tightening of the
eyebolt.
Ensure that lifting machine has the required lifting capacity for the weight indicated on the motor nameplate.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.1 – Correct tightening of the eyebolt Figure 4.2 – Incorrect tightening of
the eyebolt.
The center-of-gravity may change depending on motor design and accessories. During the lifting
procedures the maximum allowed angle of inclination should never be exceeded as specified below.
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt

For horizontal motors fitted with only one eyebolt, the maximum allowed angle-of-inclination during the lifting
process should not exceed 30º in relation to the vertical axis, as shown in Figure 4.3.
30° Max.
Figure 4.3 – Maximum allowed angle-of-inclination for motor with one eyebolt.
www.weg.net
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts

When motors are fitted with two or more eyebolts, all supplied eyebolts must be used simultaneously for the
lifting procedure.
There are two possible eyebolt arrangements (vertical and inclined), as shown below:
g For motors with vertical lifting eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.4, the maximum allowed lifting angle should not
exceed 45° in relation to the vertical axis. We recommend to use a spreader bar for maintaining the lifting
elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface.
45° Max.
Figure 4.4 – Maximum resulting angle for motors with two or more lifting eyebolts.
g F
or HGF motors, as shown in Figure 4.5, the maximum resulting angle should not exceed 30° in relation to the
vertical axis.
ENGLISH
30° Max.
Figure 4.5 – Maximum resulting angle for horizontal HGF motors
g F
or motors fitted with inclined eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.6, the use of a spreader bar is required for
maintaining the lifting elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor
surface.
Figure 4.6 – Use of a spreader bar for lifting.

www.weg.net
4.1.3. Vertical Motors

For vertical mounted motors, as shown in Figure 4.7, the use of a spreader bar is required for maintaining the
lifting element (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface.
Figure 4.7 – Lifting of vertical mounted motors.
Always use the eyebolts mounted on the top side of the motor, diametrically opposite, considering the
mounting position. See Figure 4.8.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.8 – Lifting of HGF motors.
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position

For safety reasons during the transport, vertical mounted Motors are usually packed and supplied in horizontal
position.
To place W22 motors fitted with eyebolts (see Figure 4.6), to the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that the eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Remove the motor from the packaging, using the top mounted eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.9;
Figure 4.9 – Removing the motor from the packaging.

www.weg.net
3. Install a second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.10;
Figure 4.10 – Installation of the second pair of eyebolts.
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts to start the motor rotation, as shown in Figure 4.11. This
procedure must be carried out slowly and carefully.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.11 – End result: motor placed in vertical position.
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF motors in the vertical position

HGF motors are fitted with eight lifting points: four at drive end and four at non-drive end. The HGF motors are
usually transported in horizontal position, however for the installation they must be placed in the vertical
position.
To place an HGF motor in the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the motor by using the four lateral eyebolts and two hoists, see Figure 4.12;
Figure 4.12 – Lifting HGF motor with two hoists.

www.weg.net
2. Lower the hoist fixed to motor drive end while lifting the hoist fixed to motor non-drive end until the motor
reaches its equilibrium, see Figure 4.13.
Figure 4.13 – Placing HGF motor in vertical position
3. Remove the hoist hooks from the drive end eyebolts and rotate the motor 180° to fix the removed hooks into
the two eyebolts at the motor non-drive end, see Figure 4.14.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.14 – Lifting HGF motors by the eyebolts at the non-drive end.
4. Fix the removed hoist hooks in the other two eyebolts at the non-drive end and lift the motor until the vertical
position is reached, see Figure 4.15.
Figure 4.15 – HGF motor in the vertical position
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.2 Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position
To place W22 vertical mount motor in horizontal position, proceed as follows:

www.weg.net
1. Ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Install the first pair of eyebolts and lift the motor as shown in Figure 4.16;
Figure 4.16 – Install the first pair of eyebolts
3. Install the second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.17;

ENGLISH
Figure 4.17 – Install the second pair of eyebolts
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts for rotating the motor, as shown in Figure 4.18. This procedure
must be carried out slowly and carefully.
Figure 4.18 – Motor is being rotated to horizontal position
5. Remove the first pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.19.
Figure 4.19 – Final result: motor placed in horizontal position

www.weg.net
5. Storage
If the motor is not installed immediately, it must be stored in a dry and clean environment, with relative humidity
not exceeding 60%, with an ambient temperature between 5 ºC and 40 ºC, without sudden temperature
changes, free of dust, vibrations, gases or corrosive agents. The motor must be stored in horizontal position,
unless specifically designed for vertical operation, without placing objects on it. Do not remove the protection
grease from shaft end to prevent rust.
If the motor are fitted with space heaters, they must always be turned on during the storage period or when the
installed motor is out of operation. Space heaters will prevent water condensation inside the motor and keep
the winding insulation resistance within acceptable levels. Store the motor in such position that the condensed
water can be easily drained. If fitted, remove pulleys or couplings from the shaft end (more information are given
on item 6).
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.
5.1. Exposed machined Surfaces

All exposed machined surfaces (like shaft end and flange) are factory-protected with temporary rust inhibitor. A
protective film must be reapplied periodically (at least every six months), or when it has been removed and/or
damaged.
5.2. Storage
The stacking height of the motor packaging during the storage period should not exceed 5 m, always
considering the criteria indicated in Table 5.1:
Table 5.1 – Max. recommended stacking height
ENGLISH
Packaging Type Frame sizes Maximum stacking quantity
IEC 63 to 132 Indicated on the top side of
Cardboard box
NEMA 143 to 215 the cardboard box
IEC 63 to 315
06
NEMA 48 to 504/5
IEC 355
Wood crate 03
NEMA 586/7 and 588/9
HGF IEC 315 to 630
Indicated on the packaging
HGF NEMA 5000 to 9600
Notes:
1) Never stack larger packaging onto smaller packaging.
2) Align the packaging correctly (see Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2).
Figure 5.1 – Correct stacking

X
Figure 5.2 – Incorrect stacking

www.weg.net
3) The feet of the crates above should always be supported by suitable wood battens (Figure 5.3) and never
stand on the steel tape or without support (Figure 5.4).
Figure 5.3 – Correct stacking

X XFigure 5.4 – Incorrect stacking
4) When stacking smaller crates onto longer crates, always ensure that suitable wooden supports are provided
to withstand the weight (see Figure 5.5). This condition usually occurs with motor packaging above IEC 225S/M
(NEMA 364/5T) frame sizes.
ENGLISH
Figure 5.5 – Use of additional battens for stacking
5.3 Bearings
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings
We recommend rotating the motor shaft at least once a month (by hand, at least five revolutions, stopping the
shaft at a different position from the original one). If the motor is fitted with shaft locking device, remove it before
rotating the shaft and install it again before performing any handling procedure. Vertical motors may be stored
in the vertical or in horizontal position. If motors with open bearings are stored longer than six months, the
bearings must be relubricated according to item 8.2 before commissioning of the motor.
If the motor is stored for longer than 2 years, the bearings must be replaced or removed, washed, inspected
and relubricated according to item 8.2.
5.3.2 Oil Lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the center of the sight glass.
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least
five revolutions, thus achieving an even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good
operating conditions. Reinstall the shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period of over six months, the bearings must be relubricated according to Item 8.2
before starting the operation. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must be
replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and relubricated according to
Item 8.2. The oil of vertical mounted motors that are transported in horizontal position is removed to prevent
oils leaks during the transport. These motors must be stored in vertical position after receiving and the bearing
must be lubricated.

www.weg.net
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in horizontal position. Lubricate the bearings with ISO VG 68 mineral oil in the
amount indicated in the Table 5.2 (this is also valid for bearings with equivalent dimensions). After filling with oil,
rotate the shaft by hand, at least five revolutions)
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand every week, at
least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Reinstall the shaft locking device
every time the motor has to be moved. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must
be replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and relubricated according
to item 8.2.
Table 5.2 – Amount of oil per bearing
Bearing Size Amount of Oil (ml) Bearing Size Amount of Oil (ml)
6201 15 6309 65
6202 15 6311 90
6203 15 6312 105
6204 25 6314 150
6205 25 6315 200
6206 35 6316 250
6207 35 6317 300
6208 40 6319 350
6209 40 6320 400
6211 45 6322 550
6212 50 6324 600
6307 45 6326 650
6308 55 6328 700
ENGLISH
The oil must always be removed when the motor has to be handled. If the oil mist system is not operating after
installation, fill the bearings with oil to prevent bearing rusting. During the storage period, rotate the shaft by
hand, at least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Before starting the motor,
all bearing protection oil must be drained from the bearing and the oil mist system must be switched ON.
5.3.4 Sleeve Bearing

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the middle of the sight glass. During the storage period, remove the shaft locking
device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least five revolutions, and at 30 rpm, thus achieving an
even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good operating conditions. Reinstall the
shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period of over six months, the bearings must be relubricated according to the Item
8.2 before starting the operation.
If the motor is stored for a period longer than the oil change interval, or if it is not possible to rotate the motor
shaft by hand, the oil must be drained and a corrosion protection and dehumidifiers must be applied.
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE
We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement

We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.

www.weg.net
The insulation resistance must be measured with a megohmmeter. The machine must be in cold state and
disconnected from the power supply.
To prevent the risk of an electrical shock, ground the terminals before and after each measurement.
Ground the capacitor (if any) to ensure that it is fully discharged before the measurement is taken.
It is recommended to insulate and test each phase separately. This procedure allows the comparison of the
insulation resistance between each phase. During the test of one phase, the other phases must be grounded.
The test of all phases simultaneously evaluates the insulation resistance to ground only but does not evaluate
the insulation resistance between the phases.
The power supply cables, switches, capacitors and other external devices connected to the motor may
considerably influence the insulation resistance measurement. Thus all external devices must be disconnected
and grounded during the insulation resistance measurement.
Measure the insulation resistance one minute after the voltage has been applied to the winding. The applied
voltage should be as shown in Table 5.3.
Table 5.3 – Voltage for the insulation resistance
Winding rated voltage (V) Testing voltage for measuring the insulation resistance (V)
< 1000V 500
1000 - 2500 500 - 1000
2501 - 5000 1000 - 2500
5001 - 12000 2500 - 5000
> 12000 5000 - 10000
The reading of the insulation resistance must be corrected to 40°C as shown in the Table 5.4.
Table 5.4 – Correction Factor for the Insulation Resistance corrected to 40°C
ENGLISH
Measuring temperature Correction factor of the Measuring temperature of Correction factor of the
of the insulation insulation resistance the insulation resistance insulation resistance
resistance (°C) corrected to 40°C (°C) corrected to 40°C
10 0.125 30 0.500
11 0.134 31 0.536
12 0.144 32 0.574
13 0.154 33 0.616
14 0.165 34 0.660
15 0.177 35 0.707
16 0.189 36 0.758
17 0.203 37 0.812
18 0.218 38 0.871
19 0.233 39 0.933
20 0.250 40 1.000
21 0.268 41 1.072
22 0.287 42 1.149
23 0.308 43 1.231
24 0.330 44 1.320
25 0.354 45 1.414
26 0.379 46 1.516
27 0.406 47 1.625
28 0.435 48 1.741
29 0.467 49 1.866
30 0.500 50 2.000

www.weg.net
The motor insulation condition must be evaluated by comparing the measured value with the values
indicated in Table 5.5 (corrected to 40 °C):
Table 5.5 – Evaluation of the insulation system
Limit value for rated voltage Limit value for rated voltage
Situation
up to 1.1 kV (MΩ) above 1.1 kV (MΩ)
Dangerous. The motor can not
Up to 5 Up to 100
be operated in this condition
5 to 100 100 to 500 Regular
100 to 500 Higher than 500 Good
Higher than 500 Higher than 1000 Excellent
The values indicated in the table should be considered only as reference values. It is advisable to log all
measured values to provide a quick and easy overview on the machine insulation resistance.
If the insulation resistance is low, moisture may be present in the stator windings. In this case the motor
should be removed and transported to a WEG authorized Service Center for proper evaluation and repair
(This service is not covered by the warranty). To improve the insulation resistance through the drying
process, see section 8.4.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
6. Installation
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.
Check some aspects before proceeding with the installation:
1. Insulation resistance: must be within the acceptable limits. See item 5.4.
2. Bearings:
a. Rolling bearings: oxidized bearings must be replaced. If no oxidation is detected, lubricate the bearings as
described in Item 8.2. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must be replaced
before starting the motor.
b. Sleeve bearing: if sleeve bearing motors are stored longer than the recommended oil change interval, the
oil must be changed before machine starting. Don’t forget to remove the dehumidifiers when you drain the
oil from the motor and to fill it again with new oil before starting the machine. For more details, see item
8.2.
3. Operating conditions of the start capacitors: If single-phase motors are stored for a period of over two years,
it is recommended to change the start capacitors before motor starting since they lose their operating
characteristics.
4. Terminal box:
a. the inside of the terminal box must be clean and dry.
b. the contacts must be correctly connected and corrosion free. See 6.9 and 6.10.
c. the cable entries must be correctly sealed and the terminal box cover properly mounted in order to ensure
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
5. Cooling: the cooling fins, air inlet and outlet openings must be clean and unobstructed. The distance
between the air inlet openings and the wall should not be shorter than ¼ (one quarter) of the diameter of the
air inlet. Ensure sufficient space to perform the cleaning services. See item 7.
6. Coupling: remove the shaft locking device (where fitted) and the corrosion protection grease from the shaft
ENGLISH
end and flange just before installing the motor. See item 6.4.
7. Drain hole: the motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is at the lowest position (If there is any
indication arrow on the drain, the drain must be so installed that the arrow points downwards).
Motors supplied with rubber drain plugs leave the factory in the closed position and must be opened
periodically to allow the exit of condensed water. For environments with high water condensation levels and
motor with degree of protection IP55, the drain plugs can be mounted in open position (see Figure 6.1).
For motors with degree of protection IP56, IP65 or IP66, the drain plugs must remain at closed position (see
Figure 6.1), being opened only during the motor maintenance procedures.
The drain system of motors with Oil Mist lubrication system must be connected to a specific collection
system (see Figure 6.12).
Closed position Open position
Figure 6.1 – Detail of the rubber drain plug mounted in closed and open position.

www.weg.net
8.Additional recommendations:
a. C heck the direction of motor rotation, starting the motor at no-load before coupling it to the load.
b. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end down must be fitted with drip cover to protect them from liquids
or solids that may drop onto the motors.
c. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end up must be fitted with water slinger ring to prevent water
penetration inside the motor.
Remove or fix the shaft key before starting the motor.
6.1. Foundations
The foundation is the structure, structural element, natural or prepared base, designed to withstand the
stresses produced by the installed equipment, ensuring safe and stable performance during operation. The
foundation design should consider the adjacent structures to avoid the influences of other installed equipment
and no vibration is transferred through the structure
The foundation must be flat and its selection and design must consider the following characteristics:
a) The features of the machine to be installed on the foundation, the driven loads, application, maximum
allowed deformations and vibration levels (for instance, motors with reduced vibration levels, foot flatness,
flange concentricity, axial and radial loads, etc. lower than the values specified for standard motors).
b) Adjacent buildings, conservation status, maximum applied load estimation, type of foundation and fixation
and vibrations transmitted by theses constructions.
If the motor is supplied with leveling/alignment bolts, this must be considered in the base design.
Please consider for the foundation dimensioning all stresses that are generated during the operation of
the driven load.
ENGLISH
The user is responsible for the foundation designing and construction.
The foundation stresses can be calculated by using the following equations (see Figure 6.2):
F1 = 0,5 * g * m – (4 * Tb / A)
F2 = 0,5 * g * m + (4 * Tb / A)
Where:
F1 and F2 = lateral stresses (N);

g = gravitational acceleration (9,8 m/s2);
m = motor weight (kg);
Tb = breakdown torque (Nm);
A = distance between centerlines of mounting holes in feet or base of the machine (end view) (m).

www.weg.net
The motors may be mounted on:

g Concrete bases: are most used for large-size motors (see Figure 6.2);
g Metallic bases: are generally used for small-size motors (see Figure 6.3).
F1 F1
A
F2 F2
Figure 6.2 – Motor installed on concrete base Figure 6.3 – Motor installed on metallic base
A
The metallic and concrete bases may be fitted with sliding system. These types of foundations are generally
used where the power transmission is achieved by belts and pulleys. This power transmission system is easier
to assemble/disassemble and allows the belt tension adjustment. Other important aspect of this foundation
type is the location of the base locking screws that must be diagonally opposite. The rail nearest the drive
pulley is placed in such a way that the positioning bolt is between the motor and the driven machine. The other
rail must be placed with the bolt on the opposite side (diagonally opposite), as shown in Figure 6.4 .
To facilitate assembly, the bases may have the following features:

ENGLISH
g shoulders and/or recesses;
g anchor bolts with loose plates;
g bolts cast in the concrete;
g leveling screws;
g positioning screws;
g steel & cast iron blocks, plates with flat surfaces.
Figure 6.4 – Motor installed on sliding base
After completing the installation, it is recommended that all exposed machined surfaces are coated with
suitable rust inhibitor.

www.weg.net
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING
Footless motors supplied with transportation devices, according to Figure 6.5, must have their devices
removed before starting the motor installation.
Figure 6.5 – Detail of the transportation devices for footless motors.
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors

The drawings of the mounting hole dimensions for NEMA or IEC motors can be checked in the respective
technical catalogue.
The motor must be correctly aligned and leveled with the driven machine. Incorrect alignment and leveling may
result in bearing damage, generate excessive vibration and even shaft distortion/breakage.
For more details, see section 6.3 and 6.6. The thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at
ENGLISH
least 1.5 times the bolt diameter. This thread engagement length should be evaluated in more severe
applications and increased accordingly.
Figure 6.6 shows the mounting system of a foot mounted motor indicating the minimum required thread
engagement length.
L = 1.5 x D
D
Figure 6.6 – Mounting system of a foot mounted motor
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors
The drawings of the flange mounting dimensions, IEC and NEMA flanges, can be checked in the technical
catalogue.
The coupling of the driven equipment to the motor flange must be properly dimensioned to ensure the required
concentricity of the assembly.
Depending on the flange type, the mounting can be performed from the motor to the driven equipment flange
(flange FF (IEC) or D (NEMA)) or from the driven equipment flange to the motor (flange C (DIN or NEMA)).
For the mounting process from the driven equipment flange to the motor, you must consider the bolt length,
flange thickness and the thread depth of the motor flange.
If the motor flange has tapped through-holes, the length of the mounting bolts must not exceed the
tapped through-hole length of the motor flange, thus preventing damage to the winding head.

www.weg.net
For flange mounting the thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at least 1.5 times the bolt
diameter. In severe applications, longer thread engagement length may be required.
In severe applications or if large motors are flange mounted, a foot or pad mounting may be required in addition
to the flange mounting (Figure 6.7). The motor must never be supported on its cooling fins.
Figure 6.7 - Mounting method of flange mounted motors with frame base support
Note:
When liquid (for example oil) is likely to come into contact with the shaft seal, please contact your local WEG representative.
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors

Typically, this method of mounting is used in axial fans. The motor is fixed by tapped holes in the frame. The
dimensions of these tapped holes can be checked in the respective product catalogue. The selection of the
motor mounting rods/bolts must consider the dimensions of the fan case, the installation base and the thread
depth in the motor frame.
ENGLISH
The mounting rods and the fan case wall must be sufficiently stiff to prevent the transmission of excessive
vibration to the machine set (motor & fan). Figure 6.8 shows the pad mounting system.
Figure 6.8 – Mounting of the motor inside the cooling duct
6.3. Balancing
Unbalanced machines generate vibration which can result in damage to the motor. WEG motors are
dynamically balanced with “half key” and without load (uncoupled). Special balancing quality level must be
stated in the Purchase Order.
The transmission elements, such as pulleys, couplings, etc., must balanced with “half key” before they
are mounted on the motor shaft.
The balance quality grade meets the applicable standards for each product line.
The maximum balancing deviation must be recorded in the installation report
6.4. Couplings
Couplings are used to transmit the torque from the motor shaft to the shaft of the driven machine. The
following aspects must be considered when couplings are installed:
g Use proper tools for coupling assembly & disassembly to avoid damages to the motor and bearings.
g W henever possible, use flexible couplings, since they can absorb eventual residual misalignments during the
machine operation.
g T he maximum loads and speed limits informed in the coupling and motor manufacturer catalogues cannot
be exceeded.
g Level and align the motor as specified in sections 6.5 and 6.6, respectively.

www.weg.net
Remove or fix the shaft key firmly when the motor is operated without coupling in order to prevent
accidents.
6.4.1. Direct coupling

Direct coupling is characterized when the Motor shaft is directly coupled to the shaft of the driven machine
without transmission elements. Whenever possible, use direct coupling due to lower cost, less space required
for installation and more safety against accidents.
Do not use roller bearings for direct coupling, unless sufficient radial load is expected.
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling

Gearbox coupling is typically used where speed reduction is required.
Make sure that shafts are perfectly aligned and strictly parallel (in case of straight spur gears) and in the right
meshing angle (in case of bevel and helical gears).
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling

Pulleys and belts are used when speed increase or reduction between motor shaft and driven load is required.
Excessive belt tension will damage the bearings and cause unexpected accidents such as breakage of
the motor shaft.
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors
Motors designed with sleeve bearings must be operated with direct coupling to the driven machine or a
ENGLISH
gearbox. Pulley and belts can not be applied for sleeve bearing motors.
Motors designed with sleeve bearings have 3 (three) marks on the shaft end. The center mark is the indication
of the magnetic center and the 2 (two) outside marks indicate the allowed limits of the rotor axial movement, as
shown in Figure 6.9.
The motor must be so coupled that during operation the arrow on the frame is placed over the central mark
indicating the rotor magnetic center. During start-up, or even during operation, the rotor may freely move
between the two outside marks when the driven machine exerts an axial load on the motor shaft. However,
under no circumstance, the motor can operate continuously with axial forces on the bearing.
Axial Clearance
Figure 6.9 – Axial clearance of motor designed with sleeve bearing

www.weg.net
For coupling evaluation consider the maximum axial bearing clearance as shown in Table 6.1.
The axial clearance of the driven machine and coupling influence the maximum bearing clearance.
Table 6.1 – Clearance used for sleeve bearings
Bearing size Total axial clearance (mm)

9* 3+3=6
11* 4+4=8
14* 5 + 5 =10
18 7,5 + 7,5 = 15
* For Motors in accordance with API 541, the total axial clearance is 12.7 mm
The sleeve bearings used by WEG were not designed to support axial load continuously.
Under no circumstance must the motor be operated continuously at its axial clearance limits.
6.5. Leveling
The motor must be leveled to correct any deviations in flatness arising from the manufacturing process and the
material structure rearrangement. The leveling can be carried out by a leveling screw fixed on the motor foot or
on the flange or by means of thin compensation shims. After the leveling process, the leveling height between
the motor mounting base and the motor cannot exceed 0.1 mm.
If a metallic base is used to level the height of the motor shaft end and the shaft end of the driven machine, level
only the metallic base relating to the concrete base.
Record the maximum leveling deviations in the installation report.
6.6. Alignment
The correct alignment between the motor and the driven machine is one of the most important variables that
extends the useful service life of the motor. Incorrect coupling alignment generates high loads and vibrations
ENGLISH
reducing the useful life of the bearings and even resulting in shaft breakages. Figure 6.10 illustrates the
misalignment between the motor and the driven machine.
Motor shaft Driven machine shaft
Max.
misalignment
Driven machine
offset (mm)
Motor
offset (mm)
Figure 6.10 – Typical misalignment condition
Alignment procedures must be carried out using suitable tools and devices, such as dial gauge, laser alignment
instruments, etc. The motor shaft must be aligned axially and radially with the driven machine shaft.
The maximum allowed eccentricity for a complete shaft turn should not exceed 0.03 mm, when alignment is
made with dial gauges, as shown in Figure 6.11. Ensure a gap between couplings to compensate the thermal
expansion between the shafts as specified by the coupling manufacturer.
Dial gauge
Reference
Line
GAP
Parallel alignment Angular alignment
84 Manual of Electric Motors Figure 6.11 – Alignment with dial gauge.

www.weg.net
If alignment is made by a laser instrument, please consider the instructions and recommendations provided by
the laser instrument manufacturer.
The alignment should be checked at ambient temperature with machine at operating temperature.
The coupling alignment must be checked periodically
Pulley and belt couplings must be so aligned that the driver pulley center lies in the same plane of the driven
pulley center and the motor shaft and the shaft of the driven machine are perfectly parallel.
After completing the alignment procedures, ensure that mounting devices do not change the motor and
machine alignment and leveling resulting into machine damage during operation.
It is recommended to record the maximum alignment deviation in the Installation Report.
6.7. Connection of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors

When oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors are installed, connect the existing lubricant tubes (oil inlet and
oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as shown in Figure 6.12. The lubrication system must ensure continuous
oil flow through the bearings as specified by the manufacturer of the installed lubrication system.
Inlet
ENGLISH
Drain
Outlet
Figure 6.12 – Oil supply and drain system of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors
6.8. Connection of the cooling water system

When water cooled motors are installed, connect the water inlet and outlet tubes to ensure proper motor
cooling. According to item 7.2, ensure correct cooling water flow rate and water temperature in the motor
cooling system.
6.9. Electrical connection

Consider the rated motor current, service factor, starting current, environmental and installation conditions,
maximum voltage drop, etc. to select appropriate power supply cables and switching and protection devices.
All motors must be installed with overload protection systems. Three-phase motors should be fitted with phase
fault protection systems.
Before connecting the motor, check if the power supply voltage and the frequency comply with the
motor nameplate data. All wiring must be made according to the connection diagram on the motor
nameplate. Please consider the connection diagrams in the Table 6.2 as reference value.
To prevent accidents, check if motor has been solidly grounded in accordance with the applicable standards.

www.weg.net
Table 6.2 - Typical connection diagram for three-phase motors.

1 2 3
1
1
1 22
2 33 3
1 2 3
Type of 111 222 333
Configuration Quantity of Leads Connection
L1 1
L1 L2
L1
L2 2 diagram
L2 L3L33
L3 LL
L
connection L1
L1 L2
L1 L2 L3
L2 L3
L3
L
L
L
L1
L1 1 L2
L2 2 L3
L3 3 L1
L
L1 L2 L3
3 - 66 44 55
66 44 55 6 66 44
6 4L1 55 L2 6 L3 4 55 6 4L
6
6 4 4 5 5 6 4
6 4 5
4 5 6
6 4 4
666
11 422 5334 4 5 6 611 4422 5533 666
11 4422
4
116 224 335 1 16 224 335 116 224
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1
1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2
1
1L1
L1 222 L3
L2
L2 33
L3
L3 1L1
L1
1 L2 222 L3
L2
L2 33
L3
L3 1
1L1
L1 222
L2
L2
6 Δ-Y
L1
L1
L1
1 L2
1 L2
L2 2 L333 L1
L3 L1
L1 1 L2
L2 2 L333
L3
L1
L1
L1
1 L2
1 L2 L2 2
L16 L2
L1 L2 4 L3 L3 5 L1 L1 L2 6 L2 L3 4 L3 5 L16 L2
L1 L2 4
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
44 55 66 4 5 6 44 55
4 5 6 L144 4 L2 55 5L3 66 6 4 5
4L1 L2
4
7
4 5 L36
5
8
5 6
9
6 4
7
4 5
8
5 6
9 4L1 L2
4
7
5
5
8
44777 5588 8 6699 9 44777 5588 8 666 99
9 4
44777 558 58
8
1
714 8
7 2
825 9 3
936 1
714 8
7 2
825 9 3
936 1
714 8
7 2
825
771 1 8822 9933 771 1 8822 9933 771 1 8822
YY - Y L1
L1
L1
17 L2
1
11 L2 L2
L2
28 L3
2
22 L3 L3
L333
39 L1
3 L1
L1
17 L2
1
11 L2 L2
L2
28 L3
2
22 L3 L3
L3
33
39
3 L1L1
L1
1 L2
1117 L2 L2
L2
2
2228
L1
L1 L2 L3 L1
L1 L2 L3 L1
L1 L2
L1 4 L2 5 L3 6 L1 4 L2 5 L3 6 L1 4 L2 5
L1 1 L2
L1 L2 2 L3 L3 3 L1 L1 1 L2 L2 2 L3 L3 3 L1 1 L2
L1 L2 2
L17 L28 L39 L17 L28 L39 L17 L28
9 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
44 5 66 4 5 6 44 5
L1 44 L25 5 L3 6 L144 4 L25 5 L36 6 L1 4 L25 5
47 5
7
4 58 6
8
5 69
9
6 47 5
7
4 58 6
8
5 69
9
6
4
47 5
7 58
8
ΔΔ - Δ 447 7 58 5 8 69 6 9 4 477 58 5 8 69 6 9 44477 58 5 5 8
Single Speed 777
1
71
14 88 2
82
25 99 3
9336 777
1
71
14 88 2
82
25 99 3
93
36 777
1
71
14 88 2
8225
L1 1
17 L2 82
28 L3 93
39 L1 1
17 L2 82
28 L3 93
39 L1 1
17 L2 82
28
L1L1
L1
1 1 L2
L2
L22 2 L3
L3
L33 3 L1L1
L1
1 1 L2 L2
L2
22 L3
L3
L33 3 L1L1
L1
1 1 L2L2
L2
2 2
L1 1
L1 1 L2 2
L2 2 L3 3
L3 3 1
L1 1 L2
L1 2
L2 2 L3 3
L3 3 1
L1 1 L2
L1 L2 22
L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5 L3 L3 6 L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5 L3 L3 6 L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5
11 12 10 L1 11 L2 12L39 10 L1
11 7 12 L210 L39 11 12 10 11 12 10 L1 11 L2
11 12
11
11 12 10
12 10 7 11
10 118 12
11 12 10
12 10
10 1111
11 12 12810
12 10 11
10 11 12
11 12 10 10 11 12
11 12 10
12 10 7 11
10 118 11
11 1
5
11
5 12
11 6
12
126 10 4
10
104 1 5
11
11 2
5 12 6
12
126 10 34
10
104 5
11
11 1
5 12 6
12
12 6 10 2 4
10
4 311
10 55 12
11
11 66 10
12
12 44
10
10
11
5
11
5 12
11 6
12
126 10 4
10
104 1 55 2 1
11
11 6
1
1
115
115 6
12 6 4
104 11
115 5 126 6 4
10 4 11115 5 126 6 4
104 115 5 12 6
12 6 10 4
104 115
115 6
12 6 4
104 11115 5 12
16
5
88 6
5811669999124444
77 L1 5
8L2
8 6
9
5811669912449 L3 4
77 L15
8 8 6
9
581166991244 9L2 4
77 L3 5
88 6
9 9
581166991244 4
77 5
88 6
99
581166991244 4
77 L1 5
8L2
8
5811669 69
ΔΔ - YY - Δ - Y 558 7710 558 47 710 558 47710 558 47710 558 710 558
2
82
8
88225
63
993
93
936 1
71
714 882
2
8
8 2
5
2
63
993
9
9 3
36 1
7
71
14 8
882
2
8 2
5
2
63
993
9
9 3
36 1
7
714
1 882
2
8
82
25
63
9
9
993 3
6
3 1
7
71
14
2
888
225 969
82 336 747
93 1
71
714 888
225 969
82 3
9
L2
L22
2 L3
L3 3
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L2 2
2 L3
L3 3
3 L1771
L1 1 L2L2 22 L3
L3 3
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L2 2
2 L3
L33
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L22 L3
2 93
L3 3 L1
3 71
L117 L2 L2
2
22 L3 L3933
L2
2
L2 8
211L3 L3
3312L19 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 9
312L1 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 312L19 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 9
312L1 L1
1 1
1107 L2
2
L2 8
211L3L3
3
312L19 L1
1 1
110 L2 L2
2 211 8 L3 333
L3
L2
L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 2 L3L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 2 L3L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L252L3 L3
L363L1 L1
L141 L2 L2
L252L3 L3
L3
L2
L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2
L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L2 L3 9 L1
8 PART-WINDING 7 L2 8 L3 9 L1 7 L2 8 L3 L17 L2
9WYE-DELTA 8 L3 9 L1 7 L2 8 L3 9 L1 7
PART-WINDIN L2 8 L
PART-WINDING WYE-DELTA PART-WINDIN
PART-WINDIN
12 PART-WINDING
2 PART-WINDING
3 1
PART-WINDING 2 3 1 2 3 WYE-DELTA
WYE-DELTA
1
WYE-DELTA 2 3 1 2 PART-WINDIN
3 1
PART-WINDIN
PART-WINDIN
2
L2STARTPART-WINDING
PART-WINDING
L3 L1 L2 RUN
L3 L1 L2START L3 WYE-DELTA
WYE-DELTA
L1 L2 RUN
L3 L1 L2 PART-WINDING
PARTIDAPART-WINDING
L3 L1 OPERA
L2 L3
PART-WINDING
START
START RUN
RUN START
START WYE-DELTARUN RUN PARTIDA
PARTIDA PART-WINDIN OPER
OPER
START
START PART-WINDING RUN
RUN START
START WYE-DELTA RUN
RUN PARTIDA
PARTIDA OPERA
OPERA
12START
12
START 1010 11 1111 1212RUNRUN 10
10 11 11
11 12
START
12 10
START 1010 11 11
11 12 12
12 RUN
RUN 10
10 11 11
11 12
PARTIDA
12
PARTIDA 1010 1111 OPERA
OPERA 12
12 11
Δ - PWS 1212
START 1010 11 1212 RUN 10
10 11 12
START
12 10 11 12 RUN1010 11 PARTIDA
1212 1010 1111 OPERA 12
12 1 1
12
77 10
12 10
START88 11
10 11
99
11 12
77 10
12 10
RUN88 11
10 11
99
11 12
12 START
66 10 10
1044 11 11
55 12
11 12
66 10
12 10
RUN
44 11
10 11
55
11 12
12 10
7PARTIDA
88
10 11
99
11 OPER12
77 10
12 18
1
12
127 10 PART-WINDING
8 11 9 12
127 7 10 88 119 9 12
12 66 104 4 11
55
WYE-DELTA 12
6 6 10
44 11
55 12
127
7 1010 PART-WINDIN
8 1111 9 12
127 7 18 8
8
Part-winding start 7
6
712 84
6
76
8
4
8 10 95 9
5
9511 776 6
7 12884
6 4
8410995 5
9 11 667
5 6
7712 448 4
8 10559
8 5
911 667
9 6
7 12448
7 4
8810559 5
911
9
7
6
712 84
6
8
4
8 10 95
4
9
5
9511 776 6
7612884 4
8 4
776
6
1 884
4
2
4 995
5
3 76
6
1 844
2 95
5
3 671 482 59
3 67
1 48
2 59
3 777
6
6
1
6 884
4
PARTIDA
2 995
5
3 OPER766
1 844
2
61 START 2 53 17 44RUN 28 55 39 7 START
16 88 8 24 99 935 77 7 16 88 8
RUN
24 99 935 17 44 28 53 53 17 42 42
66117 444 2 28 553 39 6661 1 42 2 53 3 77711 82 2 933 71 1 822 933 61
661 42 2 5339 66161
422
L1112
1 L2
6 2L2 2
210 L3
4 3L33
311
5 L1 1
1126 L2 L2 2
210 L3
4 3L33
3115 L1 1
1127 22 L22210 L3
8 33 3
311
9 1L1 L11
112 2
L2
210 L33
311 L1112
1 L2
6 2L22
210 L3
4 3L3311
5 L1 11126 L L2 21
L1
11
L1
L1 L2 L3
2 L3
3 L1
1L1
1 22 L2 L3 L3
3 L1
11
L1 L2
L2 L3
L3 17 22
L1 L2
L2 8 33 L3
L3 9 L1
11
L1 L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1
1L1
1 22 L
L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L393 L1
82 L3 L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L3
82 L3 93
L1
L161 L2
L1 L2
L2 42 L3
L3
L3 53 L1
L1
L161 L2 L2
L2 42 L3
L3
L353 L1
L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L3
82 L3 93 L1 L171 L2 L2
L2 8
L1
L16 L2 L24 L3 L35 44 L1 L1 556 L2 L2 664 L3L35 L1 L1 L2 L244L3 L3 55 L1 L166 L2 L2 L3 L3 L1
L16 L2 L24 L3 L35 44 L1 L1 556 L2 L2 664
L1 L2 L34 4 5
L1 6 6
L2 L3 7
L1 L2 8 4 9 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 L6
4 5 5 6 44 L35 5 6 6L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L34 4 5 L1 6
5 6
1 2 3444 11 555 21 666 32 3 1 4424 11 3555 2 666 31 2 3 1 2 3444 11 522 6332
5 5 1 6 6
14 22 25 33 36 14 22 25 33 36 1 225 33
YY - Y L1 L2 L31 1 L1
2 L2
3 L3 L1 L2 11 L3 2 L1
3 L2 L3 L1 L2 L31 14 L1 2 L3
111 222 333 111 222 333 111 222 333
ENGLISH
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 L2 L3
Variable Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L36 L1
L1
L1 4 L252 L3
1 L2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2 L3 L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOWLOW L2 L3
SPEED L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2ROTA
ROTA L3
L11 L2
LOW
LOW L2
L33
SPEED
2SPEED
SPEED L3
L1
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH L1 1 L2 L22
SPEED
L33
SPEED
SPEED L3
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1
L2
1 ROTAÇROTAÇ
ROTA
L2 2 L3 L3
LOW
44 5SPEED SPEED 66 HIGH 44 SPEED SPEED
55 66 MENOR
MENOR 44 ROTAÇ 55 66
LOW
LOW4 55 5SPEED 6 HIGH
HIGH 4 SPEED 5 66 MENOR 4 ROTAÇ 5 6
4
4LOW
4 5 SPEED 6
6 HIGH44 5 5SPEED 6 4 ROTA
4 5
5 6 6
4L1
411 L2 55522 6L3 6
633 4L14
411 L2 555
22 6L3 6
63 4
L14
411 L2 55522 6L 6
63
14 225 336 14 225 33 3 14 225 33 3
1
1LOW 2 SPEED 3 11 2 2SPEED 36 MENOR 1
1 ROTA 2 3 3
Δ - YY 1
11 22 33 2 3 HIGH 1
11 22 33 3 1
11 22 33 2
6 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Constant Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 L2
4 L25 L3 L3
L363 L1
L1
1
4 L25 L3L2 2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOWLOW
LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2 ROTA
ROTA
ROTA L3
L33
L11 2SPEED 3 HIGH 1 L2 SPEED
2 3 MENOR ROTA 2
44 L2
LOW
LOW SPEED
55SPEED L3
66 HIGH
HIGH L144 SPEED 55 L3
SPEED
SPEED 6 MENOR
MENOR L144 ROTAÇ L2
ROTA 55 L6
Double Speed LOW
LOW44 5SPEED 5SPEED 6 6 HIGH
HIGH 44 SPEED 5 66 6 MENOR 4 ROTA 5
4LOW
4 5 SPEED
5 6
6 HIGH 4 5
4 5SPEED
5 6
6 MENOR 4
4 ROTA
4
5
5 6
5 66
Dahlander 441 L2
L1 552 6 L3633 4 411 L2
L1 552 6L3 633 441 L2
L1 552 6 63
1 1
14 225 336 2 114 225 3362 11
14 22 25 L3
1 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 3 1 ROTA 2 3 3
111LOW 22 SPEED 33 111 222SPEED
HIGH 33 MENOR 1
11 22 33 2
YY - Δ L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L22 L3
L1L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 63 L1 L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L363 L1L1
L1 41 L2 L25 L L
Constant Output L1
L1 LOW L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2 L3
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1 LOW
LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2ROTA
ROTA
ROTA L3L3
LOW
L11 L2 2SPEED L33 HIGH L1 1 L2 SPEED
2 L3 3 MENOR L1 ROTA 2
LOW
LOW
LOW SPEED
SPEED
SPEED
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
SPEED
SPEED
SPEED MENORROTAÇ
MENOR ROTAL
L2
MENOR
7 88 ROTAÇ 99
77 8LOW 8LOW 99SPEED 77 88 HIGH 99HIGHSPEED 77 88 99 7 8
MENOR
7 8 ROTA 9
7 7 88 9 9 SPEED 77 8 8 99 SPEED
77 88 99 77
11 882L18 9
93 L
3
777
71 8
1 2L1
8 L293 L3
3
9 71 2
17 82 39 93L1 L2 7 71L3 8
1 822 99 93
3 777 1 822 2 99 L29 3
1 82 2 993 3 771 1 882 93 7711 82 3 1 3
117 82
4 28LOW
5 3
669SPEED11 17 82
4 28 93
5 3 9
6HIGH 17 82
SPEED
4 28 93
5 3669 11
447 22
11MENOR
4 5
2
58 3ROTA
5 36
3
3669
111
4 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 14 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
66
6 11
1
44
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 441 25 52 6 63
41
4 552 66 5 6 3 4 1 5 2 6 3 4
4 55 663
1 5 2 6 444 5
55 L3 66 6
44
L1 L258 L3 69 444 L2
L1 555 L3 666 4L1
4L1 L258 L3 69 L1L1
L1
L2
74 L2L2
L2 8 L3 L39
9 Δ - Y - YY L1
L1
L1
7
L1
4 L2 L2
L2 L3 6
L25L3 L3
L3 L1 7
L14 L2
L1 L2
L1 L25 L3
L2 L3
8 L3
L3
L36
9 L1
L1
ONLY
7
L14 L2 L2
L25L3
L2FOR
L3
L3
L3 6
L1
L1
L1 L25L3
MENOR
L2
MENOR L3 6
L3
L1 1 L2L2 L3 L1 L2 ONLY
L1 L2 FOR
L3 L1
L1 1 L2
MENOR
L2
MENOR 2L3 L3 3
LOW
LOWL1
L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
2L3 L3 3 HIGH
HIGH L11L2
L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
2L3 L33 L11 L2
ONLY
L1
ONLY L2FOR2FOR
L3L3 3 MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
L1 L2
LOW
LOW
LOW L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
SPEED
4 SPEED L3 6
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
SPEED L3 ONLY
STARTING
ONLYL1
STARTING
STARTING
ONLY L2FOR
FOR
5 L36
FOR
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
4
ROTAÇÃO
MENOR 5 L36
LOW
LOW
5 HIGH4SPEED 5 6 ONLY 4 FOR
STARTING
STARTING ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED ONLY FOR
STARTING
STARTING
STARTING
ROTAÇÃO
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED
L1 L211 11L3 2 2
2 3 3 HIGH
3 L1 L2 L3 66 SPEED 6 6 4 4 L15 5
4STARTING5L2 L3 L1 L2
ROTAÇÃO 11 L322 33
1 2 33
1 2 2 3 3 6 4 4 5 5 MENOR 11 2 2 3
LOW SPEED 111 222 333 HIGH SPEED 666 444ONLY 555 FOR 111 222 333
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 6 L2 L3
STARTING
4 5 ROTAÇÃO L1 1 L2 2 L3
Double Speed L1 L2
L1
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1
L1 L2
L2 L3
L
6 - LOWL1 L2
L1 L2
L2 SPEED L3
L3 HIGH
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
L2ROTA
ROTA
L3
L3
L3
Double Winding LOW
L1
LOW
L1
LOW
LOW
L2
L2
1 SPEED
SPEED
SPEED
2 L3
SPEED
L3
L3 3
HIGH
L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH
HIGH
L2
L2
6 SPEED
SPEED
SPEEDL3
4 L3
SPEED
L3 5
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 1 ROTA
L2
L2 ROTA
ROTA2 L
L3
L3 3
LOW L1 L2
SPEED HIGH L1 L2
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2
ROTA
LOW
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED MENOR ROTAÇ ROTA
LOW SPEED HIGH SPEED MENOR ROT
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L
Equivalent table for lead identificationLOW SPEED HIGH SPEED MENOR ROTA
Lead identification on the wiring diagram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NEMA MG 1 Part 2 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12
IEC 60034-8 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U3 V3 W3 U4 V4 W4
Single Speed
JIS (JEC 2137) - up to 6 terminals U V W X Y Z
JIS (JEC 2137) - above 6 terminals U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U5 V5 W5 U6 V6 W6
Double Speed NEMA MG 1 Part 21) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
(Dahlander / IEC 60034-8 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
Double Winding) JIS (JEC 2137) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
1) NEMA MG 1 Part 2 defines T1 to T12 for two or more winding, however WEG adopts 1U to 4W.

www.weg.net
If motors are supplied without terminal blocks, insulate the cable terminals with suitable insulation material that
meets the power supply voltage and the insulation class indicated on the motor nameplate.
Ensure correct tightening torque for the power cable and grounding connections as specified in Table 8.7
The clearance distance (see Figure 6.13) between non-insulated live parts with each other and between
grounded parts must be as indicated in Table 6.3.
Clearance distance
Clearance distance
ENGLISH
Clearance distance Clearance distance
Figure 6.13 – Clearance distance representation

Table 6.3 – Minimum clearance distance (mm) x supply voltage.
Voltage Minimum clearance distance (mm)

U ≤ 440 V 4
440 < U ≤ 690 V 5.5
690 < U ≤ 1000 V 8
1000 < U ≤ 6900 V 45
6900 < U ≤ 11000 V 70
11000 < U ≤ 16500 V 105
Even when the motor is off, dangerous voltages may be present inside the terminal box used for the
space heater supply or winding energization when the winding is used as heating element.
Motor capacitors will hold a charge even after the power has been cut off. Do not touch the capacitors
and/or motor terminals, before discharging the capacitors completely.

www.weg.net
After the motor connection has been completed, ensure that no tool or foreign body has been left inside
the terminal box.
Unused cable inlet holes in the terminal box must be properly closed to ensure the degree of protection
indicated on the motor nameplate.
The cable inlets used for power supply and control must be fitted with components (for example, cable-
glands and conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations in each country.
If the motor is fitted with accessories, such as brakes and forced cooling systems, these devices must
be connected to the power supply according to the information provided on their nameplates and with
special care as indicated above.
All protection devices, including overcurrent protection, must be set according to the rated machine conditions.
These protection devices must protect the machine against short circuit, phase fault or locked rotor condition.
The motor protection devices must be set according to the applicable standards.
Check the direction of rotation of the motor shaft. If there is no limitation for the use of unidirectional fans, the
shaft rotation direction can be changed by reversing any two of the phase connections. For single-phase motor,
check the connection diagram indicated on the motor nameplate.
6.10. Connection of the thermal protection devices

If the motor is supplied with temperature monitoring devices, such as, thermostat, thermistors, automatic
thermal protectors, Pt-100 (RTD), etc., they must be connected to the corresponding control devices as
specified on the accessory nameplates. The non-compliance with this procedure may void the product
warranty and cause serious material damages.
ENGLISH
Do not apply test voltage above 2.5 V on thermistors and current above 1 mA on RTDs (Pt-100)
according to IEC 60751 standard.
Figure 6.14 and Figure 6.15 show the connection diagram of the bimetal thermal protector (thermostats) and
thermistors, respectively.
Figure 6.14 – Connection of the bimetal thermal protectors (thermostats)
Figure 6.15 – Thermistor connection

www.weg.net
The alarm temperature limits and thermal protection shutdowns can be defined according to the application;
however these temperature limits can not exceed the values in Table 6.4.
Table 6.4 - Maximum activation temperature of the thermal protections
Maximum temperature of the protection setting (°C)
Component Insulation class
Alarm Tripping
B - 130
Winding F 130 155
H 155 180
Bearing All 110 120
Notes:
1) The number and type of the installed protection devices are stated on the accessory nameplate of the motor.
2) If the motor is supplied with calibrated resistance, (for example, Pt-100), the motor protection system must be set according to the
operating temperatures indicated in Table 6.4.
6.11. Resistance Temperature Detectors (Pt-100)

The thermocouples Pt-100 are made of materials, whose resistance depends on the temperature variation,
intrinsic property of some materials (usually platinum, nickel or copper), calibrated resistance. Its operation is
based on the principle that the electric resistance of a metallic conductor varies linearly with the temperature,
thus allowing a continuous monitoring of the motor warm-up through the controller display ensuring a high level
of precision and answer stability. These devices are widely used for measuring temperatures in various industry
sectors.
In general these devices are used in installations where precise temperature control is required, for example, in
installation for irregular or intermittent duty.
The same detector may be used for alarm and tripping purposes.
Table 6.5 and Figure 6.16 show the equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
Table 6.5 - Equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature.
ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω
-29 88.617 17 106.627 63 124.390 109 141.908 155 159.180
-28 89.011 18 107.016 64 124.774 110 142.286 156 159.553
-27 89.405 19 107.404 65 125.157 111 142.664 157 159.926
-26 89.799 20 107.793 66 125.540 112 143.042 158 160.298
-25 90.193 21 108.181 67 125.923 113 143.420 159 160.671
-24 90.587 22 108.570 68 126.306 114 143.797 160 161.043
-23 90.980 23 108.958 69 126.689 115 144.175 161 161.415
-22 91.374 24 109.346 70 127.072 116 144.552 162 161.787
-21 91.767 25 109.734 71 127.454 117 144.930 163 162.159
-20 92.160 26 110.122 72 127.837 118 145.307 164 162.531
-19 92.553 27 110.509 73 128.219 119 145.684 165 162.903
-18 92.946 28 110.897 74 128.602 120 146.061 166 163.274
-17 93.339 29 111.284 75 128.984 121 146.438 167 163.646
-16 93.732 30 111.672 76 129.366 122 146.814 168 164.017
-15 94.125 31 112.059 77 129.748 123 147.191 169 164.388
-14 94.517 32 112.446 78 130.130 124 147.567 170 164.760
-13 94.910 33 112.833 79 130.511 125 147.944 171 165.131
-12 95.302 34 113.220 80 130.893 126 148.320 172 165.501
-11 95.694 35 113.607 81 131.274 127 148.696 173 165.872
-10 96.086 36 113.994 82 131.656 128 149.072 174 166.243
-9 96.478 37 114.380 83 132.037 129 149.448 175 166.613
-8 96.870 38 114.767 84 132.418 130 149.824 176 166.984
-7 97.262 39 115.153 85 132.799 131 150.199 177 167.354
-6 97.653 40 115.539 86 133.180 132 150.575 178 167.724
-5 98.045 41 115.925 87 133.561 133 150.950 179 168.095
-4 98.436 42 116.311 88 133.941 134 151.326 180 168.465
-3 98.827 43 116.697 89 134.322 135 151.701 181 168.834
ENGLISH
-2 99.218 44 117.083 90 134.702 136 152.076 182 169.204

-1 99.609 45 117.469 91 135.083 137 152.451 183 169.574
0 100.000 46 117.854 92 135.463 138 152.826 184 169.943
1 100.391 47 118.240 93 135.843 139 153.200 185 170.313
2 100.781 48 118.625 94 136.223 140 153.575 186 170.682
3 101.172 49 119.010 95 136.603 141 153.950 187 171.051
4 101.562 50 119.395 96 136.982 142 154.324 188 171.420
5 101.953 51 119.780 97 137.362 143 154.698 189 171.789
6 102.343 52 120.165 98 137.741 144 155.072 190 172.158
7 102.733 53 120.550 99 138.121 145 155.446 191 172.527
8 103.123 54 120.934 100 138.500 146 155.820 192 172.895
9 103.513 55 121.319 101 138.879 147 156.194 193 173.264
10 103.902 56 121.703 102 139.258 148 156.568 194 173.632
11 104.292 57 122.087 103 139.637 149 156.941 195 174.000
12 104.681 58 122.471 104 140.016 150 157.315 196 174.368
13 105.071 59 122.855 105 140.395 151 157.688 197 174.736
14 105.460 60 123.239 106 140.773 152 158.061 198 175.104
15 105.849 61 123.623 107 141.152 153 158.435 199 175.472
16 106.238 62 124.007 108 141.530 154 158.808 200 175.840

www.weg.net
Figure 6.16 – Ohmic resistance of the Pt-100 x temperature
6.12. Connection of the space heaters

Before switching ON the space heaters, check if the space heaters connection have been made according to
the connection diagram shown on the space heater nameplate. For motors supplied with dual voltage space
ENGLISH
heaters (110-127/220-240 V), see Figure 6.17.
Figure 6.17 – Dual voltage space heater connection.
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.

www.weg.net
6.13. Starting Methods

Whenever possible, the motor starting must be Direct On Line (DOL) at rated voltage. This is the most simple
and feasible starting method. However, it must only be applied when the starting current does not affect the
power supply. Please consider the local electric utility regulations when installing a motor.
High inrush current may result in:
a) high voltage drop in the power supply line creating unacceptable line disturbance on the distribution system;
b) requiring oversized protection system (cables and contactor) increasing the installation costs.
If DOL starting is not allowed due to the reasons mentioned above, an indirect starting method compatible with
the load and motor voltage to reduce the starting current may be used.
If reduced voltage starters are used for starting, the motor starting torque will also be reduced.
Table 6.6 shows the possible indirect starting methods that can be used depending on the number of the
motor leads.
Table 6.6 - Starting method x number of motor leads.
Number of leads Possible starting methods
Autotransformer
3 leads
Soft-starter
Star-Delta
6 leads Autotransformer
Soft-Starter
Series/Parallel
Part Winding
9 leads
Autotransformer
ENGLISH
Soft-Starter
Star-Delta
Series/Parallel
12 leads Part Winding
Autotransformer
Soft-Starter
Table 6.7 shows examples of possible indirect starting methods to be used according to the voltage indicated
on the motor nameplate and the power supply voltage.
Table 6.7 – Starting methods x voltage
Nameplate Operating Autotransformer Starting by series/ Part-winding Starting by
Star-delta
voltage voltage Starting parallel switch Starting soft-starter
220 V YES YES NO NO YES
220/380 V
380 V NO YES NO NO YES
220 V NO YES YES YES YES
220/440 V
230 V NO YES YES YES YES
230/460 V
380/660 V 380 V YES YES NO NO YES
220 V YES YES YES YES YES
220/380/440 V 380 V NO YES YES YES YES
440 V YES YES NO NO YES
The WQuattro line motors must be started direct on-line (DOL) or driven by a frequency inverter in scalar
mode.

www.weg.net
6.14. Motors driven by Frequency Inverter
The operation with frequency inverter must be stated in the Purchase Order since this drive type may
require some changes of the motor design.
Wmagnet Motors must only be driven by WEG frequency inverter.
The frequency inverter used to drive motors up to 690 V must be fitted with Pulse With Modulation (PWM) with
vector control.
When a motor is driven by a frequency inverter at lower frequencies than the rated frequency, you must reduce
the motor torque to prevent motor overheating. The torque reduction (derating torque) can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available on the site
www.weg.net.
If the motor is operated above the rated frequency, please note:

g That the motor must be operated at constant output;
g That the motor can supply max. 95% of its rated output;
g Do not exceed the maximum speed and please consider:
g max. operating frequency stated on the additional nameplate;
g mechanical speed limitation of the motor.
Information on the selection of the power cables between the frequency inverter and the motor can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter

6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire
ENGLISH
Motors designed for rated voltages up to 690 V, when driven by frequency inverter, do not require the use of
dV/dT filters, provided that following criteria are considered.
Criteria for the selection of motors with round enameled wire when driven by frequency inverter 1
Inverter MTBP 3
Peak voltage at the dV/dt
Motor rated votage 2 Rise Time 3 Time between pulses
motor terminals (max) inverter output (max)
(min.) (min)
Vnom ≤ 460 V ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/µs
460 < Vnom ≤ 575 V ≤ 1800 V ≤ 6500 V/µs
≥ 0,1 µs ≥ 6 µs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 4 ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/µs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 5 ≤ 2200 V ≤ 7800 V/µs
Notes:
1. For the application of motors with round enameled wires designed for 690 < Vnom ≤ 1100 V, please contact WEG.
2. For the application of dual voltage motors, example 380/660 V, consider the lower voltage (380 V).
3. Information supplied by the inverter manufacturer.
4. When not stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
5. When stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils

Motors with prewound coils (medium and high voltage motors regardless of frame sizes, and low voltage
motors from IEC 500 / NEMA 800 frame on), designed for the use with frequency inverters, do not require the
use of filters, provided they comply with the criteria in Table 6.8.
Table 6.8 – Criteria to be considered when using motor with prewound coils to be drive by frequency inverters
Turn to turn insulation (phase-phase) Phase-ground insulation

Type of Peak voltage at Peak voltage at
Motor rated voltage dV/dt at the motor dV/dt at the motor
modulation the motor the motor
terminals terminals
terminals terminals
Sinusoidal ≤ 5900 V ≤ 500 V/µs ≤ 3400 V ≤ 500 V/µs
690 < Vnom ≤ 4160 V
PWM ≤ 9300 V ≤ 2700 V/µs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 2700 V/µs
Sinusoidal ≤ 9300 V ≤ 500 V/µs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 500 V/µs
4160 < Vnom ≤ 6600 V
PWM ≤ 14000 V ≤ 1500 V/µs ≤ 8000 V ≤ 1500 V/µs

www.weg.net
6.14.2. Bearing insulation

Only the motors in IEC frame size 400 (NEMA 680) and larger are supplied, as standard, with insulated bearing.
If motor must be driven by frequency inverter, insulate the bearing according to Table 6.9.
Table 6.9 – Recommendation on the bearing insulation for inverter driven motors
Frame size Recommendation
IEC 315 and 355
NEMA 445/7, 447/9, L447/9, 504/5, 5006/7/8, 5009/10/11, 586/7, g Insulated bearing/end shield
5807/8/9, 5810/11/12 and 588/9 g Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
IEC 400 and larger g Insulated NDE bearing
NEMA 680 and larger g Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
When motors are supplied with shaft grounding system, monitor the grounding brush constantly during
its operation and, when it reaches the end of its useful life, it must be replaced by another brush with the
same specification.
6.14.3. Switching Frequency

The minimum inverter switching frequency must not be lower than 2.5 kHz and should not exceed 5 kHz.
The non-compliance with the criteria and recommendations indicated in this manual may void the
product warranty.
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation

Table 6.10 shows the maximum speeds allowed for motors driven by frequency inverter.
ENGLISH
Table 6.10 – Maximum motor speed (in rpm).

Frame size Maximum speed for
DE-bearing
IEC NEMA standard motors
6201
6202
63-90 143/5 6203 10400
6204
6205
100 - 6206 8800
6207 7600
112 182/4
6307 6800
132 213/5 6308 6000
160 254/6 6309 5300
180 284/6 6311 4400
200 324/6 6312 4200
6314 6314
6315 6315
6316 6316
6319 6319
6220 6220
225-630 364/5-9610
6320 6320
6322 6322
6324 6324
6328 6328
6330 6330
Note:
to select the maximum allowed motor speed, consider the motor torque derating curve.
For more information on the application of frequency inverters, contact WEG or check the “Technical Guidelines
for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.

www.weg.net
7. Commissioning
7.1. Initial Start-up
After finishing the installation procedures and before starting the motor for the first time or after a long period
without operation, the following items must be checked:
If the nameplate data (voltage, current, connection diagram, degree of protection, cooling system, service
g
factor, etc.) meet the application requirements.

g If the machine set (motor + driven machine) has been mounted and aligned correctly.
If the motor driving system ensures that the motor speed does not exceed the max. allowed speed indicated
g
in Table 6.10.
g Measure the winding insulation resistance, making sure it complies with the specified values in item 5.4.
g Check the motor rotation direction.
Inspect the motor terminal box for damage and ensure that it is clean and dry and all contacts are rust-free,
g
the seals are in perfect operating conditions and all unused threaded holes are properly closed thus ensuring
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
Check if the motor wiring connections, including grounding and auxiliary equipment connection, have been
g
carried out properly and are in accordance with the recommendations in item 6.9.
Check the operating conditions of the installed auxiliary devices (brake, encoder, thermal protection device,
g
forced cooling system, etc.).

Check bearing operating conditions. If signs of oxidation are detected, replace the bearings. If no sign of
g
oxidation is detected, relubricate the bearings as described in item 8.2. If the motors are stored for more than
two years, the bearings must be replaced before starting the motor.
g When motors are fitted with sleeve bearings, ensure:

g correct oil level for the sleeve bearing. The oil level should be in the center of the sight glass (see Figure 6.8);
g that the motor is not started or operated with axial or radial loads;
that if the motor is stored for a period equal or longer than the oil change interval, the oil must be changed
g
ENGLISH
before starting the motor.
g Inspect the capacitor operating condition, if any. If motors are installed for more than two years, but were
never commissioned, it is recommended to change the start capacitors since they lose their operating
characteristics.
g Ensure that the air inlet and outlet opening are not blocked. The minimum clearance to the nearest wall (L)
should be at least ¼ of the fan cover diameter (D), see Figure 7.1. The intake air temperature must be at
ambient temperature.
L
Figure 7.1- Minimum clearance to the wall

www.weg.net
Please consider the minimum distances shown in the Table 7.1 as reference value
Table 7.1 – Minimum distance between the fan cover and wall
Frame size Distance between the fan cover and the wall (L)
IEC NEMA mm inches
63 - 25 0.96
71 - 26 1.02
80 - 30 1.18
90 143/5 33 1.30
100 - 36 1.43
112 182/4 41 1.61
132 213/5 50 1.98
160 254/6 65 2.56
180 284/6 68 2.66
200 324/6 78 3.08
225 364/5
85 3.35
250 404/5
444/5
280 445/7 108 4.23
447/9
L447/9
504/5
315 122 4.80
5006/7/8
5009/10/11
586/7
588/9
355 136 5.35
5807/8/9
5810/11/12
6806/7/8
400 147 5.79
6809/10/11
450 7006/10 159 6.26
500 8006/10 171 6.73
ENGLISH
560 8806/10 185 7.28

630 9606/10 200 7.87
g e
nsure correct water flow rate and water temperature when water cooled motors are used. See item 7.2.
g ensure
that all rotating parts, such as pulleys, couplings, external fans, shaft, etc. are protected against
accidental contact.
Other tests and inspections not included in the manual may be required, depending on the specific installation,
application and/or motor characteristics.
After all previous inspections have been carried out, proceed as follows to start the motor:
g S tart the motor on no-load (if possible) and check the motor direction of rotation. Check for the presence of
any abnormal noise, vibration or other abnormal operating conditions.
g E nsure the motor starts smoothly. If any abnormal operating condition is noticed, switch off the motor, check
the assembly system and connections before the motor is started again.
g If excessive vibrations are noticed, check if the motor mounting bolts are well tightened or if the vibrations are
not generated and transmitted from adjacent installed equipment. Check the motor vibration periodically and
ensure that the vibration limits are as specified in item 7.2.1.
g S
tart the motor at rated load during a short time and compare the operating current with the rated current
indicated on the nameplate.
g C
ontinue to measure the following motor variables until thermal equilibrium is reached: current, voltage,
bearing and motor frame temperature, vibration and noise levels.
g R
ecord the measured current and voltage values on the Installation Report for future comparisons.
As induction motors have high inrush currents during start-up, the acceleration of high inertia load requires an
extended starting time to reach full speed resulting in fast motor temperature rise. Successive starts within
short intervals will result in winding temperature increases and can lead to physical insulation damage reducing
the useful life of the insulation system. If the duty cycle S1 / CONT. is specified on the motor nameplate, this
means that the motor has been designed for:
g t
wo successive starts: first start from cold condition, i. e., the motor windings are at room temperature and
the second start immediately after the motor stops.
g o
ne start from hot condition, i. e., the motor windings are at rated temperature.
The Troubleshooting Chart in section 10 provides a basic list of unusual cases that may occur during motor
operation with the respective corrective actions
www.weg.net
7.2. Operating conditions

Unless otherwise stated in the Purchase Order, electric motors are designed and built to be operated at
altitudes up to 1000 meters above sea level and in a temperature range from -20°C to +40°C. Any deviation
from the normal condition of motor operation must be stated on the motor nameplate. Some components must
be changed if the ambient temperature is different from the specified one. Please contact WEG to check the
required special features.
For operating temperatures and altitudes differing from those above, the factors indicated in Table 7.2 must be
applied to the nominal motor power rating in order to determine the derated available output (Pmax = Pnom x
correction factor).
Table 7.2 - Correction factors for altitude and ambient temperature.
Altitude (m)
T (°C)
1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
10 0.97 0.92 0.88
15 0.98 0.94 0.90 0.86
20 1.00 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.83
25 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.89 0.85 0.81
30 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.78
35 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.90 0.88 0.84 0.80 0.75
40 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.80 0.76 0.71
45 0.95 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.81 0.78 0.74 0.69
50 0.92 0.90 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.72 0.67
55 0.88 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.78 0.76 0.73 0.70 0.65
60 0.83 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.70 0.67 0.62
65 0.79 0.76 0.74 0.72 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.62 0.58
70 0.74 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.58 0.53
75 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.53 0.49
80 0.65 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.48 0.44
Motors installed inside enclosures (cubicles) must be ensured an air renewal rate in the order of one cubic
meter per second for each 100 kW installed power or fraction of installed power. Totally Enclosed Air Over
ENGLISH
motors - TEAO (fan and exhaust / smoke extraction) are supplied without cooling fan and the manufacturer of
the driven machine is responsible for sufficient motor cooling. If no minimum required air speed between motor
fins is indicated on the motor nameplate, ensure the air speed indicated in the table 7.3 is provided. The values
shown in Table 7.3 are valid for 60 Hz motors. To obtain the minimum air speed for 50 Hz motors, multiply the
values in the table by 0.83.
Table 7.3 – Minimum required air speed between motor fins (metres/second).
Frame Poles
IEC NEMA 2 4 6 8
63 to 90 143/5 14 7 5 4
100 to 132 182/4 to 213/5 18 10 8 6
160 to 200 254/6 to 324/6 20 20 12 7
225 to 280 364/5 to 444/5 22 22 18 12
315 to 355 445/7 to 588/9 25 25 20 15
The voltage and frequency variations may affect the performance characteristics and the electromagnetic
compatibility of the motor. The power supply variations should not exceed the values specified in the applicable
standards. Examples:
ABNT NBR 17094 - Parts 1 and 2. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for a combined
g
variation in voltage and frequency:

g Zone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency.
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods.
g IEC 60034-1. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for combined variation in voltage and
frequency:
gZone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency.
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods. For multivoltage motors (example 380-
415/660 V), a ±5% voltage variation from the rated voltage is allowed.
www.weg.net
g NEMA MG 1 Part 12. The motor has been designed to be operated in one of the following variations:
g ±10% of the rated voltage, with rated frequency;
g ±5% of the rated frequency, with rated voltage;
g A combined variation in voltage and frequency of ±10%, provided the frequency variation does not exceed
±5%.
If the motor is cooled by ambient air, clean the air inlet and outlet openings and cooling fins at regular intervals
to ensure a free airflow over the frame surface. The hot air should never be returned to the motor. The cooling
air must be at room temperature limited to the temperature range indicated on the motor nameplate (if no room
temperature is specified, please consider a temperature range between -20°C and +40°C).
Table 7.4 shows the minimum required water flow for water cooled motors considering the different frame sizes
and the maximum allowed temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor. The inlet
water temperature should not exceed 40°C.
Table 7.4 – Minimum required water flow and the maximum allowed
temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor
Frame size Flow rate Maximum allowed water

IEC NEMA (litres/minute) temperature rise (°C)
180 284/6 12 5
200 324/6 12 5
225 364/5 12 5
250 404/5 12 5
444/5
280 445/7 15 6
447/9
315 504/5 16 6
586/7
355 25 6
588/9
Motors fitted with oil mist lubrication systems can be operated continuously for a maximum of one hour after
ENGLISH
the failure of the oil pumping system.
Considering the sun’s heat increases the operating temperature, externally mounted motors should always be
protected from direct sunlight exposure.
Each and every deviation from the normal operating condition (tripping of the thermal protection, noise and
vibration level increase, temperature and current rise) should be investigated and corrected by WEG Authorized
Service Centers.
Motors fitted with cylindrical roller bearings require a minimum radial load to ensure a normal operation.
For information regarding the radial preload, please contact WEG.
7.2.1.Limits of vibration
The vibration severity is the maximum vibration value measured at all positions and in all directions as
recommended in the standard IEC 60034-14. Table 7.5 specifies the limits of the maximum vibrations
magnitudes according to standard IEC 60034-14 for shaft heights IEC 56 to 400, for vibrations grades A and B.
The vibration severity limits in Table 7.5 are given as RMS values (Root Mean Square values or effective values)
of the vibration speed in mm/s measured in free suspension condition.
Table 7.5 – Recommended limits for the vibration severity according to standard IEC 60034-14
Shaft height [mm] 56 < H < 132 132 < H < 280 H > 280
Vibration Grade Vibration severity on elastic base [mm/s RMS]
A 1.6 2.2 2.8
B 0.7 1.1 1.8
Notes:
1 – The values in Table 7.5 are valid for measurements carried out with decoupled machines (without load) operated at rated voltage and
frequency.
2 - The values in Table 7.5 are valid regardless of the direction of rotation of the machine.
3 – The values in Table 7.5 are not applicable to single-phase motors, three-phase motors powered by a single-phase system or to
machines mounted in situ or coupled with inertia flywheels or to loads.
According to NEMA MG 1, the allowed vibration limit for standard motors is 0.15 in/s (peak vibration in in/s).
Note:
For the load operation condition, the use of the standard ISO 10816-3 is recommended for evaluating the motor vibration limits. In the
load condition the motor vibration will be influenced by several factors, such as, type of the coupled load, condition of the motor fixation,
alignment condition under load, structure or base vibration due to other equipments, etc.

www.weg.net
8. Maintenance
The purpose of the maintenance is to extend the useful life of the equipment. The non-compliance with one of
these previous items can cause unexpected machine failures.
If motors with cylindrical roller or angular contact bearings are to be transported during the maintenance
procedures, the shaft locking device must always be fitted. All HGF motors, regardless of the bearing type,
must always be transported with the shaft locking device fitted.
All repairs, disassembly and assembly related services must be carried out only by qualified and well-trained
personnel by using proper tools and techniques. Make sure that the machine has stopped and it is
disconnected from the power supply, including the accessory devices (space heater, brake, etc.), before any
servicing is undertaken.
The company does not assume any responsibility or liability for repair services or maintenance operations
executed by non-authorized Service Centers or by non qualified service personnel. The company shall have no
obligation or liability whatsoever to the buyer for any indirect, special, consequential or incidental loss or
damage caused or arising from the company’s proven negligence
8.1. General Inspection
The inspection intervals depend on the motor type, application and installation conditions. Proceed as follows
during inspection:
g Visually inspect the motor and coupling. Check if abnormal noises, vibrations, excessive heating, wear signs,
misalignment or damaged parts are noticed. Replace the damaged parts as required.
g Measure the insulation resistance according to the item 5.4.
Clean the motor enclosure. Remove oil spills and dust accumulation from the motor frame surface to ensure
g
a better heat transfer to the surrounding ambient.

g Check cooling fan condition and clean the air inlet & outlet openings to ensure a free air flow over the motor.
g Investigate the actual condition of the seals and replace them, if required.
ENGLISH
g D
rain the condensed water from inside the motor. After draining, reinstall the drain plugs to ensure the degree
of protection as indicated on the motor nameplate. The motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is
at the lowest position (see item 6).
Check the connections of the power supply cables, ensuring the correct clearance distance between live and
g
grounded parts, as specified in Table 6.3.

Check if the tightening torque of the bolted connections and mounting bolts meets the tightening torque
g
specified in Table 8.7.

Check the status of the cable passages, the cable gland seals and the seals inside the terminal box and
g
replace them, if required.

Check the bearing operating conditions. Check for the presence of any abnormal noise, vibration or other
g
abnormal operating conditions, like motor temperature rise. Check the oil level, the lube oil condition and
compare the workings hours with the informed life time.
g Record and file all changes performed on the motor.
Do not reuse damaged or worn parts. Damaged or worn parts must be replaced by parts supplied by
the manufacturer and must be installed as if they were the original parts.
8.2. Lubrication
Proper lubrication plays a vital role in the motor performance. Only use the grease or oil types, amounts and
lubrication intervals recommended for the bearings. This information is available on the motor nameplate and
the lubrication procedures must be carried out according to the type of lubricant (oil or grease).
When the motor is fitted with thermal protection devices for bearing temperature control, consider the operating
temperature limits shown in Table 6.4.
The maximum operating temperature of motors used in special applications may differ from those shown in
Table 6.4. The grease and oil disposal should be made in compliance with applicable laws in each country
Please contact WEG when motors are to be installed in special environments or used for special
applications.

www.weg.net
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings
Excess grease causes bearing overheating, resulting in bearing failure.
The lubrication intervals specified in Table 8.1, Table 8.2, Table 8.3 and Table 8.4 consider an absolute
temperature on the bearing of 70 °C (up to frame size IEC 200 / NEMA 324/6) and 85 °C (for frame size IEC
225 / NEMA 364/5 and above), the motor running at rated speed, a motor mounted in horizontal position and
greased with Mobil Polyrex EM grease. Any variation of the parameters listed above must be evaluated.
Table 8.1 – Lubrication intervals for ball bearings

LUBRICATION INTERVALS (hours)
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC

Bearing Amount of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (g) (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 18100 15700 22000 20000
4
160 254/6 6309 13 20000 20000
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 13700 11500 17000 14000
4
180 284/6 6311 18 20000 20000
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 11900 9800 15000 12000
4
ENGLISH
200 324/6 6312 21 20000 20000

6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18000 14400 4500 3600 5000 4000
4 11600 9700 14000 12000
6314 27
6 20000 20000 16400 14200 20000 17000
8 19700 17300 24000 20000
364/5 *Upon *Upon *Upon

2 14000 3500 4000
404/5 request request request
444/5 4 6316 34 10400 8500 13000 10000
225 445/7
6 20000 20000 14900 12800 18000 16000
250 447/9
280 L447/9 8 18700 15900 20000 20000
315 504/5
*Upon *Upon *Upon
355 5008 2 9600 2400 3000
request request request
5010/11
586/7 4 6319 45 9000 7000 11000 8000
588/9 6 20000 20000 13000 11000 16000 13000
8 17400 14000 20000 17000
4 7200 5100 9000 6000
6 6322 60 20000 20000 10800 9200 13000 11000
8 15100 11800 19000 14000

www.weg.net
Table 8.2 – Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings

LUBRICATION INTERVALS (hours)
Amount
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC
Bearing of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
(g)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 19600 13300 9800 16000 12000
4
160 254/6 NU309 13 20000
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18400 12800 9200 6400 11000 8000
4 19100
180 284/6 NU311 18
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
20000
8
2 15200 10200 7600 5100 9000 6000
4 17200 21000
200 324/6 NU312 21
6 20000 20000 20000 25000
20000 25000
8
4 17800 14200 8900 7100 11000 9000
364/5 6 NU314 27 13100 11000 16000 13000
20000 20000
404/5 8 16900 15100 20000 19000
444/5 4 15200 12000 7600 6000 9000 7000
225 445/7 6 NU316 34 19000 11600 9500 14000 12000
250 447/9 20000
8 20000 15500 13800 19000 17000
280 L447/9
315 504/5 4 12000 9400 6000 4700 7000 5000
355 5008 6 NU319 45 19600 15200 9800 7600 12000 9000
5010/11 8 20000 20000 13700 12200 17000 15000
586/7 4 8800 6600 4400 3300 5000 4000
588/9 6 NU322 60 15600 11800 7800 5900 9000 7000
8 20000 20000 11500 10700 14000 13000
ENGLISH
Table 8.3 – Lubrication intervals for ball bearings – HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50Hz 60Hz
2 6314 27 3100 2100
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
6320 50 4500 4500
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T 4–8
6316 34 4500 4500
2 6314 27 3100 2100
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
6322 60 4500 4500
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T 4–8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6315 30 2700 1800
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8T and
6324 72 4500 4500
400 C/D/E 6809/10/11T 4–8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6220 31 2500 1400
6328 93 4500 3300
4
450 7006/10 6322 60 4500 4500
6328 93 4500 4500
6–8
6322 60 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6–8
6324 72 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6–8
6324 72 4500 4500
560 8806/10 4-8
*Upon request
630 9606/10 4-8

www.weg.net
Table 8.4 – Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings – HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50 Hz 60 Hz
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8 and 4 4300 2900
NU320 50
315C/D/E 5009/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9 and 4 3500 2200
NU322 60
355C/D/E 5810/11/12 6-8 4500 4500
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and 4 2900 1800
NU324 72
400C/D/E 6809/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
4 2000 1400
450 7006/10 6 NU328 93 4500 3200
8 4500 4500
4 1700 1000
500 8006/10 6 NU330 104 4100 2900
8 4500 4500
4 75 2600 1600
560 8806/10 NU228 + 6228
6-8 106 4500 4500
4 92 1800 1000
630 9606/10 6 NU232 + 6232 120 4300 3100
8 140 4500 4500
For each increment of 15 ºC above the bearing temperature, the relubrication intervals given in the Table must
be halved. The relubrication interval of motors designed by the manufacturer for mounting in horizontal position,
but installed in vertical position (with WEG authorization), must be halved.
For special applications, such as: high and low temperatures, aggressive environments, driven by frequency
inverter (VFD – frequency inverter), etc., please contact WEG about the required amount of grease and the
relubrication intervals.
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting

ENGLISH
Motors without grease fittings must be lubricated in accordance with the existing Maintenance Plan. Motor
disassembly must be carried out as specified in Item 8.3. If motors are fitted with shielded bearings (for
example, ZZ, DDU, 2RS, VV), these bearings must be replaced at the end of the grease service life.
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting
To lubricate the bearings with the motor stopped, proceed as follows:
Motors with grease fittings must be stopped to be lubricated. Proceed as follows:
g B
efore lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g L
ift grease inlet protection;
g R
emove the grease outlet plug;
g P
ump in approximately half of the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate and run the motor for about
1 (one) minute at rated speed;
g S
witch-off the motor and pump in the remaining grease;
g L
ower again the grease inlet protection and reinstall the grease outlet protection.
To grease the motor while running, proceed as follows:

g B
efore lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g P
ump the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate;
g L
ower again the grease inlet protection.
For lubrication, use only manual grease gun.
If Motors are provided with a spring device for grease removal, the grease excess must be removed by pulling
the rod and cleaning the spring until the spring does not remove more grease.
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases

The Mobil Polyrex EM grease has a polyurea thickener and a mineral oil thus being compatible with greases
that contain:
g L
ithium based thickener, lithium-based complex thickener, polyurea thickener and refined mineral oil;
g T
he used grease must have in its formulation corrosion and oxidation inhibitors.
In general terms, greases with the same type of soap are compatible to each other. However, depending on the
proportion of the mixture there may be incompatibility. In such a case, it is not recommended to mix different
types of greases without contacting the supplier or WEG beforehand.
www.weg.net
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings

To change the oil of oil lubricated motor proceed as follows:
switch-off the motor;
g
remove threaded oil drain plug;

g
open the valve and drain the oil;

g
close the drain vale again;

g
reinstall the threaded oil drain plug;

g
fill-up with the type and amount of oil as specified on the nameplate;
g
check oil level. The oil level is OK when the lubricant can be viewed approximately in the center of the sight
g
glass;
reinstall oil inlet plug;
g
check for oil leaks and ensure that all not used threaded plugs are closed with plugs.
g
The bearing lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes in the oil
properties are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked
every day and must be kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities should be used.
Note:
The HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust are supplied with grease lubricated DE-bearings and with oil lubricated NDE-
bearings. The DE-bearings must be lubricated according to recommendations in item 8.2.1. Table 8.5 specifies the oil type and the
amount of oil required for this motor lubrication.
Table 8.5 – Oil properties for HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust
Frame Bearing Lubricant

Poles Oil (liters) Interval (h) Lubricant
Mounting - High axial thrust
IEC NEMA designation specification

315L/A/B e 5006/7/8T e
4-8 29320 20
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T
355L/A/B e 5807/8/9T e ISO VG150
4-8 29320 26
ENGLISH
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T mineral oil
Renolin
with antifoam
400L/A/B e 6806/7/8T e 8000 DTA 40 /
4-8 29320 37 and
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T SHC 629
antioxidant
additives
450 7006/10 4-8 29320 45
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings

Check the service conditions of the seals and if replacement is required use only original components. Clean
the seal components before assembly (bearing caps, end shields, etc.).
Apply joint sealant between the bearing caps and end shields. The joint sealant must be compatible with the
used lubricating oil. Connect the oil lubricant tubes (oil inlet and oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as
shown in Figure 6.12.
8.2.4. Sleeve bearings
The lubricating oil of sleeve bearings must be changed at the intervals specified in Table 8.6. To replace the oil,
proceed as follows:
NDE-bearing: remove the protection plate from the fan cover;
g
Drain the oil through the drain hole located at the bottom of the bearing (see Figure 8.1);
g
Close the oil drain hole;

g
Remove the oil inlet plug;

g
Fill the sleeve bearing with the specified oil and with the amount of oil specified in;
g
Check the oil level and ensure it is kept close to the center of the sight glass;
g
Install the oil inlet plug;

g
Check for oil leaks.

g
Oil inlet
Oil sight glass
Oil outlet
Figure 8.1 – Sleeve bearing Manual of Electric Motors 103

www.weg.net
Table 8.6 – Oil properties for sleeve bearings.
Frame Bearing Oil Lubricant

Poles Interval (h) Lubricant
IEC NEMA designation (liters) Specification
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T ISO VG32
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and mineral oil with
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T Renolin
2 9-80 2.8 8000 antifoam and
DTA 10
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T additives
450 7006/10
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
9-90
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T
2.8 ISO VG46
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
9-100 mineral oil with
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T
4-8 8000 Renolin DTA 15 antifoam and
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and
11-110 antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T
4.7 additives
450 7006/10
11-125
500 8006/10
The lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes on the oil properties
are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked every day
and kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities are to be used.
8.3. Motor assembly and disassembly
All repair services on motors should be always performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with
the applicable laws and regulations in each country. Always use proper tools and devices for motor
disassembly and assembly.
ENGLISH
Disassembly and assembly services can be carried out only after the motor has been disconnected
from the power supply and is completely stopped.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals inside the terminal box since capacitors can
retain electrical charge for long periods of time even when they are not connected directly to a power source or
when space heaters are connected to the motor or when the motor windings are used as space heaters.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals when they are driven by frequency inverter even
when they are completely stopped.
Record the installation conditions such as terminal connection diagram, alignment / leveling conditions before
starting the disassembly procedures. These records should be considered for later assembly.
Disassemble the motor carefully without causing scratches on machined surfaces or damaging the threads.
Assemble the motor on a flat surface ensuring a good support base. Footless motors must be fixed/locked on
the base to prevent accidents.
Handle the motor carefully to not damage the insulated components such as windings, insulated rolling
bearings, power cables etc.
Seal elements, such as joint seals and bearing seals should always be replaced when wear or damage is
noticed.
Motors with degree of protection higher than IP55 are supplied with joint and screw seal Loctite 5923 (Henkel)
Clean the components and apply a new coat of Loctite 5923 on the surfaces before assembly.

www.weg.net
8.3.1. Terminal box

Proceed as follows to remove the terminal box cover and to disconnect/connect the power supply cables and
the cables of the accessory devices:
Ensure that during the screw removal the terminal box cover does not damage the components installed
g
inside the terminal box.

If the terminal box cover is fitted with lifting eyebolt, lift the terminal box cover always by its lift eyebolt.
g
If motors are supplied with terminal blocks, ensure the correct tightening torque on the motor terminals as
g
specified in Table 8.7.

Ensure that the cables do not contact sharp edges.
g
Ensure that the original IP degree of protection is not changed and is maintained as indicate on the motor
g
nameplate. The power supply cables and the control cables must always be fitted with components (cable
glands, conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations of each country.
Ensure that the pressure relief device is in perfect operating condition, if provided. The seals in the terminal
g
box must be in perfect condition for reuse and must be reinstalled correctly to ensure the specified degree of
protection.
Ensure the correct tightening torque for the securing bolts of the terminal box cover as specified in Table 8.7.
g
Table 8.7 – Tightening torque for the securing bolts [Nm]

Screw type and seal M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
Hex bolt/hex socket bolt
- 4 to 7 7 to 12 16 to 30 30 to 50 55 to 85 120 to 180 230 to 360
(without seal)
Combined slotted screw
- 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 - - - -
(without seal)
(with seal with metallic - - - 13 to 20 25 to 37 40 to 55 50 to 65 -
stop/cord)
Combined slotted screw
(with flat seal 'and/or - 3 to 5 4 to 8 8 to 15 - - - -
ENGLISH
mettallic stop/cord)
- - - 8 to 15 18 to 30 25 to 40 35 to 50 -
(with flat seal)
Terminal blocks 1 to 1,5 1,5 to 4 3 to 6,5 6 to 9 10 to 18 15,5 to 30 30 to 50 -
Grounding terminals - 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 30 to 50 55 to 85 120 to 180 -
8.4. Drying the stator winding insulation

Dismantle the motor completely. Remove the end shields, the rotor with the shaft, the fan cover, the fan and the
terminal box before the wound stator with the frame is transferred to the oven for the drying process. Place the
wound stator in the oven heated to max. 120 °C for two hours. For larger motors a longer drying time may be
required. After the drying process has been concluded, allow the stator to cool to room temperature. Measure
the insulation resistance again as described in item 5.4. Repeat the stator drying process if the required
insulation resistance does not meet the values specified in Table 5.3. If the insulation resistance does not
improve despite several drying processes, evaluate the causes of the insulation resistance drop carefully and an
eventual replacement of the motor winding may be required. If in doubt contact WEG.
To prevent electrical shock, discharge the motor terminals immediately before, and after each
measurement. If the motor is equipped with capacitors, these must be discharged before beginning any
repair.

www.weg.net
8.5. Spare parts

When ordering spare parts, always provide complete motor designation, indicating the motor type, the code
number and the serial number, which are stated on the motor nameplate.
Spare parts must always be purchased from WEG authorized Service Centers. The use of non-original spare
parts can cause motor failure, performance drop and void the product warranty.
The spare parts must be stored in a clean, dry and properly ventilated room, with relative air humidity not
exceeding 60%, with ambient temperature between 5°C and 40°C, free of dust, vibrations, gases, corrosive
smokes and at constant temperature. The spare parts must be stored in their normal mounting position without
placing other components onto them.
ENGLISH
Figure 8.2 - Exploded view of the components of a W22 motor

www.weg.net
9. Environmental Information
9.1. Packaging
WEG electric motors are supplied in cardboard, plastic or wooden packaging. These materials can be recycled
and must be disposed according to the applicable laws and regulations in each country. All wood used in the
packaging of WEG motors come from the company reforestation program and is not submitted to any chemical
conservation treatment.
9.2. Product
Electric motors consist mainly of ferrous metals (steel plates and cast iron), non ferrous metals (copper and
aluminum) and plastic materials.
In general, electric motors have relatively long service live. However when they must be discarded, WEG
recommends to dismantle the motor, sort the different materials and send them for recycling.
No-recyclable materials should be disposed of at industrial landfills according to the applicable environmental
laws and regulations in each country, or co-processed in cement kilns or incinerated.
The recycling service providers, the disposal in industrial landfills, the waste co-processing or the incineration
process must be properly authorized by the state environment agency to carry out these activities.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
10. Troubleshooting chart x solutions

This troubleshooting chart provides a basic list of problems that may occur during motor operation, possible
causes and recommended corrective actions. In case of doubts, please contact WEG Service Center.
Problem Possible cause Corrective action

Check the control panel and the motor
Power cables are interrupted.
power supply cables.
Blown fuses. Replace blown fuses.
Motor does not start, neither coupled nor
decoupled Correct the motor connection according to
Wrong motor connection.
connection diagram.
Check motor shaft to ensure that it rotates
Locked rotor.
freely.
Load toque is too high during start-up. Do not start the motor on load.
The motor starts at no-load, but fails when
load is applied. It starts very slowly and Check the installation dimensioning
does not reach the rated speed. Too high voltage drop in the power cables (transformer, cable cross section, relays,
circuit breakers, etc.)
Defective transmission component or Check the transmission force, the coupling
defective driven machine. and the alignment.
Align / level the motor with the driven
Misaligned / unleveled base.
machine
Unbalanced components or unbalanced
Balance the machine set again
driven machine
Abnormal / excessive noise Different balancing methods used for motor
Balance the motor again
and coupling balancing (halve key, full key)
Wrong motor direction of rotation Reverse the direction of rotation
Loose bolts Retighten the bolts
Foundation resonance Check the foundation design
ENGLISH
Damaged bearings Replace the bearings

Clean air inlet and outlet and cooling fins
Check the minimum required distance
Insufficient cooling between the fan cover and nearest walls.
See item 7
Check air temperature at inlet
Measure motor current, evaluate motor
Overload
application and if required, reduce the load
Number of starts per hour is too high or the
Reduce the number of starts per hour
load inertia moment is too high
Check the motor power supply voltage.
Motor overheating Power supply voltage too high Power supply voltage must not exceed the
tolerance specified in item 7.2
Check the motor power supply voltage and
the voltage drop. Power supply voltage
Power supply voltage too low
must not exceed the tolerance specified in
item 7.2
Interrupted power supply Check the connection of the power cables
Check for blown fuses, wrong commands,
Voltage unbalance at the motor terminals voltage unbalance in the power line, phase
fault or interrupted power cables
Direction of rotation is not compatible with Check if the direction of rotation matches
the unidirectional fan the rotation arrow indicated on end shield
Excessive grease / oil
Clean the bearing and lubricate it
Grease / oil aging
according to the provided
The used grease / oil does not matches the recommendations
specified one
Bearing overheating
Lubricate the bearing according to the
Lack of grease / oil provided recommendations
Excessive axial or radial forces due to Reduce the belt tension
the belt tension Reduce the load applied to the motor

www.weg.net
11. Warranty Term

WEG Equipamentos Elétricos S/A, Motor Unit, offers warranty against defects in workmanship and materials for
their products for a period of 18 months from the invoice issue date by factory or distributor / dealer, limited to
24 months from date of manufacture. Motors of the HGF Line are covered for a period of 12 months from the
invoice issue date by the factory or distributor / dealer, limited to 18 months from the date of manufacture.
The paragraph above contains the legal warranty periods. If a warranty period is defined in a different way in
the commercial, technical proposal of a particular sale, that will override the time limits set out above.
The periods above are independent of installation date and provided that the following requirements are met:
proper transportation, handling and storage; correct installation in specified environmental conditions free of
aggressive agents; operation within the capacity limits and observation of the Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual; execution of regular preventive maintenance; execution of repairs and/or changes only by
personnel with WEG‘s written authorization; in the occurrence of an anomaly, the product must be available to
the supplier for the minimum period necessary to identify the cause of the anomaly and to repair it properly; the
buyer must immediately notify WEG of any defects occurred and they must be later confirmed as
manufacturing defects by WEG. The warranty does not include assembly and disassembly services at the
buyer’s premises, costs of product transportation, as well as travel, lodging and meals expenses for the
technical assistance staff when requested by the customer. The warranty service will be provided exclusively
at a WEG authorized Technical Assistance or at the plant.
Components, parts and materials whose useful life is usually less than 12 (twelve) months are not covered by
the warranty.
Under no circumstance will warranty services extend the warranty period of the equipment. However, new
warranty equivalent to the original one will be due only to the components repaired or replaced by WEG.
The present warranty is limited to the product supplied. WEG will not be liable for damages to people, third
parties, other equipment and facilities, loss of profits or other incidental or consequential damages.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
12. Ec declaration of conformity
WEG Equipamentos Elétricos S/A

Av. Prefeito Waldemar Grubba, 3000
89256-900 - Jaraguá do Sul – SC – Brazil,
and its authorised representative established in the European Community,

WEGeuro – Industria Electrica SA
Rua Eng Frederico Ulrich, Apartado 6074
4476-908 – Maia – Porto – Portugal
hereby declare that the products:
WEG induction motors and components for using in these motors:
Three-phase
……………
Single-phase
……………
when installed, maintained and used in applications for which they were designed, and in compliance with the relevant
installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions, comply with the requirements of the following European Directives
ENGLISH
and standards where applicable:
Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
Regulation (EC) No 640/2009
Directive 2009/125/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC (induction motors are considered inherently benign in terms of electromagnetic compatibility)
Standards:
EN 60034-1/2-1/5/6/7/8/9/11/12/14/30 and 60204-1
From 29/12/2009 on low voltage electric motors are no longer considered under the scope of the current Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EC.
CE marking in: 1996
Milton Oscar Castella

Engineering Director
Jaraguá do Sul, May 31st, 2011

Appendix
CONTROL SYSTEMS /
INSTRUMENTATIONS
DREXELBROOK
®
A Leader In Level Measurement Solutions
MultiPoint II™ 506-3100 Series

Multiple Operating Point
Level Control
Control up to four operating
points on a single sensor with the
MultiPoint II Level Control from
Drexelbrook.
The MultiPoint II level control is economical
for processes requiring multiple operating
High Level
points, such as batch processing and sump
applications. The system provides four
Pump On
operating points with only one electronic unit
Deadband to install and maintain. It requires only one
opening in the vessel for the sensor.
Pump Off
Top mounting eliminates any
openings below the material level.
Single entry in the top of the vessel eliminates
any possibility of leaks in the vessel due to the
Low Level placement of the control at the material level.
The sensing element mounts in a single NPT or
flange mounting at the top of the vessel.
Coating on the sensor has no effect

on the measurement.
For process materials that produce coatings,
Multiple operating points through a
the MultiPoint II Level Control features
single entry
System offers up to four control points on a single Drexelbrook’s unequaled Cote-ShieldTM
sensing element. One relay has an adjustable circuitry. Cote-Shield ignores the effects of
differential, providing two control points. build-up on the sensing element and continues
to accurately detect the presence or
No need to empty the vessel for absence of material.
installation
Sensing element is mounted in the top of the
vessel. This eliminates the need for openings Choose the most convenient
below the material level. location for the transmitter.
The MultiPoint II Level Control is
Safe for hazardous locations
Sensing element and cable are intrinsically safe available in integral or remote mounted
for hazardous areas. versions with standard explosionproof or
optional NEMA 4X housings. Choose the
No Maintenance configuration that best suits your needs.
All electronic design and no moving parts
eliminate the need for maintenance.
MultiPoint II™ 506-3100 Series
Specifications
Power Requirements Operating Point Range Housing
95-145 Vac 50/60 Hz 1 watt or 0-200 ft (depending on sensing 5-inch integral explosion-
205-255 Vac 50/60 Hz 1 watt. elements) Range selection: Four- proof standard. 5-inch remote
position adjustable switch. explosion-proof or Nema 4X
Level Output remote housings optional.
(3) DPDT relays:one with 0-90 RFI Protection
second adjustable time delay, (Built-in) Less than 1/2 inch Sensing Element and Cable
one on/off, one with adjustable shift in operating point for unit Designed to be intrinsically
differential*. in explosion-proof housing, 5W safe for Class I Groups
field @ 27, 150, or 450 MHz at A,B,C,D and Class II Groups
*Adjustable differential can be a distance of 5 feet (1.5m) from E,F,G (Div. 1 and 2). Unit is
selected as a locked band.The exposed cable, or power line. mounted in FM approved
differential remains the same, explosion proof housing.
even if the setpoints are moved. Fail-Safe
Switchable to either Low-Level Approvals
Contact Ratings Fail-Safe (LLFS) or High-Level Consult factory.
120 Vac; 5A non-inductive, 3A Fail-Safe (HLFS).
inductive. Min. Rating 100 mA/ Other Options
12VDC. Connecting Cable DrexelcoteTM corrosion-resistant
(Remote units only) Three- condulet/housing.
Operating Temperature terminal coaxial up to 150 feet
(Electronics) (45.7m).
-40°F to 140°F (-40°C to 60°C).
Model Number Process Capacitance

Sensing Element Standard Ma t e r i a l s of
(Sensing Pressure/ Applications (pF) per
Dimensions Mounting1 Const r uct i on
Element) Temperature Foot
1000psi @100oF Light or

.375 in (9.5mm) O.D.
506-3100-X01 (70 BAR @ 38oC) non-coating TFE i nsul at ed
(700-1-22) 500 psi @300oF c o n d u c t i ve
20 ft (6m) 3⁄4 inch NPT me t a l r o d
78 pF
maximum length
(34 BAR @149oC) liquids
1000psi @100oF Fo r s t r e n g t h
.84 in (21.3mm) O.D.
506-3100-X04 (70 BAR @ 38oC) and modest " X" i nsul at ed 350 pF
20 ft (6m) 1 inch NPT
(700-2-57) 500 psi @250oF c o n d u c t i ve me t a l r o d ±10%
maximum length
(34 BAR @120oC) coatings
Longer
lengths in
.093 in (2.4mm) O.D.
506-3100-X05 500 psi @300oF wa t e r - l i ke PFA i n s u l a t e d
(700-5-54) (34 BAR @149oC) liquids
200 ft (61m) 3⁄4 inch NPT c a bl e
48 pF
maximum length
wi thout
agitation
1000psi @100oF Best

.54 in (13.7mm) O.D.
506-3100-X06 (70 BAR @ 38oC) c o n d u c t i ve " X" i nsul at ed
(700-2-37) 500 psi @250oF coating
12 ft (3.65m) 3⁄4 inch NPT me t a l r o d
2400 pF
maximum length
(34 BAR @149oC) rejection
1000psi @100oF
Modest .56 in (13.7mm) O.D.
FEP i nsul at ed
506-3100-X07 (70 BAR @38oC)
(700-2-27) 500 psi @300oF
c o n d u c t i ve 15 ft (4.7m) 3⁄4 inch NPT me t a l r o d
300 pF
coatings maximum length
(34 BAR @120oC)
Flange mountings available. Consult local Drexelbrook representative.

1
X = 0 (Integral Electronic); X = 7 (Remote Electronics)

U.S.A. Sales: 800-553-9092 • 24-Hour Service: 800-527-6297 • International Support: 215-674-1234 • Fax: 215-674-2731
AMETEK Nihon Drexelbrook AMETEK Singapore Pte. Ltd. AMETEK Precision Instruments Europe
2 Chome • 12-7 Minami Gyotoku 10 Ang Mo Kio Street 65 Rudolf-Diesel-Strasse 16
Ichikawa City • Chiba 27201 Japan #05-12 Techpoint • 569059 Singapore D-40670 Meerbusch Germany
DREXELBROOK Phone: 81-473-56-6513
Fax: 81-473-56-6535
Phone: 65-6484-2388
Fax: 65-6481-6588
Phone: 49-2159-9136-0
Fax: 49-2159-9136-39
205 Keith Valley Road E-mail: nd@nihon-drexelbrook.co.jp E-mail: aspl@ametek.com.sg Web: www.ametek.de
Horsham PA 19044 U.S.A.
E-mail - drexelbrook.info@ametek.com
Web - www.drexelbrook.com ©2004, by AMETEK, Inc. All rights reserved. • Printed in the U.S.A. • 506-3100-A • EDO#3-04-243 • Issue #2
C SERIES
PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS
http://www.k-torc.com
CONTENTS
Design and structure 1
Operating principle 2
Assemble，parts and material 3
Dimension drawings and table 4
Output torque table of double acting 5
Output torque table of spring return 5-7
Operating conditions, Air consumption 7
Weight, Mounting operation,maintenance 8
Sizing information and How to Order 10
Accessories 11
Design
Our newly designed C Series Pneumatic Actuator is an aluminum rack & pinion
actuator in double acting and spring return based on our innovative and
patented technology. This kind of actuator features a top mount multifunction
indicator and open-close stop adjustment as a standard. In addition, state-of-
the-art engineering has allowed us to reduce the size of the actuator without
losing any torque. The features and characteristics of the actuator have kept
pace with 4th generation pneumatic actuator in the world.
Structure
4. End caps
Die-casting aluminum powder polyester painted in
different colors, PTFE or nickel plated.
1
5. Pistons
3 2 7
The twin rack pistons are made from die-casting
6
5 aluminum treated with hard anodized or made from cast
steel with galvanization .Symmetric mounting position,
8 long cycle life and fast operation, reversing rotation by
9
simply inverting the pistons.
4
6. Travel adjustment
The two independent external travel stop adjustment
bolts can adjust both open and close directions easily and
1. Indicator precisely.
Position indicator with NAMUR is convenient for 7. High performance springs
mounting accessories such as limit switch box, positioner Preloaded coating springs are made from the high quality
and so on. material for resistant to corrosion and longer cycle life,
2. Pinion which can be demounted safely and conveniently to
The pinion is high-precision and integrative, made from satisfy different requirements of torque by changing
nickel alloy steel, full conform to the latest standards of quantity of springs.
ISO5211,DIN3337,NAMUR.The dimensions can be 8. Bearings & guides
customized and the stainless steel is available. Made from low friction, long-life compound material, to
3. Actuator body avoid the direct contact between metals. The
According to the different requirements, the extruded maintenance and replacement are easy and convenient.
aluminum alloy ASTM6005 body can be treated with hard 9. O-rings
anodized, powder polyester painted (different colors is NBR rubber o-rings provide trouble-free operation at
available such as blue, orange, yellow etc.) or PTFE or standard temperature ranges. For high and low
nickel plated. temperature, viton or silicone is used.
1
Operating Principle
Double acting
Standard rotation Reverse rotation
CCW CW
A B A B A B A B
0o 90 o 90 o 0o
Standard Rotation: Reverse Rotation:

Air to port A forces the pistons outwards, causing Air to port A forces the pistons outwards, causing
the pinion to turn counterclockwise while the air is the pinion to turn clockwise while the air is being
being exhausted from port B. Air to port B forces exhausted from port B. Air to port B forces the
the pistons inwards, causing the pinion to turn pistons inwards, causing the pinion to turn
clockwise while the air is being exhausted from counter clockwise while the air is being
port A. exhausted from port A.
Spring return
Standard rotation Reverse rotation
CCW CW
A B A B A B A B
0o 90 o 90 o 0o
Standard Rotation: Reverse Rotation:

Air to port A forces the pistons outwards, causing Air to port A forces the pistons outwards,
the springs to compress, the pinion turns counter causing the springs to compress, the pinion turns
clockwise while air is being exhausted from port B. clockwise while air is being exhausted from port
Loss of air pressure on port A, the stored energy in B. Loss of air pressure on port A, the stored
the springs forces the pistons inwards. The pinion energy in the springs forces the pistons inwards.
turns clockwise while air is being exhausted from The pinion turns counterclockwise while air is
port A. being exhausted from port A.
2
Parts and Material
18 17 15 25
4
5
6
23
7
7 26 27
24
16
8
9
10
11
15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22
27 26 12
13
14
No. Des cription Qty. Material No. Des cription Qty. Material
1 Indicator s crew 1 P lastic(AB S ) 15 S pring 0~12 Spring s teel
2 Indicator 1 P lastic(AB S ) 16 B earing (pis ton) 2 polyoxymethylene
3 Circlip 1 Stainles s s teel(304) 17 O-ring(pis ton) 2 NB R
4 T hrus t was her 1 Stainles s s teel(304) 18 P is ton 2 Die-Cas t aluminum(101A)
5 Outs ide was her 1 polyoxymethylene 19 P lug 2 NB R
6 B ody 1 E xtruded aluminum alloy(6005-T 5) 20 O-ring(adjus t s crew) 2 NB R
7 Guide(pis ton) 2 polyoxymethylene 21 Nut (adjus t s crew) 2 Stainles s s teel(304)
8 O-ring(pinion top) 1 NB R 22 Adjus t s crew 2 Stainles s s teel(304)
9 B earing(pinion top) 1 polyoxymethylene 23 S top s crew 2 Stainles s s teel(304)
10 Ins ide was her 1 polyoxymethylene 24 Nut (s top s crew) 2 Stainles s s teel(304)
11 Cam 1 # 45 25 O-ring(end cap) 2 NB R
12 P inion 1 # 45 26 E nd-cap 2 Die-Cas t aluminum(ADC12)
13 B earing (pinion bottom) 1 polyoxymethylene 27 E nd-cap s crew 8 S tainles s s teel(304)
14 O-ring(pinion bottom) 1 NB R
3
Dimension
4xL
NAMUR
4
45
4
12
J
I
M6
4xK
Φ F
D
C
E
N
Z A B
40
4-M6x10
2-G1/2"
4-M5x8
NAMUR
2-G1/4"
4-M5x8 24
G
32
G1/4 "NAMUR" G1/2 "NAMUR"
Unit: mm
Model A B C D E F G H I J K L M N Z Φ Air Connection
C-40 28.5 36.5 60 80 52 30 80 Φ36 Φ50 M5x8 M6x10 11 14 120 Φ40 G1/4"(1/4"NPT)
C-52 30 41.5 65.5 72 92 65 30 80 Φ36 Φ50 M5x8 M6x10 11 14 147 Φ40 G1/4"(1/4"NPT)
C-63 36 47 81 87.5 107.5 72 30 80 Φ50 Φ70 M6x10 M8x13 14 18 168 Φ40 G1/4"(1/4"NPT)
C-75 42 53 94 99.5 119.5 81 30 80 Φ50 Φ70 M6x10 M8x13 14 18 184 Φ40 G1/4"(1/4"NPT)
C-83 46 57 98.5 108.7 128.7 92 30 80 Φ50 Φ70 M6x10 M8x13 17 21 204 Φ40 G1/4"(1/4"NPT)
C-92 50 58.5 111 116.5 136.5 98 30 80 Φ50 Φ70 M6x10 M8x13 17 21 262 Φ40 G1/4"(1/4"NPT)
C-105 57.5 64 122.5 133 153 109.5 30 80 Φ70 Φ102 M8x13 M10x16 22 26 268 Φ40 G1/4"(1/4"NPT)
C-125 67.5 74.5 145.5 155 175 127.5 30 80 Φ70 Φ102 M8x13 M10x16 22 26 301 Φ55 G1/4"(1/4"NPT)
C-140 75 77 161 172 192 137.5 30 80 Φ102 Φ125 M10x16 M12x20 27 31 390 Φ55 G1/4"(1/4"NPT)
C-160 87 87 184 197 217 158 30 80 Φ102 Φ125 M12x20 27 31 458 Φ55 G1/4"(1/4"NPT)
C-190 103 103 216 230 260 189 30 130 Φ140 M16x25 36 40 525 Φ80 G1/4"(1/4"NPT)
C-210 113 113 235.5 255 285 210 30 130 Φ140 M16x25 36 40 532 Φ80 G1/4"(1/4"NPT)
C-240 130 130 264.5 289 319 245 30 130 Φ165 M20x25 46 50 602 Φ80 G1/4"(1/4"NPT)
C-270 147 147 299 326 356 273 30 130 Φ165 M20x25 46 50 722 Φ80 G1/2"(1/2"NPT)
4
Output torque
For Double Acting Actuator
Output Torque of C Series Pneumatic Actuator with Double Acting (unit:Nm)
Air pressure(Bar)
Model
2 2.5 3 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 7 8
Output C40DA 4.8 6 7.2 9.5 10.7 11.9 13.1 14.3 16.7 19.1
torque
C52DA 8.0 10.0 12.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 21.9 23.9 27.9 31.9
Output torque of C63DA 14.6 18.2 21.9 29.2 32.8 36.5 40.1 43.8 51.1 58.4
double acting actuators C75DA 20.1 25.1 30.1 40.1 45.1 50.2 55.2 60.2 70.2 80.3
C83DA 31.4 39.2 47.0 62.7 70.5 78.4 86.2 94.1 109.7 125.4
C92DA 45.1 56.4 67.7 90.3 101.6 112.9 124.1 135.4 158.0 180.6
C105DA 66.1 82.7 99.2 132.2 148.8 165.3 181.8 198.4 231.4 264.5
C125DA 100.3 125.4 150.5 200.6 225.7 250.8 275.9 301.0 351.1 401.3
Rotation
C140DA 171.0 213.8 256.5 342.0 384.8 427.5 470.3 513.0 598.5 684.0
0o 45 o 90 o C160DA 266.0 332.5 399.0 532.0 598.5 665.0 731.5 798.0 931.0 1064.0
C190DA 425.6 532.0 638.4 851.2 957.6 1064.0 1170.4 1276.8 1489.6 1702.4
C210DA 532.0 665.0 798.0 1064.0 1197.0 1330.0 1463.0 1596.0 1862.0 2128.0
C240DA 769.5 961.9 1154.3 1539.0 1731.4 1923.8 2116.1 2308.5 2693.3 3078.0
C270DA 1169.6 1462.1 1754.5 2339.3 2631.7 2924.1 3216.5 3508.9 4093.7 4678.6
For spring return actuator
Output Output
torque torque
Air Stroke Spring Stroke

Rotation Rotation
0o 45 o 90 o 0o 45 o 90 o
Output Torque of C Series Pneumatic Actuator with Spring Return (unit:Nm)

Air pressure(Bar)
Springs' output
2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8
Model Spring
0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 90 o 0o
Q.TY
Start End Start End Start End Start End Start End Start End Start End Start End
5 5.7 3.8 7.6 5.7 6.2 4.3
6 4.9 2.5 6.9 4.5 10.9 8.5 7.4 5.0
7 4.0 1.3 6.0 3.3 9.8 7.3 14.0 10.4 8.6 5.9
C52SR 8 5.2 2.0 9.2 6.0 13.2 9.1 17.2 14.1 9.9 6.7
9 4.3 0.8 8.3 4.8 12.3 7.9 16.3 12.8 20.3 16.8 11.1 7.6
10 7.4 3.6 11.5 6.7 15.5 11.6 19.5 15.6 12.4 8.5
11 6.6 2.3 10.6 5.4 14.6 10.4 18.6 14.3 22.6 18.3 13.6 9.3
12 9.7 4.2 13.8 9.1 17.8 12.2 21.8 17.1 14.8 10.2
5 11.4 7.7 15.0 11.4 22.3 14.9 10.4 6.8
6 10.1 5.7 13.6 9.3 20.9 16.6 28.3 23.9 12.5 8.2
7 8.6 3.6 12.5 7.2 19.5 14.5 26.8 21.9 14.6 9.6
C63SR 8 10.9 5.1 18.2 12.4 25.5 19.8 32.8 27.0 40.1 34.3 16.7 10.9
9 16.8 10.4 24.1 17.7 31.4 24.9 38.7 32.2 18.8 12.3
10 1.4 8.2 22.8 15.6 30.0 22.8 37.3 30.1 44.7 37.4 20.9 13.7
11 21.5 13.5 28.7 20.7 36.0 28.0 43.3 35.3 22.9 15.0
12 20.0 11.4 27.3 18.6 34.6 25.9 41.9 33.3 25.0 16.4
5
Air pressure(Bar)
Springs' output
2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8
Model Spring
0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 90 o 0o
Q.TY
5 14.5 10.6 19.4 15.5 29.5 25.7 14.5 10.5
6 12.4 7.6 17.3 12.6 27.4 22.7 37.5 32.8 17.4 12.7
7 10.4 4.8 15.2 9.7 25.3 19.9 35.4 29.9 20.3 14.8
8 13.1 6.8 23.1 16.9 33.3 27.0 43.2 37.0 53.3 47.0 23.2 16.9
C75SR 9 21.0 14.1 31.2 24.1 41.1 34.1 51.2 44.2 26.1 19.0
10 19.0 11.1 28.8 21.2 39.0 31.2 49.1 41.2 59.1 51.2 29.0 21.1
11 27.0 18.3 37.0 28.3 47.0 38.4 57.0 48.4 31.9 23.2
12 24.9 15.4 34.9 25.4 44.9 35.4 54.9 45.4 34.7 25.3
5 23.3 16.1 31.1 24.0 46.8 39.7 23.0 15.8
6 20.1 11.5 28.0 19.3 43.7 35.1 59.4 50.7 27.6 19.0
7 17.0 6.9 24.8 14.8 40.5 30.5 56.2 46.2 32.2 22.1
8 21.7 10.1 37.4 25.8 53.1 41.5 68.8 57.2 84.5 72.9 36.8 25.3
C83SR 9 34.2 21.3 49.9 37.0 65.6 52.6 81.2 68.3 41.4 28.5
10 31.0 16.6 46.7 32.3 62.4 48.0 78.1 63.7 93.8 79.3 46.0 31.6
11 43.6 27.7 59.3 43.4 75.0 59.1 90.6 74.8 50.6 34.8
12 40.4 23.2 56.1 38.9 71.7 54.5 87.4 70.2 55.2 38.0
5 33.1 22.0 44.2 33.2 66.8 55.9 34.4 23.3
6 28.4 15.2 39.6 26.4 62.2 49.0 84.8 71.6 41.2 28.0
7 23.8 8.2 34.9 19.4 57.5 42.1 80.2 64.7 48.1 32.7
8 31.3 12.6 52.9 35.2 75.5 57.9 98.1 80.5 120.7 103.0 55.0 37.3
C92SR 9 48.2 28.4 70.9 51.0 93.5 73.6 116.0 96.1 61.9 42.0
10 43.6 21.5 66.2 44.1 88.8 66.7 111.3 89.2 134.0 111.8 68.7 46.7
11 61.5 37.2 84.1 59.9 106.6 82.4 129.2 105.0 75.6 51.4
12 56.8 30.4 79.4 53.0 101.9 75.5 124.5 98.1 82.5 56.0
5 51.0 33.4 67.5 49.9 100.6 83.0 49.2 31.6
6 44.7 23.5 61.1 40.0 94.2 73.2 127.3 106.2 59.1 38.0
7 38.4 13.7 54.9 30.3 87.9 63.4 121.0 96.4 68.9 44.3
C105SR 8 48.5 20.4 81.6 53.5 114.7 86.5 147.7 119.6 180.8 152.7 78.7 50.6
9 75.3 43.7 108.4 76.8 141.5 109.8 174.5 142.9 88.6 56.9
10 68.9 33.4 102.0 66.5 135.1 99.6 168.2 132.6 201.2 165.7 98.4 63.3
11 95.7 57.0 128.7 90.1 161.8 123.1 194.8 156.2 108.3 69.6
12 89.4 47.5 122.5 80.6 155.5 113.6 188.6 146.7 118.1 75.9
5 73 47 98 72 148 122 79 52
6 63 31 88 56 138 107 188 157 94 63
7 52 15 77 40 127 90 178 141 110 73
C125SR 8 67 25 117 75 167 125 217 176 268 226 125 84
9 107 59 157 109 207 159 257 210 141 94
10 96 44 146 94 196 144 247 194 297 245 157 105
11 136 78 186 128 236 178 286 228 173 115
12 125 63 176 113 226 163 276 213 188 125
5 128 85 171 127 256 213 129 86
6 111 59 154 102 239 187 325 273 155 103
7 94 33 137 76 222 162 308 247 181 120
8 120 50 205 136 291 221 376 307 462 392 206 137
C140SR
9 187 110 273 196 358 281 444 367 232 155
10 170 84 256 169 341 255 427 340 512 426 258 172
11 238 143 324 229 409 314 495 400 284 189
12 221 118 307 203 392 289 478 374 310 206
5 193 124 259 191 392 324 208 140
6 165 83 232 149 365 282 498 415 250 168
7 137 41 203 107 336 240 469 373 292 196
C160SR 8 176 66 309 199 442 237 575 465 708 598 333 223
9 280 157 413 290 546 423 679 556 375 251
10 253 115 386 248 519 381 652 514 785 647 417 279
11 358 207 491 340 624 473 757 606 458 307
12 330 165 463 298 596 431 729 564 500 335
5 332 222 438 329 651 542 309 200
6 292 161 398 267 611 480 824 693 371 240
7 252 99 358 205 571 418 784 631 433 280
C190SR 8 318 143 531 356 744 569 957 782 1169 995 495 320
9 491 295 704 507 917 720 1130 933 557 360
10 451 233 664 446 877 658 1090 871 1302 1084 618 400
11 624 384 837 597 1050 809 1263 1022 680 440
12 584 322 797 535 1010 748 1223 960 742 480
5 390 285 523 418 789 684 380 275
6 335 209 468 342 734 608 1000 874 456 330
7 280 133 413 266 679 532 945 798 532 385
8 358 190 624 456 890 722 1156 988 1422 1254 608 440
C210SR
9 569 380 835 646 1101 912 1367 1178 684 495
10 514 304 780 570 1046 836 1312 1102 1578 1368 760 550
11 725 494 991 760 1257 1026 1523 1292 836 605
12 670 418 936 684 1202 950 1468 1216 912 660
6
Air pressure(Bar)
2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 Springs' output
Model Spring
Q.TY 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 0o 90 o 90 o 0o
5 552 409 744 600 1129 985 554 410
6 470 297 662 489 1047 874 1432 1259 665 492
7 388 187 580 379 964 764 1349 1149 775 575
8 498 268 883 653 1267 1037 1652 1422 2037 1807 886 656
C240SR 9 800 542 1185 926 1569 1311 1954 1696 998 739
10 718 431 1103 816 1488 1201 1872 1586 2257 1970 1108 821
11 1021 705 1406 1090 1791 1474 2176 1859 1219 903
12 939 594 1323 979 1708 1363 2093 1748 1330 985
5 903 675 1195 968 1779 1552 787 560
6 790 519 1083 811 1667 1396 2252 1981 943 672
7 679 361 972 654 1556 1238 2141 1823 1101 783
8 860 497 1444 1081 2029 1666 2614 2252 3199 2836 1258 895
C270SR 9 1332 923 1917 1509 2502 2094 3087 2678 1416 1007
10 1220 767 1805 1352 2390 1937 2974 2521 3560 3107 1572 1119
11 1693 1194 2278 1779 2862 2364 3448 2949 1730 1231
12 1582 1037 2167 1623 2751 2207 3336 2792 1887 1342
Operating Conditions
1. Operating media
Dry or lubricated air, or the non-corrosive gas.
The maximum particle diameter must less than 30um.
2. Air supply pressure
The minimum supply pressure is 2 Bar
The maximum supply pressure is 8 Bar
3. Operating temperature
Standard(NBR O-ring): -20˚C~+80˚C
Low temperature(L NBR O-ring): -35˚C~+80˚C
High temperature(Viton O-ring): -15˚C~+150˚C
4. Travel adjustment
Have adjustment range of ±5o for the rotation at 0oand 90o
5. Application
Suitable both for indoor and outdoor
Air Consumption
Air volume opening & closing Unit: L
Model Air volume opening Air volume closing Model Air volume opening Air volume colsing
C-40 0.05 0.06 C-125 1.6 1.4
C-52 0.12 0.16 C-140 2.5 2.2
C-63 0.21 0.23 C-160 3.7 3.2
C-75 0.3 0.34 C-190 5.9 5.4
C-83 0.43 0.47 C-210 7.5 7.5
C-92 0.64 0.73 C-240 11 9
C-105 0.95 0.88 C-270 17 14
Air consumption depends on Air Supply. Air volume and Action cycle times, the calculating as follows:
Air Supply (Kpa)+101.3
L/Min=Air volume (Air volume Opening+Air volume closing) x [ ] x Action cycle times (/min)
101.3
7
Weight Unit: Kg
Model C-40 C-52 C-63 C-75 C-83 C-92 C-105 C-125 C-140 C-160 C-190 C-210 C-240 C-270
DA 0.8 1.38 2.03 2.7 3.13 4.6 6.77 8.9 13.25 20.14 31.3 46.8 67.28 96.9
SR 1.45 2.05 2.9 3.6 5.22 6.85 10.11 15.55 24 35.25 54.8 80.2 118
Operation Time
Unit: s
Double Acting Spring Return
Spring Qty.
o o o o
Size 0 -90 90 -0 Size 3+3 3+4 4+4 4+5 5+5 5+6 6+6
o
0o-90o 90o-0o 0o-90o 90o-0o 0o-90o 90o-0o 0o-90o 90o-0o 0 -90 90 -0 0o-90o 90o-0o 0o-90o 90o-0o
o o o
52DA 0.6 0.53 52SR 2.46 0.48 2.48 0.46 2.5 0.44 2.52 0.42 2.54 0.4 2.56 0.38 2.58 0.36
63DA 0.66 0.58 63SR 2.54 0.56 2.56 0.54 2.58 0.52 2.6 0.5 2.62 0.48 2.64 0.46 2.66 0.44
75DA 0.72 0.64 75SR 2.62 0.64 2.64 0.62 2.66 0.6 2.68 0.58 2.7 0.56 2.72 0.54 2.74 0.52
83DA 0.83 0.73 83SR 2.71 0.73 2.73 0.71 2.75 0.69 2.77 0.67 2.79 0.65 2.81 0.63 2.83 0.61
92DA 1 0.86 92SR 2.89 0.86 2.91 0.84 2.93 0.82 2.95 0.8 2.97 0.78 2.99 0.76 3.01 0.74
105DA 1.35 1.3 105SR 3.14 0.91 3.16 0.89 3.18 0.87 3.2 0.85 3.22 0.83 3.24 0.81 3.26 0.79
125DA 2.4 1.79 125SR 4.24 1.2 4.26 1.18 4.28 1.16 4.3 1.14 4.32 1.12 4.34 1.1 4.36 1.08
140DA 2.5 2.1 140SR 4.4 1.35 4.4 1.33 4.62 1.31 4.64 1.29 4.66 1.27 4.68 1.25 4.68 1.22
160DA 3.93 2.6 160SR 4.74 1.77 4.76 1.75 4.78 1.73 4.8 1.71 4.82 1.69 4.82 1.67 4.84 1.65
190DA 4.55 3.45 190SR 5.75 3.7 5.77 3.5 5.75 3.48 5.77 3.46 5.79 3.44 5.8 3.42 5.83 3.4
210DA 5.5 4.35 210SR 8.25 4.8 8.4 4.6 8.42 4.58 8.44 4.56 8.46 4.54 8.48 4.52 8.5 4.5
240DA 8.4 8.33 240SR 16.2 5.14 16.4 5.12 16.42 5.1 16.44 4.9 16.6 4.98 16.8 4.86 17 4.84
270DA 10.9 8.53 270SR 17.6 6.28 17.8 6.26 17.6 6.24 17.8 6.2 18 6.18 18.2 6.16 18.4 6.14
Air Pressure: 5 bar
Mounting Operation
Remove any manual opening device from the valve, leaving the valve stem clear. Make sure that the shape of the
stem fit the actuator output and that the rotation is not hindered in any way. Mount the actuator onto the valve,
certaining it well on the stem. Make sure that the rotation direction is correct, in any case do not insert your hands
inside the valve. We strongly suggest checking the cleanness of the air-supply pipes, especially when the plant is not
provided with filters. A spacer between actuator and valve will be necessary with fluids at high temperature.
Springs mounting form for spring return actuators:
5 Springs 6 Springs 7 Springs 8 Springs
9 Springs 10 Springs 11 Springs 12 Springs
8
Maintenance
1.It is recommended that periodic checks be performed to make sure that all fasteners remain tight.
2.The actuator is supplied ready-lubricated no further lubrication is required. If lubrication is deemed necessary , use
EP-1 grease.
3.Under certain working conditions (heavy duty, non-compatible operating media or abnormal operating
conditions)internal seals should be checked periodically and replaced when necessary.
4.On spring return actuators, spring fatigue may set in requiring the replacement of springs. Spring should always be
replaced in full sets.
NOTE
If an actuator is properly assembled and used , it will be maintenance free, as it has been lubricated
enough to last a normal working life under normal working conditions. Should it get necessary to
replace its seals, we suggest turning to our company where the product will be overhauled first, and
then tested. On request, our company will be willing to provide its customers with kits and
instructions.
Different colors powder polyester painted

and treatment body and ends available.
9
Special actuators
Actuators with steel body
Actuators with stainless steel pinion and pistons
120o ,145o ,180o actuators
Three-positions actuator
Speedy or slow act actuators
Sizing information and How to Order

There are four parts in the Model and specification of K-TORC Series Actuators .
Seeing follows please: α

Registered trade mark
Actuator Series
Diameter of Body(mm)
Double Acting or Spring Return
Example:
αC-85DA
C Series Actuator With Double Acting.The Diameter of Body equal to
85mm.
αC-240SR
C Series Actuator With Spring Return.The Diameter of Body equal to
240mm.
10
Sizing: Double Acting Actuators Sizing: Spring Return Actuators
The suggested safety factor for double acting actuators The suggested safety factor for spring return actuator under
under normal working conditions is 20%-30%. normal working conditions is 30%-50%
Example:
Example: The torque needed by valve=80N.m
The torque needed by valve=100N.m The torque consider safety factor ( 1+30%)=104N.m
The torque considered safety factor Air Supply=5Bar
(1+30%)=130N.m According to the table of spring return actuators' output,
Air Supply=5Bar we find output torque of C-140SRT is:
Air stroke 0o=308N.m
According to the above table, we can choose the Air stroke 90o=247N.m
minimum model is αC-105DA. Spring stroke 90o=181N.m
Spring stroke 0o=120N.m
All the output torque is larger than we needed.
Attention:
During the restoration, the spring return actuators' output torque will not be affected by the inputing air
from the port B. On the contrary, it will help the restoration of springs.
Accessories
ALVB series solenoid valve

Namur Connection Both for 1/4″and 1/2″
IP65 Double Coils or single Coil
Wide Range Voltage Both for DC and AC
ALS-200 series Mini Type Limit Switch box

Weather Protection IP67
ISO5211 Bracket Carbon steel and Stainless Steel available
Mechanical Switches, Proximity Sensor and Magnet Sensor
ALS-300 series Mult-Function Type Limit Switch box

Position Transmitter (4-20mA) available
ALS-400 series Explosion-proof Limit Switch box

Explosion-proof Ex d II CT6
11
ALS-500 series Explosion-proof Limit Switch box
Explosion-proof Ex d II BT6
Stainless Steel Body and cover available
ACS-300 series Pneumatic Monitor

2/5，2/3 Solenoid valve
ACS-400 series Explosion-proof Pneumatic Monitor

Explosion-proof Ex d II CT6
Stainless Steel Body and cover available
ACS-500 series Explosion-proof Pneumatic Monitor

Explosion-proof Ex d II BT6
ALP1000 Electric Pneumatic Valve Positioner

Input signal 4-20mADC or 5-15mADC
Explosion-proof Ex d II BT6 or Ex ia II CT6
Available both for linear and Rotary
ALP1200 Pneumatic Pneumatic Valve Positioner

Input signal 0.2～1kgf/cm , 3～15psi
Available both for linear and Rotary
ALHVP2000 Smart Valve Positioner

Input signal 4-20mADC or 5-15mADC
Explosion-proof Ex d II BT6 or Ex ia II CT6
Diagnosing failures voluntarily
Setting safe valve position easily
Setting adjustable characteristics easily
Setting valve position voluntarily
Hart or profibus available
12
Kempe Supply Group
http://www.kempe.com.au Email: supply@kempe.com.au
http://www.k-torc.com
Melbourne Mt Waverley
Kempe Supply Group Kempe Supply Group
Tel: +61 (0) 3 9931 2100 Tel: +61 (0) 3 9543 3122
Fax: +61 (0) 3 9931 0144 Fax: +61 (0) 3 9543 3921
Sydney Morwell
Valvelink Pty Ltd Kempe Valves & Fittings
Tel: +61 (0) 2 4722 9730 Tel: +61 (0) 3 5133 9559
Fax: +61 (0) 2 4722 9774 Fax: +61 (0) 3 5134 8242
Brisbane Geelong
Kempe Supply Group Air & Hydraulics Services
Tel: +61 (0) 7 3899 0650 Tel: +61 (0) 3 5248 0510
Fax: +61 (0) 7 3899 0652 Fax: +61 (0) 3 5248 0507
Perth Portland
Kempe Fluidair Air & Hydraulics Services
Tel: +61 (0) 8 9453 0800 Tel: +61 (0) 3 5523 5688
Fax: +61 (0) 8 9350 5568 Tel: +61 (0) 3 5523 3601
South Australia Tasmania

Kempe Supply Group Island Engineering Supplies
Tel: +61 (0) 3 9931 2100 Tel: +61 (0) 3 6424 2111
Fax: +61 (0) 3 9931 0144 Fax: +61 (0) 3 6424 2333
New Zealand (Auckland) New Zealand (Wanganui)

Pump & Valve Specialists Ltd Pump & Valve Specialists Ltd
Tel: +64 9 276 9045 Tel: +64 6 349 0088
Fax: +64 9 270 4905 Fax: +64 6 345 6013
ISSUE: Apr.2010
Product data sheet XS2M18KP340D
Characteristics inductive sensor XS2 M18 - L72mm - brass -
Sn8mm - 12..24VDC - M12
Main
Range of product OsiSense XS
Series name General purpose
Sensor type Inductive proximity sensor
Product specific appli- -
cation
Sensor name XS2
Sensor design Cylindrical M18
Size 72 mm
Body type Fixed
Detector flush mounting Non flush mountable
acceptance
Material Metal
It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof.
Type of output signal Discrete
Wiring technique 4-wire
[Sd] sensing range > 4...8 mm
[Sn] nominal sensing 8 mm
distance
Discrete output function 1 NO or 1 NC programmable
Output circuit type DC
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein.
This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications.
Discrete output type PNP and NPN
Neither Schneider Electric Industries SAS nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein.
Electrical connection 4 pins M12 male connector
[Us] rated supply volt- 12...24 V DC with reverse polarity protection
age
Switching capacity in <= 200 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
mA
IP degree of protection IP67 conforming to IEC 60529
Complementary
ISO thread M18 x 1
Detection face Frontal
Enclosure material Nickel plated brass
Operating zone 0...6.4 mm
Differential travel 1...15% of Sr
Status LED 1 LED yellow for output state
Supply voltage limits 10...36 V DC
Switching frequency <= 2000 Hz
Voltage drop <= 2.6 V at closed state
Current consumption 0...10 mA at no-load
Delay first up <= 5 ms
Delay response <= 0.15 ms
Delay recovery <= 0.35 ms
Marking CE
Threaded length 44 mm
Length 70 mm
CAD overall height 18 mm
CAD overall depth 70 mm
Product weight 0.06 kg
Mar 20, 2012

1
Environment
Product certifications CSA
UL
Ambient air temperature for operation -25...70 °C
Ambient air temperature for storage -40...85 °C
Vibration resistance 25 gn amplitude = +/- 2 mm (f = 10...55 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance 50 gn for 11 ms conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
RoHS EUR status Compliant
RoHS EUR conformity date 0843
2
• ± 0.04% High Accuracy
• ±0.2% of URL Stability - Guarantee

for 12 Years
• 120:1 Rangeability
• Non-volatile Totalizer
• Tank Linearization
• 100 ms Total Response Time
• PID Control Capability
• Bi-directional Flow Measurement
• Advanced Diagnostics
• Largest Library of Function
• Instantiable Function Blocks
• Supported by DD, EDDL and FDT/

DTM
• Three Technology Options

Features
± 0.04% high performance option;

± 0.2% of URL stability;
120:1 rangeability;
Span as small as 50 Pa (0.2 inH2O) up to a range limit of 40 MPa (5800 psi);
Up to 52 MPa static pressure (7500 psi);
Direct digital capacitance sensing (no A/D conversion);
True non-interactive zero and span;
Local zero and span adjustment;
Remote calibration and parameterization;
Transfer functions: linear, V x, V x3 e V x5 ;
Tank linearization;
Alphanumerical LCD indication;
Small and lightweight;
Explosion proof and weather proof housing approved (IP66/68 or IP66/68W);
Intrinsically safe certification;
Signal simulation for loop tests;
Non-volatile flow totalization;
Configurable user unit;
Configurable local adjustment;
EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) according to IEC61326-1:2006,
IEC61326-2-3:2006, IEC61000-6-4:2006, IEC61000-6-2:2005;
Write protection function;
Three technology options: HART®, FoundationTM fieldbus, PROFIBUS PA.
HART® - 4 to 20 mA
Update output current in 100 ms with 0.75 μA resolution;
Improved performance due to dedicated math co-processor;
Multidrop operation mode;
PID control function;
Supports DTM and EDDL;
Bi-directional flow measurement;
With FMEDA analysis and MTBF of 244 years.
FoundationTM fieldbus
17 different types of function blocks for control strategies and advanced diagnostics;
Up to 20 function blocks;
Execution of up to 29 external links;
12 mA consumption;
Dynamic block instantiation improves interchangeability;
Fieldbus FoundationTM registered and ITK approved;
MVC (Multivariable Container) enabled;
MTBF of 186 years.
PROFIBUS PA
12 mA consumption;
Function blocks for analog input and totalization;
Integrated to Smar ProfibusView or Simatic PDM;
Supports DTM and EDDL;
Profile 3.0 improves interchangeability;
MTBF of 186 years.
2
Functional Description
Sensing Diaphragm (1)

Isolating Diaphragm (2)
Filling Fluid (3)
Ceramics
Metalized Surface (4)
Glass
Steel
LD300 Series offers: The electronic resonance circuit reads capacitance

± 0.04% accuracy for high performance option; variation between the moving and fixed plates. The CPU
± 0.2% of URL stability guarantee for 12 Years; conditions the measurement and communicates according
120:1 rangeability; to protocol. As there is no A/D conversion, errors and drifts
Compact and lightweight; during conversions are eliminated. A temperature sensor
Multiple Protocol Options. provides temperature compensations, which combined
with the sensor precision, results in high accuracy and
LD300 Series uses the field-proven technique of rangeability for the LD300 Series.
capacitance cell sensor measurement.
The process variable, as well as monitoring and diagnostics
The sensor is shown in the picture above. The sensing information, are provided by digital communication
diaphragm (1) is at the cell center. The diaphragm deflects protocol.
as a result of the difference between the pressures applied The available protocol options are: HART®, FoundationTM
to the left and right sides of the sensor. Pressure is directly fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA.
applied to the isolating diaphragms (2), which provide
resistance against process fluid corrosion. The pressure These protocols are easily changed by either replacing the
is transmitted to the sensing diaphragm through the filling internal electronic board or downloading the firmware. A
fluid (3). HART® transmitter can be changed into a FoundationTM
fieldbus / PROFIBUS PA device by replacing the
The sensing diaphragm is a moving capacitor plate internal card, and vice versa. A FoundationTM fieldbus
while the two metallized surfaces (4) are fixed plates. device can be changed into a PROFIBUS PA device
The sensing diaphragm deflection results in capacitance and vice versa, by simply downloading a new firmware.
variations between the moving and fixed plates.
Sensor Main Board
3
Transmitter Types
Differential Pressure - LD300D and LD300H

Pressure is applied to high and low sides and differential pressure is measured. High static pressure
is supported by LD300H models.
Flow - LD300D and LD300H

The differential pressure is generated by a primary flow element and the square root function
computes the flow measurement.
Absolute Pressure - LD300A

The pressure is measured at the high side of the transmitter and the low side is at zero absolute
reference to a sealed chamber with vaccum.
Gage Pressure - LD300M

The pressure is measured at the high side of the transmitter and the low side is open to the
atmosphere, providing true local atmospheric reference.
Level - LD300L
The transmitter has a flange mounted unit for direct installation on vessels. Extended diaphragms
are also available. For closed tank low side can compensate for ullage pressure.
Remote Seals
SR301 is a remote seal designed for chemical and thermal isolation. LD300 Series can be assembled with separate
diaphragm seals in either one or both sides of the sensor. SR301 options include: “T” Type Flanged (SR301T),
Threaded (SR301R), Pancake (SR301P) where those three models with an optional flush connection, Sanitary
(SR301S), Flanged with Extension (SR301E) and Pancake with Extension (SR301Q).
The flush connection enables deposits removal without disconnecting the seal.
Typical applications for LD300 Series with remote seals:
Corrosive process fluid;
Suspended solids or viscous process fluid;
Process fluids that may freeze or solidify;
Process temperatures higher than supported by transmitters;
Replaces impulse lines and condensate legs;
Bubble system.
See the Smar SR301 Series catalog for further information regarding application and specification.
Sanitary Transmitter
LD300S Series are specially designed for food and other applications where sanitary connections
are required. With threaded or “tri-clamp” connections, it allows for easy and quick maintenance
and cleaning. Tri-clamp and other connections are compliant to 3A-7403 standard for food grade
applications.
For further information, see the Smar SR301 Series Catalog.
Manifold Valves
Smar manifold valves provide all of the necessary safety for field maintenance of LD300 Series
transmitters. Working at pressures up to 6,000 psi, they are easy to handle and lighter than others in
the market. Pressure and leakage tests carried out in 100% of the valves, also for models mounted
on the transmitter. For further information, please see the Smar Manifold Valves Catalog.
4
Parameterization and Diagnostics
LD300 Series are available in three different technologies: Smar has developed AssetView, which
HART® (LD301), FoundationTM fieldbus (LD302) and is a user-friendly Web Tool that can be
PROFIBUS PA (LD303). accessed anywhere and anytime using
These instruments can be configured with Smar software an Internet browser. It is designed for
and other manufacturers’ configuration tools. management and diagnostics of field
Local adjustment is available in all LD300 Series. It is devices to ensure reactive, preventive,
possible to configure zero and span, totalization, set point predictive and proactive maintenance.
Local
and other control functions using the magnetic screwdriver. Adjustment
Hart® - LD301
LD301 (HART® protocol) can be configured by:
Smar CONF401 for Windows;
Smar DDCON100 for Windows;
Smar HPC301 and HPC401 for several models of Palms*;
Other manufacturers’ configuration tools based on DD
(Device Description) or DTM (Device Type Manager),
such as AMSTM, FieldCareTM, PACTwareTM, HHT275 and
HHT375, PRM Device Viewer.
For LD301 management and diagnostics, AssetView

ensures continuous information monitoring. Universal HART® Configuration Software HPC401
* Requires HPI311.
Foundation™ fieldbus - LD302

LD302 utilizes the FoundationTM fieldbus H1 protocol, an Seventeen different types of function blocks are supported,
open technology that allows any H1 enabled configuration and up to 20 function blocks can be running simultaneously.
tool to configure this device. Maintenance procedures with AssetView diagnostics and
Syscon302 (System Configuration Tool) is a software tool status information from FoundationTM fieldbus result in a
used to configure, maintain and operate the field devices. safer plant with higher availability.
Syscon offers efficient and friendly interaction with the
user, using Windows NT version 4.0 or later, Windows
2000 and Windows XP.
Configuration tools such as AMSTM, FieldCareTM and
HHT375 can configure LD302 devices. DD (Device
Description) and CF (Capability File) files can be
downloaded at either the Smar or Fieldbus FoundationTM
website.
LD302 supports complex strategies configurations due
to the high capacity and variety of dynamic instantiable
function blocks.
PROFIBUS PA - LD303
LD303 (PROFIBUS PA protocol) can be configured using
Smar ProfibusView or Simatic PDM and by the FDT (Field
Device Tool) and DTM (Device Type Manager) concept
tools, such as FieldCareTM and PACTwareTM. It can also be
integrated by any PROFIBUS System using the GSD file.
PROFIBUS PA also has quality and diagnostic information,
improving plant management and maintenance.
Conforms to profile 3.0.
5
Applications
HART® - LD301
Power
Supply HI Interface
250 
Control Room
Plant Floor 4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA 4-20 mA
LD301 LD301
HART® HART®
FT N
N
E X PLOSI V E
E A
- I T W H N CI RC TM
TI
GH UI
T
FY301 PT N
N
E X PLOSI V E
E A
TI
GH UI
T
FY301
O A
O A
IO
IO
S L
S L
PH I V
PH I V
K E UT
K E UT
HART® HART®
EP
EP
ER E
E
CA
CA
RE
E
E
CU TE N
CU TE N
ZA A
ZA A
D
D
G I IV
G I IV
N
N
ID
ID
R OS
R OS
A H
A H
L L
DO
DO
A - P A - P
E E X NE E E X NE
AP M A A E AP M A A E
E R T MO S F E R DO E R T MO S F E R DO
O AN O AN
FV PV
LD301
FY301
HART®
E X PLOSI V E
N E A
N GH UI
TI T
O A
IO
S L
PH I V
K E UT
HART®
EP
E
CA
RE
E
LT
CU TE N
ZA A
D
G I IV
N
ID
R OS
A H
L
DO
A - P
E E X NE
AP M A A E
E R T MO S F E R DO
O AN
LV
FoundationTM fieldbus - LD302

BT302
Bus Terminator
Feed Drum Steam

Water Level Flow
Flow
LD302
PT FY302 LD302
Power Supply LD302 LD302 LD302
FV FT
+ Bus Impedance
LD302
LT
HSE
Link Device
BT302 FY302
Terminador de
Barramento
Three-element
Boiler feed-water flow
PROFIBUS PA- LD303
BT302
Bus Terminator
Feed Drum Steam
Water Level Flow
Flow
LD303 LD303 LD303

LD303
PT FY303 LD303
Power FT
FV
Supply
LD303
LT
BT302
Bus Terminator
DF73
FY303
Three-element
Profibus Boiler feed-water flow
DP Master
6
Technical Characteristics
Functional Specifications
Process Fluid Liquid, gas or steam.

HART®:
Output and Two-wire, 4-20 mA according to NAMUR NE43 specification, with superimposed digital
Communication communication (HART® Protocol).
Protocol FoundationTM fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA:
Digital only. Complies with IEC 61158-2:2000 (H1): 31.25 kbit/s voltage mode, bus powered.
HART®:
Power Supply / 12 to 45 Vdc.
Current FoundationTM fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA:
Consumption Bus powered: 9 to 32 Vdc.
Quiescent current consumption: 12 mA.
Indicator 4½-digit numerical and 5-character alphanumerical LCD indicator (optional).
HART®, FoundationTM fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA:
Intrinsically Safe (FM, CSA, NEMKO, EXAM, CEPEL, NEPSI), explosion proof (FM, CSA,
Hazardous Area NEMKO, CEPEL, NEPSI), dust ignition proof (FM) and non-incendive (FM).
Certifications FoundationTM fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA:
FISCO Field Device Ex ia IIC T4
FNICO Field Device Ex n1 IIC T4
Authorized representative in European Community
Smar Gmbh-Rheingaustrasse 9-55545 Bad Kreuzanach
PED Directive (97/23/EC) - Pressure Equipment Directive
This product is in compliance with the directive and it was designed and manufactured in accordance
with sound engineering practice using several standards from ANSI, ASTM, DIN and JIS.
EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) - Eletromagnetic Compatibility
The EMC test was performed according to IEC standard: IEC61326-1:2006, IEC61326-2-3:2006,
IEC61000-6-4:2006, IEC61000-6-2:2005. For use in environment only.
Keep the shield insulated at the instrument side, connecting the other one to the ground if
European necessary to use shielded cable.
Directive ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) - Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially
Information explosive atmospheres
This product was certified according European Standards at NEMKO and EXAM (old DMT).
The certified body for manufacturing quality assessment is EXAM (number 0158).
LVD Directive 2006/95/EC - Electrical Equipment designed for use within certain voltage
limits
According the LVD directive Annex II the equipment under ATEX “Electrical equipment for use
in an explosive atmosphere” directive are excluded from scope from this directive.
The EC declarations of conformity for all applicable European directives for this product can
be found at www.smar.com.
Zero and Span
Noninteractive, via digital communication or local adjustment.
Adjustments
Detailed diagnostics through communication for all protocols.
HART®:
In case of sensor or circuit failure, the self diagnostics drives the output to 3.6 or 21.0 mA,
Failure Alarm according to the user’s choice and NAMUR NE43 specification.
(Diagnostics)
FoundationTM fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA:
For sensor circuit failures, events are generated and status is sent to link outputs. Detailed
diagnostics are available in the contained parameters.
7
Ambient: -40 a 85 °C (-40 a 185 °F)

Process: -40 a 100 °C (-40 a 212 °F) (Silicone Oil)
-40 a 85 °C (-40 a 185 °F) (Inert Halocarbon Oil)
0 a 85 °C ( 32 a 185 °F) (Inert Fluorolube Oil)
Temperature -20 a 85 °C ( -4 a 185 °F) (Inert Krytox Oil and Fomblim Oil)
Limits -25 a 100 °C (-13 a 212 °F) (Viton O’Ring)
-40 a 150 °C (-40 a 302 °F) (LD301L)
Storage: -40 a 100 °C (-40 a 212 °F)
Digital Display: -20 a 80 °C ( -4 a 176 °F)
-40 a 85 °C (-40 a 185 °F) (without damage)
HART : ®
Performs within specifications in less than 5 seconds after power is applied to the transmitter.
Turn-on Time
HART®:
By digital communication (HART® protocol) using the configuration software CONF401, DDCON
(for windows), HPC301 or HPC401 (for Palms). It can also be configured using DD and FDT/
DTM tools, and can be partially configured through local adjustment.
Configuration
Basic configuration may be done using the local adjustment magnetic tool if device is fitted with
display. Complete configuration is possible using configuration tools.
Volumetric
Less than 0.15 cm3 (0.01 in3)
Displacement
From 3.45 kPa abs. (0.5 psia)* to:
0.5 MPa (72.52 psi) for range 0
8 MPa (1150 psi) for range 1
16 MPa (2300 psi) for ranges 2, 3 & 4
32 MPa (4600 psi) for models H & A5
40 MPa (5800 psi) for model M5
52 MPa (7500 psi) for model M6
* except the LD300A model
Overpressure and Flange Test Pressure: 60 MPa (8570 psi)
Static Pressure
Limits For ANSI/DIN Level flanges (LD300L models):
150 #: 6 psia to 235 psi (-0.6 to 16 bar) at 199.4 °F (93 °C)
PN10/16: -60 kPa to 1.02 MPa at 212 °F (100 °C)

PN25/40: -60 kPa to 2.55 MPa at 212 °F (100 °C)
The above pressures will not damage the transmitter, but a new calibration may be necessary.
Humidity Limits 0 to 100% RH (Relative Humidity)

Damping User configurable from 0 to 128 seconds (via digital communication).
Adjustment
Performance Specifications
Span starting at zero, temperature of 25 °C (77 °F), atmospheric pressure, power supply of 24
Reference
Vdc, fill fluid in Silicone Oil, O’Ring in Buna-N, isolating diaphragms in 316L SST and digital trim
Conditions
equal to lower and upper range values.
8
For range 0, and differential or gage models and 316L SST or hastelloy diaphragm with
silicon or halocarbon filling fluid:
0.2 URL ≤ span ≤ URL: ± 0.1% of span
0.05 URL ≤ span < 0.2 URL: ± [0.025+0.015 URL/span]% of span
For ranges 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, differential or gage models, and 316L SST or hastelloy
diaphragm with silicon or halocarbon filling fluid:
0.025 URL ≤ span < 0.1 URL: ± [0.0375+0.00375.URL/span]% of span
For ranges 2 to 6 and absolute model. For tantalum or monel diaphragm. For fluorolube
filling fluid:
Accuracy 0.1 URL ≤ span ≤ URL: ± 0.1% of span
0.025 URL ≤ span < 0.1 URL: ± 0.05[1+0.1 URL/span]% of span
0.0083 URL ≤ span < 0.025 URL: ± [0.01+0.006 URL/span]% of span
For range 1 and absolute model:
± 0.2% of span
For ranges 2, 3 or 4 and level model and 316L SST diaphragm with silicon or halocarbon
filling fluid with maximum pressure matching the flange pressure class:
Linearity effects, hysterese and repeatability are included.
For ranges 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6: ± 0.15% of URL for 5 years at 20 oC temperature change and up
to 7 MPa (1000 psi) of static pressure
Stability For ranges 0 and 1: ± 0.2% of URL for 12 months at 20 oC temperature change and up to
100 kPa (1 bar) of static pressure
For Level transmitters: ± 0.2% of URL for 12 months at 20 oC temperature change
For ranges 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6:
0.2 URL ≤ span ≤ URL: ± [0.02% URL + 0.06% span] per 20 oC (68 ºF)
0.0085 URL ≤ span < 0.2 URL: ± [0.023% URL + 0.045% span] per 20 oC (68 ºF)
For range 1:
0.2 URL ≤ span ≤ URL: ± [0.08% URL + 0.05% span] per 20 oC (68 ºF)
Temperature For range 0:
Effect 0.2 URL ≤ span ≤ URL: ± [0.15% URL + 0.05% span] per 20 oC (68 ºF)
For LD300L:
6 mmH2O per 20 oC for 4” and DN100
17 mmH2O per 20 oC for 3” and DN80
Consult for other flange dimensions and fill fluid.
Zero error:
For ranges 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6: ± 0.033% URL per 7 MPa (1000 psi)
For range 1: ± 0.05% URL per 1.7 MPa (250 psi)
For range 0: ± 0.1% URL per 0.5 MPa (5 bar)
For Level transmitters: ± 0.1% URL per 3.5 MPa (500 psi)
Static Pressure The zero error is a systematic error that can be eliminated by calibrating at the operating static
Effect pressure.
Span error:
For ranges 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6: correctable to ± 0.2% of reading per 7 MPa (1000 psi)
For range 1 and level transmitters: correctable to ± 0.2% of reading per 3.5 MPa (500 psi)
For range 0: correctable to ± 0.2% of reading per 0.5 MPa (5 bar)
Power Supply
± 0.005% of calibrated span per volt.
Effect
Mounting Position Zero shift of up to 250 Pa (1 inH2O) which can be calibrated out.
Effect No span effect.
Electromagnetic
Approved according to IEC61326-1:2006, IEC61326-2-3:2006, IEC61000-6-4:2006,
Interference
Effect IEC61000-6-2:2005.
9
Physical Specifications
½ - 14 NPT ¾ – 14 NPT (with 316 SST adapter for 1/2 - 14 NPT)

Electrical M20 X 1.5 ¾ – 14 BSP (with 316 SST adapter for 1/2 - 14 NPT)
Connection PG 13.5 DIN ½ – 14 BSP (with 316 SST adapter for 1/2 - 14 NPT)
¼ - 18 NPT or ½ -14 NPT (with adapter).
Process
For L models see Ordering Code.
Connection
See Ordering Code for more options.
Isolating Diaphragms:
316L SST, Hastelloy C276, Monel 400 or Tantalum.
Drain/Vent Valves and Plug:
316 SST, Hastelloy C276 or Monel 400.
Flanges:
Wetted Parts Plated Carbon Steel, 316 SST CF8M (ASTM - A351), Hastelloy C276 - CW-12MW, (ASTM - A494)
or Monel 400.
Wetted O-Rings (For Flanges and Adapters):
Buna-N, Viton™, PTFE or Ethylene-Propylene.
The LD300 is available in NACE MR-01-75/ISO 15156 compliant materials.
Electronic Housing:
Injected aluminum with polyester painting, epoxy painting or 316 SST - CF8M (ASTM - A351)
housing.Complies with NEMA 4X/6P, IP66 ou IP66W*, IP68 ou IP68W*.
Note: *The IP66/68W sealing test (immersion) was performed at 1 bar for 24 hours. For any other situation, please consult Smar. IP66/68W
tested for 200h to according NBR 8094 / ASTM B 117 standard.
Blank Flange:
When flange adapter and Drain/Vent material is Carbon Steel, blank flange is in Carbon Steel,
otherwise blank flange is in 316 SST CF8M (ASTM - A351).
Level Flange (LD300L):
316L SST, 304 SST, Hastelloy C276 and Plated Carbon Steel.
Nonwetted Fill Fluid:
Parts Silicone, Fluorolube, Krytox, Halocarbon 4.2 or Fomblim oils.
Cover O’Ring:
Buna-N
Mounting Bracket:
Plated Carbon Steel or 316 SST.
Accessories (bolts, nuts, washers and U-clamps) in Carbon Steel or 316 SST.
Flange Bolts and Nuts:
Plated Carbon Steel, Grade 8 or 316 SST.
For NACE applications: Carbon Steel ASTM A193 B7M.
Identification Plate:
316 SST.
a) Flange mounted for Level models.
b) Optional universal mounting bracket for surface or vertical/horizontal 2”-pipe (DN 50).
Mounting c) Manifold Valve integrated to the transmitter.
d) Directly on piping for closely coupled transmitter/orifice flange combinations.
Approximate 3.15 kg (7 lb): all models, except L models.
Weights 5.85 to 9.0 kg (13 lb to 20 lb): L models depending on the flanges, extension and materials.
HART®
PID Control (PID) and Totalizer (TOT)
FoundationTM fieldbus
Control Functions Resource (RS), Transducer (TRD), Diagnostics Transducer Block (DIAG), Analog Input (AI), PID
Characteristics Control (PID), Advanced PID Control (APID), Arithmetic (ARTH), Integrator (INTG), Input Selector
(Optional) (ISEL), Signal Characterizer (CHAR), Analog Alarm (AALM), Timer and Logic (TIME), Lead Lag
(LLAG), Output Signal Selector and Dynamic Limiter (OSDL), Constant (CT) and Density (DENS).
PROFIBUS PA
Physical Block (PHY), Transducer (TRD), Analog Input (AI) and Totalizer (TOT)
10
Technical Characteristics of High Performance - CODE L1
High Performance option (code L1) is available under the following conditions only:
Differential
Application
Gage
D2: -50 to 50 kPa -200 to 200 inH2O
D3: -250 to 250 kPa -36 to 36 psi
D4: -2500 to 2500 kPa -360 to 360 psi
Range M2: -50 to 50 kPa -200 to 200 inH2O
M3: -100 to 250 kPa -14.5 to 36 psi
M4: -100 to 2500 kPa -14.5 to 360 psi
Diaphragm 316L SST
Material Hastelloy C276
Fill Fluid Silicone
Performance Specifications (Code L1)

Span starting at zero, temperature of 25 °C (77 °F), atmospheric pressure, power supply of
Reference 24 Vdc, silicone oil fill fluid, isolating diaphragms in 316L SST and digital trim equal to lower
Conditions and upper range values.
For range 2:
0.05 URL ≤ span < 0.2 URL: ± [0.021667 + 0.003667 URL/span]% of span
Accuracy For range 3 and 4:
For range 2: ± 0.05% of URL for 6 months

For range 3: ± 0.075% of URL for 12 months
Stability For range 4: ± 0.1% of URL for 24 months
± 0.2% of URL for 12 years, at 20 °C temperature change and up to 7 MPa (1000 psi) {70 bar}
of static pressure, environment free of hydrogen migration.
From -10 oC to 50 oC, protected from direct sun radiation:

Temperature
0.2 URL ≤ span ≤ URL: ± [0.018% URL + 0.012% span] per 20 oC (36 oF)
Effect
0.0085 URL ≤ span < 0.2 URL: ± [0.02% URL + 0.002% span] per 20 oC (36 oF)
Zero error:
± 0.025% URL per 7 MPa (1000 psi)
Static Pressure The zero error is a systematic error that can be eliminated by calibrating at the operating static
Effect pressure.
Span error:
Correctable to ± 0.2% of reading per 7 MPa (1000 psi).
Hastelloy is a trademark of the Cabot Corp. Fluorolube is a trademark of Hooker Chemical Corp. Foundation is a trademark of Fieldbus Foundation.
Monel is a trademark of International Nickel Co. Halocarbon is a trademark of Halocarbon. Profibus is a trademark of Profibus International.
Viton and Teflon are trademarks of E. I. DuPont de Nemours & Co. HART is a trademark of HART Communication Foundation. Smar Pressure Transmitters are protected by US patent number 6,433,791
® ®
11
Ordering Code
MODEL DIFFERENTIAL, FLOW, GAGE, ABSOLUTE AND HIGH STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
LD301 HART® & 4-20 mA

LD302 Foundation™ fieldbus
LD303 PROFIBUS PA
Range Limits Range Limits
COD. Type Min. Span Unit Min. Span Unit
Min Max Min Max
D0 Differential and Flow -1 1 0.05 kPa -4 4 0.2 inH2O
D3 Differential and Flow -250 250 2.08 kPa -36 36 0.3 psi
D4 Differential and Flow -2500 2500 20.83 kPa -360 360 3 psi
M0 Gage -1 1 0.05 kPa -4 4 0.2 inH2O

M1 Gage -5 5 0.13 kPa -20 20 0.5 inH2O
M2 Gage -50 50 0.42 kPa -200 200 1.67 inH2O Note: The range can be extended
M3 Gage -100 250 2.08 kPa - 14.50 36 0.3 psi up to 0.75 LRL and 1.2 URL with
M4 Gage -100 2500 20.83 kPa - 14.50 360 3 psi small degradation of accuracy.
M5 Gage -0.1 25 0.21 MPa - 14.50 3600 30 psi
M6 Gage -0.1 40 0.33 MPa - 14.50 5800 48.3 psi
A1 Absolute 0 5 2.00 kPa 0 37 14.8 mmHga

A2 Absolute 0 50 2.50 kPa 0 7.2 0.36 psia
A3 Absolute 0 250 5.00 kPa 0 36 0.73 psia
A4 Absolute 0 2500 20.83 kPa 0 360 3 psia
A5 Absolute 0 25 0.21 MPa 0 3600 30 psia
A6 Absolute 0 40 0.33 MPa 0 5800 48.3 psia
H2 Differential - High Static Pressure -50 50 0.42 kPa - 200 200 1.67 inH2O
H3 Differential - High Static Pressure -250 250 2.08 kPa - 36 36 0.3 psi
H4 Differential - High Static Pressure -2500 2500 20.83 kPa - 360 360 3 psi
H5 Differential - High Static Pressure -25 25 0.21 MPa - 3600 3600 30 psi
COD. Diaphragm Material and Fill Fluid
1 316L SST Silicone Oil (9) 9 316L SST Fomblim Oil P Monel 400 Gold Plated Inert Krytox Oil (1) (3) (15)
2 316L SST Inert Fluorolube Oil (12)(15) A Monel 400 Fomblim Oil (1)(3) Q 316 L SST Inert Halocarbon 4.2 Oil (2) (3) (15)
3 Hastelloy C276 Silicone Oil (1)(9) D 316 L SST Inert Krytox Oil (3)(15) R Hastelloy C276 Inert Halocarbon 4.2 Oil (2) (3) (15)
4 Hastelloy C276 Inert Fluorolube Oil (1)(2)(15) E Hastelloy C276 Inert Krytox Oil (1)(3)(15) S Tantalum Inert Halocarbon 4.2 Oil (2) (3) (15)
5 Monel 400 Silicone Oil (1)(3)(9) G Tantalum Inert Krytox Oil (3)(15) U 316 L SST O.P. Silicone Oil (9)
7 Tantalum Silicone Oil (3)(9) K Monel 400 Inert Krytox Oil (1)(3)(15) Note: O.P. = Over-Lay Pot
8 Tantalum Inert Fluorolube Oil (2)(3)(15) M Monel 400 Gold Plated Silicone Oil (1) (3) (9)
COD. Flange(s), Adapter(s) and Drain/Vent Valves Material
C Plated CS (Drain/Vent In Stainless Steel) (16) M Monel 400 (1)
F Monel 400 Plated Bar (for HF applications) N 316 SST - CF8M (ASTM A351) (Drain/Vent In Hastelloy C276) (1)
H Hastelloy C276 (CW-12MW, ASTM - A494) (1) P 316 SST - CF8M (ASTM A351) Flange with PVDF (Kynar) Insert (5) (7) (11)
I 316 SST - CF8M (ASTM A351) Z User’s specification
COD. Wetted O'Rings Materials
0 Without O’Rings E Ethylene - Propylene (12) T Teflon Note: O’Rings are not available on the sides
B Buna-N K Kalrez (12) V Viton with Remote Seals.
COD. Drain/Vent Position
0 Without Drain/Vent D Bottom Note: For better drain/vent operation, vent valves are strongly recommended.
A Drain/Vent (Opposite to Process Connection) U Top Drain/vent valve not available on the sides with remote seals.
COD. Local Indicator
0 Without Indicator 1 With Digital Indicator
COD. Process Connection
0 1/4 - 18 NPT (Without Adapter) B High Side: 1/2 – 14 NPT and Low Side: Remote Seal (With Plug) (10) (12)
1 1/2 - 14 NPT (With Adapter) D High Side: Remote Seal (With Plug) and Low Side - 1/2 - 14 NPT (10) (12)
2 CF16 (Without Adapter) F High Side: 1/2 – 14 NPT and Low Side: Remote Seal (Low Volume Flange) (10)(12)
3 Remote Seal (With Plug) (3) (8) H High Side: Remote Seal (Low Volume Flange) and Low Side: 1/2 - 14 NPT (10)(12)
5 1/2 - 14 NPT Axial with PVDF Insert (5)(7)(14) Q 8 mm hole without thread (According to DIN19213) (13)
6 Low Volume Flange T 1/2 – 14 BSP (With Adapter)
7 Plug for Remote Seal U Low Volume Flange for Level Welded
8 Low Volume Flange - Welded V Manifold Valve integrated to the transmitter
9 Remote Seal (Low Volume Flange) (3)(4)(8) Z User’s specification
COD. Electrical Connection
0 1/2 - 14 NPT (17)(18)(19)(20) A M20 X 1.5 (17)(18)
1 3/4 – 14 NPT (with 316 SST adapter for 1/2 - 14 NPT) (17)(20) B PG 13.5 DIN (17)(18)
2 3/4 – 14 BSP (with 316 SST adapter for 1/2 - 14 NPT) (6) Z User’s specification
3 1/2 – 14 BSP (with 316 SST adapter for 1/2 - 14 NPT) (6)
COD. Set this code as “1” for LD301 and exclude for the others
COD. Mounting Bracket for 2” Pipe or Surface Mounting

0 Without bracket 7 Carbon steel bracket. Accessories: 316 SST (16)
1 Carbon steel bracket and accessories (16) 9 L type, carbon steel bracket. Accessories: 316 SST (16)
2 316 SST bracket and accessories A Flat, 304 SST bracket and 316 SST accessories
5 L type, carbon steel bracket and accessories (16) Z User’s specification
6 L type, 316 SST bracket and accessories
COD. Continues next page
LD301 D2 1 I B U 1 0 0 1 2 * TYPICAL MODEL NUMBER
LD302 D2 1 I B U 1 0 0 2 *
LD303 D2 1 I B U 1 0 0 2 *
* Leave blank for no optional items.
Notes:
(1) Meets NACE MR-01-75/ISO 15156 recommendations. (12) Not available for range 0.
(2) Not available for absolute models nor for vacuum applications. (13) Available for differential pressure transmitters, range 4, 7/16 UNF or M10 x 1.5 thread and
(3) Not available for range 0 and 1. for high static pressure transmitters , range 4, 7/16 UNF thread.
(4) Not recommended for vacuum service. (14) Only available for flange with PVDF (Kynar) insert
(5) Maximum pressure 24 bar. (15) Inert Fluid: Safe Oxygen Service.
(6) Options not certified for use in hazardous locations. (16) Not applicable for saline atmosphere.
(7) Drain/Vent not applicable. (17) This adapter has certified for use in Explosion Proof (CEPEL).
(8) For remote seal only 316 SST - CF8M (ASTM A351) flange is available 7/16 UNF. (18) This adapter has certified for use in Explosion Proof (NEPSI, NEMKO, EXAM).
(9) Silicone Oil is not recommended for oxygen (O2) or Chlorine service. (19) This adapter has certified for use in Explosion Proof (FM).
(10) Only available for differential pressure transmitters. (20) This adapter has certified for use in Explosion Proof (CSA).
(11) O-ring should be Viton or Kalrez.
12
Ordering Code (Continued)
MODEL DIFFERENTIAL, FLOW, GAGE, ABSOLUTE AND HIGH STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
COD. Flanges Bolts and Nuts Material

A0 Plated Carbon Steel (Default) (8) A2 Carbon Steel (ASTM A193 B7M) (1) (8)
A1 316 SST A5 Hastelloy C276
COD. Flange Thread for Fixing Acessories (Adapters, Manifolds, Mounting Brackets, etc)
D0 7/16 UNF (Default) D2 M12 X 1.75
D1 M10 X 1.5
COD. Output Signal (Only available for LD301)
G0 4 - 20 mA (Default) G3 NAMUR NE43 Extended 4 to 20 mA (Burnout 3.55 and 22.8 mA)
G1 0 - 20 mA (4-wire) (2)
COD. Housing Material (10) (11)
H0 Aluminum (Default) (IP/TYPE) H3 316 SST for Saline Atmospheres (IPW/TYPEX) (9)
H1 316 SST - CF8M (ASTM - A351) (IP/TYPE) H4 Aluminium Copper Free (IPW/TYPEX) (9)
H2 Aluminium for Saline Atmospheres (IPW/TYPEX) (9)
COD. Tag Plate
J0 With tag, when specified (Default) J1 Blank J2 User’s Specification
COD. PID Configuration - (Only available for LD301)
M0 With PID (Default)
M1 Without PID
COD. LCD1 Indication (Only available for LD301)
Y0 LCD1: Percentage (Default) Y3 LCD1: Temperature (Engineering Unit)
Y1 LCD1: Current - I (mA) YU LCD1: User’s Specification (4)
Y2 LCD1: Pressure (Engineering Unit)
COD. Identification Plate
I1 FM: XP, IS, NI, DI I6 Without Certification
I2 NEMKO: Ex-d, Ex-ia (7) I7 Dekra/EXAM: Group I, M1 Ex-ia
I3 CSA: XP, IS, NI, DI I8 0 to 20 mA: LD301 (2)
I4 EXAM (DTM): Ex-ia, NEMKO: Ex-d ID NEPSI: Ex-ia, Ex-d
I5 CEPEL: Ex-d, Ex-ia IE NEPSI: Ex-ia (5)
COD. Painting
P0 Gray Munsell N 6,5 Polyester P8 Without Painting
P3 Black Polyester P9 Safety Blue Epoxy - Electrostatic Painting
P4 White Epoxy PC Safety Blue Polyester - Electrostatic Painting
P5 Yellow Polyester PG Safety Orange Epoxy Paint - Electrostatic Painting
LD301-D21I-BU10-012 A0 D0 G0 H0 J0 M0 Y0 Y5 I6 P0 TYPICAL MODEL NUMBER
LD302-D21I-BU10-02 A0 D0 H0 J0 I6 P0
LD303-D21I-BU10-02 A0 D0 H0 J0 I6 P0
Optional Items
Burn-out
(Only available BD - Down Scale (According to NAMUR NE43 specification)
for LD301) BU - Up Scale (According to NAMUR NE43 specification)
Special Applications C1 - Degrease Cleaning (Oxygen or Chlorine Service) (5)
High Performance L1- 0.04% accuracy (3)
Square Root
Extraction (Only M3 - Configured with Square Root Extraction
available for LD301D)
Special Features ZZ - User’s specification
Notes:
(1) Meets NACE MR-01-75/ISO 15156 recommendations. (9) IPW/TYPEX tested for 200 hours according to NBR 8094 / ASTM B 117 standard.
(2) Without Explosion Proof or Intrinsic Safety approvals. (10) IPX8 tested in 10 meters of water column for 24 hours.
(3) Only available for differential and gage pressure models. (11) Ingress Protection:
(4) Values limited to 4 1/2 digits; unit limited to 5 characters.
(5) Degrease cleaning not available for carbon steel flanges. Products CEPEL NEMKO / EXAM FM CSA NEPSI
(6) Only available for LD302 and LD303 models.
(7) Only available for LD301. LD300 IP66/68/W IP66/68/W Type 4X/6P Type 4X IP67
(8) Not applicable for saline atmosphere.
13
Ordering Code
MODEL Flanged Pressure Transmitter
LD301 HART®
LD302 FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus
LD303 PROFIBUS PA
COD. Min. Span Unit. Min. Span Unit.
Min. Máx. Min. Máx.
L2 -50 50 1.25 kPa -200 200 5 inH2O Note: The range can be extended up to 0.75 LRL and 1.2 URL
L3 -250 250 2.08 kPa -36 36 0.3 psi with small degradation of accuracy. The upper range value
L4 -2500 2500 20.83 kPa -360 360 3 psi must be limited to the flange rating.
L5 -25000 25000 208.30 kPa -3625 3625 30.2 psi
COD. Diaphragm material and Fill Fluid (Low Side)
1 316L SST Silicone Oil (2) 8 Tantalum Inert Fluorolube Oil (3) (26) K Monel 400 Inert Krytox Oil (1) (26)
2 316L SST Inert Fluorolube Oil (3) (26) 9 316L SST Fomblim Oil M Monel 400 Gold Plated Silicone Oil (1) (2)
3 Hastelloy C276 Silicone Oil (1) (2) A Monel 400 Fomblim Oil (1) P Monel 400 Gold Plated Inert Krytox Oil (1) (26)
4 Hastelloy C276 Inert Fluorolube Oil (1) (3) (26) D 316L SST Inert Krytox Oil (26) Q 316L SST Inert Halocarbon 4.2 Oil (26)
5 Monel 400 Silicone Oil (1) (2) E Hastelloy C276 Inert Krytox Oil (1) (26) R Hastelloy C276 Inert Halocarbon 4.2 Oil (1) (26)
7 Tantalum Silicone Oil (2) G Tantalum Inert Krytox Oil (26) S Tantalum Inert Halocarbon 4.2 Oil (26)
COD. Flange, Adapter and Drain/Vent Valves material (Low Side)
A 304L SST I 316 SST – CF8M (ASTM – A351)
C Plated CS (Drain/Vent in Stainless Steel) (22) M Monel 400 (1)
F Monel 400 Plated Bar (for HF applications) N 316 SST – CF8M (ASTM – A351) (Drain/Vent in Hastelloy C276) (1)
H Hastelloy C276 (CW – 12MW, ASTM – A494) (1) P 316 SST – CF8M (ASTM – A351) Flange with PVDF (Kynar) insert (3) (4) (5)
COD. Wetted O’Ring Material (Low Side)

0 Without O’Rings E Ethylene - Propylene T Teflon Note: O’rings are not available on the
B Buna-N K Kalrez V Viton sides with remote seals.
COD. Drain/Vent Position (Low Side)
0 Without Drain/Vent D Low Nota: For better Drain/Vent operation, vent valves are strongly recommended.
A Drain/Vent (Opposite to Process Connection) U Upper Drain/Vent valve are not available on the sides with remote seals
0 Without Indicator 1 With Digital indicator
COD. Process Connection (Low Side)
0 1/4 - 18 NPT (Without Adapter) 6 Low Volume Flange - 1/4 NPT U Low Volume Flange for Level Welded
1 1/2 - 14 NPT (Without Adapter) 7 Plug for Remote Seal V Without Connection (Mounted with Gage
2 CF16 (Without Adapter) 8 Low Volume Flange - Welded Flange)
3 Remote Seal (With Plug ) (7) 9 Remote Seal (Low Volume Flange) (3) (7) W Without Connection (Absolut Reference)
5 1/2 - 14 NPT Axial with PVDF Insert (3) (4) (6) T 1/2 14 BSP (With Adapter)
0 1/2 – 14 NPT (24)(29)(30)(31) A M20 x 1.5 (24)(29)
1 3/4 – 14 NPT (with 316 SST adapter for ½ - 14 NPT) (24)(31) B PG 13.5 DIN (24)(29)
2 3/4 – 14 BSP (with 316 SST adapter for ½ - 14 NPT) (9) Z User’s specification
3 1/2 – 14BSP (with 316 SST adapter for ½ - 14 NPT) (9)
COD. Zero and Span Adjust
1 With Zero and Span Adjustment
U 1” 150 # (ANSI B16.5) (33) B 2” 600 # (ANSI B16.5 5 DN 25 PN 10/40 (33) T JIS 50A 40K (21)
V 1” 300 # (ANSI B16.5) (33) 1 3” 150 # (ANSI B16.5) R DN 40 PN 10/40 K JIS 50A 20K (21)
W 1” 600 # (ANSI B16.5) (33) 2 3” 300 # (ANSI B16.5) E DN 50 PN 10/40 G JIS 80A 10K (21)
O 1.1/2” 150 # (ANSI B16.5) C 3” 600 # (ANSI B16.5) 6 DN 80 PN 10/40 L JIS 80A 20K (21)
P 1.1/2” 300 # (ANSI B16.5) N 3" 600 # (ANSI B16.5 RTJ) 7 DN 100 PN 10/16 H JIS 100A 10K (21)
Q 1.1/2” 600 # (ANSI B16.5) 3 4” 150 # (ANSI B16.5) 8 DN 100 PN 25/40 M JIS 100A 20K (21)
9 2” 150 # (ANSI B16.5) 4 4” 300 # (ANSI B16.5) S JIS 40A 20K (21) Z User’s specification
A 2” 300 # (ANSI B16.5) D 4” 600 # (ANSI B16.5) F JIS 50A 10K (21)
COD. Material and Flange Type (Level Tap)
2 316L SST (Integral Flange) 3 Hastelloy C276 (Integral Flange) 5 316 SST (Slip-on Flange)
Z User’s specification 4 304 SST (Slip-on Flange) 6 Carbon Steel (Slip-on Flange)
COD. Extension Length
0 0 mm (0”) 2 100 mm (4”) 4 200 mm (8”) Nota: Extension
1 50 mm (2”) 3 150 mm (6”) Z User’s specification Material 316L SST
COD. Diaphragm Material / Extension (Level Tap)
A 304L SST / 304L SST 4 Tantalum / 316 SST (10) B Tantalum with Teflon Lining
1 316L SST / 316 SST 5 Titanium / 316 SST (10) C Hastelloy with Teflon Lining
2 Hastelloy C276 / 316 SST 6 316L SST with Teflon Lining (for 2”and 3”) L 316L Stainless Steel with
3 Monel 400 / 316 SST 7 316L SST with Gold Lining Halar Lining (20)
COD. Fill Fluid (Level Tap)
1 DC 200 Silicone Oil T Syltherm 800 Oil H Halocarbon 4.2
3 DC 704 Silicone Oil N Neobee M20 Propylene Glycol Oil G Glycerin + Water (11)
2 MO – 10 Fluorolube Oil (8) 4 Krytox Oil B Fomblim 06/06
COD. Lower Housing Material
0 Without Lower Housing (12) 3 Super Duplex (UNS 32750) (11)
1 Stainless Steel 316 4 Duplex (UNS 31803) (11)
2 Hastelloy C276 M Monel
COD. Gaskte Material
0 Without gasket G Grafoil (Flexible lead) I Stainless 316 L
T Teflon (PTFE) C Copper
COD. Continues Next Page
LD301 L2 1 I B U 1 0 0 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 T * TYPICAL MODEL NUMBER
LD302 L2 1 I B U 1 0 0 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 T *
LD303 L2 1 I B U 1 0 0 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 T *
* Leave it blank when there are not optional items.
14
MODEL FLANGED PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

D1 M10 X 1.5
COD. Flange Facing Finish (18)
Q0 Raised Face - RF (Default) Q3 Tongue Face (11)
Q1 Flat Face - FF Q4 Grooved Face (11)
Q2 Ring Joint Face - RTJ (Only available for ANSI standard flange) (17)
G1 0 - 20 mA (4-wire) (13)
COD. Tag Plate

M1 Without PID
COD. Painting
P0 Gray Munsell N 6,5 Polyester
P3 Black Polyester
P4 White Epoxy
P5 Yellow Polyester
P8 Without Painting
P9 Safety Blue Epoxy - Electrostatic Painting
PC Safety Blue Polyester - Electrostatic Painting
PG Safety Orange Epoxy Paint - Electrostatic Painting
LD301-L21I-BU10-01-122111-T A0 D0 Q0 G0 H0 J0 M0 Y0 Y5 I6 P0 TYPICAL MODEL NUMBER
LD302-L21I-BU10-01-122111-T A0 D0 Q0 H0 J0 I6 P0
LD303-L21I-BU10-01-122111-T A0 D0 Q0 H0 J0 I6 P0
Optional Items
Burnout BD - Down Scale (Accordance to NAMUR NE43 specification) BU - Up Scale (Accordance to NAMUR NE43 specification)
Special Procedures C1 - Degrease Cleaning (Oxygen or Chlorine Service) (15) C2 – For Vacuum Application
Special Features ZZ – User’s Specification.
Gasket Connection U0 - With Flush Connection of 1/4” NPT (If supplied with housing) U3 - With Two Connections of 1/2” NPT - 14 NPT at 180° (With Lid)
U1 - With Two Flush Connections of 1/4” NPT at 180° U4 - Without gastek connection
U2 - With Two Flush Connections of 1/4” NPT at 90°
Insulator Kit K0 – Without Kit K1 – With Kit
Diaphragm Thickness (16) N0 - Default (25) N1 - 0.1mm (11)
15
Notes
Notes - LD300L:
(1) Meets NACE MR – 01 – 75/ISO 15156 recommendations. (19) Temperature application range:
(2) Silicone oil not recommended for Oxygen (O2) or Chlorine Service. -40 to 150°C.
(3) Not applicable for vacuum service. (20) Applicable only for:
(4) Drain/Vent is not applicable. - Diaphragm Thickness of 0.05mm.
(5) O-ring material must be of Viton or Kalrez. - Diameters/Capillary Length:
(6) Maximum pressure 24 bar. 2” ANSI B 16.5, DN 50 DIN, JIS 50 A, for seals up to 3 meters of capillary and level models
(7) For remote seal is only available flange in 316 stainless steel– CF8M (ASTM A351) (thread M12). (by inquiry).
(8) Fluorolube fills fluid not available with Monel diaphragm. 3” ANSI B 16.5, DN 80 DIN, JIS 80 A, for seals up to 5 meters of capillary and level models.
(9) Options not certified for use in hazardous locations. 4” ANSI B 16.5, DN 100 DIN, JIS 100 A, for seals up to 8 meters of capillary and level models.
(10) Attention, check corrosion rate for the process, tantalum plate 0.1 mm, AISI 316L extension - Faces: RF and FF.
3 to 6mm. - Temperature Limits:
(11) Item by inquiry. +10 to 100°C;
(12) Supplied without Gasket. +101 to 150°C (by inquiry).
(13) Without certification for Explosion proof certification or Intrinsically safe. - Not applicable for diaphragm thickness: N1 - 0.10mm.
(14) Limited values to 4 1/2 digits; limited unit to 5 characters. - Not applicable for use with housing.
(15) Degreaser’s cleaning is not available for carbon steel flanges . (21) Not available for slip-on flange.
(16) The insulator kit is applicable with Raised Face (HO) and Smooth Face (H1) with Gasket (22) Not applicable for saline atmosphere.
material. T(Teflon) and only for the following models: - ANSI until #600 , DIN until P40 and (23) IPW/TYPEX tested for 200 hours according to NBR 8094 / ASTM B 117 standard.
JIS until 40K; (24) Certificate for use in explosive atmosphere (CEPEL).
- For models with extension the Gasket T (Teflon) it has special share. (25) Diaphragms of Titanium and Monel available only in 0.1 mm, and diaphragms of Tantalum
(17) Gasket for housing, available only in Stainless 316. only in 0.075 mm.
(18) Finishing flange faces: (26) Inert Fluid: Safe Oxygen service.
ANSI B 16.5 / MSS-SP6: (27) IPX8 tested in 10 meters of water column for 24 hours.
- Raised or Smoth Face with gooved lining: 3.2 to 6.3 µm Ra (125 a 250 µ” AA); (28) Ingress Protection:
- Small or Large Tongue Face and Small or Large Groove with smooth finishing not exceeding:
3.2 µm Rt (125 µ” AA); Products CEPEL NEMKO / EXAM FM CSA NEPSI
RTJ ANSI B 16.20 / MSS-SP6:
-Smooth finishing not exceeding: 1.6 µm Rt (63 µ” AA); LD300 IP66/68/W IP66/68/W Type 4X/6P Type 4X IP67
DIN EN-1092-1:
- Grooved finishing “B1” (PN 10 a PN40): 3.2 a 12.5 µm Ra (125 a 500 µ” AA);
- Smooth finishing “B2” (PN 63 a PN100), “C” (Tongue) e “D” (Groove): 0.8 a 3.2 µm Ra (29) This adapter has certified for use in Explosion Proof (NEPSI, NEMKO, EXAM).
(32 a 125 µ” AA). (30) This adapter has certified for use in Explosion Proof (FM).
Din 2501 (DIN 2526): (31) This adapter has certified for use in Explosion Proof (CSA).
- Smooth finishing “E” (PN 160 a PN250): Rz = 16 (3.2 µm Ra (125 µ” AA). (32) Only available for LD301.
Standard Jis B2201 (33) Not available for integral flange.
- Grooved finishing 3.2 a 6.3 µm Ra (125 a 250 µ” AA).
16
Ordering Code
MODEL PRESSURE SANITARY TRANSMITTER

LD301 HART®
LD302 FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus
LD303 PROFIBUS PA
COD. Min. Span Unit. Min. Span Unit.
Min. Máx. Min. Máx.
S2 -50 50 1.25 kPa -200 200 5 inH2O
Nota: The range can be extended up to 0.75 LRL and 1.2
S3 -250 250 2.08 kPa -36 36 0.3 psi
URL with small degradation of accuracy. The upper range
S4 -2500 2500 20.83 kPa -360 360 3 psi
value must be limited to the connection.
S5 -25000 25000 208.30 kPa -3625 3625 30.2 psi
COD. Diaphragm Material and Fill Fluid ( Low Side)
1 316L SST Silicone Oil (2) 8 Tantalum Inert Fluorolube Oil (3) (19) K Monel 400 Inert Krytox Oil (1) (19)
2 316L SST Inert Fluorolube Oil (3) (19) 9 316L SST Fomblim Oil M Monel 400 Gold Plated Silicone Oil (1) (2)
3 Hastelloy C276 Silicone Oil (1) (2) A Monel 400 Fomblim Oil (1) P Monel 400 Gold Plated Inert Krytox Oil (1) (19)
4 Hastelloy C276 Inert Fluorolube Oil (1) (3) (19) D 316L SST Inert Krytox Oil (19) Q 316L SST Inert Halocarbon 4.2 Oil (19)
5 Monel 400 Silicone Oil (1) (2) E Hastelloy C276 Inert Krytox Oil (1) (19) R Hastelloy C276 Inert Halocarbon 4.2 Oil (1) (19)
7 Tantalum Silicone Oil (2) G Tantalum Inert Krytox Oil (19) S Tantalum Inert Halocarbon 4.2 Oil (19)
COD. Flange(s), Adapter (s) and Drain Valve(s) Material (Low Side)
C Plated CS (Drain/Vent in Stainless Steel) (18) M Monel 400 (1)
H Hastelloy C276 (CW – 12MW, ASTM – A494) (1) N 316 SST – CF8M (ASTM – A351) (Drain/Vent in Hastelloy C276) (1)
I 316 SST – CF8M (ASTM – A351) P 316 SST – CF8M (ASTM – A351) Flange with PVDF (Kynar) insert (3) (4) (5)
COD. Wetted O-Ring Material (Low Side)

0 Without O-Ring E Ethylene - Propylene V Viton Note: O-Rings are not available on
B Buna-N T Teflon (Approved 3A) (21) K Kalrez the sides with remote seal.
COD. Drain Position (Low Side)
0 Without Drain D Bottom Note: For better drain operation, drain valves are strongly recommended.
A Drain (Opposite to process connection) U Top Drain valve are not available on the sides with remote seal
COD. Process Connection (Low Side)
0 1/4 - 18 NPT (Without Adapter) 6 Low Volume Flange - 1/4 NPT U Low Volume Flange for Level Welded
1 1/2 - 14 NPT (Without Adapter) 7 Plug for Remote Seal V Without Connection (Mounted with Gage
2 CF16 (Without Adapter) 8 Low Volume Flange - Welded Flange)
3 Remote Seal (With Plug ) (7) 9 Remote Seal (Low Volume Flange) (3) (7) W Without Connection (Absolut Reference)
5 1/2 - 14 NPT Axial with PVDF Insert (3) (4) (6) T 1/2 14 BSP (With Adapter)
0 1/2 - 14 NPT (20)(23)(24)(25) A M20 X 1.5 (20)(23)
1 3/4 - 14 NPT (With 316 SST adapter for 1/2 - 14 NPT) (20)(25) B PG 13.5 DIN (20)(23)
2 3/4 - 14 BSP (With 316 SST adapter for 1/2 - 14 NPT) (9) Z User’s Specification
3 1/2 - 14 BSP (With 316 SST adapter for 1/2 - 14 NPT) (9)
COD. Zero and Span Adjust
1 With Local Adjustment
8 Threaded DN25 DIN 11851 - with ext. / 316L SST (10) (11) E Threaded SMS 2" - without ext. / 316L SST (10) (11)
9 Threaded DN40 DIN 11851 - with ext. / 316L SST (10) (11) M Threaded SMS 3" - with ext. / 316L SST (10) (11)
H Threaded DN40 DIN 11851 - without ext. / 316L SST (10) 1 Threaded SMS 3" - without ext. / 316L SST (10) (11)
V Threaded DN50 DIN 11851 - with ext. / 316L SST (10) (11) F Tri-Clamp 1 1/2" - without ext. / 316L SST (11)
U Threaded DN50 DIN 11851 - without ext. / 316L SST (10) Q Tri-Clamp 1 1/2" HP - without ext. / 316L SST (8) (11)
X Threaded DN80 DIN 11851 - with ext. / 316L SST (10) (11) 6 Tri-Clamp 2" - with ext. / 316L SST (11)
W Threaded DN80 DIN 11851 - without ext. / 316L SST (10) D Tri-Clamp 2" - without ext. / 316L SST (11)
4 Threaded IDF 2" - with ext. / 316L SST (10) (11) N Tri-Clamp 2" HP - with ext. / 316L SST (8) (11)
B Threaded IDF 2" - without ext. / 316L SST (10) (11) P Tri-Clamp 2" HP - without ext. / 316L SST (8) (11)
K Threaded IDF 3" - with ext. / 316L SST (10) (11) I Tri-Clamp 3" - with ext. / 316L SST (11)
3 Threaded IDF 3" - without ext. / 316L SST (10) (11) G Tri-Clamp 3" - without ext. / 316L SST (11)
5 Threaded RJT 2" - with ext. / 316L SST (10) (11) J Tri-Clamp 3" HP - with ext. / 316L SST (8) (11)
C Threaded RJT 2" - without ext. / 316L SST (10) R Tri-Clamp 3" HP - without ext. / 316L SST (8) (11)
L Threaded RJT 3" - with ext. / 316L SST (10) (11) Z User's specification
2 Threaded RJT 3" - without ext. / 316L SST (10)
S Threaded SMS 1 1/2" - without ext. / 316L SST (10) (11) Note: ext. = extension
7 Threaded SMS 2" - with ext. / 316L SST (10) (11) HP = High Pressure
COD. Diaphragm Material (High Side)

H Hastelloy C276 I 316L SST
COD. Fill Fluid
S DC 200 – Silicone Oil T Syltherm 800 H Halocarbon 4.2
D DC 704 – Silicone Oil N Neobee M20 (11) G Glycerin + Water (12)
F Fluorolube MO-10 K Krytox 1506 B Fomblim 06/06
COD. Wet O-ring
0 Without O-ring T Teflon (11) B Buna-N (11) V Viton (11)
COD. Tank Adapter
0 Without Tank Adapter
1 With Tank Adapter in 316 SST
COD. Tri-Clamp
0 Without Tri-Clamp
2 With Tri-Clamp in 304 SST
COD. Continues next page
LD301 S2 1 I B U 1 0 0 1 A I S T 1 2 * TYPICAL MODEL NUMBER
LD302 S2 1 I B U 1 0 0 1 A I S T 1 2 *
LD303 S2 1 I B U 1 0 0 1 A I S T 1 2 *
* Leave it blank when there are not optional items.
17
MODEL PRESSURE SANITARY TRANSMITTER

D1 M10 X 1.5
G1 0 - 20 mA (4-wire) (13)
COD. Tag Plate
M1 Without PID
COD. Painting
P0 Gray Munsell N 6,5 Polyester P8 Without Painting
P3 Black Polyester P9 Safety Blue Epoxy - Electrostatic Painting
P4 White Epoxy PC Safety Blue Polyester - Electrostatic Painting
P5 Yellow Polyester PG Safety Orange Epoxy Paint - Electrostatic Painting
LD301-S21I-BU10-01-AIST12 A0 D0 G0 H0 J0 M0 Y0 Y5 I6 P0 TYPICAL MODEL NUMBER
LD302-S21I-BU10-01-AIST12 A0 D0 H0 J0 I6 P0
LD303-S21I-BU10-01-AIST12 A0 D0 H0 J0 I6 P0
Optional Itens
BD – Down Scale (Accordance to NAMUR NE43 specification)
Burn-out BU – Up Scale (Accordance to NAMUR NE43 specification)
C1 – Degrease Cleaning (Oxygen or Chlorine Service) (15)

Special Procedures C2 – For Vacuum Application
C4 – Polishing of the wet parts according to 3A Certification (11) (12)
Special Features ZZ – User’s Specification
N0 – Default
Diaphragm Thickness
N1 – 0.1mm (12)
Note - LD300S:
(1) Meets NACE MR-01-75/ISO 15156 recommendations. (15) Degrease cleaning is not available for Carbon Steel Flanges.
(2) Silicone oil not recommended for Oxygen (O2) or Chlorine Service. (16) Temperature application range: -40 to 140 °C and Tables 5 and 6 from the following page.
(3) Not applicable for vacuum service. (17) Inert Fluid: Safe Oxygen service.
(4) Drain not applicable. (18) Not applicable for saline atmosphere.
(5) O-Ring material must be of Viton or Kalrez. (19) IPW/TYPEX tested for 200 hours according to NBR 8094 / ASTM B 117 standard.
(6) Maximum pressure 24 bar. (20) Certificate for use in Explosion Proof (CEPEL).
(7) For remote seal is only available flange in 316 Stainless Steel - CF8M (ASTM A351) (thread M12). (21) IPX8 tested in 10 meters of water column for 24 hours.
(8) HP – High Pressure. (22) Ingress Protection:
(9) Options not certified for use in hazardous locations.
(10) Not available for Tri-clamp. Products CEPEL NEMKO / EXAM FM CSA NEPSI
(11) Compliant with 3A-7403 standard for food and other applications where sanitary connections
are required: LD300 IP66/68/W IP66/68/W Type 4X/6P Type 4X IP67
- Neobee M2O Fill Fluid
- Finishing wet Face: 0,8 µm Ra (32 µ” AA) (23) This adapter has certified for use in Explosion Proof (NEPSI, NEMKO, EXAM).
- Wet O-Ring: Viton, Buna-N and Teflon (24) This adapter has certified for use in Explosion Proof (FM).
(12) Item by inquiry. (25) This adapter has certified for use in Explosion Proof (CSA).
(13) Without certification for explosion proof or intrinsically safe. (26) Only available for LD301.
(14) Limited values to 4 1/2 digits; limited unit to 5 characters.
18
Dimensions
LD300 - Differential, Flow, Gage, Absolute and High Static Pressure

Transmitters with Mounting Bracket
Allow 150 mm minimum for local

zero and span adjustment with
113 magnetic tool PLUG 83
(4.45) (3.27)
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION
(Ø3.27)
TERMINAL
Ø83
(3.8)
CONNECTION
96,6
MOUNTING BRACKET
(7.15)
181,5
LOCK
(7.28)
185
1/4 - 18 NPT
(WITHOUT ADAPTERS)
(1.62)
(3.54)
41,3
90
DRAIN / VENT
OPTIONAL THREAD
(WITH ADAPTERS)
Y TABLE 1 ADAPTER
TABLE 1
Z DN50 DIMENSIONS
RANGE 48,7 72,5
TABLE 1 TUBE 2"
Y Z (1.90) (2.85)
179
0-1-2-3 54,0 (2.13) 69,5 (2.73) 100
(7.04)
4 56,0 (2.20) 71,5 (2.81) (3.94)
5 58,3 (2.30) 73,8 (2.90)
6 58,7 (2.31) 74,2 (2.92)
19
Dimensions
Flanged Pressure Transmitter with Integral Flange
83 113
(3.27) (4.45)
1/2 NPT
(3.27)
83
FF FACE RTJ FACE
(5.51)
140
ØE
O’RING
(7.13)
LOCK
181
ØF1
ØG
ØB
ØA
ØF
+1 D
-0 72,5
32,8 94,2 C EXTENSION C1 C2 (2.85)
(1.29) (3.72)
100
(3.94)
EN 1092-1 DIMENSIONS
JIS B 2202 DIMENSIONS
20
Dimensions
LD300L - Flanged Pressure Transmitter with Slip-on Flange
Plug
Allow 150 mm for local zero and 113
83
(3.27)
span adjustment with magnetic tool (4.45)
ELECTRIC FF FACE RTJ FACE

CONNECTION 1/2 NPT
LEVEL DIAPHRAGM WITHOUT EXTENSION TERMINAL
(3.27)
RF FACE
83
(3.80)
CONNECTIONS
97
(7.13)
LOCK
(3.85)
181
98
1/4-18 NPT
(Without Adapter)
ØF1
ØF2
ØB
ØG
ØD
ØB
ØB
ØA
ØA
ØA
ØF
Drain/Vent Valve
1/2-14 NPT
(With Adapter)
E
Extension 72.5
C C
C 12 (2.85)
49 max. 154.8 max. 7.2 100 Adapter

(1.93) (6.1) (3.94)
(0.28)
LEVEL DIAPHRAGM WITH EXTENSION
ANSI-B 16.5 DIMENSIONS

DN CLASS A B C D E F (RF) F1 (FF) F2 (RTJ) G # HOLES
150 108 (4.25) 79.4 (3.16) 14.3 (0.56) - 16 (0.63) 50.8 (2) 50.8 (2) - - 4
1"
300/600 124 (4.88) 88.9 (3.5) 17.5 (0.69) - 19 (0.75) 50.8 (2) 50.8 (2) - - 4
150 127 (5) 98.4 (3.87) 17.5 (0.69) - 16 (0.63) 73 (2.87) 73 (2.87) - 40 (1.57) 4
1 1/2"
300/600 156 (6.14) 114.3 (4.5) 22.2 (0.87) - 22 (0.87) 73 (2.87) 73 (2.87) - 40 (1.57) 4
150 152.4 (6) 120.7 (4.75) 17.5 (0.69) 82.6 (3.25) 19 (0.75) 92 (3.62) 92 (3.62) 101.6 (4.00) 48 (1.89) 4
2" 300 165.1 (6.5) 127 (5) 20.7 (0.8) 82.6 (3.25) 19 (0.75) 92 (3.62) 92 (3.62) 107.9 (4.25) 48 (1.89) 8
600 165.1 (6.5) 127 (5) 25.4 (1) 82.6 (3.25) 19 (0.75) 92 (3.62) 92 (3.62) 107.9 (4.25) 48 (1.89) 8
150 190.5 (7.5) 152.4 (6) 22.3 (0.87) 114.3 (4.50) 19 (0.75) 127 (5) 127 (5) 133.4 (5.25) 73 (2.87) 4
3" 300 209.5 (8.25) 168.1 (6.62) 27 (1.06) 123.8 (4.87) 22 (0.87) 127 (5) 127 (5) 146.1 (5.75) 73 (2.87) 8
600 209.5 (8.25) 168.1 (6.62) 31.8 (1.25) 123.8 (4.87) 22 (0.87) 127 (5) 127 (5) 146.1 (5.75) 73 (2.87) 8
150 228.6 (9) 190.5 (7.5) 22.3 (0.87) 149.2 (5.87) 19 (0.75) 158 (6.22) 158 (6.22) 171.5 (6.75) 89 (3.5) 8
4" 300 254 (10) 200 (7.87) 30.2 (1.18) 149.2 (5.87) 22 (0.87) 158 (6.22) 158 (6.22) 174.6 (6.87) 89 (3.5) 8
600 273 (10.75) 215.9 (8.5) 38.1 (1.5) 149.2 (5.87) 25 (1) 158 (6.22) 158 (6.22) 174.6 (6.87) 89 (3.5) 8
EN 1092-1 / DIN2501 DIMENSIONS - RF/ FF

DN PN A B C E F G # HOLES
25 10/40 115 (4.53) 85 (3.35) 18 (0.71) 14 (0.55) 68 (2.68) - 4
40 10/40 150 (5.91) 110 (4.33) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 88 (3.46) 73 (2.87) 4
50 10/40 165 (6.50) 125 (4.92) 20 (0.78) 18 (0.71) 102 (4.01) 48 (1.89) 4
80 10/40 200 (7.87) 160 (6.30) 24 (0.95) 18 (0.71) 138 (5.43) 73 (2.87) 8
10/16 220 (8.67) 180 (7.08) 20 (0.78) 18 (0.71) 158 (6.22) 89 (3.5) 8
100
25/40 235 (9.25) 190 (7.50) 24 (0.95) 22 (0.87) 162 (6.38) 89 (3.5) 8
-FOR 1” AND DN25 THE EXTENSION LENGTH IS 0 mm
21
Dimensions
LD300L - Flanged Pressure Transmitter with Housing
RF / FF FACE RTJ FACE
40
25
LOCK
Sealing
Gasket O´Ring
ØH1
ØF1
ØH
ØJ
ØJ
Housing
Housing
Drain/Vent
Drain/Vent
DIMENSIONS IN mm (") DIMENSIONS IN mm (")
ANSI-B 16.5 DIMENSIONS ANSI-B 16.5 DIMENSIONS - RTJ FACE

DN CLASS H J DN CLASS F1 O`RING H1 J
1.1/2" 73,2 (2,88) 48 (1,89) 150 65,1 (2,56) R19 82,5 (3,25) 48 (1,89)
2" ALL 91,9 (3,62) 60 (2,36) 300 68,3 (2,69) R20 90,5 (3,56) 48 (1,89)
3" 127 (5,00) 89 (3,50) 1.1/2" 600 68,3 (2,69) R20 90,5 (3,56) 48 (1,89)
4" 158 (6,22) 115 (4,53) 1500 68,3 (2,69) R20 92 (3,62) 48 (1,89)
FORM D DIMENSIONS 2500 82,6 (3,25) R23 114 (4,50) 48 (1,89)
150 82,6 (3,25) R22 102 (4,00) 60 (2,36)
DN PN H J 82,6 (3,25) 108 (4,25) 60 (2,36)
300 R23
40 88 (3,46) 48 (1,89)
ALL 2" 600 82,6 (3,25) R23 108 (4,25) 60 (2,36)
50 102 (4,02) 60 (2,36)
1500 95,3 (3,75) R24 124 (4,88) 60 (2,36)
80 138 (5,43) 89 (3,50)
2500 101,6 (4,00) R26 133 (5,25) 60 (2,36)
100 158 (6,22) 115 (4,53)
150 114,3 (4,50) R29 133 (5,25) 89 (3,50)
DIMENSIONS 3" 300 123,8 (4,87) R31 146 (5,75) 89 (3,50)
DN CLASS H J 600 123,8 (4,87) R31 146 (5,75) 89 (3,50)
40A 20K 81 (3,19) 48 (1,89) 150 149,2 (5,87) R36 171 (6,75) 115 (4,53)
10K 96 (3,78) 60 (1,36) 4" 300 149,2 (5,87) R37 175 (6,88) 115 (4,53)
50A 105 (4,13) 60 (1,36)
40K 600 149,2 (5,87) R37 175 (6,88) 115 (4,53)
10K 126 (4,96) 89 (3,50)
80A 132 (5,20) 89 (3,50)
20K
100A 10K 151 (5,94) 115 (4,53)
22
Dimensions
LD300S - Sanitary Transmitter with Extension

magnetic tool
TRICLAMP
E
High Pressure - HP
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
E RTJ
ØD
LOCK
TRICLAMP
ØG
ØD
ØC
ØF
ØG
ØC
ØF
TANK
A ext. O’RING ADAPTER
+1
-0 TANK
32,8 91,2 O’RING
A ext. ADAPTER
+2
-0
67,6
ØD IDF
E
ØG
ØD
ØC
ØF
TRICLAMP
TANK
A ext. O’RING
ADAPTER
DIN 11851
E SMS E
ØG
ØG
ØD
ØD
ØC
ØC
ØF
ØF
O’RING TANK TANK

ADAPTER A ext. O’RING ADAPTER
A ext.
LD300S
CONNECTION WITH Dimensions in mm (”)

EXTENSION A ØC ØD E ØG
ØF EXT.
Tri-Clamp DN50 8 (0.315) 63.5 (2.5) 76.5 (3.01) 18 (0.71) 50.5 (1.99) 80 (3.15) 48 (1.89)
Tri-Clamp DN50 HP 8 (0.315) 63.5 (2.5) 81 (3.19) 25 (0.98) 50.5 (1.99) 80 (3.15) 48 (1.89)
Tri-Clamp - 2" 8 (0.315) 63.5 (2.5) 76.5 (3.01) 18 (0.71) 50.5 (1.99) 80 (3.15) 48 (1.89)
Tri-Clamp - 2" HP 8 (0.315) 63.5 (2.5) 81 (3.19) 25 (0.98) 50.5 (1.99) 80 (3.15) 48 (1.89)
Tri-Clamp - 3" 8 (0.315) 91 (3.58) 110 (4.33) 18 (0.71) 72.5 (2.85) 100 (3.94) 50 (1.96)
Tri-Clamp - 3" HP 8 (0.315) 91 (3.58) 115 (4.53) 25 (0.98) 72.5 (2.85) 100 (3.94) 50 (1.96)
Threaded DN25 - DIN 11851 6 (0.24) 47.5 (1.87) 63 (2.48) 21 (0.83) 43.2 (1.7) 80 (3.15) 26.3 (1.03)
Threaded DN40 - DIN 11851 8 (0.315) 56 (2.2) 78 (3.07) 21 (0.83) 50.5 (1.99) 80 (3.15) 48 (1.89)
Threaded DN50 - DIN 11851 8 (0.315) 68.5 (2.7) 92 (3.62) 22 (0.86) 50.5 (1.99) 80 (3.15) 48 (1.89)
Threaded DN80 - DIN 11851 8 (0.315) 100 (3.94) 127 (5) 29 (1.14) 72.5 (2.85) 100 (3.94) 50 (1.96)
Threaded SMS - 2" 8 (0.315) 65 (2.56) 84 (3.3) 26 (1.02) 50.5 (1.99) 80 (3.15) 48 (1.89)
Threaded SMS - 3" 8 (0.315) 93 (3.66) 113 (4.45) 32 (1.26) 72.5 (2.85) 100 (3.94) 50 (1.96)
Threaded RJT - 2" 8 (0.315) 66.7 (2.63) 86 (3.38) 22 (0.86) 50.5 (1.99) 80 (3.15) 48 (1.89)
Threaded RJT - 3" 8 (0.315) 92 (3.62) 112 (4.41) 22.2 (0.87) 72.5 (2.85) 100 (3.94) 50 (1.96)
Threaded IDF - 2" 8 (0.315) 60.5 (2.38) 76.2 (3) 30 (1.18) 50.5 (1.99) 80 (3.15) 48 (1.89)
Threaded IDF - 3" 8 (0.315) 87.5 (3.44) 101.6 (4) 30 (1.18) 72.5 (2.85) 100 (3.94) 50 (1.96)
23
Dimensions
LD300S - Sanitary Transmitter without Extension

magnetic tool
TRICLAMP
E
ELECTRIC High Pressure - HP
CONNECTION
E RTJ
ØD
ØC
ØF
LOCK
TRICLAMP
A TANK
ØC
ØC
ØF
ADAPTER
O’RING
+1
32,8
-0
91,2 A
TANK IDF
ADAPTER E
+2 O’RING
-0
67,6
ØC
ØF
ØD
E
TRICLAMP
A TANK
ADAPTER
O’RING
DIN 11851
SMS
E
E
ØD
ØD
ØC
ØC
ØF
ØF
TANK
A TANK
ADAPTER
A ADAPTER
O’RING O’RING
LD300S
CONNECTION WITHOUT Dimensions in mm (”)

EXTENSION A ØC ØD E ØF ØG EXT.
Tri-Clamp DN50 8 (0.315) 63.5 (2.5) 76.5 (3.01) 18 (0.71) 47.5 (1.87) --- ---
Tri-Clamp - 1 1/2" 12 (0.47) 50 (1.96) 61 (2.4) 18 (0.71) 35 (1.38) --- ---
Tri-Clamp - 1 1/2" HP 12 (0.47) 50 (1.96) 66 (2.59) 25 (0.98) 35 (1.38) --- ---
Tri-Clamp - 2" 12 (0.47) 63.5 (2.5) 76.5 (3.01) 18 (0.71) 47.6 (1.87) --- ---
Tri-Clamp - 2" HP 12 (0.47) 63.5 (2.5) 81 (3.19) 25 (0.98) 47.6 (1.87) --- ---
Tri-Clamp - 3" 12 (0.47) 91 (3.58) 110 (4.33) 18 (0.71) 72 (2.83) --- ---
Tri-Clamp - 3" HP 12 (0.47) 91 (3.58) 115 (4.53) 25 (0.98) 72 (2.83) --- ---
Threaded DN40 - DIN 11851 13 (0.51) 56 (2.2) 78 (3.07) 21 (0.83) 38 (1.5) --- ---
Threaded DN50 - DIN 11851 15 (0.59) 68.5 (2.7) 92 (3.62) 22 (0.86) 50 (1.96) --- ---
Threaded DN80 - DIN 11851 16 (0.63) 100 (3.94) 127 (5) 29 (1.14) 81 (3.19) --- ---
Threaded SMS - 1 1/2" 12 (0.47) 55 (2.16) 74 (2.91) 25 (0.98) 35 (1.38) --- ---
Threaded SMS - 2" 12 (0.47) 65 (2.56) 84 (3.3) 26 (1.02) 48.6 (1.91) --- ---
Threaded SMS - 3" 12 (0.47) 93 (3.66) 113 (4.45) 32 (1.26) 73 (2.87) --- ---
Threaded RJT - 2" 15 (0.59) 66.7 (2.63) 86 (3.38) 22 (0.86) 47.6 (1.87) --- ---
Threaded RJT - 3" 15 (0.59) 92 (3.62) 112 (4.41) 22.2 (0.87) 73 (2.87) --- ---
Threaded IDF - 2" 12 (0.47) 60.5 (2.38) 76 (2.99) 30 (1.18) 47.6 (1.87) --- ---
Threaded IDF - 3" 12 (0.47) 87.5 (3.44) 101.6 (4) 30 (1.18) 73 (2.87) --- ---
24
All-in-one Station
Maintenance
Engineering
- MES (Manufacturing Execution System)
Communication - ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning)
Server - CRM (Customer Relationship Management
Operation
DF100
Communication
Fiber Optic Ring Maintenance
Server
DFI302 Maintenance and

Redundant Controller Asset Management
Alarm and Asset

Communication
Management
Server
Outputs
4 - 20 mA
Eth
ern
et
Inputs
Auto Tuning Corporate
4 - 20 mA
Internet
Advanced Control Network Internet
DFI302
Redundant Controller
Router or
Firewall
HI302
HART/FOUNDATION TM DFI302 Communication
Fieldbus PROFIBUS DP and PA Server
25
PA DP Matrix
Intrinsic Safety DFI302
Barrier Printer
DeviceNet
FOUNDATION TM Laser
DC302 FISCO
Printer
(Remote I/O)
DFI302 Server
AS-i
rete Server
System302 Architecture
isc e
In D iscret
t D
Ou
FOUNDATION TM
H1 I.S. Channel 1 Channel 8
Communication
DFI302 Server
Modbus TCP
(Cotroller with I/O modules) Modbus RTU
4 - 20 mA
Discrete I/O
Package Units
Legacy Systems
CLP
F&G
4 - 20 mA I.S. ESD
I.S.
Discrete
I/O
Main Smar Products
Pressure Pressure, Level and Flow Level Density/Concentration
4-20 mA LD290 LD400

LD1.0
RD400 DT301
LD291 LD301
LD302 DT302
LD292
LD293 LD303 DT303
Pressure Gauge Economic Pressure Pressure Level Transmitter Intelligent Density /

Transmitter Capacitive Pressure Transmitter Transmitter with Concentration
Transmitter high performance Transmitter
Position
FY301 FY301 TP301

FY302 FY400 FY302 TP302
FY303 FY303 TP303
Valve Positioner Valve Positioner Valve Positioner with Position Transmitter

with auto tuning remote sensor
Temperature Junction Box
4-20 mA 4-20 mA
TT301 TT411
TT302
TT303 TT421
Temperature Panel Mounting Head Mouting 3 Ways Junction Box 4 Ways Junction Box
Transmitter Temperature Temperature JM1 JM400
Transmitter Transmitter
Configurators Interfaces
HART® Configurator HART® Configurator HART® Configurator HART-RS232 HART-USB Interface

Interface CONF401 Interface DDCON 100 for Palm HPC301 Interface HI311 HI321
26
Main Smar Products
Converters
FP302 IF302 FI302
FP303 IF303 FI303
Fieldbus to Pneumatic Current to Fieldbus Fieldbus to Current HART® / Fieldbus HART® / Current
Signal Converter Converter Converter Interface HI302 Converter HCC301
Controllers
DeviceNet
TM
DeviceNet
TM
Programmable Logical Digital Controller Interface Universal Fieldbus

Controller CD600Plus DFI302
LC700
Systems
DeviceNet DeviceNet
TM TM
AssetView
ProcessView Studio302 On Line Plant Asset
Process Visualization Tool System302 Management Tool Management Tool
DeviceNet
TM
Syscon Equipment Database LogicView

System Configurator Plant Information Management IEC61131
Programming Tool
27
smar
www.smar.com
Specifications and information are subject to change without notice.
Up-to-date address information is available on our website.
web: www.smar.com/contactus.asp
© Copyright 2007 - Smar International - all rights reserved. - October/2011

Main Smar Products Dimensional Drawing
Converters
FP302 IF302 FI302
FP303 IF303 FI303
ALLOW 150 MM MINIMUM FOR LOCAL

ZERO AND SPAN ADJUSTMENT WITH
Fieldbus to Pneumatic Current to Fieldbus Fieldbus to Current HART / Fieldbus
®
HART / Current
® PLUG MAGNETIC TOOL.

CONDUIT
CONNECTION
PLUG
COMMUNICATIONS
TERMINAL
Controllers
• 0.02% Basic Accuracy
• Single Unit and Several

WALL OR Options for Sensors and
Connections
PANEL MOUNTING
FOR WALL MOUNTING

Programmable Logical Digital Controller Interface Universal Fieldbus MOUNTING BRACKET 2 EXPANSION ANCHOR - S8
2 HEXAGON SCREW - 3/16”X70
• Input Signal Isolation
Controller CD600Plus DFI302 FOR PANEL MOUNTING
PID Control Capability

PIPE 2" 2 BOLT AND NUTS - 1/4”X30
•
LC700 NOT INCLUDED
Systems
Block Execution Capacity
• Supported by DD, EDDL, and

FDT/DTM
• Dual Channel
• Sensor Backup
AssetView • Three Bus Technology
ProcessView Studio302 On Line Plant Asset Options
smar www.smar.com

Programming Tool
© Copyright 2006 - Smar International - all rights reserved. - September/2011

13
Features System302 Architecture Main Smar Products
Server
• 0.02% Accuracy; • Signal isolation; Pressure Pressure, Level and Flow Level Density/Concentration
• •
Server
Built-in thermocouples and RTDs Configurable user unit;
linearization; • Configurable local adjustment; 4-20 mA LD290 LD400
LD1.0
• True non-interactive zero and span; •
RD400
Printer
Laser
Communication
EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) LD291 LD301 DT301
Server
• Local zero and span adjustment; according to IEC 61000-6-2: 1999,
IEC 61000-6-4: 1997 and IEC 61326: LD302 DT302
• Remote configuration via Hand-Held LD292
2002;
Modbus RTU
Terminal or via PC;
Modbus TCP
Printer
Matrix
LD293 LD303 DT303
Legacy Systems
Package Units
• Alphanumerical LCD indication; • Write protection function;
F&G
ESD
CLP
• • Three technology options: HART®,
Internet
Small and lightweight; Pressure Gauge Economic Pressure Pressure Level Transmitter Intelligent Density /
F O U N D AT I O N TM fieldbus, and Transmitter Capacitive Pressure Transmitter Transmitter with Concentration
• Explosion proof and weather proof PROFIBUS PA; Transmitter high performance Transmitter
housing approved (IP66/68 ou
Network Internet
•
(Cotroller with I/O modules)

Sensor backup*;
Corporate
IP66/68W);
• • Universal input accepts several Position
Router or
Firewall
thermocouples, RTDs, mV and Ohm.
- CRM (Customer Relationship Management

•
Discrete
I.S.
I/O
DFI302
- ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning)
4 - 20 mA I.S.
Discrete I/O
Advanced Control
DFI302
HART® - 4 to 20 mA
Auto Tuning
AS-i
FY301 FY301 TP301
FY302 FY400
• • FY302 TP302
4 - 20 mA
Excellent long term stability due to PID control function;
auto-zero at the input circuit; •
Communication
Match sensor (Callendar Van Dusen FY303 FY303 TP303
DeviceNet
Server
•
DFI302
2-wire, 4-20 mA output plus direct equation);
Alarm and Asset

Management
Maintenance
digital communication; • Maximum, minimum and average
• Special 16-point sensor characterization; input sensor selection, also working Valve Positioner Valve Positioner Valve Positioner with Position Transmitter
Asset Management
• with two sensors simultaneously;
PROFIBUS DP and PA
Maintenance and
Update output current in 0.5 s with
1.5 A/bit resolution; • Pt1000 included in sensor list;
DP
• Improved performance due to • Setpoint generator function; Temperature Junction Box
DFI302
et
dedicated math coprocessor; •
Maintenance
ern
Supports DTM, DD and EDDL.
Eth
• Multidrop operation mode;
PA
4-20 mA 4-20 mA
Communication
TT301 TT411
Server
FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus
DFI302
Operation
HART/FOUNDATION TM
TT302
• Self-diagnosis; • Dynamic block instantiation improves TT303 TT421
Fieldbus
• interchangeability;
HI302
Engineering
Dual channel;
• Fieldbus Foundation TM registered Panel Mounting Head Mouting
• 12 mA consumption; Temperature Temperature Temperature
3 Ways Junction Box 4 Ways Junction Box
and ITK (Interoperability Test Kit) JM1
Communication
JM400
• 19 different types of function blocks Transmitter Transmitter Transmitter
All-in-one Station
Server
approved;
Channel 8
for control strategies and advanced
diagnostics; • LAS (Link Active Scheduler) capability;
• • MVC (Multivariable Container)
DFI302
Channel 1
enabled.
Intrinsic Safety
FOUNDATION TM
•
Communication
Server
Barrier
FISCO
H1 I.S.
TM
PROFIBUS PA
Fiber Optic Ring
FOUNDATION
(Remote I/O)
• Self-diagnosis; • Integrated to Smar Profibus View and
DC302
e
In D iscret
• Simatic PDM;
rete
DF100
Dual channel;
tD
isc
u
Inputs
O
• Supports DTM and EDDL;
4 - 20 mA
12mA consumption; HART® Configurator HART® Configurator HART® Configurator HART-RS232 HART-USB Interface
• 2 analog input function blocks; • Profile 3.0 improves interchangeability. Outputs
4 - 20 mA Interface CONF401 Interface DDCON 100 for Palm HPC301 Interface HI311 HI321
2 11 12
Functional Description
TT300 Series offers:

• ± 0.02% accuracy; • Single channel with two sensors (same type) with
• Built-in thermocouples and RTDs linearization; maximum, minimum or average signal selection (only
• Compact and lightweight; HART protocol device).
• Interchangeable protocols.
The Smar TT300 Series is a powerful and extremely
The Smar TT300 Series is a transmitter mainly intended for versatile smart temperature transmitter. The digital
measurement of temperature using RTDs or thermocouples. technology used in the TT300 Series enables a single
However, it can also accept other sensors with resistance device to accept several types of sensors, wide ranges,
or mV output such as pyrometers, load cells, resistance single or multiple-ended measurement and an easy
position indicators, etc. The TT300 Series accepts up to interface between the field and the control room. It also
two sensors and may operate in one of the modes below*: includes several features which reduce considerably
• Single channel with single sensor measurement; the installation, operation and maintenance costs. The
• Dual channel with dual sensor measurement (except transmitter accepts two channels, i.e., two measurements.
HART protocol device); It reduces the cost per channel.
• Single channel with two sensors (same type) in differential
measurement; The TT300 Series is suitable for direct field installation,
• Single channel with two sensors (same type) in backup being weather proof and explosion proof, as well as
measurement; intrinsically safe, for use in hazardous areas.
* Please consult your Smar representative to check the option availability.
3
Programming and Diagnostics
TT300Series is available in three different to configure zero and span, setpoint and other control
technologies: HART® (TT301), FOUNDATIONTM functions using the magnetic tool (SD1). With Smar
fieldbus (TT302), and PROFIBUS PA (TT303). AssetView, an user-friendly Web Tool, user can access
These instruments can be configured with the plant assets anywhere and anytime using an Internet
Smar software and other manufacturer browser. It is designed for management and diagnostics
configuration tools. Local adjustment is of field devices to ensure reactive, preventive, predictive
available in all TT300 Series. It is possible and proactive maintenance.
Local
Adjustment
Hart® - TT301
TT301 (HART® protocol) can be configured by:
Smar CONF401 for Windows;
Smar DDCON100 for Windows;
Smar HPC401 for several models of Palms*;
Other manufacturers' configuration tools based on DD
(Device Description) or DTM (Device Type Manager), such
as AMSTM, FieldCare, PACTwareTM, HHT275, HHT375 and
PRM Device Viewer.
For management and diagnostics, AssetView ensures
continuous information monitoring.
DDCON100 - Configuration Software
*Requires HI311 (HART Serial Interface). HPC401- Configuration Software
FOUNDATION™ fieldbus - TT302

TT302 utilizes the FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus H1 protocol, an
open technology that allows any H1 enabled configuration
tool to configure this device.
Syscon (System Configuration Tool) is a software tool used to
configure, and operate the field devices. Syscon offers efficient
and friendly interaction with the user, using Windows 2000 or
Windows XP.
Configuration tools such as AMSTM, FieldCare and HHT375
can configure TT302 devices. DD (Device Description) and
CF (Capability File) files can be downloaded at either the
Smar or Fieldbus FoundationTM website.
TT302 supports complex strategies configuration due to the high
capacity and variety of dynamic instantiable function blocks.
PROFIBUS PA - TT303
TT303 (PROFIBUS PA protocol) can be configured using
configuring Smar Profibus View, Simatic PDM, FDT (Field
Device Tool) and DTM (Device Type Manager) concept tools,
such as FieldCare and PACTwareTM. It can also be integrated
by any PROFIBUS System using the GSD (General Station
Description) file.
PROFIBUS PA also has quality and diagnostics information,
improving plant management and maintenance.
Smar and SYSTEM302 are trademarks or registered trademarks of Smar Equipamentos Industriais Ltda. in Brazil
and/or other countries. Other marks are the properties of their respective owners.
4
Wiring Connection
HART - TT301
Power Supply
TT301
and/or
For an adequate communication, a minimun load of

250 is required between the configuration tool and
the power supply.
HHT based on
Laptop
Palm platform
FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus - TT302
Spur
Junction
Box
Shield Junction
Box
Terminator Shield
Spur Spur
Terminator
Panel Analog
Ground Ground Panel Analog
Ground Ground
PROFIBUS - TT303
Spur Spur
DP/PA Junction DP/PA Junction

Coupler Box Coupler Box
Shield Shield
Terminator
Spur
Terminator Terminators
Panel Analog Spur Spur Panel Analog Spur Spur

Ground Ground Ground Ground
* For some DP/PA couplers, the bus terminator is built-in.
5
Applications
HART® - TT301
Power Supply HART®
250 W Interface
Control Room DCS, computer with CONF401 or DDCON100
Plant Floor
TT301
TT301 TT301
TT301
Pyrometer
Load Cell
FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus - TT302
LD302 TT302
LD302
FY302
Process
Power Supply
+ TT302
Bus Impedance
D D
F F
5 5
2 3
D D BT302
F F
5
0
6
2
Bus
Terminator
HSE
Link Device
BT302
Bus Terminator
FY302
PROFIBUS - TT303
LD303 TT303
LD303 FY303
Process
DF73
Power Supply
D
F
5 TT303
2
BT302
PA
Bus
BT302 DP
Terminator
Bus Terminator
D D
F F
5 7
0 3
Profibus DP Master FY303
6
Functional Specifications
Inputs See table 1, 2 and 3.

HART®:
2-wire, 4-20 mA according to NAMUR NE43 specification, with super-imposed digital
Output and
communication (HART® Protocol).
Communication
Protocol FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA:
Digital only. Complies with IEC 61158-2: 2000 (H1): 31.25 kbit/s voltage mode, bus powered.
HART®:
Power Supply / 12 to 45 Vdc.
Current FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA:
Consumption Bus powered: 9 - 32 Vdc.
Quiescent current consumption: 12 mA.
Indicator 4½-digit numerical and 5-character alphanumerical LCD indicator (optional).
HART®, FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA:
Intrinsic Safety (FM, CSA, NEMKO, EXAM, CEPEL, NEPSI), Explosion Proof (FM, CSA,
Hazardous Area NEMKO, CEPEL), Dust Ignition Proof (FM), Non-incendive (FM)
Certifications FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA:
FISCO (FM, CSA, NEMKO, EXAM, CEPEL, NEPSI) and FNICO (FM, CSA, NEMKO, EXAM,
CEPEL)
Authorized representative in European Community
Smar Gmbh-Rheingaustrasse 9-55545 Bad Kreuzanach
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) - Electromagnetic Compatibility
The EMC test was performed according to IEC standard: IEC61326:2002. For use only in
industrial environment.
European ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) - Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially
Directive explosive atmospheres.
Information This product was certified according European Standards at NEMKO and EXAM (former DMT).
The certified body for manufacturing quality assessment is EXAM (number 0158).
LVD Directive 2006/95/EC - Electrical Equipment designed for use within certain voltage
limits
According the LVD directive Annex II the equipment under ATEX “Electrical equipment for use
in an explosive atmosphere” directive are excluded from scope from this directive.
Zero and Span

Noninteractive, via local adjustment and digital communication.
Adjustments
Detailed diagnostics through communication for all protocols.
HART®:
In case of sensor or circuit failure, the self diagnostics drives the output to 3.6 or 21.0 mA,
according to the user's choice and NAMUR NE43 specification.
Failure Alarm FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus:
(Diagnostics) For sensor circuit failures, events are generated and status is sent to link outputs. Detailed
diagnostics are available in the contained parameters.
PROFIBUS PA:
For sensor or circuit failures, status is sent to link outputs. Detailed diagnostics are available
in the contained parameters.
Ambiente: -40 oC to 85 oC (-40 to 185 oF)
Temperature Storage: -40 oC to 100 oC (-40 to 212 ºF)
Limits Digital Display: -20 oC to 80 oC (-4 to 176 ºF) (normal operation)
-40 oC to 85 oC (-40 to 185 oF) (without damage)
7
HART®:
Turn-on Time
FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA:
HART®:
By digital communication (HART® protocol) using the configuration software CONF401,
DDCON100 (for Windows) or HPC301 (for Palms). It can also be configured using DD and
FDT/DTM tools, and can be partially configured through local adjustment , since the transmitter
is supplied with display.
Configuration
FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA:
Basic configuration may be done using the local adjustment magnetic tool if device is supplied
with display. Complete configuration is possible using configuration tools such as Syscon
(System Configuration Tool), AMSTM, FieldCare and HHT375. The TT303 can be configured
via Smar Profibus View and Simatic PDM using EDDL.
Humidity Limits 0 to 100% Relative Humidity.

Damping
Adjustment User configurable from 0 to 32 seconds (via digital communication).
Performance Specifications
Accuracy See tables 1, 2 and 3.
±0.1% of reading or 0.1 °C (0.18 °F), whichever is greater, for 2 years for RTDs;
Digital Stability
±0.1% of reading or 0.1 °C (0.18 °F), whichever is greater, for 1 year for thermocouples.
For a 10 °C variation:
mV (-6 to 22 mV), TC (NBS: B, R, S,T): ± 0.03% of the input milivoltage or 0.002 mV whichever
is greater;
mV (-10 to 100 mV), TC (NBS: E, J, K, N; DIN: L, U): ± 0.03% of the input milivoltage or 0.01
mV whichever is greater;
Temperature mV (-50 to 500 mV): ± 0.03% of the input milivoltage or 0.05 mV whichever is greater;
Effect
Ohm (0 to 100), RTD (GE: Cu10): ± 0.03% of the input resistence or 0.01 whichever is greater;
Ohm (0 to 400), RTD (Edison Curve #7: Ni120; IEC: Pt50, Pt100; JIS: Pt50, Pt100): ± 0.03%
of the input resistence or 0.04 whichever is greater;
Ohm (0 to 2000), RTD (IEC: Pt500), RTD (IEC: Pt1000): ±0.03% of the input resistence or
0.2 whichever is greater;
Power Supply
± 0.005% of calibrated span per volt.
Effect
Electromagnetic
Interference Approved according to IEC 61326: 2002.
Effect
Electrical 1/2 - 14 NPT 1/2 - 14 NPT X 3/4 NPT (316 SST) - with adapter Note: Explosion proof approvals do not
apply to adapter, only to transmitter.
M20 X 1.5 1/2 - 14 NPT X 3/4 BSP (316 SST) - with adapter
Connection
PG 13.5 DIN 1/2 - 14 NPT X 1/2 BSP (316 SST) - with adapter
8
Physical Specifications
Can be attached directly to the sensor. With an optional bracket can be installed on a 2" pipe
Mounting or fixed on a wall or panel.
Without display and mounting bracket: 0.80 kg.

Approximate
Add for digital display: 0.13 kg.
Weights
Add for mounting bracket: 0.60 kg.
HART®:
PID Control, Alarm and Setpoint Ramp Generator.
FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus Function Blocks:
Control Resource, Transducer, Display Transducer, Diagnostic Transducer, Analog Input, PID Control,
Functions Enhanced PID Control, Arithmetic, Integrator, Input Selector, Signal Characterizer, Splitter,
Characteristics Analog Alarm, Timer, Lead Lag, Output Selector/Dynamic Limiter, Setpoint Generator and
(Optional) Constant.
PROFIBUS PA Function Blocks:
Physical Block, Transducer, Display Transducer and Analog Input.
Note: Additional information can be found in the Function Blocks Instruction Manual.
Inputs
2, 3 or 4 wires DIFFERENTIAL
MINIMUM °C DIGITAL MINIMUM °C DIGITAL

SENSOR TYPE RANGE °C RANGE °F RANGE °C RANGE °F
SPAN °C ACCURACY* SPAN °C ACCURACY*
Cu 10 GE -20 to 250 -4 to 482 50 ± 1.0 -270 to 270 -486 to 486 50 ± 2.0
Ni120 Edison
Curve #7 -50 to 270 -58 to 518 5 ± 0.1 -320 to 320 -576 to 576 5 ± 0.5
Pt50 IEC -200 to 850 -328 to 1562 10 ± 0.25 -1050 to 1050 -1890 to 1890 10 ± 1.0
Pt100 IEC -200 to 850 -328 to 1562 10 ± 0.2 -1050 to 1050 -1890 to 1890 10 ± 1.0
RTD Pt500 IEC -200 to 450 -328 to 842 10 ± 0.2 NA NA NA NA

Pt1000 IEC -200 to 300 -328 to 572 10 ± 0.2 NA NA NA NA
Pt50 JIS -200 to 600 -328 to 1112 10 ± 0.25 -800 to 800 -1440 to 1440 10 ± 1.0
Pt100 JIS -200 to 600 -328 to 1112 10 ± 0.25 -800 to 800 -1440 to 1440 10 ± 1.5
Pt100 MILT -40 to 540 -40 to 1000 10 + 0.2 -580 to 580 -1040 to 1040 10 + 1.0
Ni120 MILT -40 to 205 -40 to 400 5 + 0.13 -245 to 245 -440 to 440 5 + 0.5
B NBS 100 to 1800 212 to 3272 50 ± 0.5** -1700 to 1700 -3060 to 3060 60 ± 1.0**
E NBS -100 to 1000 -148 to 1832 20 ± 0.2 -1100 to 1100 -1980 to 1980 20 ± 1.0
J NBS -150 to 750 -238 to 1382 30 ± 0.3 -900 to 900 -1620 to 1620 30 ± 0.6
K NBS -200 to 1350 -328 to 2462 60 ± 0.6 -1550 to 1550 -2790 to 2790 60 ± 1.2
N NBS -100 to 1300 -148 to 2372 50 ± 0.5 -1400 to 1400 -2520 to 2520 50 ± 1.0
THERMO-
R NBS 0 to 1750 32 to 3182 40 ± 0.4 -1750 to 1750 -3150 to 3150 40 ± 2.0
COUPLE
S NBS 0 to1750 32 to 3182 40 ± 0.4 -1750 to 1750 -3150 to 3150 40 ± 2.0
T NBS -200 to 400 -328 to 752 15 ± 0.15 -600 to 600 -1080 to 1080 15 ± 0.8
L DIN -200 to 900 -328 to 1652 35 ± 0.35 -1100 to 1100 -1980 to 1980 35 ± 0.7
U DIN -200 to 600 -328 to 1112 50 ± 0.5 -800 to 800 -1440 to 1440 50 ± 2.5
Table 1 - Sensor Characteristics
RANGE MINIMUM DIGITAL* RANGE MINIMUM DIGITAL*

SENSOR SENSOR
mV SPAN mV ACCURACY % Ohm SPAN Ohm ACCURACY %
-6 to 22 0.40 ± 0.02% or ± 2 µV 0 to 100 1 ± 0.02% or ± 0.01 Ohm
mV -10 to 100 2.00 ± 0.02% or ± 10 µV Ohm 0 to 400 4 ± 0.02% or ± 0.04 Ohm

-50 to 500 10.00 ± 0.02% or ± 50 µV 0 to 2000 20 ± 0.02% or ± 0.20 Ohm
-28 to 28 0.40 ± 0.1% or ± 10 µV -100 to 100 1 ± 0.08% or ± 0.04 Ohm
mV DIF. Ohm DIF.
-110 to 110 2.0 ± 0.1% or ± 50 µV -400 to 400 4 ± 0.1% or ± 0.2 Ohm
Table 2 - mV Sensor Characteristics Table 3 - Ohm Sensor Characteristics
* Accuracy of value read on display and accessed by communication. The 4-20 mA accuracy is the digital accuracy ±0.03%.
** Not applicable for the first 20% of the range (up to 440 °C).
NA: Not applicable.
9
Ordering Code
MODEL TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
TT301 HART® & 4 to 20 mA

TT302 FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus
TT303 PROFIBUS PA

COD. Mounting Bracket
A Flat, 304 SST bracket and 316 SST accessories 1 Carbon Steel Bracket 7 Carbon Steel Bracket with 316 SST Fasteners
0 Without Bracket 2 316 SST Bracket
COD. Set this code as "1" for TT301 and exclude for the others
COD. Electrical Connections

0 1/2 - 14 NPT (8) 3 1/2 - 14 NPT X 1/2 BSP (316 SST) - With adapter (2) Z According to user´s notes
1 1/2 - 14 NPT X 3/4 NPT (316 SST) - With adapter (9) A M20 x 1.5 (10)
2 1/2 - 14 NPT X 3/4 BSP (316 SST) - With adapter (2) B PG 13.5 DIN (11)
H0 Aluminum (IP/TYPE) H2 Aluminium for saline atmosphere (IPW/TYPEX) (15) H4 Copper Free Aluminium (IPW/TYPEX) (15)
H1 316 SST (IP/TYPE) H3 316 SST for saline atmospheres (IPW/TYPEX) (15)
COD. Identification Plate (12)
I1 FM: XP, IS, NI, DI I4 EXAM (DMT): Ex-ia IE NEPSI: Ex-ia (3)
I2 NEMKO: Ex-d, Ex-ia (4) I5 CEPEL: Ex-d, Ex-ia IF CEPEL: Ex-d (4)
I3 CSA: XP, IS, NI, DI (5) I6 Without Certification IG CEPEL (Ex-d, Ex-ia) +IPW (6)
COD. Tag Plate (12)
J0 With tag, when specified (Default) J1 Blank J2 According to user's notes
COD. Sensor Connection
L2 2-wire L4 4-wire LD Double 2-wire (3)
L3 3-wire LF Differential LB Backup
COD. PID Configuration - (4)

M0 With PID (Default) M1 Without PID
COD. LCD1 Indication - (4)
Y1 LCD1: Current - I (mA) YU LCD1: According to user notes (1) (7)
COD. LCD2 Indication - (4)
Y4 LCD2: Current - I (mA) YU LCD2: According to user notes (1) (7)
COD. Painting
P0 Gray Munsell N 6,5 Polyester (Default) P5 Yellow Polyester
P3 Black Polyester P8 Without Painting
P4 White Epoxy P9 Safety Blue Epoxy - Electrostatic Painting
COD. Sensor Type
T1 RTD Cu10 - GE TA Thermocouple type B - NBS TP Thermocouple type U - DIN
T2 RTD Ni120 - Edison Curve #7 TB Thermocouple type E - NBS TN 100 OHM
T3 RTD PT50 - IEC TC Thermocouple type J - NBS TO Special OHM (4)
T4 RTD PT100 - IEC TD Thermocouple type K - NBS TQ 22 mV
T5 RTD PT500 - IEC TE Thermocouple type N - NBS TR 100 mV
T6 RTD PT50 - JIS TF Thermocouple type R - NBS TS 500 mV
T7 RTD PT100 - JIS TG Thermocouple type S - NBS TT Special mV (4)
TU RTD PT1000 - IEC (4) TH Thermocouple type T - NBS TV RTD Pt100 MILT
T8 2K OHM TK Thermocouple type L - DIN TW RTD Ni120 MILT
T9 400 OHM
COD. Burn-out (4)
BD Down Scale BU Up Scale
TT301 1 2 1 0 H1 I1 J0 L2 M0 Y0 Y0 P8 T1 BU
TT302 1 2 0 H1 I1 J0 L2 P8 T1
TT303 1 2 0 H1 I1 J0 L2 P8 T1
Note:
(1) Values limited to 4 ½ digits; units limited to 5 characters. (11) Certified for use in hazardous locations (CEPEL, NEPSI, NEMKO, EXAM).
(2) Not certified for use in hazardous locations. (12) Rectangular plate in 316 SST.
(3) Only available for TT302 and TT303. (13) IPX8 tested in 10 meters of water column for 24 hours.
(4) Only available for TT301. (14) Ingress Protection:
(5) Only available for TT301 and TT302.
(6) Not available for Aluminum housing. Product CEPEL NEMKO / EXAM FM CSA NEPSI
(7) For TT301, this code will be available only if the chosen sensor is Ohm or mV special.
(8) Certified for use in hazardous locations (CEPEL, CSA, FM, NEPSI, NEMKO, EXAM). TT300 IP66/68W IP66/68W Type 4X/6 (6P) Type 4X IP67
(9) Certified for use in hazardous locations (CEPEL, CSA, FM).
(10) Certified for use in hazardous locations (CEPEL, FM, NEPSI, NEMKO, EXAM). (15) IPW/TYPE testes for 200 hours according to NBR 8094 / ASTM B 117 standard.
10
Server
• •
Server
LD1.0
RD400
Printer
Laser
Communication
Server
IEC 61000-6-4: 1997 and IEC 61326: LD302 DT302
2002;
Modbus RTU
Terminal or via PC;
Modbus TCP
Printer
Matrix
LD293 LD303 DT303
Legacy Systems
Package Units
F&G
ESD
CLP
Internet
Network Internet
•

Sensor backup*;
Corporate
IP66/68W);
Router or
Firewall

•
Discrete
I.S.
I/O
DFI302
4 - 20 mA I.S.
Discrete I/O
Advanced Control
DFI302
HART® - 4 to 20 mA
Auto Tuning
AS-i
FY301 FY301 TP301
FY302 FY400
• • FY302 TP302
4 - 20 mA
Communication
DeviceNet
Server
•
DFI302
Alarm and Asset

Management
Maintenance
Asset Management
PROFIBUS DP and PA
Maintenance and
DP
DFI302
et
Maintenance
ern
Eth
PA
4-20 mA 4-20 mA
Communication
TT301 TT411
Server
DFI302
Operation
HART/FOUNDATION TM
TT302
Fieldbus
HI302
Engineering
Dual channel;
Communication
JM400
All-in-one Station
Server
approved;
Channel 8
DFI302
Channel 1
enabled.
Intrinsic Safety
FOUNDATION TM
•
Communication
Server
Barrier
FISCO
H1 I.S.
TM
PROFIBUS PA
Fiber Optic Ring
FOUNDATION
(Remote I/O)
DC302
e
In D iscret
• Simatic PDM;
rete
DF100
Dual channel;
tD
isc
u
Inputs
O
4 - 20 mA
2 11 12
Server
• •
Server
LD1.0
RD400
Printer
Laser
Communication
Server
IEC 61000-6-4: 1997 and IEC 61326: LD302 DT302
2002;
Modbus RTU
Terminal or via PC;
Modbus TCP
Printer
Matrix
LD293 LD303 DT303
Legacy Systems
Package Units
F&G
ESD
CLP
Internet
Network Internet
•

Sensor backup*;
Corporate
IP66/68W);
Router or
Firewall

•
Discrete
I.S.
I/O
DFI302
4 - 20 mA I.S.
Discrete I/O
Advanced Control
DFI302
HART® - 4 to 20 mA
Auto Tuning
AS-i
FY301 FY301 TP301
FY302 FY400
• • FY302 TP302
4 - 20 mA
Communication
DeviceNet
Server
•
DFI302
Alarm and Asset

Management
Maintenance
Asset Management
PROFIBUS DP and PA
Maintenance and
DP
DFI302
et
Maintenance
ern
Eth
PA
4-20 mA 4-20 mA
Communication
TT301 TT411
Server
DFI302
Operation
HART/FOUNDATION TM
TT302
Fieldbus
HI302
Engineering
Dual channel;
Communication
JM400
All-in-one Station
Server
approved;
Channel 8
DFI302
Channel 1
enabled.
Intrinsic Safety
FOUNDATION TM
•
Communication
Server
Barrier
FISCO
H1 I.S.
TM
PROFIBUS PA
Fiber Optic Ring
FOUNDATION
(Remote I/O)
DC302
e
In D iscret
• Simatic PDM;
rete
DF100
Dual channel;
tD
isc
u
Inputs
O
4 - 20 mA
2 11 12
Converters
FP302 IF302 FI302
FP303 IF303 FI303

®
HART / Current

CONDUIT
CONNECTION
PLUG
COMMUNICATIONS
TERMINAL
Controllers

Connections
PANEL MOUNTING
FOR WALL MOUNTING


•
LC700 NOT INCLUDED
Systems

FDT/DTM
• Dual Channel
• Sensor Backup
smar www.smar.com

Programming Tool

13
Converters
FP302 IF302 FI302
FP303 IF303 FI303

®
HART / Current

CONDUIT
CONNECTION
PLUG
COMMUNICATIONS
TERMINAL
Controllers

Connections
PANEL MOUNTING
FOR WALL MOUNTING


•
LC700 NOT INCLUDED
Systems

FDT/DTM
• Dual Channel
• Sensor Backup
smar www.smar.com

Programming Tool

13
Appendix
Nederman
Articulation Arm
ORIGINAL
ORIGINAL
SERIES 535
EXTRACTOR ARM
ORIGINAL 2 m
ORIGINAL 4 m V
ORIGINAL 4 m H
ORIGINAL 3 m
ORIGINAL 5 m
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
ENGLISH page 2-7 NEDERLANDS pag. 2-6, 11
SVENSKA sida 2-7 SUOMI sivu 2-6, 11
DANSK side 2-7 POLSKI strona 2-6, 12
NORSK side 2-7 CESTINA strana 2-6, 12
DEUTSCH Site 2-6, 8 MAGYAR oldal 2-6, 13
FRANÇAIS page 2-6, 8 LATVIESU VALODA skat 2-6, 13
ESPAÑOL pág. 2-6, 9 LIETUVIUK puslapyje 2-6, 14
PORTUGÊS página 2-6, 9 EESTI leheküljel 2-6, 14
ITALIANO pagina 2-6, 10 SLOVENSCINA stran 2-6, 15 No. 148753 / 02
ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ page 2-6, 10 SLOVENSKY stranu 2-6, 15 2005-10-01
ORIGINAL
TECHNICAL DATA
Original 2 m: m=11,5 kg Lp = 68 dB(A) Vacuum
Original 3 m: m=13,5 kg (ISO 11201) p = max. 1500 Pa
Original 4 mV: m=14,2 kg
Original 4 mH: m=15,5 kg
Original 5 m: m=15,7 kg t = max. 70 °C q = 700 - 1000 m3/h
(extracted air)
Material recovery:
91 % by weight
307
230
Ø 160
198,5
Ø9
(x4)
~2400
360
max. 2 m
max. 3 m
max. 4 m
max. 5 m
HOOD POSITIONING BENCH

INSTALLATION
2 ~ 1,0 m
ORIGINAL
MOUNTING EXAMPLES
Original 5 m
min. 4,0 m
3
ORIGINAL
MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
A
B
1
C
230
~2400 mm
198,5
~2000 mm
Ø9
(x4)
2 B
C
(2
x)
M
8x
50
A
(2x) M8x50
(2x) M8x50
~20 mm
D
(2x) M8x50
Original 5 m only
Ø
8,0
Drill this hole when the arm has been fixed in its leaning position
upwards, as shown in this picture. Then fit the third M8x50 screw.
4
ORIGINAL
3 4
M8x60
Original
4 mV, 4 mH, 5 m
a
b 5 6 Alt. 1 Alt. 2
M8x70
M8x40
d
gasket
M8x70 M8x70
c
MAINTENANCE
X1 5
ORIGINAL
SPARE PARTS 4
37
29
4 Original 3 m
37
Original 2 m
33
31
30
4 30
8
37
8
Original 5 m
33
4 29
30
29
Original 4 m H 38
37
37
30
4 8
38
Original 4 m V
31
33
Spare parts
4. Swivel with gasket and connector
6. Hose with rubber ring and hose clamps
8. Hood, complete with damper and 8
spider support
11. Service kit: wear discs, rubber rings
38
and hose clamps
29. Horizontal link with arms
30. Inner link, not adjusted 8
31. Knee link, not adjusted
33. Outer link
37. Arm system, complete with spring
and preset links 11 6
38. Outer arm with links
(for Fume Extractor 4m and 5 m only)
6
ORIGINAL SVENSKA SE (DANSK DK NORSK NO )
Förord
För att säkerställa (sikre) rätt funktion (virkemåte)
och minimalt servicebehov (vedligeholdelse) är det VARNING! (ADVARSEL!)
viktigt att taga del av (læse og fortså) informationen Risk (fare) för personskador!
i denna instruktionsmanual (betjeningsvejledning). Utsugningsarmen får inte (må ikke) använ-
Produkten är konstruerad för att uppfylla kraven i das (bruges) i miljöer där statisk elektricitet
de direktiv den omfattas av. För att behålla denna kan innebära risk (fare) för explosion.
status får installation, reparation och underhåll (ved-
ligehold) endast (kun) utföras av kompetent (kvalifi-
ceret) personal (fagfolk) och med användning av Skötsel (vedligeholdelse)
original reservdelar. Kontakta tillverkaren (produ- (rekommenderas (anbefales) minst 1 gång per år)
centen) eller närmaste auktoriserad återförsäljare • Kontrollera att slangen är hel. Rengör nedsmutsad
(forhandler) för rådgivning vid teknisk service eller (snavset / skitten) slang. Vid behov byt (skift) slang.
vid behov av (brug for) reservdelar. • Justera lederna (se bild X1 sid. 5).
• Spänn (stram) armprofilernas fästbultar.
Montageinstruktion • Kontrollera utsugningsarmens infästning på vägg.
Se sid. 4 – 5. Se till (sørg for / påse) att under- • Kontrollera luftflödet (luftstrømmen) Vid för
laget är plant och märk upp håldelningen (markere lågt (lav) luftflöde skall ventilationssystemet
hullerne) med hjälp av väggfästet (konsolen). inspekteras (etterses).
Använd (brug) vibrationssäkra fästelement som
passar underlaget. Fästbultarna skall vardera (hver Reservdelar
især) klara en drag(træk)kraft på minst 1700 N. Se sid. 6. Vid beställning anges (oppgi) alltid:
• Artikelnr. och kontrollnr. (se produktens
Justering av leder märkskylt (typeskilt)).
Se bild X1 sid. 5. Lederna är vid leverans grund- • Reservdelens detaljnr. och benämning (betegnelse)
inställda. Kontrollera och justera alltid lederna så • Antal erforderliga (ønskede) reservdelar.
att inställningen stämmer med aktuellt behov.
ENGLISH GB
Foreword
To gurantee a correct function and a minimal service,
it is important to read and understand the information WARNING!
in this instruction manual. Risk of personal injury!
The product is designed to meet the requirements The arm must not be used in environ-
of the relevant directives. To maintain this status all ments where static electricity could cause
installation, repair and maintenance work must be explosion.
carried out by qualified personnel using only original
spare parts. Contact the manufacturer or your
nearest authorised dealer for advice on technical Maintenance
service or if you require spare parts. (is recommended at least once a year)
• Check that the hose is intact. Clean the hose if
Mounting instruction it is dirty. If necessary change the hose.
See page 4 – 5. Ensure that the surface, on which • Adjust the links (see picture X1 page 5).
to mount the arm is level and use the wall bracket • Tighten all the arm profile fixing bolts.
to mark the holes. Use vibration secured fixing bolts • Check the mounting of the arm on wall.
and nuts suitable for the wall material. The bolts • Check the airflow. If it is too low, the ventilation
much each stand a torque force of minimum system must be inspected.
1700 N (380 lbs).
Spare parts
Adjusting the links See page 6. When ordering parts always state:
See picture X1 page 5. The links are factory set for • Part no. and control no. (type label of the product).
normal working position. Always check and adjust • Detail no. of the spare part and the name.
the links so they will suit the users preference. • Quantity of the parts required.
7
D DEUTSCH ORIGINAL
Vorwort
Um optimale Funktion und minimalen Service-
bedarf zu gewährleisten, ist es wichtig, daß Sie die WARNUNG!
Informationen in dieser Betriebsanleitung sorgfällig Verletzungsgefahr!
durchlesen. Der Arm darf nicht in einer Umgebung
Dieses Produkt wurde unter Berücksichtigung der eingesetzt werden, in der durch statische
in den Richtlinien festgelegten Anforderungen ent- Elektrizität eine Explosion verursacht
wickelt. Um diesen Qualitätsanforderungen zu ent- werden kann.
sprechen, dürfen Installationen, Reparatur- und
Wartungsarbeiten nur von Fachleuten unter Anwen- Wartung
dung von Original Ersatzteilen ausgeführt werden.
Wenden Sie sich bei technischen Fragen oder beim (wird mind. einmal jährlich empfohlen)
Bedarf von Ersatzteilen an den Hersteller oder den • Kontrollieren, ob der Schlauch intakt ist. Schmut-
nächst-gelegenen autorisierten Fachhändler. zigen Schlauch reinigen. Notfalls auswechseln.
• Gelenke justieren (siehe Abbildung X1 Seite 5).
Montageanleitung • Befestigungsschrauben der Armprofile anziehen.
Siehe Seite 4 – 5. Die Auflagefläche des Absaug- • Befestigung an Wand prüfen.
armes muß horizontal ausgerichtet sein. Bohrungs- • Luftstrom prüfen. Ist er zu schwach, muss die
löcher mit der Wandkonsole markieren. Benutzen Lüftungsanlage überprüft werden.
Sie vibrationsfeste Schrauben und Muttern, passend
zum Wandaufbau. Anzugsmoment der Verschrau- Ersatzteile
bung beachten 1700 N/Bolz. Siehe Seite 6. Bei der Bestellung immer angeben:
• Modell- und Kontroll-nummer (siehe Typenschild).
Gelenke einstellen • Ersatzteilnummer mit Beschreibung.
Siehe Abbildung X1 Seite 5. Die Gelenke wurden • Anzahl erforderlicher Ersatzteile.
werksseitig für eine normale Arbeitsposition
eingestellt, können jedoch bei Bedarf an den
Benutzer anpaßt werden.
FR FRANÇAIS
Avertissement
Pour assurer le bon fonctionnement du matériel et
réduire les entretiens, lire attentivement et respecter ATTENTION!
scrupuleusement les informations contenues dans Risque d’accident!
ce manuel. Le bras ne doit pas être utilisé dans un
Ce produit est conçu pour répondre aux normes environnement où l’électricité statique
des directives européennes. Pour maintenir celles- peut provoquer une explosion.
ci, l’installation, la réparation et la maintenance ne
doivent être effectuées que par un personnel qualifié
en n’utilisant que des pièces d’origine. Pour toute Entretien
assistance technique et la fourniture de pièces (rec. au moins une fois par an)
détachées, veuillez vous adresser au fabricant ou • Vérifier que le tuyau est intact et le nettoyer s'il est
à votre revendeur agrée le plus proche. encrassé. Le remplacer si nécessaire.
• Régler les articulations (voir figure X1, page 5).
Instructions de montage • Serrer tous les boulons de fixation de l'armature
Voir page 4 – 5. Vérifier que la surface sur laquelle du bras.
le bras est monté soit bien plane et utiliser les • Vérifier le montage du bras sur le mur.
fixations murales pour marquer les trous. Utiliser • Contrôler le débit d’air. S’il est trop faible, le système
des boulons et écrous antivibratoires convenant de ventilation doit être inspecté.
à la structure du mur. Les boulons devront tolérer
un couple de torsion de 1700 N. Pièces de rechange
Voir page 6. Lors de la commande toujours spécifier:
Réglage des articulations • Numéro modèle et de contrôle (sur la plaque
Voir figure X1, page 5. Les articulations sont réglées signalétique).
en usine pour une position de travail normale et • Numéro et désignation de la pièce détachée.
peuvent être adaptées aux besoins des utlisateurs. • Quantités des pièces requises.
8
ORIGINAL ESPAÑOL ES
Prólogo
Para garantizar un funcionamiento correcto y una
mínima necesidad de servicio, es importante leer ¡ATENCION!
este manual de instrucciones. ¡Riesgo de accidentes personales!
Este producto está diseñado y construido para El brazo no debe usarse en ambientes
satisfacer los requerimientos de las directivas de la donde la electricidad estática pudiera
Comunidad Europea que lo abarcan. Para mantener causar riesgo de explosión.
este estado, es necesario que la instalación, repara-
ción y mantenimiento sólo sean efectuados por per-
sonal cualificado y utilizando recambios originales. Mantenimiento
Para asesoría técnica o adquisición de recambios, (se recomienda una vez al año)
tengan la amabilidad de ponerse en contacto con el • Verifique que la manguera esté intacta. Límpiela
concesionario más cercano o el fabricante. si está sucia. Cámbiela si es necesario.
• Ajuste las rotulas (ver la figura X1, página 5).
Instrucciones de montaje • Apriete todos los tornillos de fijación del brazo.
Ver la página 4 – 5. Compruebe que la superficie • Chequear la sujeción del brazo en pared.
donde montará el brazo sea plana y utilice el soporte • Controlar el flujo de aire. Si es muy débil, se debe
de pared a modo de plantilla. Usar tornillos y tuercas inspeccionar el sistema de ventilación.
anti-vibración apropiados para el material de la pared
donde va fijado el brazo. Los tornillos deben soportar Piezas de repuesto
cada uno una fuerza de torsión de 1700 N como Ver la página 6. Cuando pida repuestos
mínimo. especifique siempre:
• N° del modelo/control fabricacion (placa de
Ajuste de las rotulas caracteristicas).
Ver la figura X1, página 5. Las rótulas vienen ya fija- • N° despiece del repuesto.
das de fábrica para una posición normal de trabajo • Cantidad de repuestos requeridos.
pero se pueden ajustar según lo prefi-era el usuario.
PORTUGÊS PT
Prefácio
Para garantir um funcionamento correcto e um
serviço de assistência mínimo, é importante ler e ADVERTÊNCIA!
compreender as informações constantes deste Risco de ferimentos pessoais!
manual de instruções. O braço não pode ser utilizado em
O produto foi concebido para satisfazer as exigên- ambientes onde a electricidade estática
cias das directivas relevantes. Para manter este possa causar explosão.
estado, é necessário que os trabalhos de instalação,
reparação e manutenção sejam realizados por pes- Manutenção
soal qualificado utilizando apenas peças sobresse-
(recomendase pelo menos uma vez por ano)
lentes originais. Para aconselhamento, assistência
ou aquisição de peças sobresselentes, por favor, • Verifique se a mangueira está intacta. Limpe a
contacte o seu fabricante ou o concessionário mangueira se estiver suja. Se necessário, substitua
autorizado mais próximo. a mangueira.
• Ajuste as rótulas (consulte a imagem X1, página 5)
Instruções de montagem • Aperte todos os parafusos de fixação do perfil
Consulte a página 4 – 5. Certifiquese de que a do braço.
superfície sobre a qual vai montar o braço está • Verifique a montagem do braço na parede.
nivelada e utilize o suporte de parede para marcar • Verifique o fluxo de ar. Se estiver demasiado baixo,
os orifícios. Utilize parafusos e porcas de fixação é necessário inspeccionar o sistema de ventilação.
antivibração adequados ao material da parede.
Os parafusos devem suportar cada um, no mínimo, Peças sobresselentes
uma força de torção de 1700 N. Consulte a página 6. Quando encomendar peças,
indique sempre:
Ajuste das rótulas • N.º da peça e n.º de controlo (etiqueta de tipo de
Consulte a imagem X1, página 5. As rótulas vêm já produto).
fixadas de fábrica para a posição normal de trabalho • Forneça pormenores acerca do n.º da peça
mas podem ser ajustadas de acordo com as suas sobresselente e nome.
necessidades. • Quantidade de peças pedidas.
9
IT ITALIANO ORIGINAL
Premessa
Per garantire il corretto funzionamento e ridurre
al minimo la manutenzione, è importante leggere ATTENZIONE!
attentamente e capire le informazioni contenute in Pericolo di lesioni personali!
questo manuale. Il braccio non deve essere utilizzato in ambienti
Questo prodotto è costruito in conformità ai requisiti in cui l’elettricità statica può causare rischi di
imposti dalle direttive rilevanti. Per conservare queste esplosione.
condizioni, l’installazione, le riparazioni e la manu-
tenzione devono essere eseguite da personale com- Manutenzione
petente utilizzando esclusivamente ricambi originali.
(da eseguire almeno una volta all’anno)
Contattare il rivenditore autorizzato più vicino oppure
il produttore per consulenze in caso di interventi • Controllare che il tubo sia intatto. Pulire il tubo nel
tecnici o di necessità di ricambi. caso in cui sia sporco. Sostituirlo se necessario.
• Regolare gli snodi (vedere figura X1 pagina 5).
Istruzioni di montaggio • Serrare tutti i bulloni di fissaggio del braccio
Vedere pagina 4 – 5. Il braccio estrattore deve • Controllare il montaggio del braccio sul muro.
essere montato a muro. Accertarsi che la superficie • Controllare il flusso d’aria. Se è troppo basso,
di montaggio sia piana e segnare i fori utilizzando la controllare il sistema di ventilazione.
staffa. Utilizzare bulloni di fissaggio antivibrazioni e Ricambi
dadi idonei al tipo di muro. I bulloni devono resistere
Vedere pagina 6. In sede di ordinazione dei
ad un momento torcente minimo di 1700 N.
ricambi, indicare sempre:
Regolazione degli snodi • Numero di particolare e controllo (targa matricola).
Vedere figura X1 pagina 5. Gli snodi sono preten- • Numero di riferimento e descrizione del ricambio
sionati in fabbrica per la normale posizione di lavoro, (vedere di seguito).
ma possono essere regolati all’occorrenza. • Quantità desiderata di ricambi.
EL ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ
Εισαγωγή
Για να εξασφαλίσετε τη σωστή λειτουργία και την
ελάχιστη συντήρηση, είναι σηµαντικ να διαβάσετε ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ!
και να κατανοήσετε τις πληροφορίες σε αυτ το Κίνδυνος τραυµατισµού του προσωπικού!
εγχειρίδιο οδηγιών. Ο βραχίονας δεν πρέπει να χρησιµοπο-
Το προϊν είναι σχεδιασµένο να συµµορφώνεται µε τις ιείται σε χώρο µε στατικ ηλεκτρισµ
απαιτήσεις των σχετικών οδηγιών. Για να διατηρήσετε µπορεί να προκληθεί έκρηξη.
την καλή κατάσταση λες οι εργασίες εγκατάστασης,
επισκευής και συντήρησης πρέπει να εκτελούνται απ Συντήρηση
εξουσιοδοτηµένο προσωπικ χρησιµοποιώντας µνο (συστήνεται τουλάχιστον µια φορά το χρνο)
αυθεντικά ανταλλακτικά. Επικοινωνήστε µε τον κατασ- - Βεβαιωθείτε τι ο ελαστικς σωλήνας είναι
κευαστή ή µε τον πλησιέστερο εξουσιοδοτηµένο αν- ανέπαφος. Καθαρίστε τον ελαστικς σωλήνα αν
τιπρσωπο για πληροφορίες σχετικά µε την τεχνική είναι βρώµικος. Εάν είναι απαραίτητο αλλάξτε τον
υποστήριξη ή αν χρειάζεστε ανταλλακτικά. ελαστικ σωλήνα.
Οδηγίες στερέωσης - Ρυθµίστε τις συνδέσεις (δείτε την εικνα X1, σελίδα 5)
∆είτε τη σελίδα 4 – 5. Βεβαιωθείτε τι η επιφάνεια, - Σφίξτε λα τα µπουλνια στερέωσης στο εξωτερικ
στην οποία πρκειται να στερεωθεί ο βραχίονας, είναι µέρος του βραχίονα
επίπεδη και χρησιµοποιήστε το βραχίονα τοίχου για να - Ελέγξτε τη στερέωση του βραχίονα στον τοίχο.
σηµαδέψετε τις τρύπες. Χρησιµοποιήστε µπουλνια - Ελέγξτε τη ροή αέρα. Εάν είναι πολύ χαµηλή, πρέπει
και παξιµάδια ασφαλής στερέωσης για δονήσεις κατά- να γίνει επιθεώρηση στο σύστηµα εξαερισµού.
λληλα για υλικά τοίχου. Το κάθε µπουλνι µπουλνια Ανταλλακτικά
πρέπει να αντέχει µια ελάχιστη δύναµη ροπής 1700 N. ∆είτε τη σελίδα 6. -ταν παραγγέλνετε ανταλλακτικά
Ρύθµιση συνδέσεων πάντα να αναφέρετε τα εξής:
∆είτε την εικνα X1, σελίδα 5. Οι συνδέσεις είναι - Αρ. ανταλλακτικού και κωδικς αρ. (ετικέτα τύπου
ρυθµισµένες απ το εργοστάσιο για την κανονική του προϊντος).
θέση λειτουργίας αλλά µπορούν να προσαρµοσθούν - Ειδικς κωδ. του ανταλλακτικού και το νοµα
ανάλογα µε τις προτιµήσεις των χρηστών. - Ποστητα των ανταλλακτικών που απαιτείται.
10
ORIGINAL NEDERLANDS NL
Voorwoord
Om een correcte werking en een minimum aan onder-
houd te garanderen, is het belangrijk dat u de informatie LET OP!
in deze handleiding leest en begrijpt. Risico op letsels!
Dit produkt is zo vervaardigd dat het voldoet aan de De arm dient niet te worden gebruikt
eisen in de EEG-richtlijnen. Om deze status te behouden in werkomgewingen waar statische
mag installatie, reparatie en onderhoud slechts worden elektriciteit explosies kan veroorzaken.
uitgevoerd door vakkundig personeel en met gebruik van
originele reserveonderdelen. Neem contact op met de Onderhoud
fabrikant of de dichtstbijzijnde geautoriseerde weder-
(aanbevolen minstens één keer per jaar)
verkoper voor adviezen bij technische service of voor
reserveonderdelen. • Controleer of de slang intact is. Maak de slang
schoon als ze vuil is. Vervang de slang zo nodig.
Montagehandleiding • Pas de scharnierpunten aan (zie afbeelding X1,
Zie pagina 4 – 5. Zorg ervoor dat het oppervlak pagina 5).
waarop u de arm monteert effen is en gebruik de • Draai alle bevestigingsbouten van de arm aan.
muurbeugel om de gaten te markeren. Maak gebruik • Controleer de montage van de arm op de muur.
van trillingsbestendige bevestigungsbouten en • Controleer de luchtstroom. Als deze te laag is, moet
moeren die zijn afgestemd op het wandmateriaal. het ventilatiesysteem worden geïnspecteerd.
De schroeven moeten elk een belasting van
1700 N aankunnen. Reserveonderdelen
Zie pagina 6. Geef bij het bestellen het volgende aan:
De scharnierpunten aanpassen • Het artikel- en het controlenummer (zie typeplaatje).
Zie afbeelding X1, pagina 5. De scharnierpunten • Het detailnummer en de benaming van het
zijn bij aflevering ingesteld op een normale werk- onderdeel.
positie. Pas, indien nodig, de instelling aan uw • Het aantal benodigde onderdelen.
wensen aan.
SUOMI FI
Alkusanat
Oikean toiminnan ja mahdollisimman vähäisen
huoltotarpeen varmistamiseksi on tärkeää perehtyä VAROITUS!
tässä ohjekäsikirjassa annettuihin tietoihin. Henkilövahinkojen vaara!
Tämä tuote on suunniteltu ja valmistettu täyttämään Kohdepoistoletkustoa ei saa käyttää
asianmukaiset EY-direktiivien vaatimukset. Tämän paikoissa, joissa staattisen sähkön takia
tason säilyttämiseksi on asennuksessa, korjauksessa on räjähdysvaara.
ja huol-lossa käytettävä asiantuntevaa henkilöstöä ja
alkuperäisiä varaosia. Ota yhteys lähimpään valtuu- Kunnossapito
tettuun jälleenmyyjääsi tai valmistajaan, jos tarvitset (vähintään kerran vuodessa)
teknistä huoltoa koskevia neuvoja tai varaosia. • Tarkista, että letku on ehjä. Puhdista letku, jos
Asennusohje se on likainen. Vaihda letku tarvittaessa.
Katso sivu 4 – 5. Imuvarsi on tarkoitettu asen- • Säädä nivelet (ks. kuva X1, sivu 5).
nettavaksi seinään. Varmista, että alusta on sileä • Kiristä tukivarren kiinnityspultit.
ja merkitse reiät seinäkiinnikkeen avulla. Käytä • Tarkista imuvarren kiinnitys seinään.
tärinänkestäviä, kiinnityspintaan sopivia kiinnitys- • Tarkista ilmavirta. Jos se on liian pieni,
pultteja. Kaikkien pulttien on kestettävä vähintään ilmanvaihtojärjestelmä on tarkistettava.
1700 N:n rasitus. Varaosat
Nivelien säätö Katso sivu 6. Varaosia tilattaessa ilmoita aina:
Ks. kuva X1, sivu 5. Nivelet on asetettu valmiiksi • Mallinumero ja tarkistusnumero (ks. tyyppikilpi).
normaaliin työasentoon. Säädä tarvittaessa muun • Varaosan osanumero ja nimike.
käyttötarpeen mukaan. • Tarvittavien varaosien lukumäärä.
11
PL POLSKI ORIGINAL
Wstęp
W celu zapewnienia poprawnego działania i ogra-
niczenia czynności serwisowych należy zapoznać OSTRZEŻENIE!
się z informacjami zawartymi w niniejszej instrukcji. Niebezpieczeństwo obrażeń ciała!
Produkt zaprojektowano zgodnie z wymaganiami Ramienia nie wolno używać w środowisku,
określonymi w odpowiednich dyrektywach. Aby w którym elektryczność statyczna może
utrzymać zgodność, wszelkie czynności instalacyjne, spowodować wybuch.
naprawcze i konserwacyjne powinny być wykony-
wane przez odpowiednio wykwalifikowany personel Konserwacja
wyłącznie przy użyciu oryginalnych części zamien- (zalecana co najmniej raz w roku)
nych, W celu uzyskania informacji na temat serwisu • Sprawdzić, czy waż nie jest uszkodzony. Oczyścić
technicznego lub części zamiennych należy skontak- zabrudzenia. W razie konieczności wymienić.
tować się z producentem lub najbliższym jego • Wyregulować połączenia (patrz rysunek X1,
autoryzowanym przedstawicielem. strona 5).
Instrukcja montażu • Dokręcić wszystkie śruby ustalające profilu ramienia.
• Sprawdzić zamocowanie ramienia do ściany.
Patrz strona 4 – 5. Powierzchnię montażową
• Sprawdzić przepływ powietrza. Jeśli jest zbyt niski,
wypoziomować, a do zaznaczenia otworów użyć
skontrolować system wentylacyjny.
wspornika przyściennego. Używać zabezpieczonych
przed drganiami śrub i nakrętek ustalających odpo- Części zamienne
wiednich do materiału, z którego wykonana jest Patrz strona 6. Przy zamawianiu części zamien
ściana. Śruby muszą wytrzymywać moment obro- nych należy podać następujące informacje:
towy co najmniej 1700 N. • Numer katalogowy i identyfikacyjny (tabliczka typu
Regulacja połączeń produktu).
Patrz rysunek X1, strona 5. Połączenia zostały • Numer szczegółowy części zamiennej i jej nazwę
fabrycznie ustawione do normalnego położenia • Ilość zamawianych części.
roboczego, możliwa jest jednak ich dowolna
regulacja zależnie od wymagań.
v v
CS CESTINA
Slovo úvodem
K zajištění správné funkce a minimální údržby je
nutné pozorně pročíst a pochopit informace uvedené VAROVÁNÍ
v návodu k obsluze. Riziko zranění osob!
Výrobek je navržen tak, aby vyhovoval požadavkům Rameno nesmí být používáno v prost-
příslušných předpisů. Aby byl tento stav zachován, ředí, kde by statická elektřina mohla
veškeré instalace, opravy a údržbu musí provádět způsobit explozi.
kvalifikovaný personál za použití pouze originálních
náhradních dílů. Kontaktujte výrobce nebo vašeho Údržba
nejbližšího autorizovaného prodejce, pokud potře- (doporučena nejméně jednou ročně)
bujete radu související s technickým servisem nebo • Zkontrolujte stav trubice. Vyčistěte trubici, pokud
náhradními díly. je to nezbytné. V případě potřeby ji vyměňte.
Pokyny k montáži • Přizpůsobte klouby. (viz obrázek X1, strana 5)
Viz strana 4 – 5. Rameno extraktoru musí být • Dotáhněte šrouby jistící profil ramene.
upevněno na stěně. Ujistěte se, že povrch, na který • Zkontrolujte upevnění ramene na stěně
rameno upevňujete, je rovný. K označení otvorů • Zkontrolujte proud vzduchu. Je-li příliš slabý,
použijte nástěnnou konzoli. Použijte upevňovací je zapotřebí prověřit systém ventilátoru.
šrouby a matice odolávající vibracím, které jsou Náhradní díly
vhodné pro materiál stěny. Každý ze šroubů musí Viz strana 6. Při objednávání dílů vždy uvádějte:
snést kroutící moment minimálně 1 700 N. • Číslo dílu a kontrolní číslo (typový štítek výrobku).
Přizpůsobení kloubů • Podrobné číslo náhradního dílu a název
Prohlédněte si obrázek X1 na straně 5. Klouby jsou • Počet požadovaných dílů.
továrně nastaveny do normální pracovní pozice,
mohou ale být přizpůsobeny podle potřeb uživatele.
12
ORIGINAL MAGYAR HU
Előszó
A helyes működés és a minimális meghibásodás
érdekében fontos, hogy elolvassa és megértse ezen FIGYELEM!
Kezelési kézikönyv információit. Személyi sérülés veszélye!
A terméket úgy tervezték, hogy megfeleljen a A kar nem használható olyan környezetben,
vonatkozó előírások követelményeinek. Ezen állapot ahol a statikus elektromosság robbanást
fenntartásához az összes telepítési, javítási és kar- okozhat.
bantartási munkákat képesített szakembereknek kell
elvégezniük, kizárólag eredeti pótalkatrészek felhasz- Karbantartás
nálásával. Technikai tanácsadásért, vagy ha pótal- (legalább évente egyszer ajánlott)
katrészekre van szüksége, forduljon a gyártóhoz • Ellenőrizze a tömlő épségét. Tisztítsa meg a
vagy a legközelebbi hivatalos viszonteladóhoz. tömlőt, ha elszennyeződött. Ha szükséges, cserélje
ki a tömlőt.
Felszerelési utasítás • Állítsa utána a csatlakozásokat (lásd a ábrát
Lásd a 4 – 5. oldalon. Az elszívókart falra kell X1 a 5. oldalon).
szerelni. A falfelület legyen sima, a furatok kijelölé- • Szorítsa meg a karváz rögzítőanyáit
séhez használja a szerelőkeretet. Használjon a fal • Ellenőrizze a kar fali rögzítését.
anyagának megfelelő, rezgés ellen biztosított csa- • Ellenőrizze a légáramlást. Ha túl alacsony,
varokat és anyákat. Az anyáknak 1700 N nyoma- a vizsgálja meg a szellőztetőrendszert.
tékterhelést kell elviselniük.
Pótalkatrészek
A csatlakozások beállítása Lásd a 6. oldalon. Alkatrészek rendelésekor mindig
Lásd a képet X1 a 5. oldalon. A csatlakozások tüntesse fel a következőket:
gyárilag a normál működési helyzethez vannak • Cikkszám és ellezőrzőszám (a termék típuscímkéje).
beállítva, de a felhasználói igényekhez igazíthatók. • A pótalkatrész részletszáma és neve.
• Az igényelt alkatrészek mennyisége.
LATVIESU VALODA LV
Priekšvārds
Lai garantētu pareizu funkcionēšanu un minimālu
apkopi, svarīgi izlasīt un saprast šajā instrukciju BRĪDINĀJUMS!
rokasgrāmatā sniegto informāciju. Savainojumu risks!
Izstrādājums ir izstrādāts, izpildot attiecīgo direktīvu Ekstraktoru nedrīkst izmantot vidēs, kur
prasības. Lai uzturētu šo statusu, visi uzstādīšanas, statiskā elektrība var izraisīt eksploziju.
remonta un apkopes darbi jāveic kvalificētam per-
sonālam, izmantojot tikai oriģinālas rezerves daļas. Apkope
Sazinieties ar ražotāju vai jums tuvāko pilnvaroto
(ieteicams veikt vismaz vienu reizi gadā)
izplatītāju, lai konsultētos par tehniskās apkopes
• Pārbaudiet vai šļūtene ir kārtībā. Iztīriet šļūteni, ja
jautājumiem, vai ja nepieciešams iegādāties
tā ir netīra. Ja nepieciešams, nomainiet šļūteni.
rezerves daļas.
• Noregulējiet šarnīrus (skat. 5. lpp., attēlu X1).
Montāžas instrukcijas • Pievelciet visas sviras profilu fiksējošās skrūves
Skatīt 4 – 5. lpp. Nodrošiniet, lai virsma, pie kuras • Pārbaudiet šarnīra stiprinājumu pie sienas.
tiek piemontēta svira, ir līdzena un izmantojiet sienas • Pārbaudiet gaisa plūsmu. Ja tā ir pārāk vāja,
kronšteinu, lai atzīmētu atveres. Nostiprināšanai jāpārbauda ventilācijas sistēma.
izmantojiet sienai piemērotas pret vibrāciju nodro- Rezerves daļas
šinātas skrūves un uzgriežņus. Statņu skrūves
Skat. 6. Pasūtot daļas, vienmēr norādiet:
irjāpievelk ar minimums 1700 N lielu griezes spēku.
• Daļas numuru un kontroles numuru. (tipa etiķete
Šarnīru regulēšana uz produkta).
Skat. 5. lappusē zīmējumu X1. Šarnīri rūpnīcā tiek • Rezerves daļas numuru un nosaukumu
iestatīti normālā darba stāvoklī, taču tos var regulēt • Nepieciešami detaļu skaitu.
atbilstoši lietotāja vajadzībām.
13
LT LIETUVIUK ORIGINAL
´
Įvadas
Jei norite, kad gaminys veiktų teisingai ir kad jį
prižiūrėti reiktų kiek įmanoma mažiau, būtinai a- DĖMESIO!
tidžiai perskaitykite ir perpraskite šioje naudojimo Sužeidimo pavojus!
instrukcijoje pateiktą informaciją. Žarnos negalima naudoti ten, kur dėl
Gaminys suprojektuotas laikantis atitinkamų elektrostatinio krūvio galėtų kilti sprogimo
direktyvų reikalavimų. Siekiant išlaikyti tokią jo būklę pavojus.
visus montavimo, remonto ir priežiūros darbus turi
atlikti kvalifikuoti darbuotojai, naudodami tik origina- Priežiūra
lias atsargines dalis. Prireikus techninės konsultacijos (rekomenduojama atlikti bent kartą per metus)
arba atsarginių dalių kreipkitės į gamintoją arba • Patikrinkite, ar nepažeista žarna. Jei žarna
artimiausią jo įgaliotą atstovą. užsiteršusi - išvalykite ją. Jei reikia - pakeiskite žarną.
Montavimo instrukcija • Sureguliuokite lankstus (žiūrėkite X1 paveikslėlį
Žr. 4 – 5 puslapį. Įsitikinkite, kad paviršius, ant kurio 5-ame puslapyje).
rengiamasi tvirtinti ištraukiamąją žarną, yra lygus. • Priveržkite visus žarnos profilio tvirtinimo varžtus
Naudodami sieninę tvirtinimo dalį pažymėkite skyles. • Patikrinkite, kaip žarna pritvirtinta ant sienos.
Naudokite apsaugotus nuo vibracijos tvirtinimo • Patikrinkite oro srautą. Jei jis per mažas, reikia
varžtus ir veržles, tinkančius sienos medžiagai. patikrinti vėdinimo sistemą.
Kiekvienas varžtas turi atlaikyti mažiausiai 1700 N Atsarginės dalys
sukamąją jėgą. Žiūrėkite 6-ame puslapyje. Užsakydami dalis
Lankstų reguliavimas visuomet nurodykite:
Žr. paveikslėlį X1, 5-ame puslapyje. Lankstai buvo • Dalies ir kontrolinį numerius (pateikti gaminio
pritaikyti normaliai darbinei padėčiai gamykloje, tipo lentelėje).
tačiau juos galima sureguliuoti taip, kad jie atitiktų • Atsarginės dalies detalės numerį ir pavadinimą
naudotojo poreikius. • Reikiamą dalių kiekį.
ET EESTI
Eessõna
Et tagada korralikku tööd ja minimaalset hooldamist,
on väga tähtis lugeda läbi käesolev kasutusjuhend ETTEVAATUST!
nii, et selles on kõigest aru saadud. Oht vigastuste tekkeks!
Toode on välja töötatud vastavalt asjasse puutu- Väljatõmbeõlga ei tohi paigaldada selli-
vate direktiivide nõuetele. Et mitte sattuda vastuollu sesse ruumi, kus elektrilaengud võivad
kehtestatud nõuetega, tuleb lasta kõiki paigaldamis-, põhjustada plahvatust.
hooldamis- ja remonditöid teha ainult vastava välja-
õppe saanud töötajail ja kasutada ainult originaalosi. Hooldamine
Kui te vajate varuosi või tahate tehnilist nõustamist,
(Soovitav teha vähemalt üks kord aastas)
pöörduge tootja või oma lähima edasimüüja poole.
• Kontrollige, et voolik oleks terve. Kui see on
Paigaldamine must, puhastage. Kui vaja, vahetage voolik.
Vaadake juhiseid leheküljelt 4 – 5. Kontrollige, kas • Seadistage ühendused (vaadake joonist X1
sein, mille külge õlg kinnitatakse, on loodis ja sile leheküljel 4)
ning kasutage aukude märkimiseks seinaklambreid. • Pingutage üle kõik väljatõmbeõla poldid
Kinnitamiseks kasutage vibratsioonikindlaid kinnitus- • Kontrollige väljatõmbeõla seinakinnitust.
polte ja mutreid ning võtke arvesse nende valikul • Kontrollige õhuvoolu. Kui vool on nõrk, tuleb
seina materjali. Poldid peavad kõik vastu pidama ventilatsioonisüsteemi kontrollida.
vähemalt 1700 N suurusele väändejõule. Varuosad
Ühenduste seadistamine Vaadake leheküljel 6. Varuosade tellimisel teatage
Vaadake joonist X1 leheküljel 5. Ühendused on järgmised andmed
tootja poolt tehases seadistatud tavalise tööasendi • osa number ja kontrollnumber (toote tüübisilt).
järgi, kuid neid võib seadistada ka vastavalt tellija • varuosa nimetus ja number varuosade
soovidele. nimekirja järgi
• tellitavate osade arv.
14
v v
ORIGINAL SLOVENSCINA SL
Predgovor
Pomembno je, da preberete in razumete informa-
cije v teh navodilih ter s tem zagotovite pravilno OPOZORILO!
delovanje naprave in zmanjšate količino potrebnih Nevarnost telesnih poškodb!
popravil. Roke ne uporabljajte v okoljih, kjer bi lahko
Izdelek je narejen v skladu s pripadajočimi ured- statična elektrika povzročila eksplozijo.
bami. Da bi izdelek ostal v skladu s pripadajočimi
uredbami mora montažo, popravila in vzdrževanje
opraviti kvalificirano osebje z originalnimi rezervnimi Vzdrževanje
deli. Za tehnične nasvete ali rezervne dele kontakti- (priporočljivo je vsaj enkrat letno)
rajte proizvajalca ali najbližjega pooblaščenega • Prepričajte se, da je cev nepoškodovana. Če je
prodajalca. umazana jo očistite. Po potrebi jo zamenjajte.
• Prilagodite povezave (glej sliko X1, slika 5)
Navodila za montažo • Zavijte vijake na roki.
Glej stran 4 – 5. Za označevanje lukenj uporabite • Preverite zidno montažo roke.
zidne nosilce. Uporabite protivibracijske vijake in • Preverite pretok zraka. Če je prenizek, preglejte
matice, ki so primerne za zidni material. Posamezna prezračevalni sistem.
matica mora zdržati navorno silo najmanj 1700 N.
Rezervni deli
Prilagajanje povezav Glej stran 6. Pri naročanju delov imejte pripravljeno:
Glej sliko X1, stran 5. Povezave so tovarniško • Številko dela in kontrolno številko (nalepka izdelka).
nastavljene na normalen delovni položaj, ampak • Št. posamezne sestavine rezervnega dela in
jih lahko prilagodite glede na vaše zahteve. njeno ime.
• Količino želenih delov.
SLOVENSKY SK
Úvod
Na zaistenie správnej funkcie a minimálnej údržby
je dôležité prečítať si informácie uvedené v návode VAROVANIE
na používanie a porozumieť im. Hrozí riziko zranenia!
Výrobok je navrhnutý tak, aby vyhovoval požia- Rameno sa nesmie používať v prostredí,
davkám príslušných predpisov. Na zachovanie kde by mohla statická elektrina
tohto stavu je nutné, aby všetky inštalácie, opravy spôsobiť explóziu.
a údržbu vykonával kvalifikovaný personál s použi-
tím iba originálnych náhradných dielov. Pomoc Údržba
ohľadom technickej služby alebo náhradných dielov
(odporúča sa najmenej jedenkrát za rok)
vám poskytne výrobca alebo najbližší autorizovaný
• Skontrolujte, či je hadica neporušená. Ak je hadica
predajca.
znečistená, vyčistite ju. V prípade potreby ju
Pokyny k montáži vymeňte.
Pozri stranu 4 – 5. Skontrolujte, či je povrch, na • Nastavte kĺbové spoje (pozri obrázok X1, strana 5).
ktorý sa rameno upevňuje, rovný. Na označenie • Utiahnite všetky skrutky zaisťujúce profil ramena.
otvorov použite nástennú konzolu. Použite upev- • Skontrolujte upevnenie ramena na stene.
ňovacie skrutky a matice odolávajúce vibráciám, • Skontrolujte prúd vzduchu. Ak je príliš slabý,
ktoré sú vhodné na materiál steny. Každá skrutka preverte ventilačný systém.
musí zniesť krútiaci moment minimálne 1700 N. Náhradné diely
Prispôsobenie kĺbových spojov Pozri strana 4. Pri objednávaní náhradných dielov
Pozrite si obrázok X1 na strane 5. Kĺbové spoje sú z je nutné uviesť:
výroby nastavené na normálnu pracovnú pozíciu, ale • číslo dielu a kontrolné číslo (typový štítok produktu),
možno ich prispôsobiť podľa potrieb používateľa. • podrobné číslo náhradného dielu a názov.
• počet požadovaných náhradných dielov.
15
ORIGINAL
Rights reserved for modification of design and measurements.

The majority of the products are manufactured within ISO
9001 and ISO 14001-certified Quality- and Environmental
system. For more detailed information please contact the
manufacturer.
Nederman Original
An all-round arm for medium applications
The Nederman Original extraction arm is equipped

with a hood in a design (patent pending) that ensu-
res optimal capturing capacity and manoeuvrability
for easy positioning. The arm can be mounted on a
ceiling, wall or bench or on an extension bracket.
A wide range of accessories gives unlimited pos-
sibilities to match the needs at any workspace. This
makes Nederman Original to a universal solution
wherever dust and fumes must be eliminated in
an easy way. The hood in durable material with
integrated start/stop switch for fan and lamp.
• Robust swivel - allows 360° rotation

• The arm is flexible in all directions and simple to position
• Can be mounted on brackets, extention arms, exhaust rails or
on fixed or mobile filter equipment
• Can be connected directly to a single fan or to a ducted system
• Equipped with a damper in the hood - saves energy
when not in operation
Arm lengths: 2, 3, 4V, 4H, 5m*

Ducting diameter: Ø160 mm
Recommended airflow: 700 - 1000 m3/h
Max temp of extracted air: +70°C
The hood in durable
Art. No:
material has integrated
2 m: 10554235 4 m H: 10554535
lamp and start/stop
3 m: 10554335 5 m: 10554935
switch for fan.
4 m V: 10554435
4V: 4m Vertical: Long reach for work when the need for extraction at both high and low levels.
4H: 4m Horizontal: Long reach and fits under low ceilings.
* 5m: For car body work.
Dimensions Original Extraction Arm Pressure drop Original Extraction Arm
Static pressure Pa
5m
4mH
4mV
3m
2m
3
Airflow m /h

Appendix
VALVE SPECIFICATIONS
Appendix
DESCRIPTION OF
CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
(V-1929-0070B-0015)
10030-á062
ÐESCRIPTION OF CONTROL PHILOSOPHY

Client: PT Agincourt Resources
t:.i-j3T cRÍ.!*. :4.? (.i

t !* í
-¡;ra,¡
L-r: | +-
í1
r.j
Document Rev; G
Document No: v-1929-00708-0015
Ðescription of Gcods Wet Gas Scrubber - Eguipment

VDDR ltem No: 4.08
Refe¡ehcÞ: 5.û9 Piping and lnstru
The Wet Scrubbíng Systenn shail

carbon regeneration kilns, rnercury smelting furnaces - thirteen (13) e
points in totai.
The off gas emanates from a convenl L cir ofe. It is

noted that the ore also contains traces xtotis
impurities.
2 Accepted to Proceed except as noted. Revise & Resubmit
The Wet Scrubbíng System is broken ion and

fume adsorption.
of this document has been completed to determine ¡f the intent
Contract Documents has generally been complied with Such
Particulate Colleclion shall be soJuble
species shall aiso be collected ìn The S¡gnature
- Date
Eleven (11) veniilation poinis including Ihe Electrowínning Cells 102-60-HD-001:006). Furnaces alf
fitted with Fume Hoods. Eluaie Cells and Mercur¡ Retod are joined in a single duct run leadíng into
the dedicated Wet Sc¡'ubber Fan {02-60-FA-O16)
The staiic pressure is balanced between the.vent¡lation points by means of an in-duct slide gate
valye. The duct velocity is high enough such that any fine pat+.icuiale is motivated rninimising the
risk of setiïing out- The 1//et Scrubber Fan {fi2-6Ð-FA-016) fitted with a VSÐ used to control the
drafr fiom both the plant room as well as providing enough prÊssure to overcome the resistance cl
the Variable Venturi Throat-
The Fan VSÐ contro! îs referenced back to the statrc pressure rneasured at {PlT-66t2) This
pressure shoukj be maina.ained v¡ithin a band {operationai sei point +l- t.2 kPa). The shaft rotation
sensor {SAL-66Û3} shall indicate failure al eilher ihe shafl ar coupling,
i lncomíng gases are directed ta the flooded venturi by an lniet thímble. The inlei thir*þle directs gas
; lntc the fully'øetted cone and throat area. tr'ne large voiume of recyded vtaier eliminates therrnai
i shock and mininrises abrasíon in the venturi throat. thetJenturi Scrubber {û2-6O-SB-C01) is sized
?age 1 al 3
}tjfiar-11
FOWLEREX
10030-1062
so that the gas/water mixture reaches velocities between 60 to 150 meters per second creating a
fine, dense turbulent mist. The differential pressure across the venturi throat is related to the throat
velocity. Pressure couplings are located on the venturi thimble (PlT-6604) and venturi elbow (PlT-
6605). The adjustable venturi blade (DPV-6606) is pneumatically controlled by (DPIC-6606) and is
to be adjusted until the differential pressure across the throat reaches 3.5 kPa-g. A compressed air
reservoir is to be fitted to the pneumatic operator which will fail open in an emergency condition.
The recirculated water is collected in the Venturi Solids Settling Tank (02-60-TK-109), controlled by
the Venturi Recycle Pump 1 (02-60-PU-342), Flow lndicator (Fl-6607) and in-line valves. A purge
shall be established within the Venturi Solids Settling Tank controlled by (TlC 6609).
The temperature of the Venturi Solids Settling Tank is controlled by TIC-6609 initiating the
operation (XV-6609). XV-6609 is opened and closed in line with the temperature of the recirculation
liquid.
The magnetic level switch (LS-6608) shall maintain the fluid level within the tank controlling the
intake of fresh make-up water to the system. The operation of the venturi scrubber is dependent
upon reaching adiabatic saturation of the incoming gas. lt is therefore important that the
temperature. Heavy particulate accumulating in the base of the tank shall be manually drained
periodically.
Sub-micron particles are entrapped in the gas/mist stream and ducted through to the Venturi
Separator chamber (02-60-58-003). ln the separator chamber, the droplets with their dusUfume
loads are centrifugally collected against the sides of the chamber and drained to the sump. To
prevent mist carry over, a high efficiency mist eliminator shall be installed in the venturi separator.
The wire mesh mist eliminator utilises inertia to separate the liquid droplets from the gas flow.
The woven fibre mist eliminator acts as a barrier to the incoming gas. Although the gas is able to
bend around the fibres, the heavier liquid particles are not as agile and collide with the mist pad.
This process continues over the course of a few seconds until enough liquid has accumulated to
form a water droplet. A continuous supply of clean water (controlled by both Venturi Recycle Pump
2 (02-60-PU-390) and in-line valves) spray over the top of the pad to assist in dislodging the water
droplet from the screen to the separator chamber below.
The purge stream from the venturi separator will be sent to the Scrubber Area Sump Pump (02-60-
PU-341) which is subsequently pumped to the Detox Circuit.
A sulphur impregnated Granulated Activated Carbon Tower (02-60-TW-001) follows the separator
chamber. The GAC Tower is designed to adsorb the elemental mercury collected from both the
plant room and carbon regeneration kilns. The process of mercury adsorption is known as
chemisorption where the sulphur species present on the carbon surface react to form a benign
compound - mercury (ll) sulphide.
Page 2 of 3
30-Mar-'l'l
FOWLEREX
1 0030-1 062
The off gas (steam) from the Carbon Regeneration Kilns is expected to be superheated. ln order to
reduce the temperature, spray nozzles shall be installed in the duct. The GAC Tower is sensitive to
over-temperature. ldeal inlet temperature to the tower is 65"C. Therefore the temperature from the
Carbon Regen. Duct shall be controlled at the source by means of evaporative cooling in
conjunction with control valves (TV-6600A/B) and in-duct thermocouple (TlT-6600). ln operation,
the flow to the spray nozzles within the Carbon Regen. Duct shall be controlled by (TlC-6600)
feeding back to (TV-66004/B).
lf the inlet temperature (TlT-6611) to the GAC tower rises above 65oC, the VSD output of Venturi
Recycle Pump 1 (02-60-PU-342) will increase to counter the surge. lf in-duct thermocouple (TlC-
6600) measures above 250oC, the emergency by-pass valve (XV-6610) opens and the kiln gases
vent straight through the Mercury Scrubber Exhaust Stack (02-60-SK-005). The emergency by-
pass valve (XV-6610) is also interlocked to the Wet Scrubber Extraction Fan (02-6-FA-016) such
that the valve will open if the fan stops.
Cleaned gases then circle up through the GAC Tower via the Activated Carbon Tower Fan (02-60-
Fa-002) to the Mercury Scrubber Exhaust Stack (02-60-5K-005) and to atmosphere.
Page 3 of 3
30-Mar-l I
Appendix
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL

DESCRIPTION / SPECIFICATIONS
(V-1929-0070B-0044)
10030-1043
1.0 Introduction
The purpose of the Wet Gas Scrubber is to treat the gas emanating from a conventional CIL circuit
treating both gold and silver bearing ore. This ore also contains traces of arsenic, mercury, precious
metals and other noxious impurities.
2.0 Safety
2.1 Emergency Stops
There are no hard wired emergency stop facilities within the area. There is however an
emergency stop button on a Local Control Station (LCS) in the vicinity of the motor.
2.2 Emergency Power
An “Un-interruptible Power Supply “ is not required.
2.3 Environmental Monitoring
A Portable Mercury Analyser shall be situated in the gold room to alarm personnel in the
event of any gaseous mercury contamination. Stack Sampling Nozzles have been locally
specifically in accordance with AS 4323.1-1195 “Stationary Source Emissions”.
3.0 General
3.1 Glossary
AC: Alternating Current

DC: Direct Current
DCS: Distributed Control System
DN: Diameter Nominal
HMI: Human Machine Interface
P&ID: Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
PCS: Process Control System
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
RTD: Resistance Temperature Device
TRIP: Response of Motor Protection Relay (Thermistor)
VSD: Variable Speed Drive
Page 2 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev D
10030-1043
3.0 General
3.2 Units of Measure
Area : Square Metre m2
Electric Current : Amperes A
Level : Percent %
Mass Density : Kilogram per Cubic Metre kg/m3
Particulate Emission : Milligrams per Cubic Metre mg/Nm3 (wet)
Pressure : Kilopascals kPa

o
Temperature : Degrees Celsius C
Time : Seconds s
Volumetric Air Flow : (Actual) Cubic Meters per hour Am3/hr
Volumetric Air Flow : (Normal) Cubic Meters per hour Nm3/hr
Volumetric Air Flow : (Normal) Cubic Meters per hour – dry Nm3/hr-dry
Volume : Cubic Metre m3
3.3 Valve Operation Definitions
Actuated Valve : Has an actuator fitted for remote control.
Hand Valve : Does not have an actuator fitted for remote control – only local,
manual operation.
Automatic Operation : Valve is controlled by the PCS according to the requirement of

either a sequence or other group control logic.
Manual Operation : Valve is controlled by an operator. This may be from a control

room for an actuated valve or locally for a hand valve.
Page 3 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev D
10030-1043
4.0 Process Overview
4.1 Process Description
The Wet Scrubbing System shall collect off-gas from electrowinning cells, eluate return
hoppers, carbon regeneration kilns, mercury retort and gold smelting furnaces – thirteen (13)
extraction points in total.
Eleven (11) ventilation points including the Electrowinning Cells (02-60-HD-001:006),

Furnaces all fitted with Fume Hoods, Eluate Cells and Mercury Retort are joined in a single
duct run leading into the dedicated Wet Scrubber Fan (02-60-FA-016).
The static pressure is balanced between the ventilation points by means of an in-duct slide
gate valve. The duct velocity is high enough such that any fine particulate is suspended in
the airflow minimising the chance of settling out.
The Venturi Scrubber (02-60-SB-001) is sized so that the gas/water mixture reaches
velocities between 60 to 150 meters per second creating a fine, dense turbulent mist. The
differential pressure across the venturi throat is related to the throat velocity. Pressure
gauges are located on the venturi thimble and venturi elbow. The adjustable venturi blade is
pneumatically controlled and is to be adjusted until the differential pressure across the throat
reaches 3.5 kPa-g. A compressed air reservoir is to be fitted to the pneumatic operator which
will fail open in an emergency condition.
The recirculated water is collected in the Venturi Solids Settling Tank (02-60-TK-109),
controlled by the Venturi Recycle Pump 1 (02-60-PU-342), Flow Indicator (FI 6607) and in-
line valves. A purge shall be established within the Venturi Solids Settling Tank ensuring that
the levels of particulate do not accumulate and exceed 10% w/w in solution. A magnetic level
switch (LS6608) shall maintain the fluid level within the tank controlling the intake of fresh
make-up water to the system. The operation of the venturi scrubber is dependent upon
reaching adiabatic saturation of the incoming gas. It is therefore important that the
temperature. Heavy particulate accumulating in the base of the tank shall be manually
drained.
Page 4 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev D
10030-1043
4.1 Process Description (cont.)
A continuous supply of clean water (controlled by both Venturi Recycle Pump 2 (02-60-PU-
390) and in-line valves) spray over the top of the pad to assist in dislodging the water droplet
from the screen to the separator chamber below.

The off gas (steam) from the Carbon Regeneration Kilns (02-50-KN-001/002) is expected to
be superheated. In order to reduce the temperature, spray nozzles shall be installed in the
duct. The GAC Tower is sensitive to over-temperature. Ideal inlet temperature to the tower is
65oC. Therefore the temperature from the Carbon Regen. Duct shall be controlled at the
source by means of evaporative cooling in conjunction with dedicated control valves and an
in-duct thermocouple. If the inlet temperature to the GAC tower rises above 65oC, the output
of Venturi Recycle Pump 1 (02-60-PU-342) will increase to counter the surge.
Cleaned gases then circle up through the GAC Tower via the Activated Carbon Tower Fan
(02-60-FA-002) to the Mercury Scrubber Exhaust Stack (02-60-SK-005) and to atmosphere.
4.2 Process Objectives
The off gas emanates from a conventional CIL circuit treating both gold and silver bearing
ore. It is noted that the ore also contains traces of arsenic, mercury, precious metals and
other noxious impurities.
The Wet Scrubbing System is broken down into two main processes: particulate collection
and fume adsorption.
Particulate Collection shall be achieved by means of a variable venturi throat. Any water
soluble species shall also be collected in the venturi section.
Page 5 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev D
10030-1043
4.2 Process Objectives (cont.)

4.3 Process Operating Strategy
The Wet Scrubbing System is designed to operate in one mode only.
The system is fully automatic and continuous,.
4.4 Process Operating Locations
The Wet Scrubbing System has been designed to operate from the Area Control Room.
There are a number of additional locations in which maintenance and performance checks
are executed.
1. 02-60-SK-005: Stack - Sampling Points

2. 02-60-TW-001: GAC Tower - Carbon View Port
3. 02-60-SB-003: Venturi Separator - Mist Eliminator/Spray Nozzle Inspection Hatch
4. 02-60-TK-109: Trade Waste Solids Removal
5. 02-60-PU-342: Venturi Scrubber Pump 1 - Manual Pump Drainage
6. 02-60-SB-001: Venturi Elbow - Inspection
7. 02-60-SB-001: Venturi Damper Actuator
8. 02-60-FA-016: Venturi Extraction Fan – Manual Liquid Drainage
9. 02-06-FA-002: GAC Tower Extraction Fan – Manual Liquid Drainage
10. 02-60-PU-390: Venturi Scrubber Pump 2 - Manual Pump Drainage
11. 02-60-HD-001-006: EW Cells 1:6 In-Duct Slide Damper
12. Carbon Regeneration Kiln 1 & 2: Condenser Box Spray Nozzle
Page 6 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev D
10030-1043
4.5 Process Operator Functions
When starting the equipment for the first time, the fans should be checked for correction
direction of rotation and speed. The ducting, liquid lines, scrubber and tower should be
checked for leakage.
Gas Flows and pressures should be checked against the design specifications. Instruments
should be checked for correct reading and calibration adjustments made as necessary.
Control mechanisms and especially fail safe devices should be checked for operability.
HMI Requirements
The HMI should be produced in conjunction with the Piping and Instrumentation Diagram. It
is assumed that the open/closed/fault status of control valves and proximity switches shall be
illustrated on the HMI screen. It is also assumed that all instruments reaching their warning
or alarm point will initiate an audible alarm or visual caution to the process operator.
4.6 Process Performance Management
The system has been specifically designed to a given set of process parameters. Normal operation
should require few adjustments. However, after initial start up some adjustment may be required.
Page 7 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev D
10030-1043
5.1 Plant Control System
Main Plant Control System DCS shall be supplied by PT Agincourt Resources.
Each device will have both standard interlocks according to its type, which are not described in this
document, and device specific interlocks. There are three types of specific interlocks.
- Safety Interlocks : These interlocks both prevent any operation from commencing and
also terminate the active operation of a device. Safety interlocks can
never be overridden.
- Process Interlocks: These interlocks both prevent any operation from commencing and
also terminate the active operation of a device. Process interlocks will
be automatically overridden in test mode and may be overridden via
the HMI by an operator having sufficient privilege in local, central and
sequence modes.
- Start Permissives: These interlocks prevent any operation from commencing but have no
effect on the active operation of a device. Start permissives will be
automatically overridden in test mode and may be overridden via the
HMI by an operator having sufficient privilege in local, central and
sequence modes.

o Condition 1: NONE

o Condition 1: If low level switch (LS-6608) signals a low water level in the
Recirculation Tank (02-60 TK-109).

o Condition 1: If low level switch (LS-6608) signals a low water level in the
Recirculation Tank (02-60 TK-109) send alarm to operator.
Page 8 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev D
10030-1043

o Condition 1: NONE


5.2.3 Venturi Scrubber Extraction Fan (02-60-FA-016)

Stop Venturi Scrubber Extraction Fan (02-60-FA-016) when any of the following
occur:
o Condition 1: NONE

Stop Venturi Scrubber Extraction Fan (02-60-FA-016) when any of the following
occur:
o Condition 1: Relay Response (Motor Temperature Thermistor Alarm)

Prevent Venturi Scrubber Extraction Fan (02-60-FA-016) when any of the following
occur:
o Condition 1: NONE
Page 9 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev D
10030-1043
5.2.4 GAC Tower Extraction Fan (02-60-FA-002)

o Condition 1: NONE

Condition 1: Relay Response (Motor Temperature Thermistor Alarm)

Prevent GAC Tower Extraction Fan (02-60-FA-002) when any of the following occur:
o Condition 1: NONE
5.2.5 XV6610 Bypass Valve

o Condition 1: NONE

o Condition 1: When TIT-6600 reads greater than 300 oC.
o Condition 2: 02-60-FA-016 Relay Response (Motor Temperature Thermistor Alarm)
o Condition 3: 02-60-FA-016 Relay Response (SSL-6603)
o Condition 4: 02-60-FA-016 No VSD Output

o Condition 1: NONE
Page 10 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev D
10030-1043
5.3 Alarms
Alarms shall be prioritised into the following categories:
- Critical – Urgent action required by the operator. In practice, critical alarms will
generally be generated from safety systems.
- Urgent – Quick action required by the operator.
- Warning – Action required by operator within reasonable period of time.
- Events – No action required and not presented to the operator. Events are recorded
for subsequent and diagnostic purposes only.
Please refer to Table 5.3.1 for additional detail.
Page 11 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev D
10030-1043
Table 5.3.1 Alarm Levels
No. Parameter Tag Number Set Point Alarm Level
Critical Urgent Warning Event
1 Carbon Regeneration Kiln Temperature Transmitter TIC6600 110 oC 300 oC 250oC 200oC 150oC
2 Gold Room Temperature Transmitter TIT6601 - 300oC 200oC 150oC 120oC
3 Gold Room Duct Pressure Transmitter PIT6602 -3500 Pa(g) - -2500 Pa (g) -3000 Pa (g) -
4 Extraction Fan Shaft Rotation Sensor SE6603 - Alarm - -
5 Venturi Scrubber Pressure Indicator PIT6604 4000 Pa(g) - 3000 Pa(g) 3500 Pa(g) -
6 Venturi Separator Pressure Indicator PIT6605 500 Pa(g) - - 4000 Pa(g) <500 Pa(g)
7 Recirculation Tank, Water Temperature Transmitter TIC6609 40 oC - 70 oC 60 oC 50 oC
8 GAC Tower Inlet Temperature Indicator TIC6611 65 oC 300 oC 200oC 120oC 90oC
9 GAC Tower Body Temperature Indicator TI6612 65oC 300 oC 200oC 80oC 70oC
10 GAC Extraction Fan Pressure Transmitter PIT6613 -4800 Pa (g) - -3000 Pa (g) -3800 Pa (g) -4300 Pa (g)
11 GAC Extraction Fan Shaft Rotation Sensor SE6614 Alarm
10030-1043
5.4 Control Loops
5.4.1 TIC6600 Carbon Regeneration Kiln Temperature Transmitter
IF: TIT > 300oC

THEN : Open XV 6610
Close XV 6616
IF: TIT > 250oC (t = 0 + 300 sec)

THEN : Open XV 6610
Close XV 6616
IF: TIT6600 > 250oC

THEN: TV 6600 A (Open 100%)
TV 6600 B (Open 100%)
02-60-PU-342 Increase Motor Speed 100%
Open XV 6617
IF: TIT6600 < 200oC

THEN: Close XV 6617
Return TV 6600 A to Set Point
Return TV 6600 B to Set Point
Return 02-60-PU-342 to Set Point
5.4.2 DPIC6606 Venturi Damper Positioner
IF: Value (PIT 6604 – PIT 6605) < 3500 Pa-g

THEN: Close DPV 6606 until Value (PIT 6604 – PIT 6605) = 3500 Pa-g
IF: Value (PIT 6604 – PIT 6605) > 3500 Pa-g

THEN: Open DPV 6606 until Value (PIT 6604 – PIT 6605) = 3500 Pa-g
Page 13 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev C
10030-1043
5.4.3 TIC6609 Recirculation Tank, Water Temperature Transmitter
IF: TIC 6609 > 40oC,

THEN: Open TV 6609
IF: TIC 6609 < 30oC,
THEN: Close TV 6609
5.4.4 TIC6611 GAC Tower Inlet Temperature Transmitter
IF: TIT 6611 > 299oC,

THEN: Open XV 6610
Close XV 6616
Open XV 6617
Open XV 6618
IF: TIT 6611 > 200oC,

THEN: Open XV 6610
Close XV 6616
Open XV 6617
Open XV 6618
IF: TIT 6611 > 120oC,

THEN: 02-60-PU-342 (Full Speed)
IF: TIT 6611 < 80oC,

THEN: Close XV 6610
Open XV 6616
Close XV 6617
Close XV 6618
02-60-PU-342 (Set Point)
02-60-PU-390 (Off)
Page 14 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev C
10030-1043
5.5 Fail Safe Table
The fail safe status of equipment such as valves shall be shown on the PIDs.
Individual loop fail safe status will be listed in the I/O list.
6.0 References
Fowlerex Reference Ausenco Doc. Number Description
10030-1032 V-1929-0070B-0027 Input/Outlet Schedule
10030-1043 V-1929-0070B-0044 Functional Description
10030-1047 V-1929-0070B-0113 Functional Description Commentary
10030-0005 V-1929-0070B-0013 Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
10030-1118 V-1929-0070B-XXXX Hazop
Page 15 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev C
10030-1043
Normal Start
Action Idle
To Condition
Step
Transitions
10 Plant has been Interlocked
0
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Step Energise Pump
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
10
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Step Energise Fan
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
20
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Step Energise Fan
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
30
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Step
50 Open XV-6618
Transitions
40
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
Page 16 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev C
10030-1043

To Condition
Energise Pump
Step
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
T = 0 + 12 hours
50
To Condition
Step
None
Transitions
60
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
Page 17 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev C
10030-1043
Resume Start
Action Idle
To Condition
Step
Transitions
0
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Step Energise Pump
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
10
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Step Energise Fan
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
20
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Step Energise Fan
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
30
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
To Condition
Step
50 Open XV-6618
Transitions
40
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
Page 18 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev C
10030-1043

To Condition
Step Energise Pump
Transitions
VSD = 35Hz
T = 0 + 12 hours
50
To Condition
Step
None
Transitions
60
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
Page 19 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev C
10030-1043
Action Plant Fully Operational

To Condition
Step
510 Operator initiates Pollution Plant Shut Down
Transitions
500
Alarm Transition
Priority to step

To Condition
520
Transitions
PIT6602>= -0.5 kpa
510
Alarm Transition
Priority to step

To Condition
530
Transitions
PIT6603 >= -0.5 kPa
520
Alarm Transition
Priority to step

To Condition
Step De-Energise Pump
540
Transitions
530
Alarm Transition
Priority to step
Action System Idle

To Condition
Step
None System Shutdown
Transitions
540
Alarm Transition
Action Timeout seconds None None
Priority to step
Page 20 of 20
17-Mar-11 Rev C
Appendix
COMMENTARY
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION / SPECIFICATIONS
(V-1929-0070B-0113)

Manual Book Scrubber

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Book Scrubber

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNOLOGIES PTY LTD

ABN 76 100 555 904

10030-1120 Rev F O & M MANUAL

INSTALLATION DATA SHEET

CLIENT : PT AGINCOURT RESOURCES

PROJECT : MARTABE PLANT

PLANT LOCATION : NORTH SUMATRA, INDONESIA

CONTRACT NO. : 1929-0070B

FOWLEREX JOB & SERIAL NO. : 10030

EQUIPMENT TYPE : WET GAS SCRUBBER – EQUIPMENT

10030-1120 Rev F O & M MANUAL

This equipment may have very hot surfaces. If an

This equipment may contain fluids at very high

10030-1120 Rev F O & M MANUAL

INDEX FOR INSTALLATION, OPERATION

Client: PT Agincourt Resources

Document Rev: V-1929-0070B-0016

Installation Data Sheet

Functional Description SECTION A

1.0 System Description A-1

Sub-System Description, Operation and Service SECTION B

2.0 Ventilation System

Sub-System Description, Operation and Service SECTION B

2.1 Venturi Scrubber

2.2 Granulated Activated Carbon Tower

2.4 Recirculation Pump

2.5 Plant Specification

2.6 Piping and Valving B-22

Maintenance and Trouble-shooting SECTION C

3.0 General Maintenance Procedures

3.1 Trouble Shooting C-8

3.2 Lubrication Schedule C-9

3.3 Maintenance Schedule C-10

3.4 Material Safety Data Sheets C-11

4.0 Spares Parts (Recommended) D-1

Instrumentation and Control SECTION E

5.0 Instrumentation and Control E-1

Bill of Material SECTION F

Start Up and Shut Down Sequence

Equipment Data Sheet

Fan Manual - Taymac (including TECO motor manual)

Pump Manual - IWAKI

Motor Manual - WEG

Control Systems/ Instrumentations

Articulation Arm - Nederman

Description of Control Philosophy (V-1929-0070B-0015)

Control System Functional Description/ Specification (V-1929-0070B-0044)

Commentary Control System Functional Description/ Specification (V-1929-0070B-0113)

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SECTION A

1.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

V-1929-0070-006 – Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (Sheet 1)

Eleven (11) ventilation points including the Electrowinning Cells (02-60-HD-001:006),

10030-1120 Rev F A-1 O & M MANUAL

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SECTION A

1.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A sulphur impregnated Granulated Activated Carbon Tower (02-60-TW-001) follows the

10030-1120 Rev F A-2 O & M MANUAL

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SECTION A

1.1.1 SET POINT CONDITIONS

Carbon Regeneration Kiln Temperature

3 Gold Room Duct Pressure Transmitter PIT6602 -3500 Pa(g)

5 Venturi Scrubber Pressure Indicator PIT6604 4000 Pa(g)

6 Venturi Separator Pressure Indicator PIT6605 500 Pa(g)

9 GAC Tower Body Temperature Indicator TI6612 65oC